Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Chevrolet
Model
Equinox Fwd
Engine and year
V6-3.0L (2010)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
Theft Deterrent Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for
Hearing Impaired
Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing
Impaired
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B
Date: February 11, 2010
Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007
Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except
2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped
vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers.
Note
On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code
UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled.
OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY)
General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to
our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as
well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability
to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN
lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty.
TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access
to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency
button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages
back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free
Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate.
OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY.
The Reimbursement Program
This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R).
Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take
advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease
and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form
submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic
reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from
OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center.
How to Order
To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com.
The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness,
the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide.
Warranty Information
The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is
covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard
GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft
Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web.
Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through
normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for
Hearing Impaired > Page 19
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for
Hearing Impaired > Page 20
Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Radio Does Not Mute
Enough When Using OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-46-001
Date: January 27, 2010
Subject: Radio Does Not Mute Enough When OnStar(R) Turn-by Turn Navigation Directions Are
Announced (Increase Volume Setting or Request Soft Mute Feature Change Through OnStar(R)
Customer Service)
Models:
2009-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009
Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Condition
Some customers may comment that when the radio is on, it does not mute enough when the
OnStar(R) Turn-by-Turn Navigation directions are announced.
Cause
This condition may be caused by the customer improperly setting the radio volume high enough
when the Turn-by-Turn Navigation messages are played.
The 2009 and 2010 models with OnStar(R) initiates a "soft mute" feature when the radio is on
during Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. During the announcement, the radio can
still be heard at a very low volume. Previous model years initiated a "hard mute" during this
function which completely muted the radio audio.
Correction
Instruct the customer to increase the radio volume while getting the Turn-by-Turn Navigation
direction announcements. You can control the message volume using the radio volume control,
only when the Turn-by-Turn navigation messages are playing.
Some customers that were accustomed to previous model vehicles with the "hard mute" feature
may be dissatisfied with the function of the "soft mute" feature. For those customers, contact the
OnStar(R) Customer Service Center by pushing the Blue OnStar(R) Button to speak to a trained
Advisor and request a change be made to the vehicle from the "soft mute" setting to that of the
hard or complete muting of audio playback during Turn by Turn directions. OnStar(R) will then
create a case number. Advise the customer that the vehicle update should be completed Over the
Air within 5 business days, after which an OnStar(R) Customer Care advisor will follow-up with the
customer to verify the fix. If the customer does not hear back from OnStar(R) within a week, advise
them to press the Blue OnStar(R) Button and ask for Customer Care to check status.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for
Hearing Impaired > Page 21
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 22
Communications Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 23
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 24
Communications Control Module: Diagrams
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1)
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 25
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 26
Communications Control Module: Service and Repair
Communication Interface Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency
Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency
Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 35
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number
Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 41
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Entertainment System Control Module: Diagrams
T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 45
Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair
Multimedia Player Interface Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 49
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update
Navigation Module: Recalls Campaign - Navigation System Update
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09221C
Date: January 27, 2011
Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System
Update - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of
bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009.
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick
Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will
address multiple concerns with the navigation system.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate
Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS
Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles.
If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at
their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service
procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A
CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash
Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the
programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from
the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT
contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive.
For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0.
Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all
vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles
involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 58
from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events.
Service Procedure
Note
This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB
programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to
update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased
during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT
deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved
storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is
downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device.
1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will
udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the
Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS
procedures and Control Module References in SI.
Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of
12-15 volts.
2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool
EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the
ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and
Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software
- Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for
programming instructions, if required.
7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your
USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available
USB Drives box.
8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the
bottom of the SPS Special Function screen.
Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status
bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message:
"Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port."
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the
software download has been completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 59
11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen
to appear on the display.
Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the
viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the
"Ok" button in the following step.
12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title
"Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt
power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will
appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command
and begin programming.
13. A status bar indicates progress.
Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of
the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as
indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than
40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not
remove the USB flash drive.
14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen
will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the
entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will
appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will
automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming
will be complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 60
15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and
the version number U413.
Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow
viewing of the programming complete screen and version number.
16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST
now be calibrated.
Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not
operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed.
Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS
programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition.
Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the
vehicle being serviced.
19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool
and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select
the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or
the vehicle build
information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with.
22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon
completion of this step, the radio is updated.
Note
At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful
by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version
U413 displayed.
Note
The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade.
Warranty Transaction Information
Submit a claim using the table below.
* USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no
longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost
of a USB flash drive.
** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The
calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the
field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action,
remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB
programming events.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 61
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation
Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09221C
Date: January 27, 2011
Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System
Update - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of
bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009.
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick
Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will
address multiple concerns with the navigation system.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate
Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS
Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles.
If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at
their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service
procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A
CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash
Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the
programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from
the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT
contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive.
For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0.
Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all
vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles
involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation
Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 67
from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events.
Service Procedure
Note
This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB
programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to
update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased
during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT
deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved
storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is
downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device.
1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will
udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the
Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS
procedures and Control Module References in SI.
Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of
12-15 volts.
2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool
EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the
ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and
Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software
- Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for
programming instructions, if required.
7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your
USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available
USB Drives box.
8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the
bottom of the SPS Special Function screen.
Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status
bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message:
"Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port."
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the
software download has been completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation
Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 68
11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen
to appear on the display.
Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the
viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the
"Ok" button in the following step.
12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title
"Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt
power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will
appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command
and begin programming.
13. A status bar indicates progress.
Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of
the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as
indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than
40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not
remove the USB flash drive.
14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen
will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the
entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will
appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will
automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming
will be complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation
Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 69
15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and
the version number U413.
Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow
viewing of the programming complete screen and version number.
16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST
now be calibrated.
Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not
operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed.
Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS
programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition.
Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the
vehicle being serviced.
19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool
and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select
the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or
the vehicle build
information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with.
22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon
completion of this step, the radio is updated.
Note
At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful
by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version
U413 displayed.
Note
The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade.
Warranty Transaction Information
Submit a claim using the table below.
* USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no
longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost
of a USB flash drive.
** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The
calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the
field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action,
remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB
programming events.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation
Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 70
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 74
Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7)
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 75
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 76
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D >
Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D >
Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 85
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D >
Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 86
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D >
Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 87
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 93
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 94
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 95
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations
Signal Processing Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 99
Signal Processing Module: Diagrams
K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 100
Signal Processing Module: Description and Operation
Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation
The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine
the specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO
Code List (See: Application and ID/RPO Code List).
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) is a method used to cancel out undesirable sound generated by
the engine or an open window.
Active Noise Cancellation Control Circuit Operation
An Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system has four main components: the ANC module,
microphone(s), audio amplifier(s), and speaker(s). The microphone is connected to the audio
system and picks up the sound/noise in the vehicle cabin while the speakers produce the
cancellation vibrations. The ANC system is composed of two microphones. The microphones are
centrally located in the headliner to detect noise in the vehicle caused by the engine, or an open
window. The processor analyzes the noise signal and outputs a cancellation signal audio tone
based on positive coefficient and phase change to moderate the engine noise and make the
vehicle seem quieter and without vibration. The ANC system uses the engine revolutions per
minute (RPM) signal from the tachometer to determine the rotational speed in an engine. The ANC
system works within 1500-2500 engine RPM. The cancellation signal is then amplified and a signal
is sent to the speaker and subwoofer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 101
Signal Processing Module: Service and Repair
Active Noise Cancellation Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Door Lock Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 106
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Diagrams
Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 110
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory
Sys Operation
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B
Date: January 15, 2010
Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with
Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative
(Reprogram Memory Seat Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All
Built Prior to November 2, 2009
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns:
- The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will
not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may
also experience the inability to move the seat up or down.
- The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is
engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle
in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after
taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt
position and not returning to the memory position at all.
- The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory
Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent
operation.
- The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the
inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages
that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern.
Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration.
Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
> Page 115
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 116
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 117
Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 118
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 119
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 120
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 121
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control
Module > Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Control Module: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 125
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagrams
K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 126
Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 130
Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 131
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 132
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 133
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 134
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 135
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from
Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 144
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk /
Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate
Inoperative from Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk /
Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 150
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 151
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 152
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams
K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5)
K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 153
K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 154
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations
Seat Heater Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 158
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 159
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 160
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 161
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 162
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 163
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 164
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 165
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 169
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 174
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 175
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 176
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 177
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with
the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the EBCM/EBTCM.
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV)
area of any dirt or debris. 4. Disconnect the EBCM electrical connector by lifting the locking lever
upward.
5. Remove the 4 EBCM bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 178
Note: Do not pry the components apart.
6. Carefully pull the EBCM (1) from the BPMV. 7. Remove the 12 EBCM seals, if necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the EBCM seals, if removed. 2. Install the EBCM (1) to the BPMV.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 179
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the 4 EBCM bolts (1) and tighten the bolts in a cross pattern to 3 Nm (27 lb in). 4. Install
the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
5. If installing a new EBCM, program the EBCM. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). 6. Without starting the engine, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump
Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations
Vacuum Pump Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump
Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 183
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 188
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 193
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 202
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 203
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 204
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 205
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 206
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 207
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall
09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Control Module HVAC: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 217
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 218
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 219
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 220
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 221
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10
> Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 222
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000
> Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 227
Control Module HVAC: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 228
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 229
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 230
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 240
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 241
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 242
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 243
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 244
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 245
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel
Blanks Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 250
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster
Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 260
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 261
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 262
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 263
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 264
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 265
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall
09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 >
Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 >
Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 275
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel
Blanks Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 281
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 287
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 288
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 289
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 290
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 291
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 292
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control
Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster
Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 301
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 305
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 309
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Lamp Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 313
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 317
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 322
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 323
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 324
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 325
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 326
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component
Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the
vehicle.
2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks.
Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners
or tape.
4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that
originally held the relay in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page
331
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Special Tools
J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification
Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID) to
locate the electrical center where the relay exists.
Note: *
Always note the orientation of the relay.
* If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the
new relay is installed with the notch in the same location.
* Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals.
3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2).
Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of
pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center.
4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page
332
1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 337
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 338
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 339
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 340
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 341
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 342
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 343
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 344
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 345
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 346
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 347
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 348
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 349
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 350
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 351
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 352
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 353
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 354
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 355
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 356
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 357
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body
Control Module
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A
Date: June 14, 2010
Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not
Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions
Models:
2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV,
Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro
2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet
Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL
2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming
event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS).
The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this
incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event.
This condition may be caused by the following:
- A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle
and the TIS2WEB terminal.
- The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event.
Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition.
SPS Programming Process Selection
Perform this procedure first.
1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS
application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When
selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new
BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS)
with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 364
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
BCM Still Fails to Reprogram
If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following
modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes:
- BCM
- EBCM
- ECM
- IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox)
- TCM
3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to
turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace
and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using
the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to
the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 365
Body Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 366
Body Control Module: Diagrams
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 367
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 368
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 369
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 370
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 371
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 372
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 373
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 374
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 375
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 376
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 377
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Body Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 386
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 387
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 388
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 389
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 395
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 400
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 401
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 402
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 407
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 408
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 409
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 410
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 416
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 421
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 422
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 423
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 424
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 425
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 426
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 427
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 428
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 429
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 430
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 431
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 432
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 433
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 434
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 435
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 436
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
Engine Control Module Description
The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems,
and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics
monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system
performance degrades.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type.
A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions
related DTC.
The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls
system. The ECM controls the following components:
* The fuel injection system
* The ignition system
* The emission control systems
* The on-board diagnostics
* The A/C and fan systems
* The throttle actuation control (TAC) system
The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls
the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs
diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and
alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The
condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making
repairs.
ECM Function
The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This
is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases,
even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too
low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure
accurate voltage readings.
The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the
transistors or a device called an output driver module.
EEPROM
The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory
that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and
calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation.
Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in
order to reprogram the ECM.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of
accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan
tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The
DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is
controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition
that affects the vehicle emissions.
ECM Service Precautions
The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are
associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading
any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the
ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be
tested with a DMM.
Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs
This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive
levels of the following emissions:
* Hydrocarbons (HC)
* Carbon monoxide (CO)
* Oxides of nitrogen (NOx)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 437
* Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses
Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in
excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC
that is associated with the condition.
Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment
Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on
vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems.
Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at
the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a
vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No
allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment.
Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the
powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle
electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing
any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle.
After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage
Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module
(ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM.
The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very
low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic
discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components.
There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of
charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding
across a car seat.
Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly
charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off
leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage,
therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.
Emissions Control Information Label
The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission
specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information.
This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in
liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated
emission components and vacuum hose schematic.
This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has
been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO).
Underhood Inspection
Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly.
Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing
the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further
steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection:
* Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects.
* Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see.
* Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions:
- Burned or chafed spots
- Pinched wires
- Contact with sharp edges
- Contact with hot exhaust manifolds
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 438
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Engine Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 439
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID > Page 443
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 448
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 449
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID > Page 453
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 458
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views
Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Identification Views
SIR Identification Views
The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components
available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling
for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair).
1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the
passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front
door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger
Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if
equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if
equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom
of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near
the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding
on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper
rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower
rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near
the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the
driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver
seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of
the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver
front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the
steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left
Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 464
Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components
1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 465
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 466
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 467
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 468
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory
Electrical Interference
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D
Date: January 28, 2011
Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat
Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic
Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010
Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints).
Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell
phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to
the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the
electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag
and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The
electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045,
B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic
device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM
and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the
DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition).
Note
Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the
passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the
SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the
electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat.
Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the
future.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 477
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF)
K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 483
K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 484
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 485
Steering Control Module: Service and Repair
Power Steering Control Module Calibration
Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning
Warning
An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power
steering (EPS) and result in personal injury.
Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after
certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows:
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Power steering assist motor replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement
* Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement
Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop
learning.
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program)
refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and
Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle sensor (w/o electronic
stability program) can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal
steering angle sensor is activated.
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan
tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering
procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center
position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the
steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed.
Software Endstop Learning
The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle
sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal.
1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset
procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the
Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the
on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS
System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 506
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 507
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed
Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins
for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins
for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 517
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins
for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 518
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 521
6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. 7. Remove the control solenoid valve
assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 522
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 523
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 524
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 525
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 526
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 531
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 536
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Wiper Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 540
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 546
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 547
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 551
17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 552
18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp
- Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 553
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams
B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 554
B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 555
B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 556
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement
Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement
1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
2. Disconnect the sensor harness. 3. Remove the sensor from the sensor housing.
The sensor housing must be painted if replaced. If reinstalled, painting will not be necessary.
Important: Do Not grind off alignment tabs.
4. Sand/grind sonic weld plastic residue from the fascia.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 559
5. Apply structural adhesive epoxy, Lord Fusor(TM) 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating
surface.
6. Using the alignment tabs, install the sensor housing to the fascia. 7. Allow adhesive to cure
according to manufacturer's directions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 560
8. Install the sensor to the sensor housing. 9. Connect the electrical harness.
10. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 561
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Replacement
Rear Object Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
2. Disconnect electrical from the rear object sensor. 3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and
remove the rear object sensor.
Installation Procedure
Note: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will cause the sensor to be
inoperative.
1. Paint the rear object sensor. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Body and
Frame/Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and
ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems).
2. Ensure the paint does not exceed 6 mils. Use a paint thickness gauge suitable for non-ferrous
metals. Refer to Paint Gauges ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 562
3. Insert the sensor into the housing. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the rear object sensor.
5. Install the rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Calibration Criteria
Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail.
If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated.
Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or
body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal
position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver
applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data.
Calibration Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4.
Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM
menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position
Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page
567
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor
> Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor
> Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 573
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor
> Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 574
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Calibration Criteria
Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail.
If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated.
Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or
body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal
position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver
applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data.
Calibration Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4.
Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM
menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position
Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 579
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 583
Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams
S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 584
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Outside Remote Control Rearview Mirror Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 588
Power Seat Switch: Diagrams
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 589
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 590
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement > Page 593
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement
Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 597
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams
B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5)
B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 598
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams
S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 605
Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 606
Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 610
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 611
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams
S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5)
S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 612
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement > Page 615
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch
Sunroof Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 619
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 620
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 621
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams
B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 622
S46 Liftgate Handle Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 623
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 626
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement
Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 627
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Replacement
Liftgate Release Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate
Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Liftgate Side Upper Sensor Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 635
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 636
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 637
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L)
Removal Procedure
1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal
becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake
booster vacuum reserve.
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the power vacuum brake booster.
5. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the power
brake booster vacuum sensor (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 638
Installation Procedure
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
1. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to
the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2).
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
2. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the power vacuum brake booster. 3.
Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the intake manifold
cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 642
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 643
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 644
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block
Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector.
3. While compressing the retaining tabs on the inboard side of the brake fluid level indicator switch
(1), carefully remove the switch from the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
Installation Procedure
Note: Ensure the retaining tabs on the brake fluid level indicator switch are fully engaged in the
master cylinder reservoir.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 645
1. Install the brake fluid level indicator switch (1) by carefully inserting the switch into the master
cylinder reservoir. 2. Connect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Install the
accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 649
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
B80 Park Brake Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 650
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory
Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 654
Traction Control Switch: Diagrams
S75 Traction Control Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 655
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Electronic Traction Control and Vehicle Stability Control Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Wheel Components
1 - B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front 2 - B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear 3 - B5LR
Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear 4 - B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 659
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams
B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 660
B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 661
B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 662
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning) .
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the front brake hose bracket nut (1). 5. Release the front wheel speed sensor harness
from the retainers on the front brake hose.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 665
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1).
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor (1) by pulling the sensor straight upward from the steering
knuckle.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 666
1. Install the wheel speed sensor (1) to the steering knuckle.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 667
3. Install the front brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the wheel
speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the front wheel speed sensor harness to the retainers
on the front brake hose. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 668
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components
1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 672
Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams
B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 673
Yaw Rate Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Vehicle Yaw Sensor Learn
Note: The Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor is also known as the Inertia Sensor Module (IMU) in SPS
and the Yaw Rate Sensor in the scan tool. The sensor must be configured using SPS before the
vehicle yaw sensor learn is performed.
The multi-axis acceleration sensor requires a SPS configuration and a yaw rate sensor learn. This
is required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as
follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Multi-axis acceleration sensor replacement
* Vehicle yaw sensor replacement
* Vehicle yaw sensor with lateral and longitudinal accelerometer sensor replacement
The yaw rate sensor learn procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps:
1. Place vehicle on a level surface. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P
position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Reset in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset
Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset
Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 9. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that
may be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 674
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Yaw Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) > Page 685
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5)
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 691
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 692
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 693
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 694
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 699
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of the Engine Compartment Components
1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling
Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 700
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams
B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 703
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic
Ambient Air Quality Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 707
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68)
B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 708
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement - Upper
Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper > Page 711
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement - Lower
Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 715
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 716
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Evaporator Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Valve Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 725
Dimmer Switch: Diagrams
S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 726
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 730
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
B80 Park Brake Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 731
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 736
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams
B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67)
B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 737
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 741
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 742
Dome Lamp Switch: Diagrams
S12 Dome Lamp Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Headlamp Dimmer Sensor: Service and Repair
Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Horn Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Wheel Components
1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 752
Horn Switch: Diagrams
S33 Horn Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 753
Horn Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Horn Contact Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 757
Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams
S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement > Page 760
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement
Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 769
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 770
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 774
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 785
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 786
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 787
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 788
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 789
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 790
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 791
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 792
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 793
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 794
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 795
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 798
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 799
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 800
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 808
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 809
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 810
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 811
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 812
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 813
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 814
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
815
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
816
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC
that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC
that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
817
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 823
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 824
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 825
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 826
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 827
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 828
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 829
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 830
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 831
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 832
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 833
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 834
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 835
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 836
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 837
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 838
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 839
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 840
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 841
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 842
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 843
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 844
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 845
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 846
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 847
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 848
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 849
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 850
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 851
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 852
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 853
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 854
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 855
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 856
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 857
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 858
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 859
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 860
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 861
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 862
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 863
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 864
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 865
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 866
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 867
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 868
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 869
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 870
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 871
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 872
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 873
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 874
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 875
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 876
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 877
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 878
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 879
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 880
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 881
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 882
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 883
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 884
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 885
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 886
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 887
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 888
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 889
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 890
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 891
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 892
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 893
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 894
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 895
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 896
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 897
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 898
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 899
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 900
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 901
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 902
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 903
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 904
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 905
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 906
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 907
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 908
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 909
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 910
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 911
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 912
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 913
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 914
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 915
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 916
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 917
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 918
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 919
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 920
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 921
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 922
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 923
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 924
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 925
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 926
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 927
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 928
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 929
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 930
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 931
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 932
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 933
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 934
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 935
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 936
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 937
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 938
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 939
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 940
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 941
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 942
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 943
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 944
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 945
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 946
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 947
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 948
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 949
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 950
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 951
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 952
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 953
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 954
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 955
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 956
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 957
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 958
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 959
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 960
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 961
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 962
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 963
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 964
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 965
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 966
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 967
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 968
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 969
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 970
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 971
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 972
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 973
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 974
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 975
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 976
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 977
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 978
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 979
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 980
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 981
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 982
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 983
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 984
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 985
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 986
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 987
Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views
A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary
B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 988
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 989
Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management
diagrams.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 990
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 994
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
998
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
999
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
1003
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 1008
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 1009
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 1010
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 1011
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1012
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1013
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1014
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock
Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock
Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 1017
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1021
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1022
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1023
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 1028
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1029
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1030
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1031
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1035
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1036
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams
B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF)
B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037
B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1038
B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1039
B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1040
B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1041
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated
Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen
sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation.
Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector
and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of
any type.
Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring,
connector, or terminal is damaged.
This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires.
Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air
reference and degraded sensor performance.
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance.
* Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are
exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause
performance problems.
* Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks
could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize
the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor.
Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance.
* Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to
prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's
Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered
since this could result in the air reference being obstructed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated
Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 1044
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following:
* A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set
* HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available
Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S
failure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated
Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 1045
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV
sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the
HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to
check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream
will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal
voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered
to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before
replacing the oxygen sensor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1048
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1049
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1050
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1055
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1056
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1059
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1060
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1061
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1066
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1067
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1071
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Fuel Rail (LF1)
1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5
- Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 1076
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 1077
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
1078
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed
Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 1081
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel
Injection Fuel Rail
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1087
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1088
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1089
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1090
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1091
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1092
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1093
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1094
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1095
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1096
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1097
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 1100
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 1101
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 1102
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1107
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1108
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1109
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1110
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1111
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1112
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 1113
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1114
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1115
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC
that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC
that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1116
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page
1121
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position.
4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or
similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch
housing.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder
Coding - Ignition (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page
1122
2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start
switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock
cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement
(See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1127
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1128
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1129
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1130
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1132
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1133
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1 > Page 1136
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views
Impact Sensor: Locations SIR Identification Views
SIR Identification Views
The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components
available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling
for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair).
1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the
passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front
door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger
Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if
equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if
equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom
of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near
the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding
on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper
rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower
rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near
the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the
driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver
seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of
the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver
front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the
steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left
Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1142
Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1143
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Left Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1144
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1145
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1146
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left
B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1147
B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1148
B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1149
B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1150
B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1151
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor
Replacement
Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page
1154
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front
Side Door
Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page
1155
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear
Side Door
Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Passenger Seat Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1159
1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C
Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85
Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
(KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams
B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger
F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161
F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passsenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1162
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference
Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical
Interference
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D
Date: January 28, 2011
Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat
Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic
Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010
Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints).
Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell
phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to
the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the
electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag
and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The
electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045,
B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic
device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM
and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the
DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition).
Note
Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the
passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the
SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the
electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat.
Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the
future.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference >
Page 1167
Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With
Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing
System
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE
SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT
VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY
ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN
OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF
SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED.
The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that
will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an
infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the
right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly,
sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger
sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by
GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or
between the occupant and the seat fabric.
Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY
SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM
ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR
SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE
APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH
IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE
NECESSARY BY SUCH USE.
Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers.
Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat
heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other
materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing
System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to
the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and
either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the
passenger air bag.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1168
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Passenger Seat Components
1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C
Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85
Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
(KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1169
Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams
K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1170
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 1179
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position.
4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or
similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch
housing.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder
Coding - Ignition (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 1180
2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start
switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock
cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement
(See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1186
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1189
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1194
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1197
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS
System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1203
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1204
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1205
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the
vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1206
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels
and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair).
6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor
Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Mode Switch: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views >
Page 1216
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views >
Page 1217
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1220
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1221
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1222
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1226
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1227
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1228
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1229
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1230
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1231
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1232
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1235
16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch
Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction
Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1236
11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans
Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output
Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring
Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal
Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and
Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter
Assembly
3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly
500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft
Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston
Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch
Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate
508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510
- 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1237
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1238
14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential
Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and
Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch
Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control
Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid
Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1239
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1240
25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque
Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin
- Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent
31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans
Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons
400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS
O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal
Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer
Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1243
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5.
Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1244
1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve
body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1245
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1246
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Power Window Switch: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1251
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Left Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1252
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1253
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1254
Power Window Switch: Diagrams
S79D Window Switch - Driver
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1255
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1256
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1257
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1258
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 1261
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch
Replacement
Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 1262
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1267
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams
S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1268
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications
WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION
Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C
Date: December 09, 2010
Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty
administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF
WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT
SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension).
Purpose
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors'
warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel
alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel
Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty
service.
Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING
YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE.
The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a
successful wheel alignment service.
1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension
and steering configurations. Vehicles
modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty.
2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is
within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for
labor operations E2000 and E2020.
The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order:
- Customer concern in detail
- What corrected the customer concern?
- If a wheel alignment is performed:
- Consult SI for proper specifications.
- Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings.
- Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin)
5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the
appropriate calibration maintenance schedules.
Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper
labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel
Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for
other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment
operation.).
The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be
used whenever a wheel alignment is performed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1277
Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle
- Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are
on the vehicle.
- Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have
NOT been done to the vehicle.
- Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision
damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles,
suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact.
- Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving
may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle.
- Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as
large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in
trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and
wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed
semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of
these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with
equipment such as the above.)
Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy"
Possible Concerns
The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service:
1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of
effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle's straight heading."
Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle
Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull
concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare
circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered
"Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that
this is "Normal Operation."
Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a
level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is
"steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel.
2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined
as the steering wheel angle (clocking)
deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road.
3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the
shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and
should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of
the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled
mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the
customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from
aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition.
Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is
"normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can
show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance
and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance
records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are
being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be
performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1278
Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center
Ribs
Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder
Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear
Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear
Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the
repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center
wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF,
LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life,
etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to
Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C.
4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as
suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle
adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock,
steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment.
Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls
for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor
operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations.
Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in
the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are
NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns.
"Normal Operation" Conditions
Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope:
As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope.
Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize
the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires
significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be
looked into further.
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1279
A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within
"Normal Operation."
Mileage Policy
The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note
Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana
Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing
the vehicles.
- 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to
the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal
operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have
accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within
this mileage range.
- 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi):
- If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle
steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be
apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies:
- Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT,
Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and
Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required
- All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above:
E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required
- 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible
for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time
customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component
required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation
will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component
repair.
Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN.
Warranty Documentation Requirements
When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be
clearly documented on/with the repair order:
- Customer concern in detail
- What corrected the customer concern?
- If a wheel alignment is performed:
- Consult SI for proper specifications.
- Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings.
- Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin)
1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the
warranty administration system. Preferred examples:
- Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or
clocking position.
- Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe,
Moderate or Slight.
- RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering.
Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of
lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the
repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim.
Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the
wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder.
2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples:
- Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees
to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees.
- Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of
+0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle.
- Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees.
3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the
Repair Order or if print-out capability is not
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1280
available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment
Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin.
4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of
"Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to
the Repair Order and retain for use by GM.
Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process
Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when
performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please
refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment
Requirements and Recommendations.
Requirements:
- Computerized four wheel alignment system.
- Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports.
- Computer capable of time and date stamp printout.
- Racking system must have jacking capability
- Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
- Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification
- Built-in turn plates and slip plates
- Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels
- Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck
- Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment
Recommendations:
Racking should have front and rear jacking capability.
Equipment Maintenance and Calibration:
Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most
manufacturers recommend the following:
- Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if
necessary) every six months.
- Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be
checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year.
- Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in).
- If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way,
check the calibration immediately.
Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration
schedule.
Wheel Alignment Process
When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be
taken:
Preliminary Steps:
1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels
and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4.
Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for
looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to
stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate
for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI).
Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the
wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the
specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads,
such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Measure/Adjust:
Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify
that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date
by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year
in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments,
irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1281
Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear
wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles.
Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles:
1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front
and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment
angles and record the readings.
If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after
measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI.
Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only
source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year.
Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1282
Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1283
What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified?
Please Explain: .............
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening
Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening
Specifications > Page 1286
Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Specifications
Trim Height Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening
Specifications > Page 1287
Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications
Wheel Alignment Specifications
Note: Specification relative to Caster Sweep measurement method
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description
Caster Description
Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when
viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-).
Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is
affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height.
Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the
vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive
caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension
moves to a less positive caster.
With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be
diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that
wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead
to the side with the least amount of positive caster.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1290
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description
Camber Description
Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle.
When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at
the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical.
Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear.
Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side
with the most positive camber.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1291
Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description
Toe Description
Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a
straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are
turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The
purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel.
Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is
rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the
wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving.
Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1292
Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description
Setback Description
Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may
be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The
first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1293
Alignment: Description and Operation
Caster Description
Caster Description
Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when
viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-).
Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is
affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height.
Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the
vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive
caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension
moves to a less positive caster.
With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be
diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that
wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead
to the side with the least amount of positive caster.
Camber Description
Camber Description
Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle.
When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at
the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical.
Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear.
Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side
with the most positive camber.
Toe Description
Toe Description
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1294
Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a
straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are
turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The
purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel.
Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is
rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the
wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving.
Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability.
Setback Description
Setback Description
Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may
be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The
first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree.
Thrust Angles Description
Thrust Angles Description
The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action
relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the
thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2).
In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The
resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle.
If the thrust angle is not set properly the vehicle may "dog track", the steering wheel may not be
centered or it could be perceived as a bent axle. Thrust angle can be checked during a wheel
alignment.
Positive thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the right hand side (RHS) of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1295
Negative thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the left hand side (LHS) of the vehicle.
If the thrust angle is out of specification, moving the axle to body relationship will change the thrust
angle reading.
If the vehicle is out in the Positive (+) direction-moving the RHS forward and/or LHS rearward will
move the thrust angle towards zero degrees.
If the vehicle is out in the Negative (-) direction-moving the RHS rearward and/or LHS forward will
move the thrust angle towards zero degrees.
Lead/Pull Description
Lead/Pull Description
At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at
the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path.
Important: Vehicles will tend to lead/pull in the direction of the road slope as part of normal
operation.
Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors:
* Road slope
* Variability in tire construction
* Wheel alignment (front cross caster and camber)
* Unbalanced steering gear
* Electronic Power Steering (EPS) steering position and torque sensors not calibrated correctly, if
equipped.
Torque Steer Description
Torque Steer Description
A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the
other direction during deceleration.
The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle:
* A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front
tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar,
change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the
most significant effect on torque steer correction.
* A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure
* Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a
vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the
wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level
ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan
(shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle.
Memory Steer Description
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster
Description > Page 1296
Memory Steer Description
Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned
the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in
that direction.
Wander Description
Wander Description
Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with
hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external
disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel.
Scrub Radius Description
Scrub Radius Description
Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the
tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the
SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle
to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller
the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have
additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause
the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius.
A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub
radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected
geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1297
Alignment: Testing and Inspection
Trim Height Inspection
Trim Height Measurement
Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights
can cause the vehicle to bottom out over bumps, damage to the suspension components and
symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing
suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment.
Perform the following before measuring the trim heights:
* Set the tire pressure to the specifications shown on the certification label. Refer to Vehicle
Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle
Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
* Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. One U.S. gallon of
gasoline weighs approximately 6.5 lbs. One liter of gasoline weights approximately 0.70 kg.
* Make sure the passenger and rear compartments are empty, except for the spare tire.
* Make sure the vehicle is on a flat and level surface, such as an alignment rack.
* For vehicles equipped with automatic level control, ensure the system is functioning properly.
* Check that all the vehicle doors are securely closed.
* Check that the vehicle hood and rear deck lids are securely closed.
* Check for installed after market accessories or modifications that could affect trim height
measurement:
- Larger of smaller than production wheels and tires
- Lifting or lowering kits
- Wheel opening flares or ground affects
Measuring the P and R Heights
Note: The left and right P and R height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in).
Use the following procedure to measure the P and R dimensions:
1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure vertically
from the ground to the bottom lip of the wheel opening through the centerline of the front wheel, P
height. 5. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 6. Gently remove your
hands and let the vehicle settle. 7. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 8.
Re-measure the P height as in step 4.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1298
9. The true P height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim
Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical
Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications).
10. Repeat the above steps at the rear of the vehicle for the R heights. 11. If the P and R heights
are outside of specifications, measure the Z and D heights.
Measuring the Z Height
Note:
* In order to obtain the proper measurement, Z will equal inner minus the outer.
* The left and right Z height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in).
Use the following procedure to measure the Z height:
1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Repeat this
jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 5. Measure from the center of the forward
lower control arm attaching bolt tip (a) to the alignment rack. 6. Measure from the center of the ball
joint (b) to the alignment rack. 7. The difference between these 2 measurements (a-b) is the Z
height. 8. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 9. Gently remove your
hands and let the vehicle settle.
10. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 11. Re-measure the Z height as in
step 4. 12. The true Z height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to
Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical
Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications).
If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions:
* Worn or damage suspension components
* Collision damage
Measuring the D Height
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1299
Important:
* In order to obtain the proper measurement, D will equal inner minus the outer.
* The left and right D height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in).
Use the following procedure to measure the D height:
1. Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure from the
center of the inner pivot bolt (A) to the alignment rack. 5. Measure from the center of the outer pivot
bolt (B) to the alignment rack. 6. The difference between these 2 measurements is the D height. 7.
Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 9. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times.
10. Re-measure the D height as in step 4. 11. The true D height is the average of the
measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See:
Specifications/Mechanical
Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications).
If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions:
* Worn or damage suspension components
* Collision damage
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement
Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement
Wheel Alignment Measurement
Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible
cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly
manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical
straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without
pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and
Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull
Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem.
Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in
order to ensure correct alignment readings:
* Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary.
* Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear
(See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire
Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear).
* Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See:
Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics).
* Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
(See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis).
* Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications
(See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/System Specifications).
* Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to
Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle).
* Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim
Height Inspection).
* Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or
suspension components.
* Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load
added.
Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in
the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give
consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the
setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred
specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles:
1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front
and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment
angles and record the readings.
Note: *
Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements.
* When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe
adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles.
* The rear camber and caster is not adjustable.
4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1302
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment
Front Camber Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts.
4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle.
Note:
* Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to
within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first
* Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1303
* If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer.
2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If
decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole.
5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts.
6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer
to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire
assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1304
Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe
Adjustment
Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment
1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward
position.
2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts.
Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to
rotate.
3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or
decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper
adjustment and adjust as necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1305
Alignment: Service and Repair
Wheel Alignment Measurement
Wheel Alignment Measurement
Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible
cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly
manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical
straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without
pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and
Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull
Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem.
Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in
order to ensure correct alignment readings:
* Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary.
* Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear
(See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire
Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear).
* Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See:
Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics).
* Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
(See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis).
* Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications
(See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/System Specifications).
* Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to
Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle).
* Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim
Height Inspection).
* Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or
suspension components.
* Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load
added.
Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in
the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give
consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the
setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred
specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles:
1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front
and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment
angles and record the readings.
Note: *
Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements.
* When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe
adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles.
* The rear camber and caster is not adjustable.
4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Front Camber Adjustment
Front Camber Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1306
3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts.
4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle.
Note:
* Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to
within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first
* Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation
* If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer.
2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If
decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1307
5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts.
6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer
to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire
assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair).
Front Caster Adjustment
Front Caster Adjustment
The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for
suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Replace any damaged
suspension components as necessary.
Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment
Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1308
1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward
position.
2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts.
Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to
rotate.
3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or
decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper
adjustment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Camber Adjustment
Rear Camber Adjustment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1309
1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement.
Note: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the
designated location.
2. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the
camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time.
4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the
procedure for the other rear wheel.
Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. Loosen the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment
Measurement > Page 1310
Note: If experiencing problems in adjusting the rear toe, replace the existing nut with the service
cam nut to eliminate the adjustment problem.
2. Rotate the suspension adjustment nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. 3.
Snug the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the
rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the
procedure for the other rear wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF)
....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa
(40-65 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1315
Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions
Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Special Tools
CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge
Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel/Service Precautions).
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove
the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100,
refer to the manufacture's directions.
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 1318
Warning
Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and
personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel
pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure
gauge is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps:
1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into
an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel
from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the
CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the
fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid
possible contamination in the system:
* The fuel pipe connections
* The hose connections
* The areas surrounding the connections
2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from
the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the
fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 1319
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis
Fuel System Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM
detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains
active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel
pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage
to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure.
The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces
the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank.
Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions.
An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank.
The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high
pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion
chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure,
fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM).
The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel
pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet
pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The
primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates
a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through
the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank.
Reference Information Description and Operation
Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information Special Tools
* CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge
* J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter
Circuit/System Verification
Note:
* Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic.
* Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding.
* Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding.
* The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and
Instructions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 1320
1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge
Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure
Gauge Installation and Removal).
Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the
fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580
kPa (84 psi).
2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel
pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and
does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module
Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between
276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
Circuit/System Testing
Note: *
The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* DO NOT start the engine.
* High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel
pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa
(84 psi).
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the
fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is
operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi).
‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed
below. If all items test normal, replace the primary
fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure:
1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel
Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel
feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter.
4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH
48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close
the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace
the primary fuel tank module.
3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease
more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank
module.
4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel
pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel
pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering.
‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test
normal, replace the primary fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections
5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls).
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement)
* Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1324
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW)
Description
The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct
idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for
production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for
reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for
example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned.
An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take
several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability
to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero.
The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow.
Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure
Reset Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* Ignition ON, engine OFF.
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph).
Learn Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM.
* The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa.
* The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s.
* The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts.
Throttle Learn
Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced)
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start
the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow
Compensation value should equal 0 percent and
the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed.
3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here.
Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced)
Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List
- Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle).
1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and
the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed
should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes.
6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal.
Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle
speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above
70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations
and extended idles.
7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat
step 6.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1325
8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that
referred you here.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air
Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System
Information > Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1346
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1347
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Usage
* Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability
conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Powertrain Management/Ignition
System/Specifications) for the correct spark plug.
* Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the
following conditions:
- Spark plug fouling-Colder plug
- Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug
Spark Plug Inspection
* Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage.
- Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1).
- Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should
NOT move.
* Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical
charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the
following conditions:
- Inspect the spark plug boot for damage.
- Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or
water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1348
* Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack
instead of the electrodes (3, 4).
* Inspect for evidence of improper arcing.
- Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to
Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). An
excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation.
- Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug
operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack.
- Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4).
- Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3).
- Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug.
* A rattling sound indicates internal damage.
* A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity.
- Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the
gap.
- Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped.
- Inspect for excessive fouling.
* Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can
cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation.
Spark Plug Visual Inspection
* Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal
combustion by-products from fuels with additives.
* Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions:
- Rich fuel mixtures
* Leaking fuel injectors
* Excessive fuel pressure
* Restricted air filter element
* Incorrect combustion
- Reduced ignition system voltage output
* Weak coils
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1349
* Worn ignition wires
* Incorrect spark plug gap
- Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that
normal combustion deposits may not burn off.
* Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white
coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless
they form into a glazing over the electrode.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1350
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
Spark Plug Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service
and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning).
Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could
result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the
contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper
seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination.
2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity.
Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark
plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head
threads.
3. Remove the spark plug.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1351
Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that
are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type
can severely damage the engine.
Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set
gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check.
Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even
damage the engine.
1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition
System Specifications (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Specifications).
Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is
fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head.
Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust
blow-by, or thread damage.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the spark plug.
Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Check
Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less
than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1355
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine Compression Test
Special Tools
EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the
valves and the head gasket.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full
charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF.
Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument
panel (I/P) fuse block.
3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6.
Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure
the engine compression, using the following procedure:
1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into
the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression
strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5.
Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter
from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder.
9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders.
* The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading.
* No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
10. The following are examples of measurement problems:
* When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to
specified compression on each cylinder.
* When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and
tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves
considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler.
* When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and
does not build up even with the addition of oil.
* Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be
identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired
cylinders.
11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install
the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the
I/P fuse block.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations
Timing Chain Alignment Diagram
Camshaft Position Actuator Timing Marks
1 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 2 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator
Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 3 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark
- Circle 4 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 5 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator
Identifier 6 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 7 - Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark - Circle
Stage One
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations
> Page 1359
1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive
Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left
Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for
the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window for the Left Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 12 - Primary
Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft Sprocket Timing
Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 16
- Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark
Stage Two
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations
> Page 1360
1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive
Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left
Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for
the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive
Chain 12 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft
Sprocket Timing Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket 16 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket
Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 18 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket Timing Mark/Window for the Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 19 -
Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 20 - Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 21 - Right
Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle 22 - Right Exhaust Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 23 - Right Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive
Chain Timing Link
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations
> Page 1361
24 - Right Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006
Date: July 26, 2010
Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment
and/or Replace Drive Belt)
Models:
2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped
with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010
Condition
Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise.
Cause
This condition may be caused by any of the following:
- One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged.
- The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS
pump.
- The drive belt may need to be replaced.
Correction
1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists.
‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does
not apply.
2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer
to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine
Diagnosis in SI.
‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a
condition, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure.
4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT
side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser
Alignment Tool in SI.
‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt.
Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 1370
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006
Date: July 26, 2010
Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment
and/or Replace Drive Belt)
Models:
2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped
with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010
Condition
Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise.
Cause
This condition may be caused by any of the following:
- One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged.
- The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS
pump.
- The drive belt may need to be replaced.
Correction
1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists.
‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does
not apply.
2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer
to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine
Diagnosis in SI.
‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a
condition, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure.
4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT
side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser
Alignment Tool in SI.
‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt.
Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 1376
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A
Date: July 27, 2009
Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of
Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine).
Background
Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be
very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges
from $160 - $200.
EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser
tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the
guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from:
- Drive Belt Noise
- Accelerated Drive Belt Wear
- Drive Belt Slippage
Instructions
The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These
instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal
instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt.
Caution
- Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser.
- Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses
help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances.
- Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to
protect eyes from direct laser exposure.
1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics >
Page 1381
2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system.
3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves
of the pulley, farthest from the front of the
engine.
4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool.
5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the
tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light
beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley
alignment.
- If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly.
- If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the
position of the power steering pulley as required.
- Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures.
9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation.
10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present.
Tool Information
Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics >
Page 1382
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A
Date: July 27, 2009
Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of
Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine).
Background
Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be
very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges
from $160 - $200.
EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser
tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the
guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from:
- Drive Belt Noise
- Accelerated Drive Belt Wear
- Drive Belt Slippage
Instructions
The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These
instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal
instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt.
Caution
- Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser.
- Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses
help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances.
- Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to
protect eyes from direct laser exposure.
1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page
1388
2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system.
3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves
of the pulley, farthest from the front of the
engine.
4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool.
5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the
tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light
beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley
alignment.
- If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly.
- If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the
position of the power steering pulley as required.
- Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures.
9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation.
10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present.
Tool Information
Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page
1389
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1390
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1391
Drive Belt: Service Precautions
Belt Dressing Caution
Caution: Do not use belt dressing on the drive belt. Belt dressing causes the breakdown of the
composition of the drive belt. Failure to follow this recommendation will damage the drive belt.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1392
Drive Belt: Description and Operation
Drive Belt System Description
The drive belt system consists of the following components:
* The drive belt
* The drive belt tensioner
* The drive belt idler pulley
* The crankshaft balancer pulley
* The accessory drive component mounting brackets
* The accessory drive components
- The power steering pump, if belt driven
- The generator
- The A/C compressor, if equipped
- The engine cooling fan, if belt driven
- The water pump, if belt driven
- The vacuum pump, if equipped
- The air compressor, if equipped
The drive belt system may use 1 belt or 2 belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards
and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. The drive belts are made of different
types of rubbers, chloroprene or EPDM, and have different layers or plys containing either fiber
cloth or cords for reinforcement.
Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When
the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth.
The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component
pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent
the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the
drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft.
The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys.
Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is
not equipped with the accessory.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis
Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis
Diagnostic Aids
* A chirping or squeal noise may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belts or the pulleys. It
may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belts in order to duplicate the
customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt
pulleys may be the probable solution.
* If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making
sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering
system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect.
* A chirping, squeal or whine noise may be caused by a loose or improper installation of a body or
suspension component. Other items of the vehicle may also cause the noise.
* The drive belts will not cause a whine noise.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be
engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making
the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise.
Removing the drive belts one at a time and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the
noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be
operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the
drive belts removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it
can be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of
the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect
installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a
previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two
or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the
proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the
possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for
being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent
the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a
pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. This test is to verify that the
drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper
belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal
noise. 15. This test is to verify that the drive belt is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt
tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be
routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 16.
Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive
component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward
or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley
grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive
component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 17. This test is to verify that the
pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes.
19. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a
temporary repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1395
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1396
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1397
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis
Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis
Diagnostic Aids
The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Vibration from the engine
operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise.
Vibration can be caused by, but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering
system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an
intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components.
The drive belt may have a rumbling condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the
drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom.
If replacing the drive belt, completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the
drive belts are installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the
load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is
causing the rumbling noise.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that
the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar
symptom. 3. This test is to verify that one of the drive belts is causing the rumbling noise or
vibration. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the
description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When
removing the drive belts the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also
DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspecting the drive
belts is to ensure that they are not causing the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt
will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be
seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal
condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface
for proper operation. 9. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that the wrong bolt,
nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 11. This step should only be performed if the water pump is
driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump
bearings for smooth operation and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good
water pump. 12. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put
extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1398
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1399
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis
Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis
Diagnostic Aids
If the drive belt repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment.
An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the
drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly.
If the drive belt is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on
the drive belt.
Excessive wear on a drive belt is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt
for the application.
Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause
the drive belt to make a noise or to fall off.
Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the
drive belt fall off.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify
the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off.
The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for
cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be
caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the
accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair.
Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys.
If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation
procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a
dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all
of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to
drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked will let the drive
belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut ,
spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley
misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause
misalignment of the accessory component bracket. 13. The inspection is to verify the drive belt is
correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt may be caused by
mis-positioning the drive belt by one groove on a pulley. 14. The installation of a drive belt that is
two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the
grooves on all of the pulleys. 15. This inspection is to verify the drive belt is not contacting any
parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance
when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt should not come in
contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt
Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1400
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1401
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Drive Belt Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information >
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-003A
Date: June 30, 2010
Subject: Diagnostic Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement
Models:
2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005-2008 Buick LaCrosse, Allure (Canada Only) 2008-2010 Buick
Enclave 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Malibu
2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac G6
2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Saturn AURA 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009
Saturn VUE Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT or LY7) 6 Cylinder Engine
Attention: Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always
utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when
replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand
parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install
are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage.
Some aftermarket oil filters share the outside dimension of Factory Equipment and AC Delco
service replacement filters. Though they look the same, these filters do not meet GM specification
and function requirements. In recent warranty engine teardown reviews, it has been found that
aftermarket filters have caused internal engine failures and/or noise due to the lack of lubrication.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and add additional pictures to help
aid diagnosis. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-003 (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion).
Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is
not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R)
oil filters directly from General Motors Customer Care and Aftersales (GMCC&A;).
This condition may be caused by aftermarket oil filter internal failure. Filter debris can be
transferred throughout the engine this way.
Important Aftermarket oil filter failure is not covered by GM Powertrain warranty.
The following information is being communicated to aid the technician in proper diagnostics.
Engine Ticking Noise in Valve Train
First, the location of the tick must be determined (exhaust or intake, front or rear engine bank).
Using a suitable listening device such as chassis ears and/or a stethoscope, determine the location
of the ticking noise.
1. Does the noise only come from one bank location (intake or exhaust lifters area)? 2. If the noise
is in the one bank location, then the oil galley lubrication hole may be obstructed with foreign
material.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1421
3. When the location is determined, the technician should remove the valve cover and inspect the
lifters for aeration. Remove the stationary hydraulic
lifter assemblies (SHLA) for the suspect location / cylinder. For Example; Bank 2 Cylinder # 1 A & B
exhaust lifters are making noise. Inspect the lifters for the presence of oil. If oil is present, SHLA will
be pumped and hard to compress. If aeration is present, the lifter will be spongy. Test by trying to
compress with your fingers or a suitable tool.
4. Spongy SHLA (lifters) mean aeration and obstruction to flow oil to SHLA is present. Reference
the oil lubrication description document in SI for
details of system operation.
5. (A) Bank 1 (2, 4, 6) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator
(Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley
for Lifters.
(B) Bank 2 ( 1, 3, 5) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator
(Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley for Lifters. An obstruction to oil flow is present
at the engine block deck passage under the head gasket for lifter oil pressure. The passage is the
location in the front engine block deck. The oiling passage can be identified as a hole with eye
brows cut to each side. See figures above.
6. One example of obstruction is shown above. Filter media material plugging the 2 mm lubrication
passage hole creating aeration in the exhaust
lifter oil galley. The obstruction can be filter media material or an orange silicone rubber material.
The above example is filter media.
7. Engine oil passages will have to be cleaned of aftermarket filter media debris or orange silicone
rubber.
Engine Knocking / Piston Skirt Knock-Topic 2
1. Follow the procedures in SI for the source of a knock condition. Additional diagnosis is required
by removal of the oil pan for main and rod
bearing inspection. Further inspection for the source of bearing failure is required. Recent failed
engine analysis reviews reveal the bearings are
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1422
not removed and oil passages are not being checked in many cases. Technicians need to inspect
for oil galley obtrusion, which is a source for oil starvation and bearing life in some cases.
2. One source for oil starvation is due to aftermarket oil filter anti-drain back valves deterioration.
Orange silicone rubber material has been found in
many cases of oil starvation underneath the main and rod bearings, with material contained in the
oil lubrication galley in both blocks and crankshaft lubrication holes. The orange silicone rubber is
from aftermarket oil filters anti drain back valve assembly, which is located under the filter media
and above the screw on the base. Orange silicone rubber is not used in the assembly of the High
Feature V6 as well as most GM engine applications. Examples are below.
Rod bearing welded to crankshaft (1).
Orange silicone rubber obstructing the oil flow to the main and rod bearings in the engine block
webbing (1).
Silicone rubber found in main and rod bearing and in the piston skirt squirters (sprayers) (1).
Sprayer is removed to show obstruction material.
3. Such related failures as shown in the examples above are not considered to be warranty by
General Motors.
Example of Aftermarket Filter Failures
First do a general inspection for possible source. With the metal can cut off, you can see detail of
media failure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1423
This is an oil filter that is teardown. The left (1) shows a part removed from a failed engine oil main
bearing gallery. The right one (2) is a new seal removed from a new aftermarket filter. This is what
a drainback valve looks like prior to failure.
Conclusion
Repair as necessary to remove filter media/debris from oil galleys and piston squirter sprayer in the
cylinder head. Repair and/or replace damaged engine components as necessary.
GM Powertrain engines require oil filters that can meet the challenges of today oil filtration
systems, engine oil pressure requirements (both hot and cold) and Oil Life Monitoring systems.
Improper oil filter usage may result in catastrophic engine damage or failure that is not covered by
the GM Powertrain warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1424
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B
Date: July 27, 2009
Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement
Models:
2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3
2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is
not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R)
oil filters directly from GMSPO.
Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the
most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil
filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been
discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a
trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage.
Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil
filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the
diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise
or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report).
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 1425
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug. 3. Remove the oil pan
drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning).
5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain
completely.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 1426
1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22
lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See:
Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Heater Inlet Hose Replacement
Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement
Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Heater Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1435
Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement
Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator
Tube Replacement
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement
Special Tools
J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector
Removal Procedure
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging).
2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and
Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant
Reservoir/Service and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement).
4. Remove the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield
Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair).
5. Remove the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery
Replacement).
6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut
from the wheelhouse.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1440
8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent
hose retainers from the liquid line.
10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the thermal expansion
valve (TXV). 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1441
12. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 13. Remove the liquid line from the condenser.
14. Remove the bolt retaining the liquid line to the body.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1442
15. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 16. Route the liquid line
above the battery box and the ground lug. 17. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and
remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid
line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement).
19. Install protective caps to the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV to prevent
contamination and desiccant saturation.
Installation Procedure
1. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1443
3. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV. 4.
Install the new sealing washer to the liquid line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler
HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
5. Route the condenser end of the liquid line into position. 6. Install the liquid line to the condenser.
Note: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the
line.
7. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
8. Install the bolt to retain the liquid line to the body and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1444
9. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose.
10. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System
Seal Replacement).
11. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 12. Install the liquid line and
evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
13. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft).
14. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box and tighten to 10 Nm (86 lb in). 15.
Install the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery
Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1445
16. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 17. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower and tighten
to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 18. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 19. Install the
surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service
and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement).
20. Install the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield
Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair).
21. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and
Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
22. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging).
23. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1446
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement
Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement (LF1)
Special Tools
J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector
Removal Procedures
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging).
2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and
Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose nut (2) from the air conditioning evaporator
thermal expansion valve tube hose. 4. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose from the air
conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1447
5. Remove the compressor hose nut (2) from the condenser. 6. Remove the compressor hose (1)
from the condenser. 7. Unclip hose from fan shroud. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
9. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve.
10. Remove the compressor hose nut (1) at the compressor. 11. Remove the compressor hose (2)
from the compressor. 12. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 13. Remove and discard
the sealing washers from the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1448
1. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement).
2. Install the compressor hose (2) to the compressor.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the compressor hose nut (1) to the compressor and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 4.
Connect the electrical connector to the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve.
5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. 7. Install a new sealing
washer to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and
Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
8. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose to the compressor
hose. 9. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion
valve tube hose and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1449
10. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement)
11. Install the compressor hose (1) to the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the
condenser and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 13. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp
Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
14. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging).
15. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat
Sleeve Removal
Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09334A
Date: March 24, 2010
Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line
Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to
use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the
power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334,
issued December 2009.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty period.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on
certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return
hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to
the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped
around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve
and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the
VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
No parts are required for this service update.
Claim Information
1. Submit a claim using the table above.
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat
Sleeve Removal > Page 1458
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if
there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the
frame on the front passenger side of
the vehicle.
- If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3.
- If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and
Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required.
3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation in SI.
4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement
-Right Side in SI.
Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the
heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line
brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either
at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between
the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through
condition and power steering line leak.
5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area
are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured
with service tie straps (2).
6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the
wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat
Sleeve Removal > Page 1459
Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the
corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the
following precautions: -
Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material.
- Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife.
- Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or
rubber hoses.
- Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line.
- Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and
power steering line during the sleeve removal process.
Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden
stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line.
7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool
between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power
steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration.
8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the
plastic body trim tool (1).
Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose.
9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward
the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in
length.
10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat
sleeve and power steering line.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat
Sleeve Removal > Page 1460
Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber
hose or metal portion of the power steering lines.
11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife
(4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed
away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve
to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose.
12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat
Sleeve Removal > Page 1461
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power
Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09334A
Date: March 24, 2010
Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line
Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to
use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the
power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334,
issued December 2009.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty period.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on
certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return
hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to
the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped
around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve
and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the
VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
No parts are required for this service update.
Claim Information
1. Submit a claim using the table above.
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power
Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1467
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if
there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the
frame on the front passenger side of
the vehicle.
- If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3.
- If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and
Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required.
3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation in SI.
4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement
-Right Side in SI.
Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the
heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line
brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either
at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between
the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through
condition and power steering line leak.
5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area
are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured
with service tie straps (2).
6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the
wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power
Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1468
Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the
corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the
following precautions: -
Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material.
- Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife.
- Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or
rubber hoses.
- Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line.
- Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and
power steering line during the sleeve removal process.
Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden
stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line.
7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool
between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power
steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration.
8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the
plastic body trim tool (1).
Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose.
9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward
the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in
length.
10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat
sleeve and power steering line.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power
Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1469
Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber
hose or metal portion of the power steering lines.
11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife
(4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed
away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve
to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose.
12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power
Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1470
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement
Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Place drain pans under the vehicle. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake
Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Remove as much power steering fluid from the upper power steering fluid reservoir as possible.
4. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See:
Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front
Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper
Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement).
5. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the power steering gear (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1473
6. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the lower power steering fluid reservoir
(2). 7. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) from the bracket (4). 8. Disconnect the
power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) from the bracket.
9. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe nut (2) and disconnect the bracket from the stud.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1474
10. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) from the front bumper impact bar. 11.
Disconnect the 3 power steering fluid cooling pipe clips (2). 12. Remove the power steering fluid
cooling pipe (3) from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the power steering fluid cooling pipe (3) in the vehicle. 2. Connect the 3 power steering
fluid cooling pipe clips (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) to the front bumper impact bar and tighten
to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1475
4. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe bracket to the stud. Install the power steering fluid
cooling pipe nut (2) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb
in).
5. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) to the bracket (4). 6. Install the power
steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) to the bracket and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 7. Connect the
power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the reservoir (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1476
8. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the power steering gear (2). Tighten the
fitting to 34 Nm (25 lb ft). 9. Fill and bleed the power steering system. Refer to Power Steering
System Bleeding (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power
Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair).
10. Clean any excess power steering fluid from the vehicle. 11. Remove the drain pans. 12. Install
the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front
Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper
Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement).
13. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1477
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose
Replacement
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1478
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement
Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement
Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Special Tools
J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the radiator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1483
5. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator inlet
hose from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install radiator inlet hose to the vehicle.
Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation.
2. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose
clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1484
4. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose
clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Install the intake manifold cover.
Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1485
Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement
Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Special Tools
J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair).
3. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the radiator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1486
5. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator outlet
hose from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install radiator outlet hose to the vehicle.
Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation.
2. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose
clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1487
4. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose
clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the cooling
system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Hydraulic Brake System: DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in Canada
89021320).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Cooling System ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 10.8 quarts (10.2 liters)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1496
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant.
This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low.
CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire
and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: Gives freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage
aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly
damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle
could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B
Date: November 01, 2010
Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission
components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or
ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder
during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement.
Indications of water in the ATF may include:
- ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube.
- ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a
strawberry milkshake.
- Visible water in the oil pan.
- A milky white substance inside the pan area.
- Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case.
- Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not
compressed.
- Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components.
If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a
leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in
the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of
ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be
obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement.
This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking
and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These
test kits can be obtained from:
Nelco Company
Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped
standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One
test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost
of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the
warranty claim as a net item.
The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure.
Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be
replaced.
- Replace all of the rubber-type seals.
- Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands.
- Replace all of the nylon parts.
- Replace the torque converter.
- Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter.
Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing.
Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096
TransFlow.
- Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 1501
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts)
6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts)
6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1504
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission
DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check
This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself.
Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in
transmission internal damage.
Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the
transmission. With the vehicle off and the transmission fluid temperature at approximately 20-25°C
(68-77°F) there must be at least enough fluid to drain out of the fluid level hole. This will ensure that
there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle is started.
Non Dipstick Level Checking Procedure
1. Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range,
pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever
back to PARK (P).
3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate
and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the
brake pedal.
Note: If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the
vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range,
perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification.
Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature.
4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver
Information Center or a scan tool.
Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature
(TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow
the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in
either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An
under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled
transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation.
5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift
lever in the PARK range.
6. While the vehicle is idling, remove the oil level set plug. Allow any fluid to drain.
Oil Level Plug (1)
* If the fluid is flowing as a steady stream, wait until the fluid begins to drip.
* If no fluid comes out, add fluid until fluid drips out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1507
7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces
and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the
transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair
the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
8. Inspect for external leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis).
9. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.
Dipstick Level Checking Procedure (If equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK
(P). Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range,
pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever
back to PARK (P).
3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate
and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the
brake pedal.
4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver
Information Center or a scan tool.
Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature
(TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow
the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in
either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An
under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled
transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation.
Note: *
If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the
vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range,
perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification.
* Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is at between 85-95°C (185-203°F). The fluid
level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission fluid
temperature is at the specified temperature.
Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature.
5. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range. 6.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid
should be red or dark brown.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces
and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the
transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair
the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
8. Install the dipstick. Wait three seconds and then remove it again.
Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent cap to ensure it
is clean and unclogged.
Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the
crosshatch band is acceptable.
9. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level.
10. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading.
Note: Do not add more than one half pint (0.25L) at a time without rechecking the level. Once the
oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch
band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid
Leak Diagnosis (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis).
11. If the fluid level is not within the crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is at 90°C
(194°F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into
the crosshatch band.
12. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1508
13. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.
Fluid Condition Inspection
* Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal
use, and does not always indicate contamination.
Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or
overheating.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission) to verify
transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1509
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check
This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself.
Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in
transmission internal damage.
Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the
transmission. With the vehicle off there must be at least enough fluid to wet the end of the dipstick
bullet. This will ensure that there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle
is started.
Level Checking Procedure
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK
(P). 2. Start the engine. 3. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear
range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever
back to PARK (P).
4. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 1 minute. Release the brake pedal. 5. Keep the
engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information
Center or a scan tool.
Note: If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise
the fluid temperature to the specified range.
6. If the TFT reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or
operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is
reached. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is within the specified range.
Note: Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and
93°C). The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the
transmission fluid temperature is within range.
7. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 8. Inspect the fluid color. The
fluid should be red or dark brown.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces
and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the
transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair
the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
9. Install the dipstick and tighten. Wait three seconds and then remove it again.
Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent assembly to
ensure it is clean and unclogged.
10. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level.
Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the
crosshatch band is acceptable.
11. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading. 12. If the fluid level is not within the
crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and 93°C),
add or drain
fluid as necessary to bring the level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough fluid to bring the level into the crosshatch band. Note: Do not add more than one pint (0.5L)
at a time without rechecking the level. Once the oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much
more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is
low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis).
13. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick. 14. If the fluid was changed, reset
the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.
Fluid Condition Inspection
* Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal
use, and does not always indicate contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1510
Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or
overheating.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission) to verify transmission
operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fluid drain plug (1). 3. Drain transmission fluid into a
suitable container.
Caution: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle
Damage Warnings/Component Fastener Tightening Caution).
4. Install the fluid drain plug (1) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1513
1. Lower the vehicle. 2. Remove the fluid fill cap (1). 3. Fill the transmission to the proper level with
the correct fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and
Condition Check) and Fluid Capacity Specifications (6T40/45/50) (See: Specifications/Capacity
Specifications/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
4. Install the fluid fill cap (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1514
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001
Date: March 14, 2011
Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for
Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or
Complete Oil Change
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with
Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines
GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website
Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different
licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com
GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons
The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC.
Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the
demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM)
specification.
Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos
1(TM) engine oil.
GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification
Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General
Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The
oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains
acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be
used in those older vehicles.
In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine
oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil
specification are as follows:
- To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions.
- To promote long engine life.
- To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the
industry's overall dependence on crude oil.
dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the
following benefits:
- Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE)
requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits
throughout the life of the oil.
- More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1519
- Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life
has been depleted.
- Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil
specifications.
International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
GF-5 Standard
In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010.
- There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4
standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos
1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a
statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for
GF-4.
- It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard.
However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification.
- Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API
will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified
products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils.
Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy
Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than
doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed
CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet
these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than
ever before.
New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel
economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM).
The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when
determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy.
However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and
exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil.
Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower
viscosity oils.
dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs:
SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30.
Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the
Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being
serviced.
GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals
To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the
GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000
mile (4,830 km) recommendation.
The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the
GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle.
If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended,
GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually.
GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website
Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different
licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com
GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1520
The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC.
Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the
demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos
(TM)specification.
Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos
2(TM) engine oil.
GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification
- dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010
vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured.
- dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines.
Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting
specification CJ-4.
- dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and
replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025.
- dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on
certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction
systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum
performance longer.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................
............................................... 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1523
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for three things:
1. Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M.
2. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You
should look for this information on the oil container
3. All temperatures above -20°F (-29°C) SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-40,
SAE 20W-50, or any other viscosity grade not recommended.
NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the
American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES / ENGINE OIL FLUSHES Do not add anything to your oil. The
recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will
need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1524
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug. 3. Remove the oil pan
drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning).
5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain
completely.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1525
1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22
lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See:
Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Hydraulic Power Steering System (V6 Engines Only) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant charge ...............................................................................................................................
........................................................ 0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1533
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant ...........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... R-134a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1534
Refrigerant: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging
Special Tools
J 34100 - Smart Cart
Warning
To prevent personal injury, avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Work in a
well ventilated area. To remove refrigerant from the A/C System, use service equipment designed
for recovery that is certified to meet the requirements of the appropriate SAE Standards. If an
accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional
health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant, refrigerant recovery, and
lubricant manufacturers.
Warning
For personal protection, goggles and lint-free gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped
around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant
system. If refrigerant comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury
can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical
help should be obtained.
Caution: You must replace the desiccant if the A/C refrigerant system has been open to
atmosphere for more than four hours, or if the A/C refrigerant oil has been contaminated. Failure to
replace the desiccant will result in damage to the A/C refrigerant system.
Caution: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other
refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure.
Caution: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C
system.
Caution: Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation
through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If
lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result.
The J 34100 - Smart Cart is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The Smart Cart
recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically.
The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead
the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is
recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically
replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg
(12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant.
The Smart Cart has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to
recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If
foreign gases are present, the Smart Cart will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system.
The Smart Cart also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain.
Refer to the J 34100 - Smart Cart Smart Cart manual for operation and setup instruction. Always
recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System
Specifications (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Specifications) for the correct amount.
A/C Refrigerant System Oil Charge Replenishing
If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component
replacement, the oil must be replenished.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil
Abrupt Refrigerant Loss .......................................................................................................................
......................................................... 65 ml (2.20 oz) Compressor Replacement ................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 74 ml
(2.50 oz) The service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil.
Condenser Replacement with the Receiver Dehydrator
...................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2 oz)
Condenser Replacement without the Receiver Dehydrator
................................................................................................................................. 30 ml (1 oz)
Evaporator Replacement .....................................................................................................................
................................................................ 30 ml (1 oz) Receiver Dehydrator Replacement ................
..................................................................................................................................................... 30
ml (1 oz) Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement
........................................................................................................................................................ 20
ml (0.75 oz) Total System PAG Oil Capacity .......................................................................................
................................................................................ 120 ml (4 oz)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 1539
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
PAG Oil GM P/N 12378526 for United States
PAG Oil GM P/N 88900060 for Canada
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling
Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning).
Warning: Refer to Battery Disconnect Warning (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Precautions).
Note:
* The actuator/hose assemblies are shipped full with fluid. In this case the pump fluid reservoir
should only be filled to the normal + sign. Do not overfill to compensate for an empty actuator/hose
assembly.
* Symptom of a low fluid condition will be a jerking liftgate and with an abnormal hydraulic pump
noise as the liftgate is being open. The liftgate will not open to the full open position. The liftgate will
reverse before reaching the full open position if not operating properly.
* Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate hydraulic
actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench horizontally to
the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must
rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level
must be above the + mark.
* The liftgate hydraulic system components must be tested for proper operation before reinstalling
the trim panels that cover the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump and actuator/hose assemblies so the
fluid level can be recheck after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level.
Rechecking the fluid level will require removal of the liftgate hydraulic pump.
1. Remove the liftgate hydraulic pump. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Body
and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk /
Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump
Replacement).
2. Position the pump with the fluid reservoir in a vertical position with the filler screw (1) in the up
and/or on top position. 3. Wipe the surface around the filler screw clean. 4. Remove the filler screw
(1) and place on a clean, lint and dust free surface.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 1544
5. Add hydraulic fluid from a clean container (1). Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and
Sealers (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications) for the recommended fluid.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
6. Install the filler screw and tighten to 1.3 Nm (12 lb in).
7. Position the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump (1) on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the +
sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as
needed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 1545
8. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the
hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level
must be above the + mark.
9. Install the pump without the trim and inspect for proper operation and fluid level. The fluid level
can be checked after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times
to ensure proper fluid level. If the fluid is still low repeat the procedure.
10. Install the liftgate hydraulic pump after inspection. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump
Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump
Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 1546
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding
Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning).
Note: Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate
hydraulic actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench
horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic
actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is
inspected. The level must be above the + mark after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times.
1. Cycle the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. 2. Inspect the fluid level. Refer to Liftgate
Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk /
Liftgate/Trunk /
Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement).
3. If adding fluid is required, refer to Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling (See: Liftgate Hydraulic
System Refilling).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure
Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant
Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Note: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform
a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). The automated bleed
procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist:
* Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel
* Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred
* Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly
The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run
the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed
off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation.
The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in
these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners.
Automated Bleed Procedure
Caution: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing
the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be
given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment
per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid
causing damage to components and painted surfaces.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Inspect the brake system
for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic
System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic
Brakes). Repair or replace components as needed.
4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test (See:
Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test).
6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish
communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the
Special Functions
menu.
9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair).
10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See:
)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ).
11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed
procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed
procedure:
* If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) and diagnose the appropriate DTC.
* If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) ( See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure)
(See: ).
13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14.
Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 17. Inspect
the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1551
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Manual)
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant
Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With
the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort
increases significantly, in order to deplete the
brake booster power reserve.
3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you
disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you
must perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add
GM approved brake fluid from a clean,
sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada)
(See: ). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the
reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal.
2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front
brake pipe from the front port of the brake
master cylinder.
3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4.
Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant
slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the
same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe,
then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps
3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe
installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the
master cylinder,
loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8.
10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake
pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly
tightened.
4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake
fluid container. Ensure that the brake master
cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to
maintain the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder
Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to
removing the cap and diaphragm.
5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6.
Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the
transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the
pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit.
10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15
seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12.
With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been
purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit,
install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With
the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left front hydraulic circuit, install
a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With
the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a
proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After
completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel
hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly
tightened.
19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal.
Observe the feel of the brake pedal.
Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior
to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed.
21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still
feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure,
perform the following steps:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1552
1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection
(See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External
Leak Inspection).
2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in
the system.
22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated.
Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired.
23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1553
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Pressure)
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure)
Special Tools
* J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent
* J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With
the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort
increases significantly, in order to deplete the
brake booster power reserve.
3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you
disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you
must perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add
GM approved brake fluid from a clean,
sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada)
(See: ). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the
reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal.
2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front
brake pipe from the front port of the brake
master cylinder.
3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4.
Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant
slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the
same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe,
then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps
3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe
installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the
master cylinder,
loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8.
10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake
pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly
tightened.
4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer
to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake
Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the
outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm.
5. Install the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6.
Check the brake fluid level in the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent
, or equivalent. Add GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the
half-full point.
7. Connect the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, to
the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder
Adapter.
8. Charge the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, air
tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder,
or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to
enter the brake system.
10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to
ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid
leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure.
11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the
transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
14. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air
bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then
tighten the bleeder valve.
15. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been
purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit,
install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With
the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left front hydraulic circuit, install
a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1554
18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. With
the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a
proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve
20. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 21. After
completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel
hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly
tightened.
22. Close the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent,
fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J-29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, from the J-35589-A Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter.
23. Remove the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter from the brake master cylinder
reservoir. 24. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved
brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 25. Slowly depress and release the brake
pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal.
Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior
to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed.
26. If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the following steps:
1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection
(See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External
Leak Inspection).
2. Using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove
any air that may have been trapped in the brake
pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ).
27. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated.
Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired.
28. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1555
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Flushing
Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination:
* Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended
brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system
- Swirled appearance - oil-based substance
- Layered appearance - silicone-based substance
* Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into
the brake hydraulic system
- Cloudy appearance - moisture
- Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust
2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder
grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid
contamination.
3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated
by fluid separation and/or a swollen master
cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform
the following:
1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains
internal rubber seals/linings which have been
contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the
procedures indicated:
* Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement)
* Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake
Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement)
* Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake
Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement)
* Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake
Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement)
2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake
pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed
and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber
seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic
system. Refer to the procedures indicated:
* Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement); also perform the following: Clean the
brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using
non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary.
Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir
cap diaphragm.
* Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake
Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement)
* Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake
Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement)
* Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake
Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1556
* Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake
Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement)
4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but
WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust,
corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The
diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system.
5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed brake fluid container as specified
in the owners manual.
6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder
reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct
brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page
1560
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or
Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page
1561
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical
Center Identification Views (See: Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual
Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1567
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1568
To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and lift it straight up.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J-Case Fuses ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Usage
Fuse 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. Cool Fan 1 Fuse 2 .................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Cool Fan
2 Fuse 3 ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................ Rear Defog Fuse 4 .............................................................
.............................................................................................................................. Power Windows Right Fuse 5 ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................... Memory Seat Module Fuse 6 .......................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Power
Seat - Left Fuse 7 ................................................................................................................................
................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 1 Fuse 8 ...............................................
................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel
Fuse Block 2 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................... Starter Fuse 10 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
. Brake Booster Fuse 11 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Sunroof Fuse 12 .....................................
........................................................................................................................................... Antilock
Brake System Pump Fuse 13 ..............................................................................................................
................................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 Fuse 14 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Power Windows - Left Fuse 15 ............................................................................................................
................................................................. Antilock Brake System Module
Mini Fuses ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Fuse 16 ................................................................................................................................................
................... Transmission Control Module Battery Fuse 17 ...............................................................
.............................................................................................................................. Trailer Parking
Light Fuse 18 .......................................................................................................................................
...................................... Engine Control Module Battery Fuse 19 .......................................................
................................................................................................................................................. Heated
Mirror Fuse 20 .....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Trailer Left Fuse 21 ....................................................
............................................................................................................................................... Lift Gate
Module Fuse 22 ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... Power Lumbar Fuse 23 ..................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
Trailer Right Fuse 24 ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................. Canister Vent Fuse 25 ..........................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Memory
Mirror Module Fuse 26
............................................................................................................................................................
Regulated Voltage Control Battery Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1569
Fuse 27 ................................................................................................................................................
................................ Rear Accessory Power Outlet Fuse 28 ..............................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Wiper Fuse 29 .....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Rear Wiper Fuse 30 ...................................................
............................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning
Compressor Fuse 31 ...........................................................................................................................
................................................................................... Rear Latch Fuse 32 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
................ Horn Fuse 33 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................ Right High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 34 .....................................
............................................................................................................................................... Left
High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 35 ...........................................................................................................
....................................................................................... Ignition Even Coil Fuse 36 ...........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......... Ignition Odd Coil Fuse 37 .........................................................................................................
....................................................................................... Windshield Washer Fuse 38 ........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.............. Front Fog Lamps Fuse 39 ....................................................................................................
........................................................... Post Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 40 ..................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Engine Control Module Fuse 41 ................................................................................................
................................................................ Pre-Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 42 ..............
..............................................................................................................................................................
... Transmission Control Module Fuse 43 ............................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ Mirror Fuse 44 ............
..............................................................................................................................................................
. Chassis Control Module Ignition Fuse 45 ..........................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Spare Fuse 46 ........
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......................... Rear Drive Module Fuse 47 ......................................................................................
................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Logic Fuse 48 .......
.............................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Ignition Fuse 49 ....................................................................................
............................................................................................................ Heated Seat - Front Fuse 50 ..
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................... Chassis Control Module Fuse 51 ..............................................................................
........................................................................................................... Engine Control Module Fuse
52 .........................................................................................................................................................
...................................... Rear Vision Camera
Midi Fuse .............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Fuse 53 ................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Electric Power Steering
Micro Relays ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Relay 54 ..............................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Rear Defogger Relay 55 .............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan
Low Relay 56 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................. Head Lamp High Beam Relay 57 ......................................................
....................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan
Control Relay 58 ..................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Wiper On/Off Control Relay 59 ...................................................
........................................................................................................................... Air Conditioning
Compressor Relay 60 ..........................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Wiper Speed Relay 61 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Fog Lamp Relay 62 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Engine Control Relay 63 ......................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... Starter Relay 64 ...................................................................................................................
......................................................................................... Run/Crank
Mini Relays ..........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Relay 65 ..............................................................................................................................................
................................................... Cooling Fan High Relay 66 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Brake
Booster
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1570
Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual
INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1571
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1572
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side panel of the center console. To
access the fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling it out.
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs on the bottom of the door into the console first, then push the
door back into its original location.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Mini Fuses ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Fuse 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
............................................... Steering Wheel DM Fuse 2 .................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Spare Fuse 3 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Spare Fuse 4 .....................................................
...................................................................................................................................... Body Control
Module 1 Fuse 5 ..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Infotainment Fuse 6 .................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... Body
Control Module 7 Fuse 7 .....................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Noise Control Module Fuse 8 .....................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Body Control Module 4 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................
........................................................................................................... Radio Fuse 10 .........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... SEO Battery Fuse 11 ......................................................................................................
.............................................................. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid Module Fuse 12
................................................................................................................................................. Heater,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery Fuse 13 ................................................................................
........................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power Front Fuse 14
................................................................................................................................................ Heater,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ignition Fuse 15 ................................................................................
................................................................................................................................... Display Fuse 16
..............................................................................................................................................................
........................... Body Control Module 5 Fuse 17 ..............................................................................
.............................................................................................................. Auxiliary Power Rear Fuse
18 .........................................................................................................................................................
................. Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition Fuse 19 ........................................................................
................................................................................................................................... PDI Module
Fuse 20 ................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Body Control Module 6 Fuse 21 ................................................................
............................................................................................................ SEO Retained Accessory
Power Fuse 22 ....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... SDM Ignition Fuse 23 ....................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.... Spare Fuse 24 ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................... Spare Fuse 25 ..............................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... PRNDL Fuse 26 ...........................................................................................................................
........................................................................................... Spare Fuse 27 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... Spare
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1573
Fuse 28 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... Spare Fuse 30 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................................... Body Control Module
3 Fuse 31 .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. Amplifier Fuse 32 ..............................................................
................................................................................................................ Discrete Logic Ignition
Switch Fuse 33 ....................................................................................................................................
................................ Communications Integration Module Fuse 34 ....................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Body Control
Module 2 Fuse 35 ................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................... SDM Battery Fuse 36 ...............................................
............................................................................................................................................. Data Link
Connection Fuse 37 ............................................................................................................................
............................................... Instrument Panel Cluster Battery Fuse 38
..............................................................................................................................................................
IOS Module (Passenger Sensing System) Fuse 39 ............................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... Spare
J-Case Fuses ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Usage
Fuse 29 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................... Front Blower Motor Fuse 40 ................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Body Control Module
8
Relays ..................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Relay 41 ..............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. LOG Relay Relay 42 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................... Retained Accessory Power
Relay
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1576
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1577
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1578
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1579
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1580
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1581
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1582
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1583
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1584
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1585
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1586
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1587
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1588
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1589
Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1590
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1591
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1592
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1593
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1594
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1595
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application
and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1596
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 1601
Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 1602
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1605
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1606
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1607
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1608
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1609
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1610
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1611
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1612
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1613
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1614
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1615
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1616
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1617
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1618
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1619
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1620
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1621
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1622
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1623
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1624
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1625
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1626
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1627
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1628
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1629
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1630
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1631
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1632
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1633
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1634
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1635
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1636
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1637
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1638
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1639
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1640
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1641
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1642
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1643
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1644
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1645
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1646
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1647
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1648
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1649
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1650
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1651
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1652
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1653
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1654
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1655
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1656
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1657
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1658
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1659
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1660
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1661
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1662
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1663
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1664
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1665
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1666
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1667
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1668
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1669
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1670
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1671
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1672
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1673
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1674
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1675
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1676
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1677
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1678
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1679
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1680
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1681
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1682
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1683
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1684
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1685
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1686
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1687
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1688
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1689
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1690
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1691
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1692
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1693
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1694
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1695
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1696
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1697
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1698
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1699
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1700
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1701
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1702
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1703
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1704
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1705
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1706
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1707
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1708
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1709
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1710
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1711
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1712
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1713
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1714
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1715
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1716
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1717
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1718
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1719
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1720
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1721
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1722
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1723
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1724
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1725
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1726
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1727
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1728
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1729
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1730
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1731
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1732
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1733
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1734
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1735
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1736
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1737
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1738
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1739
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1740
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1741
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1742
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1743
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1744
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1745
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1746
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1747
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1748
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1749
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1750
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1751
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1752
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1753
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1754
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1755
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1756
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1757
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1758
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1759
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1760
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1761
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1762
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1763
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1764
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1765
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1766
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1767
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1768
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Fuse Block: Procedures
Ground Repair
Electrical Grounds
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, positive, corrosion-free ground connections.
Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and
loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and
component replacements.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of, three
attachment methods:
* Welded M6 stud and nut
* Welded M6 nut and bolt
* Welded M8 nut and bolt
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
Determine which attachment method is used, and carry out the appropriate repair.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible.
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
5. Select a replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part
number and application. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet
stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement.
Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation
of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding.
8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the
repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair ().
10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material
applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud
threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud
threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the
electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
(See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to
the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new rivet stud. 16.
Select a new, conductive M6 nut. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and
application.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
17. Install the M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 18. Check for proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a new, conductive
self-threading M7 bolt may be used to secure the
ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive, self-threading M7 bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1771
threads.
5. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
6. Install the electrical ground terminal to the new, conductive M7 bolt.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Install the M7 bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Check for proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair)
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 bolt
and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and
application.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance behind the
panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush,
apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M6
bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M6 bolt to the ground location.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a
conductive M8 bolt and a conductive M8 nut may be
used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and
application.
2. Select a location adjacent to M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush,
apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M8
bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M8 bolt to the ground location.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Install the conductive M8 nut and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1772
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair)
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a
conductive M6 rivet stud and a conductive M6 nut
may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers
and application.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new, conductive M6 rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a rivet stud
installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely
fastened, with no detectable movement.
Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation
of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding.
8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the
repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair ().
10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material
applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud
threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud
threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the
electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
(See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to
the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new, conductive M6
rivet stud.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
16. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 17. Check for proper system
operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1773
Fuse Block: Removal and Replacement
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1774
Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement
Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1775
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1780
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1781
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1782
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1783
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1784
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1785
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1786
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1787
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1788
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1789
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1790
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1791
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1792
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1793
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1794
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1795
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1796
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1797
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1798
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1799
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1800
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1806
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1807
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1808
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1809
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1810
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR
If your vehicle is equipped with a "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON"
indicator. This indicator is not a maintenance indicator and does not mean a maintenance service
is required.
For additional "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator information
refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
For Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator, refer to Oil Change Reminder Lamp.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module
(ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit.
Diagnostic Aids
If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors with the engine
operating. Monitor the scan tool Circuit Test Status parameters for the component. The Circuit Test
Status parameter will change from OK or Not run to Fault if there is a condition with the circuit or a
connection.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
* Instrument Cluster Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators/System Diagram/Instrument Cluster Schematics)
* Engine Controls Schematics (See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams)
Connector End View Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Electrical Information
Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool MIL Circuit Test Status parameters. Each of the MIL circuit
test status parameters should display OK or Not
Run.
2. Ignition ON, command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The MIL should turn ON and OFF
as commanded. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC
does not reset. You may also operate the vehicle within the
conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
Circuit/System Testing
1. If any other IPC indicators or gauges are inoperative, refer to Instrument Cluster Gauges
Inoperative (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative).
2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM harness connectors. Ignition ON, the MIL should not
illuminate.
‹› If the MIL is illuminated, test the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 for a short to ground. If the
circuit tests normal, replace the IPC.
3. Ignition ON, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 and
ground. The MIL should illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1817
‹› If the MIL does not illuminate, test the MIL control circuit for a short to voltage, or an open/high
resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace
the IPC/bulb.
4. If all circuits/connections test normal, replace the ECM.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)
* Instrument Cluster Replacement (Equinox) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair)Instrument Cluster Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster /
Carrier/Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
GM Oil Life System Resetting
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A "Change Engine Oil Soon" message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
If the vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 2. Press the DIC menu button until "Remaining
Oil Life" displays. 3. Press and hold the set/clear button until "100%" is displayed. 4. Turn the key
to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the "Change Engine Oil Soon" message goes off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle
Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components
are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack
stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to
the hoist.
Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands
to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack.
Caution: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure:
* Remove or secure all of the vehicle contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that
may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure.
* The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of
the vehicle and any vehicle contents.
* The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting
equipment or jacking equipment manufacturer.
* Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface.
* Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the
lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components.
Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking
equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle contents.
Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift
Front Lift Pads
When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310
mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges.
Rear Lift Pads
When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard
from the rear pinchweld flanges.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 1825
Vehicle Jacking
Note:
* Only the left side or the right side of the rear of the vehicle can be lifted at a time when using
these jacking point.
* The floor jack pad must not contact the oil pan, splash shield or the steering linkage.
Under the Rear Suspension
Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad on either side of the suspension cradle,
inboard and forward of the rear suspension, as shown.
Under the Center of the Front Suspension Frame
Lift the front of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front suspension
frame, as shown.
Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands
Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1836
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1837
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1838
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and
Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1839
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire
Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
1845
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
1846
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
1847
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
1848
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
1849
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1858
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1859
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1860
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and
Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1861
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire
Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1866
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1867
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1868
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1869
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1870
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1871
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1872
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension).
GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires
General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect
the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to
continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with
compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical
benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the
realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be
minimal.
The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its
unique properties:
- A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time.
- A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water
vapor concentration.
- A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations.
Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is
used to inflate tires under controlled conditions.
The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use
Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the
molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration)
has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are
larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing.
The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the
materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated.
Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has
demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the
inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be
reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are
required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas
with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the
benefits of using nitrogen.
GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance
Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria)
specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance
under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original
equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to
both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The
inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns,
while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength.
This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity
throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions.
Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure
maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the
correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in
many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear,
and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation
pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without
excessive structural
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1873
degradation.
Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure
maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1874
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension).
This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in
the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and
whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair.
Caution
- Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools
and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their
customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall.
- Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while
repairing tires.
- NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads.
Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may
require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be
used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy.
- NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation.
Repairable area on a radial tire.
Important
- NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth).
- NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4").
- NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair.
- NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel).
- Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair.
- Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury.
- Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and
repair tools/repair material recommendations.
Three basic steps for tire puncture repair:
1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1875
2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent
air loss.
External Inspection
1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak
by using a water and soap solution. Mark the
injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core.
2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader.
Internal Inspection
1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs
of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4.
Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5.
Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should
not be repaired.
Cleaning
1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a
scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold
lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool.
2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow
guidelines for handling and disposal.
Clean the Injury Channel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1876
1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside
of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to
prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended
reaming tool(s).
Fill the Injury
1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent
moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this
step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug
per
repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just
above the inside tire surface.
3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection.
Repair Unit Selection
Important Do not install the repair unit in this step.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1877
1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so
that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap
previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit
selection.
Buffing
1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and
evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine
wire brush or gritted rasp.
2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the
inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult
your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool.
Cementing
Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures.
Repair Unit Application
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1878
1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads
excessively).
Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units
1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over
the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out.
3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread.
Combination Repair/Plug Units
1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2.
Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions.
2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool.
Safety Cage
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1879
Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may
require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be
used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy.
Final Inspection
1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water
and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be
demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle.
For additional tire puncture repair information, contact:
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1880
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B
Date: August 13, 2009
Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire
Wear Condition)
Models:
2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2,
H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension).
This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire
feathering and recommended practices.
If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the
tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to
13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or
recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation
for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes.
SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER
TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE
MAXIMIZED.
If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a
tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing
the vehicle on the alignment machine.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description
Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description
Tread Wear Indicators Description
The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the
tires.
The location of these indicators are at 60 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire.
The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 in) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm
(2/32 in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1883
Tires: Description and Operation Tire Inflation Description
Tire Inflation Description
When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and
tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures,
or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions:
* Vehicle handling concerns
* Poor fuel economy
* Shortened tire life
* Tire overloading
Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply:
* The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours.
* The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
* The tires are cool.
Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications
on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions
keep out dust and water.
The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both
kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa.
Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions:
* A hard ride
* Tire bruising
* Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire
Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions:
* A tire squeal on turns
* Hard steering
* Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread
* Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture
* Tire cord breakage
* High tire temperatures
* Reduced vehicle handling
* High fuel consumption
* Soft riding
Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions:
* Uneven braking
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1884
* Steering lead
* Reduced vehicle handling
Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1885
Tires: Description and Operation All Seasons Tires Description
All Seasons Tires Description
Most Saturn vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment.
These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the
non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling
resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both
tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side
wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification
number.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1886
Tires: Description and Operation P-Metric Sized Tires Description
P-Metric Sized Tires Description
Most P-metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. Replacement
tires should be of the same tire performance criteria TPC specification number including the same
size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle.
Consult a tire dealer if you must replace the P-metric tire with other sizes. Tire companies can best
recommend the closest match of alphanumeric to P-metric sizes within their own tire lines. The
above illustration may not correspond with your vehicle, but is meant as an example.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Tires: Procedures
Tire Repair
Tire Repair
Warning
* Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools
and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their
customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall.
* Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while
repairing tires.
* NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads.
* NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation.
Note: Repairable area on a radial tire.
* NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32 in) remaining depth.
* NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4 in).
* NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair.
* NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel).
* Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair.
* Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury.
* Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and
repair tools/repair material recommendations.
Three basic steps for tire puncture repair:
1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep
moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss.
External Inspection
1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak
by using a water and soap solution. Mark the
injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core.
2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader.
Internal Inspection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1889
1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs
of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4.
Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5.
Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4 in) should
not be repaired.
Cleaning
1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a
scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold
lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool.
2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow
guidelines for handling and disposal.
Clean the Injury Channel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1890
1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside
of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to
prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended
reaming tool(s).
Fill the Injury
1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent
moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. For combination repair/plug units skip this
step. Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per
repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just
above the inside tire surface.
3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection.
Repair Unit Selection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1891
Note: Do not install the repair unit in this step.
1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so
that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap
previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit
selection.
Buffing
1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and
evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine
wire brush or gritted rasp.
2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the
inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult
your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool.
Cementing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1892
Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures.
Repair Unit Application
The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed. Do not spread the beads
excessively.
Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units
1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over
the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1893
3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread.
Combination Repair/Plug Units
1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2.
Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions.
Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool.
Safety Cage
Some run flat tires may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire
safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy.
Final Inspection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1894
1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water
and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be
demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle (See: Body and Frame/Testing and
Inspection/Vibration Diagnosis and Correction/Repair Instructions/Tire and Wheel Assembly
Balancing - Off Vehicle).
For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
1400 K Street, N.W., Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005-2403
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to Maintenance Schedule
(North American Emissions) (See: ). In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire and wheel
whenever uneven tire wear is noticed.
Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in
non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes
regular rotation especially necessary.
Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair).
Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set
the tire pressure.
After the tires have been rotated, the tire pressure sensors must be reset, if applicable. Refer to
Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1895
Tires: Removal and Replacement
Tire Dismounting and Mounting
Caution: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons
alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could
result.
Caution: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing
equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear
coating to peel from the wheel.
Caution: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of
improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air
to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire
changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage
may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking.
1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely.
Note: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended.
3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the
tire from the wheel.
4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and
270 degrees from the valve stem.
Caution: Failure to position valve stem in proper position while dismounting and mounting the tire
may result in the TPM sensor to become damaged.
5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. The
tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying
the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1896
6. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is again at the 7 o'clock position relative to the
head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when
prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head.
7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire
sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles
equipped with TPM, replace the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor
Replacement (See: Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires/Tire Pressure Sensor/Service and
Repair).
8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from
the wheel bead seats.
Caution: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or
corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound
can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration.
9. Apply mounting lubricant to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids,
Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Suspension/Tires and Wheels).
10. Position the rim so the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This
will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1897
11. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim. Ensure that the
valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position.
12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem (1) is
at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. This
will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1898
13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel.
Warning
To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when
the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any
tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate
the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal
injury.
14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this
time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure.
17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire
bead is fully seated on the wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009
and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on
Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Important
- Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven
a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires.
- Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel
assemblies for each vehicle.
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation
measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable
tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force
variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads.
Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out
of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three
conditions must be addressed.
Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle,
two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any
imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer,
and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly
balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration.
Before balancing, perform the following procedures.
Tire and Wheel Diagnosis
1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are
centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while
shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick.
3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and
correct as necessary:
- Missing balance weights
- Bent rim flange
- Irregular tire wear
- Incomplete bead seating
- Tire irregularities (including pressure settings)
- Mud/ice build-up in wheel
- Stones in the tire tread
- Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to
diagnosing a smooth road shake condition.
4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a
sufficient distance on a known, smooth road
surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes
are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section
of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration
as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order
(one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high
enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high
to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment.
If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a
throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1907
of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel.
5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found
at the end of this bulletin. This should be done
after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to
eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency
is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the
various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required.
A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any
parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically
indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if
this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away
and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration
may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if
vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire
flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration.
6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle
being parked for long periods of time and that the
nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information
on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment
Tires.
7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel
assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic
balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are
absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and
always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is
not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim
flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see
the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the
wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First
order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or
hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough,
it can be seen.
If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and
force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700
can address both (it is also a wheel balancer).
Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will
produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels
because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not
under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel
assembly runout be within specification.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures
radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV
measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily
done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout
specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed.
After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then
calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that
can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in
tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it
should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel
assembly.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of
finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force
variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly
force variation.
The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation
numbers should be used as a guide:
When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps.
Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation
Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of
the repair order.
- Measure radial force variation and radial runout.
- If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the
front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap
the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem
still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those
tires onto the subject vehicle.
- If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040
in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive
customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to
have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the
EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the
back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do
not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1908
onto the subject vehicle.
- After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced.
If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire
replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are
being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect
force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring.
Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to
measuring.
Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are
more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment
such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be
contacted for further instructions.
Important
- When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's
center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are
secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and
repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This
system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program.
- Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT
recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire
company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure.
Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet
When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the
appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1909
Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the
vibration concern.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels
Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition.
Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel.
Cause
Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air
leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat).
Correction
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service
procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the
tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap
and water to locate the specific leak location.
Important
- If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim),
the wheel should be replaced.
- If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced.
3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location.
- If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks.
- If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step.
4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the
wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove
the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the
INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose
cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose
Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent.
8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use
88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry.
Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging
the repair area may result in an air leak.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels >
Page 1914
10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire
Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on
the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and
inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the
tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire
and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty
one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
One leak repair per wheel.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON
Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated,
Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat)
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or
weeks.
Cause
Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat.
There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and
this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear
continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the
environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may
appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be
visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in
an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please
refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum
Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Correction
In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below.
Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to
repair the wheel with the procedure below.
Notice
The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to
be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine
the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat
Corrosion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON >
Page 1919
Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel
flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for
additional information on possible wheel porosity issues.
3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a
rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to
maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel
that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion
4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below.
- For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of
repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
- For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area
of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the
corrosion and any flaking paint. You should
remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to
the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges
that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired
surface.
Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be
visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not
visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend
to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced.
Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating
surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as
smooth and level as possible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON >
Page 1920
Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface
6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially
available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead
Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will
permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this
sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat
7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in SI.
Parts Information
Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at
www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON >
Page 1921
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F
Date: April 21, 2011
Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum
Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative
products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the
customer.
What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1
Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an
example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from
using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient
to clean wheels.
If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states
that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers
should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these
chemicals.)
- Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome)
- Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid
- Sulfamic Acid
- Phosphoric Acid
- Hydroxyacetic Acid
Notice
Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most
customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal.
Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the
paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car
warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the
calipers.
Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean,
clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts,
lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to
the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the
damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away.
Notice
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1927
Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome
wheels (or any wheels).
If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be
avoided.
For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels
Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome
wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were
returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be
charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2
A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium
chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to
Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be
uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels
should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently
possible.
Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can
also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on
the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward
direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such
conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed
as soon as conveniently possible.
Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time.
Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish
and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that
applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior
approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
"Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3
A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant
penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material
are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by
airflow. These
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1928
hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed
to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the
chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome.
Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and
Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up
or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars
Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be
waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax
#M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake
dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may
be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect
the finish.
Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be
replaced one time.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust
build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care
and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
Customer Assistance and Instructions
GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic
cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the
appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the
following:
Notice
THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN
EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE
APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL
REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED
INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER,
EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
EXACTLY.
1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce
wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water
to rinse.
2. Dry the wheels completely.
Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine
results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are
satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a
50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES,
only apply until the results are satisfactory.
3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the
polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the
towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If
continued applications fail to improve the appearance
further discontinue use.
This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications,
restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above
procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting.
In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of
cleaning will restore the finish.
†*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers
of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or
assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may
be available from other sources.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1929
*This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location
please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577.
**This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com.
^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Tri-Peek at
1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels
Available through GM
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A
Date: March 21, 2011
Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension).
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle
from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories.
This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information.
Tires
GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be
used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or
exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines.
Important
- If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO
NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire.
- If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the
19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
Wheels
Wheel (Lug) Nuts
Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170
Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the
wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available.
Caution
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
Care / Cleaning
Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel
cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use
carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of
the wheel to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels
Available through GM > Page 1934
remove road grime, brake dust and grease.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured
radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance.
The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide:
If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible
corrective actions.
Vehicle Modifications
Tire Label
After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle.
The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found
on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line
as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be
sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C
(65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to
occupant/cargo capacities.
Tire Type/Pressure Selection
To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to
update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The
factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be
changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic
System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure:
1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset
Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection".
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System
To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory
wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred
to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the
new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM).
TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure
Note
If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be
used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not
affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special
tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem
to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the
keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL
46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding
with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that
tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within
close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be
inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the
learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be
cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure
away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation
does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different
position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels
Available through GM > Page 1935
1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound
together with activated turn signal lamps
indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079
Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall
close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for
a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in
the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3
seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the
learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method
1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until
the tire learn message appears on the driver
information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have
been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been
enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods:
- Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to
the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn
chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp
sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate.
- Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate,
repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the
following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for
3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded,
the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming
Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new
vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19"
wheels are installed.
When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy.
Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service
Programming System (SPS).
Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming
DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be
cleared.
Calibration Information Documentation
1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2.
Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the
customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form
in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder.
Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the
programming of the ECM to the original specifications.
Warranty Information
Wheels
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels
Available through GM > Page 1936
All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery
will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are
replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of
the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only
effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI
(Accessory Distributor / Installer).
For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be
covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited
kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires,
but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines.
GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive
the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only).
Tires
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and
workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage.
Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a
prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire
manufacturer warranty.
USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more
information.
Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H.
ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels
Available through GM > Page 1937
You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels
and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to
provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your
Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains
important information necessary to service your vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum
Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E
Date: March 17, 2011
Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not
endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic
refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed.
Evaluating Damage
In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion,
scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be
sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the
wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been
refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record
the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin.
Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations
- Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended.
- Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the
clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be
performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later
in this bulletin.
- Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat
procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original
coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum
Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel.
- Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them.
In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is
possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel
should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the
least amount of material to be removed.
Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the
dimensions and function of the wheel.
Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will
better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM
recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle
SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using
any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain
color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures
and product recommendations.
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company
Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels
will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that
re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used.
A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent.
Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is
allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to
assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the
wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed.
Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed.
Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel
mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel
and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the
new vehicle warranty, whichever is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum
Wheels > Page 1942
longer.
Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact
surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut
torque.
When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to
reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A
Date: June 09, 2010
Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab
9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles
Attention:
Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and
reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel
installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking
instructions for safe wheel changing.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available
special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension).
Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven
Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures
had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation
intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as
winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more
than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the
technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself
aware of.
Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools
The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and
installation.
- J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
- J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
Corroded Surfaces
One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle.
Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened
wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed
away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and
an under-torqued condition.
Caution
Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or
brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting
surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is
moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury.
Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If
corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding
pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating
surface.
The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces:
- The hub mounting surface
- The brake rotor mounting surface
- The wheel mounting surface
Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub.
Lubricants, Grease and Fluids
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 1947
Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in
removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to
installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper
readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY.
Notice
Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or
drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to
clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light
coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel
pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub.
Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage
Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse.
You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not
retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any
component suspected of damage.
Tip
Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged
BEFORE tightening the nut.
Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side
of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation.
Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque
Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid
additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown
for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in
order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off
center resulting in vibration.
The Most Important Service You Provide
While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk
of becoming complacent on this very important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 1948
service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal
injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to
always side with caution when installing wheels.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force
Variation (RFV)
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009
and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on
Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Important
- Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven
a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires.
- Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel
assemblies for each vehicle.
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation
measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable
tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force
variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads.
Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out
of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three
conditions must be addressed.
Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle,
two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any
imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer,
and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly
balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration.
Before balancing, perform the following procedures.
Tire and Wheel Diagnosis
1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are
centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while
shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick.
3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and
correct as necessary:
- Missing balance weights
- Bent rim flange
- Irregular tire wear
- Incomplete bead seating
- Tire irregularities (including pressure settings)
- Mud/ice build-up in wheel
- Stones in the tire tread
- Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to
diagnosing a smooth road shake condition.
4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a
sufficient distance on a known, smooth road
surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes
are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section
of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration
as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order
(one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high
enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high
to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment.
If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a
throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force
Variation (RFV) > Page 1953
of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel.
5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found
at the end of this bulletin. This should be done
after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to
eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency
is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the
various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required.
A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any
parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically
indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if
this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away
and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration
may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if
vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire
flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration.
6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle
being parked for long periods of time and that the
nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information
on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment
Tires.
7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel
assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic
balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are
absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and
always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is
not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim
flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see
the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the
wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First
order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or
hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough,
it can be seen.
If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and
force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700
can address both (it is also a wheel balancer).
Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will
produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels
because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not
under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel
assembly runout be within specification.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures
radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV
measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily
done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout
specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed.
After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then
calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that
can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in
tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it
should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel
assembly.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of
finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force
variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly
force variation.
The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation
numbers should be used as a guide:
When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps.
Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation
Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of
the repair order.
- Measure radial force variation and radial runout.
- If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the
front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap
the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem
still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those
tires onto the subject vehicle.
- If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040
in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive
customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to
have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the
EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the
back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do
not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force
Variation (RFV) > Page 1954
onto the subject vehicle.
- After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced.
If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire
replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are
being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect
force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring.
Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to
measuring.
Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are
more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment
such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be
contacted for further instructions.
Important
- When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's
center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are
secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and
repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This
system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program.
- Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT
recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire
company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure.
Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet
When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the
appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force
Variation (RFV) > Page 1955
Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the
vibration concern.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast
Aluminum Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition.
Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel.
Cause
Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air
leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat).
Correction
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service
procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the
tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap
and water to locate the specific leak location.
Important
- If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim),
the wheel should be replaced.
- If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced.
3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location.
- If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks.
- If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step.
4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the
wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove
the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the
INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose
cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose
Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent.
8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use
88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry.
Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging
the repair area may result in an air leak.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast
Aluminum Wheels > Page 1960
10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire
Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on
the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and
inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the
tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire
and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty
one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
One leak repair per wheel.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated,
Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat)
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or
weeks.
Cause
Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat.
There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and
this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear
continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the
environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may
appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be
visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in
an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please
refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum
Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Correction
In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below.
Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to
repair the wheel with the procedure below.
Notice
The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to
be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine
the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat
Corrosion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1965
Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel
flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for
additional information on possible wheel porosity issues.
3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a
rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to
maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel
that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion
4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below.
- For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of
repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
- For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area
of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the
corrosion and any flaking paint. You should
remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to
the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges
that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired
surface.
Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be
visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not
visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend
to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced.
Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating
surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as
smooth and level as possible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1966
Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface
6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially
available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead
Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will
permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this
sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat
7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in SI.
Parts Information
Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at
www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1967
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F
Date: April 21, 2011
Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum
Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative
products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the
customer.
What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1
Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an
example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from
using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient
to clean wheels.
If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states
that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers
should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these
chemicals.)
- Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome)
- Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid
- Sulfamic Acid
- Phosphoric Acid
- Hydroxyacetic Acid
Notice
Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most
customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal.
Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the
paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car
warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the
calipers.
Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean,
clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts,
lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to
the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the
damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away.
Notice
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1973
Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome
wheels (or any wheels).
If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be
avoided.
For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels
Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome
wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were
returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be
charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2
A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium
chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to
Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be
uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels
should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently
possible.
Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can
also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on
the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward
direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such
conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed
as soon as conveniently possible.
Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time.
Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish
and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that
applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior
approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
"Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3
A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant
penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material
are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by
airflow. These
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1974
hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed
to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the
chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome.
Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and
Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up
or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars
Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be
waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax
#M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake
dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may
be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect
the finish.
Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be
replaced one time.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust
build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care
and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
Customer Assistance and Instructions
GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic
cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the
appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the
following:
Notice
THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN
EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE
APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL
REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED
INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER,
EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
EXACTLY.
1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce
wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water
to rinse.
2. Dry the wheels completely.
Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine
results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are
satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a
50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES,
only apply until the results are satisfactory.
3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the
polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the
towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If
continued applications fail to improve the appearance
further discontinue use.
This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications,
restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above
procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting.
In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of
cleaning will restore the finish.
†*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers
of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or
assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may
be available from other sources.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1975
*This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location
please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577.
**This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com.
^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Tri-Peek at
1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available
through GM
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A
Date: March 21, 2011
Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension).
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle
from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories.
This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information.
Tires
GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be
used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or
exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines.
Important
- If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO
NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire.
- If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the
19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
Wheels
Wheel (Lug) Nuts
Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170
Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the
wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available.
Caution
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
Care / Cleaning
Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel
cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use
carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of
the wheel to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available
through GM > Page 1980
remove road grime, brake dust and grease.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured
radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance.
The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide:
If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible
corrective actions.
Vehicle Modifications
Tire Label
After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle.
The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found
on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line
as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be
sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C
(65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to
occupant/cargo capacities.
Tire Type/Pressure Selection
To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to
update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The
factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be
changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic
System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure:
1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset
Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection".
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System
To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory
wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred
to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the
new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM).
TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure
Note
If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be
used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not
affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special
tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem
to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the
keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL
46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding
with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that
tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within
close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be
inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the
learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be
cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure
away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation
does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different
position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available
through GM > Page 1981
1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound
together with activated turn signal lamps
indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079
Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall
close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for
a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in
the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3
seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the
learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method
1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until
the tire learn message appears on the driver
information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have
been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been
enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods:
- Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to
the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn
chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp
sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate.
- Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate,
repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the
following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for
3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded,
the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming
Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new
vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19"
wheels are installed.
When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy.
Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service
Programming System (SPS).
Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming
DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be
cleared.
Calibration Information Documentation
1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2.
Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the
customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form
in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder.
Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the
programming of the ECM to the original specifications.
Warranty Information
Wheels
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available
through GM > Page 1982
All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery
will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are
replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of
the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only
effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI
(Accessory Distributor / Installer).
For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be
covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited
kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires,
but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines.
GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive
the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only).
Tires
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and
workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage.
Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a
prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire
manufacturer warranty.
USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more
information.
Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H.
ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available
through GM > Page 1983
You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels
and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to
provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your
Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains
important information necessary to service your vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum
Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E
Date: March 17, 2011
Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not
endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic
refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed.
Evaluating Damage
In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion,
scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be
sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the
wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been
refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record
the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin.
Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations
- Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended.
- Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the
clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be
performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later
in this bulletin.
- Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat
procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original
coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum
Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel.
- Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them.
In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is
possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel
should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the
least amount of material to be removed.
Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the
dimensions and function of the wheel.
Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will
better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM
recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle
SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using
any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain
color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures
and product recommendations.
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company
Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels
will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that
re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used.
A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent.
Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is
allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to
assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the
wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed.
Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed.
Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel
mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel
and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the
new vehicle warranty, whichever is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum
Wheels > Page 1988
longer.
Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact
surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut
torque.
When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to
reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A
Date: June 09, 2010
Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab
9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles
Attention:
Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and
reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel
installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking
instructions for safe wheel changing.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available
special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension).
Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven
Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures
had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation
intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as
winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more
than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the
technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself
aware of.
Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools
The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and
installation.
- J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
- J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
Corroded Surfaces
One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle.
Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened
wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed
away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and
an under-torqued condition.
Caution
Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or
brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting
surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is
moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury.
Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If
corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding
pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating
surface.
The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces:
- The hub mounting surface
- The brake rotor mounting surface
- The wheel mounting surface
Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub.
Lubricants, Grease and Fluids
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 1993
Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in
removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to
installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper
readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY.
Notice
Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or
drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to
clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light
coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel
pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub.
Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage
Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse.
You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not
retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any
component suspected of damage.
Tip
Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged
BEFORE tightening the nut.
Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side
of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation.
Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque
Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid
additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown
for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in
order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off
center resulting in vibration.
The Most Important Service You Provide
While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk
of becoming complacent on this very important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 1994
service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal
injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to
always side with caution when installing wheels.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Replacement Wheels Description
Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description
Replacement Wheels Description
Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist:
* The wheel exhibits excessive runout.
* The wheel is bent.
* The wheel is cracked.
* The wheel is severely rusted.
* The wheel is severely corroded.
Note: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable.
* The wheel leaks air.
Warning
If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install
only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment
parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of
vehicle control resulting in personal injury.
Caution: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause:
* Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel
* Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components
* Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius
* Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance
* Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy
Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of
the following conditions exist:
* The wheel has elongated bolt holes.
* The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly.
Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem.
Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Replacement Wheels Description > Page 1997
Wheels: Description and Operation Steel Wheel Repair Description
Steel Wheel Repair Description
Caution: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from
striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and
uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Caution: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed
ratings are greatly reduced.
If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2003
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Fastener ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 190 Nm (140 ft lb)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2011
Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation
Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description
Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way:
* The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face.
* The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt.
The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x
1.5.
* M = Metric
* 12 = Diameter in millimeters
* 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Stud Replacement
Tools Required
J 43631 Ball Joint Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly.
Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front
Suspension).
4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2014
Installation Procedure
1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange.
2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut
to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the
head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers.
6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing
and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service
and Repair/Front Suspension).
7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Service and Repair). 8. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2015
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Stud Replacement
Tools Required
J 43631 Ball Joint Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub
replacement. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service
and Repair/Rear
Suspension).
4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2016
Installation Procedure
1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange.
2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut
to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the
head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers.
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Service and Repair). 7. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle
Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components
are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack
stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to
the hoist.
Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands
to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack.
Caution: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure:
* Remove or secure all of the vehicle contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that
may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure.
* The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of
the vehicle and any vehicle contents.
* The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting
equipment or jacking equipment manufacturer.
* Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface.
* Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the
lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components.
Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking
equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle contents.
Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift
Front Lift Pads
When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310
mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges.
Rear Lift Pads
When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard
from the rear pinchweld flanges.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2020
Vehicle Jacking
Note:
* Only the left side or the right side of the rear of the vehicle can be lifted at a time when using
these jacking point.
* The floor jack pad must not contact the oil pan, splash shield or the steering linkage.
Under the Rear Suspension
Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad on either side of the suspension cradle,
inboard and forward of the rear suspension, as shown.
Under the Center of the Front Suspension Frame
Lift the front of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front suspension
frame, as shown.
Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands
Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Camshaft Actuator System Description
Camshaft Actuator System Overview
1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the
camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil
Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator
Housing
The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft
timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the
camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid
valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft
timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance
concerns:
* Engine power output
* Fuel economy
* Lower tailpipe emissions
The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP)
sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses
the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions:
* The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
* The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT)
* The mass air flow (MAF) sensor
* The throttle position (TP) sensor
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
* The volumetric efficiency
Operation
The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside
the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is
applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The
movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the
exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2027
applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top
dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft
movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve
until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the
CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP
actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve
directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also
command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the
current camshaft position.
The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the
solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP
actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing
and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the
CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with
CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a
condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake
or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2031
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2032
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagrams
Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2033
Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2034
Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2035
Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF)
Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2036
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2039
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2040
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable
Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2041
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Check
Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less
than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 2045
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine Compression Test
Special Tools
EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the
valves and the head gasket.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full
charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF.
Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument
panel (I/P) fuse block.
3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6.
Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure
the engine compression, using the following procedure:
1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into
the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression
strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5.
Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter
from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder.
9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders.
* The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading.
* No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
10. The following are examples of measurement problems:
* When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to
specified compression on each cylinder.
* When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and
tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves
considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler.
* When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and
does not build up even with the addition of oil.
* Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be
identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired
cylinders.
11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install
the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the
I/P fuse block.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft bearing caps
Left (DI)
Right (DI)
First pass .............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb in) Second pass ...................................................
...................................................................................................................................... Loosen bolts
1, 2, 3, 4 Final pass bolts 1, 2, 3, 4 ......................................................................................................
....................................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft position actuator ..................................................................................................................
......................................................... 58 Nm (43 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1
Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 (LF1)
Special Tools
* EN49982-1 - Timing Chain Retainer
* EN49982-2 - Timing Chain Retainer
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side).
2. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid - intake. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
3. Remove the intake camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
4. Remove the exhaust camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement
- Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust).
5. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid - exhaust. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust).
6. Rotate engine clockwise using crankshaft dampener retaining bolt until the flats at the rear ends
of the camshafts are pointing up. This puts the
camshafts on "base circle" and will reduce their tendency to rotate from valve spring pressure when
the camshaft position actuators/drive chains are removed.
Note: Do NOT remove or back out the camshaft position actuator bolt(s) significantly, simply break
them loose from their fully-torqued position. The position actuators must stay firmly attached until
the retaining tools are in place, but they should be broken loose while the chain is still tight and in
position.
7. Loosen intake and/or exhaust camshaft position actuator retaining bolts, depending on which
camshaft position actuator and/or camshaft you will
be servicing. If servicing both camshaft position actuators and/or camshafts, loosen both bolts.
Note: Be certain to clearly mark the position of the chain to the camshaft position actuator(s).
Though the engine does not need to be set to a specific timing mark before starting the procedure,
the relationship of the chain to the actuator(s) is critical and must be reestablished on assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2057
8. Mark the position of the chain to the camshaft position actuator - intake.
9. Mark the position of the chain to the camshaft position actuator - exhaust.
10. Remove camshaft front cap bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2058
Note: Do NOT remove or loosen any other camshaft bearing caps at this time, even if you intend to
eventually remove the camshaft.
11. Remove the camshaft front cap (1).
12. Loosen wingnut (4) to open the clamping area of EN49982-1 - retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2059
Note: Do NOT overtighten the thumbscrew. The EN49982-1 - retainer should be able to slide
slightly via the slot the screw goes through. This fore/aft movement will allow easier removal and
installation of the chain later.
13. Install EN49982-1 - retainer intake side chain holder onto front cover by screwing in the
thumbscrew (2) on the EN49982-1 - retainer finger-tight.
Note: Do NOT tighten the wingnut with a tool of any kind. Firm finger-tightening is sufficient.
14. Tighten wingnut (4) so EN49982-1 - retainer closes over and firmly grasps timing chain.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2060
Note: The engine front cover is removed for clarity in the following graphics, but is NOT required to
be removed to perform the procedure.
15. EN49982-2 - retainer (1) will be installed in the following steps such that it wedges between an
internal rib (2) that is cast into the inside of the
front cover (shown in dotted line above) and the timing chain and spring-loaded tensioner shoe (3),
holding the chain in position. The wedge will be left in place during the cam position actuator and/or
camshaft service.
16. Insert the EN49982-2 - retainer between the two camshaft position actuators with the "teeth" on
theEN49982-2 - retainer facing toward the front
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2061
17. Once the wedge portion of EN49982-2 - retainer is below the camshaft position actuators,
rotate the EN49982-2 - retainer until the flat in the
handle faces toward the intake camshaft position actuator. This orients the "teeth" toward the
chain.
Note: Do not try to force the wedge into position, simply ensure it is loosely engaged in the timing
chain and in the correct overall position.
18. Drop the wedge down until it begins to engage the timing chain and the belt casting (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2062
19. If possible shine a strong light down from above, between the camshaft position actuators, and
see the wedge in overall position as shown in the
above graphic.
20. Using a 20 mm wrench on the cast hexagonal portion of the exhaust camshaft, rotate the
camshaft toward the intake camshaft while pushing down
on the handle of the EN49982-2 - retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2063
21. This rotation of the camshaft will compress the tensioner shoe (3) against the spring force of
the tensioner, opening up a gap between the chain and
the internal rib in the front cover. The wedge will then drop into this gap. You will feel a distinct click
as the teeth engage the chain.
Caution: Be sure the EN49982-2 is captured firmly as described before continuing. This is critical to
ensuring the camshaft drive chains stay properly timed.
22. Release the force on the wrench, allowing the spring tension to close the tensioner shoe
against the wedge portion of EN49982-2 - retainer. You
should be able to lightly tug on the EN49982-2 - retainer and it should stay in position. Repeat
Steps 20 and 21 if necessary to re-insert the EN49982-2 - retainer until you are certain it is in
position and will stay in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2064
23. With EN49982-2 - retainer in position and with the 20 mm wrench removed, there should now
be some slack in the timing drive chain as indicated
in the graphics shown.
24. Do not pry against the face of the camshaft position actuators or the position actuator retaining
bolt.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2065
Caution: Do not pry against the face of the camshaft position actuators or the position actuator
retaining bolts as the position actuators will be damaged.
25. Position a screwdriver or small pry bar between a camshaft cap and camshaft lobe. Carefully
move/pry the camshafts as far as possible toward the
rear/flywheel end of the engine.
Note: Do not move or disturb the EN49982 - retainer components after their installation or the
timing chains may be lost inside the front cover.
26. The EN49982-1 - retainer and EN49982-2 - retainer should be in position as shown, they must
be left in position during the servicing of the
camshaft position actuator(s) and/or camshaft(s).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2066
27. Remove and capture the plastic thrust washers (1) in the following steps. Ensure the plastic
thrust washer does not fall into the front cover area.
28. To remove the intake camshaft position actuator, remove the loosened retaining bolt. To
remove only the exhaust camshaft position actuator, skip
the steps for removing the intake camshaft position actuator. However, the EN49982-1 - retainer
MUST be installed as discussed even if the intake side will not be serviced or the timing of the
camshaft chains will be lost.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2067
29. Slide the camshaft position actuator forward and off the end of the intake camshaft. The slot in
the EN49982-1 - retainer will allow the tool to
move forward enough to disengage the camshaft position actuator from the front of the camshaft.
Remove the plastic thrust washer when removing the camshaft position actuator from the end of
the camshaft.
30. Tilt the camshaft position actuator forward and out/away from the engine.
Note: DO NOT remove the EN49982 - retainers. They are holding the cam chains to maintain their
properly-timed positions.
31. Allow the chain to rest on the EN49982-1 - retainer and EN49982-2 - retainer in position during
service.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2068
1. Install plastic camshaft position actuator thrust washer (1) between cylinder head face and
camshaft position actuator on assembly.
2. It may help to carefully pry the camshaft forward and to move the EN49982-1 - retainer
backward via the slot to reengage the position actuator to
the camshaft. The dowel pin on the camshaft position actuator must be aligned with the slot in the
camshaft nose for reassembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2069
Note: Ensure plastic thrust washer is in place before installing the actuator.
3. Install the intake camshaft position actuator first by inserting the actuator between the timing
chain and front cover. Tilt the actuator in and engage
the chain while aligning the marks you made on the chain and position actuator.
4. Ensure the camshaft position actuator fits snugly to the end of the camshaft.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Install the intake camshaft position actuator retaining bolt, and lightly tighten the bolt to hold the
camshaft actuator in place. DO NOT torque at
this time.
6. Install the exhaust camshaft position actuator retaining bolt, and lightly tighten the bolt to hold
the camshaft actuator in place. DO NOT torque at
this time.
7. Double-check that the marks on both the intake and exhaust camshaft position actuators to
ensure that they are aligned with their respective paint
marks on the chain.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2070
8. Using a 20 mm wrench on the cast hexagonal portion of the exhaust camshaft, rotate the
camshaft clockwise while pulling up on the handle of the
EN49982-2 - retainer.
9. Remove EN49982-2 retainer.
10. Release the pressure on the wrench. The timing chain should now be tight and should lose the
slack the wedge was providing.
Note: Double-check the marks on the camshaft position actuators and chains to ensure they are
correct.
11. Torque one or both camshaft position actuator retaining bolts to 58 Nm (43 lb ft).
12. Unscrew the wingnut on EN49982-1 - retainer to release timing chain, and then remove
EN49982-1 - retainer from the front cover by unscrewing
the thumbscrew (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2071
13. Install camshaft front cap and bolts (1). 14. Tighten the camshaft front cap outer bolts to 10 Nm
(89 lb in). 15. Tighten the camshaft front cap inner bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 16. Install the camshaft
position actuator solenoid valve solenoid - exhaust. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust).
17. Install the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid-intake. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
18. Install the intake camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
19. Install the exhaust camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust).
20. Install the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2072
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 2
Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 2 (LF1)
Special Tools
EN-48313 - Timing Chain Retention Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools)
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the left camshaft cover.
Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve
Cover/Service
and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side).
3. Remove the left intake and exhaust camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position
Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position
Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust).
4. Remove the left intake and exhaust camshaft position actuator solenoids. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust).
Note: Rotate the crankshaft balancer bolt in a clockwise direction ONLY.
5. Rotate the crankshaft balancer using the balancer bolt until the camshafts are in a neutral (low
tension) position. The camshafts will be parallel
with the camshaft cover rail (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2073
Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for
proper assembly.
6. Use a paint stick to create an alignment mark on one of the timing chain links (2) and the
adjacent tooth on the exhaust camshaft position actuator
(1).
7. Use a paint stick to create an alignment mark on one of the timing chain links (3) and the
adjacent tooth on the intake camshaft position actuator
(4).
Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing
Components/Service Precautions).
8. Use an open end wrench on the hex cast into the left intake and exhaust camshafts and rotate
the camshafts toward each other in order to create
slack in the chain between the actuators.
9. Unscrew the EN-48313 - tool so that the legs of the tool are retracted.
10. Insert the EN-48313 - tool between the camshaft actuators, rearward of the timing chain until
the bottom line that is scribed in the body of the tool
(2) is adjacent to the top surface of the cylinder head (1). This is the approximate installed position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2074
Note: The engine front cover is removed for clarity in the following graphics, but NOT required to
perform the procedure.
11. Ensure that the feet (4) on the legs of the tool are facing the front of the engine. 12. Partially
expand the legs (1, 3) of the EN-48313 - tool by turning the T-shaped handle clockwise. 13. Insert
the leg of the tool (1) behind the timing chain guide (2). 14. Continue expanding the EN-48313 tool until the legs (1, 3) contact the timing chain. Do not tighten at this time.
Note: Ensure that the foot (1) of the EN-48313 - tool is engaged into one of the link pockets to
prevent tool slippage during tightening of the EN-48313 - tool.
15. Hand tighten the EN-48313 - tool. 16. Use an open end wrench on the hex cast into the left
intake and exhaust camshafts and rotate the camshafts toward each other in order to create
slack in the chain between the actuators.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2075
17. The EN-48313 - tool is now properly installed to hold the timing chain in position.
18. Use an open end wrench on the hex cast into the camshaft in order to prevent engine rotation
when loosening the camshaft position actuator bolt. 19. If replacing the exhaust camshaft position
actuator, then remove the bolt and the actuator. 20. If replacing the Intake camshaft position
actuator, then remove the bolt and the actuator. 21. If removing both the exhaust and intake
camshaft actuators, the timing chain can be draped over the EN-48313 - tool once the actuators
have been
removed.
22. Rotate the actuator in order to align the opening in the actuator reluctor wheel with the cam
sensor boss in the front cover, to allow actuator
removal.
23. Remove the camshaft thrust washer.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2076
Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for
proper assembly.
1. Align the exhaust camshaft actuator alignment mark (1) to the timing chain alignment mark (2)
made during disassembly. 2. Ensure that the intake camshaft actuator alignment mark (4) and the
timing chain alignment mark (3) are also aligned. 3. Position the exhaust camshaft actuator to the
camshaft and install the actuator bolt hand tight. 4. Remove the EN-48313 - tool.
Note: *
The camshaft position actuator will vary depending on application.
* Camshaft thrust washers must be installed on all 2010 applications when servicing the camshaft
position actuators. Do not install washers on 2009 applications if they are not already present.
5. Ensure the proper camshaft thrust washer is used. Use a 1.6 mm (0.063 in) thrust washer on
applications that have 5 attaching screws on the back
side of the camshaft position actuator (1). Use a 1.1 mm (0.043 in) thick thrust washer with yellow
speckles on applications that have 4 attaching screws on the back side of the camshaft position
actuator (2).
6. Install the thrust washer, if applicable.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2077
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. If the exhaust camshaft position actuator has been replaced, Then Tighten the bolt to 58 Nm (43
lb ft). 8. If the Intake camshaft position actuator has been replaced, Then Tighten the bolt to 58 Nm
(43 lb ft). 9. If both the exhaust and intake has been replaced, Then tighten bolt to 58 Nm (43 lb ft).
10. Install the left intake and exhaust camshaft position actuator solenoids. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement
- Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust).
11. Install the left intake and exhaust camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position
Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position
Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust).
12. Install the left camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side).
13. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2078
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement - Left Side
Camshaft Replacement - Left Side
Special Tools
* EN-46111 - Crankshaft Rotation Socket
* EN-46313 - Timing Chain Retention Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the left bank camshaft
cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head
Assembly/Valve
Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side).
3. Remove the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake).
4. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Intake).
5. Remove the camshaft position actuator. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement Bank 2 (LF1) (See: Camshaft Position Actuator
Replacement - Bank 2).
6. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
7. Rotate the crankshaft with the EN-46111 - socket until the camshafts are in a neutral (low
tension) position. The camshaft flats will be parallel with
the camshaft cover rail (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2079
Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing
Components/Service Precautions).
Note: *
Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation.
* DO NOT remove the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time.
8. Loosen the camshaft position actuator bolt.
Note: Ensure that the tips of the EN-46313 - tool are fully engaged into the timing chain.
9. Install the EN-46313 - tool in order to retain the timing chain.
Firmly tighten the EN-46313 - tool nuts.
Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for
proper assembly.
10. Mark the timing chain and the respective locations on the camshaft position actuators (1-4).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2080
11. Remove the camshaft position actuator bolt. 12. Remove the camshafts. Refer to Camshaft
Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/33. Camshaft Removal - Left Side).
Installation Procedure
Note: *
Ensure that the marks on the camshaft position actuator and the timing chain (1-4) are aligned.
* DO NOT tighten the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time.
1. Locate the camshafts to the cylinder head and assemble the camshaft actuators to the
camshafts. 2. Install the camshafts and the camshaft bearing caps. Refer to Camshaft Installation Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/102. Camshaft
Installation - Left Side).
3. Remove the EN-46108 - tool.
Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing
Components/Service Precautions).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2081
Note: Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation.
4. Install and tighten the camshaft position actuators. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator
Installation - Left Side Intake (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/106. Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Intake) and Camshaft
Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Exhaust (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/107. Camshaft
Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Exhaust).
5. Install the intake camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Intake).
6. Install the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake).
7. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block
Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
8. Install the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side).
9. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2082
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement - Right Side
Camshaft Replacement - Right Side
Special Tools
* EN-46111 - Crankshaft Rotation Socket
* EN-46313 - Timing Chain Retention Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the camshaft cover. Refer
to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve
Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side).
3. Remove the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
4. Remove the intake camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service
and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Intake).
5. Remove the Camshaft Position Actuator. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement Bank 1 (LF1) (See: Camshaft Position Actuator
Replacement - Bank 1).
6. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
7. Rotate the crankshaft with the EN-46111 - socket until the camshafts are in a neutral (low
tension) position.
The camshaft flats will be parallel with the camshaft cover rail (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2083
Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing
Components/Service Precautions).
Note: *
Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation.
* DO NOT remove the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time.
8. Loosen the camshaft position actuator bolt.
Note: Ensure that the tips of the EN-46313 - tool are fully engaged into the timing chain.
9. Install the EN-46313 - tool in order to retain the timing chain.
Firmly tighten the EN-46313 - tool nuts.
Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for
proper assembly.
10. Mark the timing chain and the respective locations on camshaft position actuators (15-18).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2084
11. Remove the camshaft position actuator bolt. 12. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the
camshaft. Refer to Camshaft Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/38.
Camshaft
Removal - Right Side).
Installation Procedure
Note: *
Ensure that the marks on the camshaft position actuators and the timing chain (15-18) are aligned.
* DO NOT tighten the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time.
1. Locate the camshafts to the cylinder head and assemble the camshaft actuators to the
camshafts. 2. Install the camshafts and the camshaft bearing caps. Refer to Camshaft Installation Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/102. Camshaft
Installation - Left Side).
3. Remove the EN-46313 - tool. 4. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer
Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2085
Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing
Components/Service Precautions).
Note: Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation.
5. Install and tighten the camshaft position actuators. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator
Installation - Right Side Intake (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/104. Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Intake) and Camshaft
Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Exhaust (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/105.
Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Exhaust).
6. Install the intake camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side)
Intake).
7. Install the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
8. Install the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side).
9. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service Precautions
Valve Lifter Priming Caution
Caution: Ensure each valve lifter is filled with clean engine oil and the valve lifter does not tip over
(plunger down) before the installation of the valve lifters. The loss of oil in the valve lifter lower
pressure chamber or the dry stroking/cycling of the valve lifter plunger will allow air to travel into the
high pressure chamber of the valve lifter. Air in the high pressure chamber of the valve lifter may
not be purged causing extensive engine component damage.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side
Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the applicable camshafts. Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See:
Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left
Side).
2. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker
Arm Replacement - Left Side).
3. Remove the lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Removal - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/36. Valve Lifter Removal - Left Side) 4. Clean and inspect the camshafts, rocker
arms and lifters. Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See:
Service
and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and
Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection).
5. Clean and inspect the rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve Rocker Arm
Cleaning and Inspection)
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side > Page 2091
1. Install the lifters. 2. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
(See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm
Replacement - Left Side).
3. Install the camshafts. Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side > Page 2092
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side
Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See:
Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement Right Side).
2. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/39. Valve Rocker Arm Removal Right Side).
3. Remove the lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/40. Valve Lifter Removal - Right Side). 4. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and
the rocker arm(s) and lifter. Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and
Inspection (
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) , Valve Lifter Cleaning
and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection) and
Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve Rocker
Arm Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side > Page 2093
1. Install the lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/100. Valve Lifter Installation - Left Side). 2. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve
Rocker Arm Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/101. Valve Rocker Arm
Installation - Left Side).
3. Install the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See:
Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right
Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See:
Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left
Side).
2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or
replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and
Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2098
1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side
(See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2099
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side
Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See:
Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement Right Side).
2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or
replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and
Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection).
4. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve
Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection)
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2100
1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side
(See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Camshaft Actuator System Description
Camshaft Actuator System Overview
1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the
camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil
Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator
Housing
The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft
timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the
camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid
valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft
timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance
concerns:
* Engine power output
* Fuel economy
* Lower tailpipe emissions
The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP)
sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses
the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions:
* The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
* The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT)
* The mass air flow (MAF) sensor
* The throttle position (TP) sensor
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
* The volumetric efficiency
Operation
The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside
the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is
applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The
movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the
exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2104
applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top
dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft
movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve
until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the
CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP
actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve
directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also
command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the
current camshaft position.
The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the
solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP
actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing
and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the
CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with
CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a
condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake
or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance
............................................................................................................................... 0.010-0.070 mm
(0.0004-0.0028 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod,
Engine > Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Bearing End
.......................................................................................................... 59.620-59.636 mm
(2.3472-2.3479 in) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Pin End - Production
............................................................................................ 24.009-24.019 mm (0.9452-0.9456 in)
Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Pin End - Service Maximum
......................................................................................................... 24.007 mm (0.9457 in)
Connecting Rod Length - Center to Center
........................................................................................................................................ 156.05 mm
(6.1437 in) Connecting Rod Side Clearance
.................................................................................................................................... 0.095-0.355
mm (0.0037-0.0140 in) Connecting Rod Width - Bearing End Production ..........................................
................................................................................................................................................ 21.775
mm (0.8573 in) Service .......................................................................................................................
................................................ 21.725-21.825 mm (0.8553-0.8593 in) Connecting Rod Width - Pin
End Production ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 21.775 mm (0.8573 in) Service ....................................................
................................................................................................................... 21.725-21.825 mm
(0.8553-0.8593 in)
Connecting rod bolts
Tighten .................................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Loosen ..............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
. zero Re-tighten First Pass .................................................................................................................
..................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Final Pass ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. 110 degrees
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance
.............................................................................................................................. 0.010-0.060 mm
(0.0004-0.0024 in) Crankshaft Main Bearing Bore Diameter
................................................................................................................... 72.867-72.881 mm
(2.8688-2.8693 in)
Main bearing caps
First, inboard bolts (1-8) First pass ......................................................................................................
................................................................................................ 20 Nm (15 lb ft) Second pass .............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... additional 80 degrees
Second, outboard bolts (9-16) First pass ............................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 lb ft) Second pass ...
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................... additional 110 degrees
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2115
Third, short/inner bolts (17-20) First pass ............................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Second pass ...
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................... additional 60 degrees
Fourth, long/outer bolts (21-24) First pass ..........................................................................................
............................................................................................................ 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Second pass .
..............................................................................................................................................................
........................... additional 60 degrees
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Seal
Retainer > Component Information > Service and Repair
Crankshaft Seal Retainer: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement
(See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing
Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/44.
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Removal).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing
Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/91.
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Installation).
2. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and
Repair). 3. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter
............................................................................................................................. 55.992-56.008 mm
(2.2044-2.2050 in) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round
................................................................................................................................................ 0.005
mm (0.0002 in) Connecting Rod Journal Taper
.............................................................................................................................................................
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Connecting Rod Journal Width Production ......................................................
.................................................................................................................................... 22.000 mm
(0.8661 in) Service ..............................................................................................................................
......................................... 21.920-22.080 mm (0.8630-0.8693 in) Crankshaft End Play
......................................................................................................................................................
0.100-0.330 mm (0.0039-0.0130 in) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance
.............................................................................................................................. 0.010-0.060 mm
(0.0004-0.0024 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter
.....................................................................................................................................................
68.000 mm (2.6772 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round
............................................................................................................................................... 0.005
mm (0.0002 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper
............................................................................................................................................................
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Thrust Wall Runout ...................................................
......................................................................................................................... 0.000-0.040 mm
(0.0000-0.0016 in) Square ...................................................................................................................
......................................................... 0.000-0.010 mm (0.0000-0.0004 in) Crankshaft Main Journal
Width, #2, 4 Production .......................................................................................................................
................................................................... 24.000 mm (0.9449 in) Service .......................................
................................................................................................................................ 23.900-24.100
mm (0.9409-0.9488 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Width, #3 Production ..............................................
............................................................................................................................................ 24.400
mm (0.9606 in) Service .......................................................................................................................
................................................ 24.360-24.440 mm (0.9591-0.9622 in) Crankshaft Pilot Bearing Bore
Diameter ................................................................................................................... 20.965-20.995
mm (0.8254-0.8266 in) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout
............................................................................................................................................................
0.025 mm (0.0010 in) Crankshaft Reluctor Ring Runout - Maximum
..................................................................................................................................... 2.000 mm
(0.0787 in) Crankshaft Runout ............................................................................................................
.................................................................... 0.030 mm (0.0012 in) Crankshaft Thrust Bearing
Clearance ............................................................................................................................
0.076-0.305 mm (0.0030-0.0120 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface - Height Diameter
.................................................................................................................................... 95.000 mm
(3.7401 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface Runout
.......................................................................................................................................................
0.040 mm (0.0016 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Replacement
Coolant Heater Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement > Page 2126
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Cord Replacement
Coolant Heater Cord Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft balancer
.................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm (74 lb ft)
plus an additional 150 degrees
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2130
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Balancer Replacement
Special Tools
* EN-38416-2 - Crankshaft Button
* EN-41816 - Crankshaft Balancer Remover
* EN-41998-B - Crankshaft Balancer Installer
* EN-45059 - Angle Meter
* EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 2. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine
Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture). 3.
Remove the starter. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting
System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair)Starter
Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
4. Install the EN-46106 - tool through the starter mounting hole.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2131
5. Using engine support fixture, lower engine approximately two inches. 6. Remove the crankshaft
balancer bolt. Discard the bolt.
7. Install the EN-38416-2 - button in the nose of the crankshaft. 8. Install the EN-41816 - remover in
order to remove the crankshaft balancer. 9. Tighten the center bolt of the EN-41816 - remover in
order to pull the crankshaft balancer off of the crankshaft.
10. Remove the EN-41816 - remover from the crankshaft balancer.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2132
1. The EN-46106 - tool must be installed onto the flywheel. 2. Use the EN-41998-B - installer , nut,
bearing and washer to install the crankshaft balancer.
Note: Do not lubricate the crankshaft front oil seal or crankshaft balancer sealing surfaces. The
crankshaft balancer is installed into a dry seal.
3. Apply lubricant to the inside of the crankshaft balancer hub bore.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2133
4. Place the crankshaft balancer in position on the crankshaft. 5. Thread the EN-41998-B - installer
in the crankshaft. Ensure you engage at least 10 threads of the EN-41998-B - installer before
pressing the
crankshaft balancer in place.
6. Push the crankshaft balancer into position by tightening the nut on the EN-41998-B - installer
until the large washer bottoms out on the crankshaft
end.
7. Remove the EN-41998-B - installer.
Note: Always install a new crankshaft balancer retaining bolt and washer.
8. Install the NEW crankshaft balancer bolt.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Tighten the crankshaft balancer bolt to 100 Nm (74 lb ft) and an additional 150 degrees using the
EN-45059 - meter.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2134
10. Remove the EN-46106 - tool. 11. Install the starter. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See:
Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair)Starter
Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
12. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 13. Remove the engine support fixture. Refer to
Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support
Fixture
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Pistons and Pins Piston Piston Diameter - Measured Over Skirt Coating
........................................................................................................ 88.476-89.014 mm
(3.4833-3.5045 in) Piston Diameter - Service Limit Minimum, w/more than 10k miles
................................................................................................... 88.926 mm (3.5010 in) Piston Pin
Bore Diameter
..........................................................................................................................................
24.007-24.012 mm (0.9452-0.9454 in) Piston Ring Groove Width - First Compression Ring
.................................................................................................... 1.220-1.240 mm (0.0480-0.0488 in)
Piston Ring Groove Width - Second Compression Ring
............................................................................................... 1.510-1.530 mm (0.0595-0.0602 in)
Piston Ring Groove Width - Oil Control Ring
............................................................................................................... 2.510-2.530 mm
(0.0988-0.0996 in) Piston to Bore Clearance - Production; Measured at Skirt Coating
............................................................................... 0.022-0.032 mm (0.0008-0.0013 in) Piston to
Bore Clearance - Service Limit Maximum, w/more than 10k miles
...................................................................................... 0.650 mm (0.0256 in) Pin Piston Pin
Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Production
.......................................................................................... 0.007-0.024 mm (0.0003-0.0010 in)
Piston Pin Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Service Maximum
..................................................................................................... 0.030 mm (0.0012 in) Piston Pin
Clearance to Piston Pin Bore - Production
................................................................................................... 0.007-0.015 mm (0.0003-0.0006 in)
Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore - Service Maximum
.............................................................................................................. 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) Piston
Pin Diameter
...................................................................................................................................................
23.997-24.000 mm (0.9448-0.9449 in) Piston Pin Length
...........................................................................................................................................................
60.60-61.10 mm (2.3858-2.4055 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Rings
Piston Ring End Gap First Compression Ring - Nominal
................................................................................................................................ 0.150-0.300 mm
(0.0059-0.0118 in) First Compression Ring - Maximum, Ring in Bore
.............................................................................................................................. 0.350 mm (0.1378
in) Second Compression Ring - Nominal
............................................................................................................................ 0.280-0.480 mm
(0.0110-0.0189 in) Second Compression Ring - Maximum, Ring in Bore
.......................................................................................................................... 0.450 mm (0.0177 in)
Oil Control Ring
............................................................................................................................................................
0.150-0.600 mm (0.0059-0.0236 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance First Compression Ring
.................................................................................................................................................
0.030-0.065 mm (0.0012-0.0026 in) Second Compression Ring
.............................................................................................................................................
0.015-0.060 mm (0.0006-0.0024 in) Oil Control Ring
............................................................................................................................................................
0.030-0.170 mm (0.0012-0.0669 in) Piston Ring Thickness First Compression Ring
.................................................................................................................................................
1.175-1.190 mm (0.0463-0.0469 in) Second Compression Ring
.............................................................................................................................................
1.470-1.495 mm (0.0579-0.0589 in) Oil Control Ring
............................................................................................................................................................
2.360-2.480 mm (0.0929-0.0976 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See:
Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side).
2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or
replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and
Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2149
1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side
(See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft
Replacement - Left Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2150
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side
Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See:
Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side).
2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or
replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and
Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection).
4. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve
Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection)
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2151
1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side
(See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side
Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1)
Special Tools
EN-46101 - Spark Plug Tube Seal Guide
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2).
2. Disconnect and remove the engine harness from the camshaft cover. 3. Remove the intake
manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake
Manifold Replacement).
4. Remove the left camshaft cover bolts. 5. Remove the left camshaft cover from the left cylinder
head. 6. Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft
Cover Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/79. Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2156
7. Install the EN-46101 - guide onto the spark plug tubes of the left cylinder head.
Installation Procedure
1. Install new camshaft cover bolt grommets prior to installing the camshaft cover bolts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2157
2. Place a bead 8 mm (0.3150 in) in diameter by 4 mm (0.1575 in) in height of RTV sealant
equivalent, on the engine front cover split lines (1).
3. Place the left camshaft cover into position onto the left cylinder head.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2158
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Loosely install the left camshaft cover bolts.
5. Tighten the left camshaft cover bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Connect and
install the engine harness to the camshaft cover. 7. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake
Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2159
8. Remove the EN-46101 - guide from the spark plug tubes of the left cylinder head. 9. Install the
ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2160
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side
Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1)
Special Tools
EN-46101 - Spark Plug Tube Seal Guide
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools)
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1)
2. Disconnect and remove the engine harness from the camshaft cover.
3. Remove the right camshaft cover bolts. 4. Remove the right camshaft cover from the right
cylinder head. 5. Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and the camshaft cover. Refer to
Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/79. Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2161
6. Install the EN-46101 - guide onto the spark plug tubes of the right cylinder head.
Installation Procedure
1. Install new camshaft cover bolt grommets prior to installing the camshaft cover bolts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2162
2. Place a bead 8 mm (0.3150 in) in diameter by 4 mm (0.1575 in) in height of RTV sealant, on the
engine front cover split lines (1).
3. Place the right camshaft cover into position onto the right cylinder head.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2163
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution)
4. Loosely install the right camshaft cover bolts.
5. Tighten the right camshaft cover bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Connect
and install the engine harness to the camshaft cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2164
7. Remove the EN-46101 - guide from the spark plug tubes of the right cylinder head. 8. Install the
ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side
Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side
Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side
Special Tools
* EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
* EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool
* EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor
* EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker
Arm Replacement - Left Side).
2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and
Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates,
disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required.
3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from
the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark
Plug/Service and Repair).
5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a
compressed air source.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2169
7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the
EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
9. Remove the valve keepers.
10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2170
12. Remove the valve spring.
13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2171
1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seal (2).
2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2172
4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown.
Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the
EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install
the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm
Replacement - Left Side).
11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 12. Install the starter
motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter
Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2173
Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side
Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side
Special Tools
* EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
* EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool
* EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor
* EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Rocker
Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker
Arm Replacement - Right Side).
2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and
Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates,
disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required.
3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from
the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark
Plug/Service and Repair).
5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a
compressed air source.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2174
7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the
EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
9. Remove the valve keepers.
10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2175
12. Remove the valve spring.
13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2176
1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seals (2).
2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2177
4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown.
Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the
EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install
the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker
Arm Replacement - Right Side).
11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool. 12. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF)
(See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine
- Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006
Date: July 26, 2010
Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment
and/or Replace Drive Belt)
Models:
2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped
with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010
Condition
Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise.
Cause
This condition may be caused by any of the following:
- One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged.
- The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS
pump.
- The drive belt may need to be replaced.
Correction
1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists.
‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does
not apply.
2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer
to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine
Diagnosis in SI.
‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a
condition, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure.
4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT
side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser
Alignment Tool in SI.
‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt.
Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine
- Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 2187
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006
Date: July 26, 2010
Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment
and/or Replace Drive Belt)
Models:
2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped
with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010
Condition
Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise.
Cause
This condition may be caused by any of the following:
- One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged.
- The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS
pump.
- The drive belt may need to be replaced.
Correction
1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists.
‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does
not apply.
2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer
to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine
Diagnosis in SI.
‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a
condition, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure.
4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT
side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser
Alignment Tool in SI.
‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt.
Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 2193
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A
Date: July 27, 2009
Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of
Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine).
Background
Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be
very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges
from $160 - $200.
EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser
tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the
guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from:
- Drive Belt Noise
- Accelerated Drive Belt Wear
- Drive Belt Slippage
Instructions
The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These
instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal
instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt.
Caution
- Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser.
- Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses
help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances.
- Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to
protect eyes from direct laser exposure.
1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2198
2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system.
3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves
of the pulley, farthest from the front of the
engine.
4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool.
5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the
tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light
beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley
alignment.
- If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly.
- If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the
position of the power steering pulley as required.
- Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures.
9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation.
10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present.
Tool Information
Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2199
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A
Date: July 27, 2009
Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of
Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine).
Background
Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be
very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges
from $160 - $200.
EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt
The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser
tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the
guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from:
- Drive Belt Noise
- Accelerated Drive Belt Wear
- Drive Belt Slippage
Instructions
The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These
instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal
instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt.
Caution
- Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser.
- Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses
help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances.
- Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to
protect eyes from direct laser exposure.
1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2205
2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system.
3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves
of the pulley, farthest from the front of the
engine.
4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool.
5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the
tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light
beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley
alignment.
- If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly.
- If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the
position of the power steering pulley as required.
- Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures.
9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation.
10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present.
Tool Information
Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: >
08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2206
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2207
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2208
Drive Belt: Service Precautions
Belt Dressing Caution
Caution: Do not use belt dressing on the drive belt. Belt dressing causes the breakdown of the
composition of the drive belt. Failure to follow this recommendation will damage the drive belt.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2209
Drive Belt: Description and Operation
Drive Belt System Description
The drive belt system consists of the following components:
* The drive belt
* The drive belt tensioner
* The drive belt idler pulley
* The crankshaft balancer pulley
* The accessory drive component mounting brackets
* The accessory drive components
- The power steering pump, if belt driven
- The generator
- The A/C compressor, if equipped
- The engine cooling fan, if belt driven
- The water pump, if belt driven
- The vacuum pump, if equipped
- The air compressor, if equipped
The drive belt system may use 1 belt or 2 belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards
and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. The drive belts are made of different
types of rubbers, chloroprene or EPDM, and have different layers or plys containing either fiber
cloth or cords for reinforcement.
Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When
the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth.
The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component
pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent
the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the
drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft.
The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys.
Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is
not equipped with the accessory.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis
Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis
Diagnostic Aids
* A chirping or squeal noise may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belts or the pulleys. It
may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belts in order to duplicate the
customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt
pulleys may be the probable solution.
* If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making
sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering
system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect.
* A chirping, squeal or whine noise may be caused by a loose or improper installation of a body or
suspension component. Other items of the vehicle may also cause the noise.
* The drive belts will not cause a whine noise.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be
engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making
the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise.
Removing the drive belts one at a time and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the
noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be
operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the
drive belts removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it
can be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of
the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect
installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a
previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two
or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the
proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the
possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for
being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent
the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a
pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. This test is to verify that the
drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper
belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal
noise. 15. This test is to verify that the drive belt is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt
tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be
routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 16.
Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive
component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward
or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley
grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive
component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 17. This test is to verify that the
pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes.
19. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a
temporary repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page
2212
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page
2213
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page
2214
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis
Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis
Diagnostic Aids
The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Vibration from the engine
operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise.
Vibration can be caused by, but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering
system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an
intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components.
The drive belt may have a rumbling condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the
drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom.
If replacing the drive belt, completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the
drive belts are installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the
load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is
causing the rumbling noise.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that
the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar
symptom. 3. This test is to verify that one of the drive belts is causing the rumbling noise or
vibration. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the
description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When
removing the drive belts the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also
DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspecting the drive
belts is to ensure that they are not causing the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt
will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be
seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal
condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface
for proper operation. 9. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that the wrong bolt,
nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 11. This step should only be performed if the water pump is
driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump
bearings for smooth operation and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good
water pump. 12. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put
extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page
2215
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page
2216
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis
Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis
Diagnostic Aids
If the drive belt repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment.
An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the
drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly.
If the drive belt is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on
the drive belt.
Excessive wear on a drive belt is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt
for the application.
Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause
the drive belt to make a noise or to fall off.
Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the
drive belt fall off.
Test Description
The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify
the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off.
The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for
cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be
caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the
accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair.
Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys.
If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation
procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a
dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all
of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to
drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked will let the drive
belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut ,
spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley
misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause
misalignment of the accessory component bracket. 13. The inspection is to verify the drive belt is
correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt may be caused by
mis-positioning the drive belt by one groove on a pulley. 14. The installation of a drive belt that is
two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the
grooves on all of the pulleys. 15. This inspection is to verify the drive belt is not contacting any
parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance
when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt should not come in
contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page
2217
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2218
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Drive Belt Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection
Drive Belt Tensioner Diagnosis
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2222
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection
Engine Mount Inspection
Note: Before replacing any engine mount due to suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the
fluid is the engine mount, not the engine or accessories.
1. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture). 2. Observe the engine mount while
raising the engine. Raising the engine removes the weight from the engine mount and creates
slight tension on the
rubber.
3. Replace the engine mount if the engine mount exhibits any of the following conditions:
* The hard rubber is covered with heat check cracks.
* The rubber is separated from the metal plate of the engine mount.
* The rubber is split through the center of the engine mount.
* The engine mount itself is leaking fluid.
4. For engine mount replacement. Refer to Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Right Side
Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount - Right Side
Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Right Side > Page 2228
Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Side
Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the drive belt idler pulley bolt. 3. Remove the drive belt idler pulley.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the drive belt idler pulley.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2232
2. Install the drive belt idler pulley bolt and tighten to
58 Nm (43 lb ft).
3. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure - Minimum @ Idle ...........................................................................................................
.......................................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) Oil Pressure - Minimum @ 2,000 RPM
....................................................................................................................................................... 138
kPa (20 psi)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2237
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing
Special Tools
* EN-47971 - Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter
* CH 48027 - Pressure Gauge
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
1. With the vehicle on a level surface, run the vehicle for a few minutes, allow adequate drain down
time, 2-3 minutes, and measure the oil level. 2. If required, add the recommended grade engine oil
and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures full on the oil level indicator. 3. Run the engine
briefly, 10-15 seconds, and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle gauge or light. 4. Listen for a
noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 5. Inspect for the following conditions:
* Oil diluted by water or glycol antifreeze
* Foamy oil
6. Remove the oil filter.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2238
Caution: Special new tool EN 47971 must be used. Due to the special size and thread pitch of the
oil filter adapter fitting ensure the proper tool is used or component damage will result.
7. Install the EN-47971 - adapter onto the oil filter adapter.
8. Install the 1/8 NPT fitting from the CH 48027 - gauge into the port on the EN-47971 - adapter.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2239
9. Install the CH 48027 - gauge flexible hose to the EN-47971 - adapter.
10. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure. 11. Compare the readings to Engine
Mechanical Specifications (LF1) (See: Specifications/Service Limits & General Specifications). 12.
If the engine oil pressure is below specifications, inspect the engine for 1 or more of the following
conditions:
* Oil pump worn or dirty. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Oil Pump/Service and Repair) , Oil
Pump Disassemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/66. Oil Pump Disassemble) and Oil Pump
Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/67. Oil Pump Cleaning and
Inspection).
* Oil pump-to-engine block bolts loose. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Oil Pump/Service
and Repair).
* Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen
Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection).
* Oil pump screen O-ring seal missing or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen
Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection).
* Oil pump pressure relief valve malfunction. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Oil
Pump/Service and Repair).
* Engine bearing clearance excessive. Refer to Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/49. Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection) ,
Crankshaft and Bearing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/89. Crankshaft and Bearing
Installation) and Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/90. Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation).
* Cracked, porous, or restricted oil galleries.
* Oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed. Refer to Engine Block Assemble (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/88. Engine Block Assemble) and Cylinder Head Assemble (LF1 or LFW)
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/61. Cylinder Head Assemble).
* Valve lifters broken. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side (See:
Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter
Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side) and
Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning
and Inspection).
Caution: This engine uses a special high performance oil filter. Use of any other filter may lead to
filter failure and/or severe engine damage.
13. If the oil pressure reading on the CH 48027 - gauge , or equivalent, is within specifications,
inspect for the following conditions:
* Plugged or incorrect oil filter and/or malfunctioning oil bypass valve. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil
Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair).
* Malfunctioning oil pressure gauge or sensor. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) ( See: Oil Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip
Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Oil Level Indicator Tube Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold
Cover Replacement)
2. Remove the oil level indicator tube bracket bolt (1). 3. Remove the oil level indicator and tube (2)
by sliding the tube out from the lower crankcase hole.
4. Remove and discard the O-ring from the oil level indicator tube if damaged.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip
Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2243
1. Install a NEW O-ring on the oil level indicator tube.
2. Install the oil level indicator and tube (2) by sliding the tube down through the lower crankcase
hole.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the oil level indicator tube bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Install the
intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover
Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001
Date: March 14, 2011
Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for
Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or
Complete Oil Change
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with
Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines
GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website
Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different
licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com
GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons
The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC.
Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the
demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM)
specification.
Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos
1(TM) engine oil.
GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification
Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General
Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The
oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains
acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be
used in those older vehicles.
In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine
oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil
specification are as follows:
- To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions.
- To promote long engine life.
- To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the
industry's overall dependence on crude oil.
dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the
following benefits:
- Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE)
requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits
throughout the life of the oil.
- More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2248
- Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life
has been depleted.
- Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil
specifications.
International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
GF-5 Standard
In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010.
- There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4
standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos
1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a
statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for
GF-4.
- It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard.
However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification.
- Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API
will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified
products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils.
Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy
Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than
doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed
CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet
these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than
ever before.
New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel
economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM).
The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when
determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy.
However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and
exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil.
Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower
viscosity oils.
dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs:
SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30.
Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the
Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being
serviced.
GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals
To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the
GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000
mile (4,830 km) recommendation.
The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the
GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle.
If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended,
GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually.
GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website
Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different
licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com
GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2249
The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC.
Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the
demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos
(TM)specification.
Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos
2(TM) engine oil.
GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification
- dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010
vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured.
- dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines.
Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting
specification CJ-4.
- dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and
replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025.
- dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on
certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction
systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum
performance longer.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................
............................................... 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2252
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for three things:
1. Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M.
2. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You
should look for this information on the oil container
3. All temperatures above -20°F (-29°C) SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-40,
SAE 20W-50, or any other viscosity grade not recommended.
NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the
American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES / ENGINE OIL FLUSHES Do not add anything to your oil. The
recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will
need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2253
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug.
3. Remove the oil pan drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning).
5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain
completely.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2254
1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22
lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See:
Maintenance/Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-003A
Date: June 30, 2010
Subject: Diagnostic Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement
Models:
2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005-2008 Buick LaCrosse, Allure (Canada Only) 2008-2010 Buick
Enclave 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Malibu
2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac G6
2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Saturn AURA 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009
Saturn VUE Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT or LY7) 6 Cylinder Engine
Attention: Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always
utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when
replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand
parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install
are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage.
Some aftermarket oil filters share the outside dimension of Factory Equipment and AC Delco
service replacement filters. Though they look the same, these filters do not meet GM specification
and function requirements. In recent warranty engine teardown reviews, it has been found that
aftermarket filters have caused internal engine failures and/or noise due to the lack of lubrication.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and add additional pictures to help
aid diagnosis. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-003 (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion).
Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is
not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R)
oil filters directly from General Motors Customer Care and Aftersales (GMCC&A;).
This condition may be caused by aftermarket oil filter internal failure. Filter debris can be
transferred throughout the engine this way.
Important Aftermarket oil filter failure is not covered by GM Powertrain warranty.
The following information is being communicated to aid the technician in proper diagnostics.
Engine Ticking Noise in Valve Train
First, the location of the tick must be determined (exhaust or intake, front or rear engine bank).
Using a suitable listening device such as chassis ears and/or a stethoscope, determine the location
of the ticking noise.
1. Does the noise only come from one bank location (intake or exhaust lifters area)? 2. If the noise
is in the one bank location, then the oil galley lubrication hole may be obstructed with foreign
material.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page
2259
3. When the location is determined, the technician should remove the valve cover and inspect the
lifters for aeration. Remove the stationary hydraulic
lifter assemblies (SHLA) for the suspect location / cylinder. For Example; Bank 2 Cylinder # 1 A & B
exhaust lifters are making noise. Inspect the lifters for the presence of oil. If oil is present, SHLA will
be pumped and hard to compress. If aeration is present, the lifter will be spongy. Test by trying to
compress with your fingers or a suitable tool.
4. Spongy SHLA (lifters) mean aeration and obstruction to flow oil to SHLA is present. Reference
the oil lubrication description document in SI for
details of system operation.
5. (A) Bank 1 (2, 4, 6) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator
(Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley
for Lifters.
(B) Bank 2 ( 1, 3, 5) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator
(Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley for Lifters. An obstruction to oil flow is present
at the engine block deck passage under the head gasket for lifter oil pressure. The passage is the
location in the front engine block deck. The oiling passage can be identified as a hole with eye
brows cut to each side. See figures above.
6. One example of obstruction is shown above. Filter media material plugging the 2 mm lubrication
passage hole creating aeration in the exhaust
lifter oil galley. The obstruction can be filter media material or an orange silicone rubber material.
The above example is filter media.
7. Engine oil passages will have to be cleaned of aftermarket filter media debris or orange silicone
rubber.
Engine Knocking / Piston Skirt Knock-Topic 2
1. Follow the procedures in SI for the source of a knock condition. Additional diagnosis is required
by removal of the oil pan for main and rod
bearing inspection. Further inspection for the source of bearing failure is required. Recent failed
engine analysis reviews reveal the bearings are
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page
2260
not removed and oil passages are not being checked in many cases. Technicians need to inspect
for oil galley obtrusion, which is a source for oil starvation and bearing life in some cases.
2. One source for oil starvation is due to aftermarket oil filter anti-drain back valves deterioration.
Orange silicone rubber material has been found in
many cases of oil starvation underneath the main and rod bearings, with material contained in the
oil lubrication galley in both blocks and crankshaft lubrication holes. The orange silicone rubber is
from aftermarket oil filters anti drain back valve assembly, which is located under the filter media
and above the screw on the base. Orange silicone rubber is not used in the assembly of the High
Feature V6 as well as most GM engine applications. Examples are below.
Rod bearing welded to crankshaft (1).
Orange silicone rubber obstructing the oil flow to the main and rod bearings in the engine block
webbing (1).
Silicone rubber found in main and rod bearing and in the piston skirt squirters (sprayers) (1).
Sprayer is removed to show obstruction material.
3. Such related failures as shown in the examples above are not considered to be warranty by
General Motors.
Example of Aftermarket Filter Failures
First do a general inspection for possible source. With the metal can cut off, you can see detail of
media failure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page
2261
This is an oil filter that is teardown. The left (1) shows a part removed from a failed engine oil main
bearing gallery. The right one (2) is a new seal removed from a new aftermarket filter. This is what
a drainback valve looks like prior to failure.
Conclusion
Repair as necessary to remove filter media/debris from oil galleys and piston squirter sprayer in the
cylinder head. Repair and/or replace damaged engine components as necessary.
GM Powertrain engines require oil filters that can meet the challenges of today oil filtration
systems, engine oil pressure requirements (both hot and cold) and Oil Life Monitoring systems.
Improper oil filter usage may result in catastrophic engine damage or failure that is not covered by
the GM Powertrain warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page
2262
Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B
Date: July 27, 2009
Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement
Models:
2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3
2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is
not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R)
oil filters directly from GMSPO.
Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the
most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil
filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been
discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a
trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage.
Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil
filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the
diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise
or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report).
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2263
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug.
3. Remove the oil pan drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning).
5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain
completely.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2264
1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22
lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See:
Maintenance/Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair
Oil Filter Adapter Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil pan
8 mm bolts (1-11) ................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) 6 mm bolts (12, 13) ..........................................
........................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2271
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
Oil Pan Replacement
Special Tools
EN-46109 - Guide Pin Set
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter.
Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair). 3.
Remove the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See:
Exhaust System/Catalytic Converter/Service
and Repair/Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side).
4. Remove the air conditioning (A/C) compressor bolts and reposition. Refer to Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement (LAF) (See: Heating
and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement)Air
Conditioning Compressor Replacement (LF1) (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement).
5. Remove the front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 6. Remove the oil pan to transmission bolts.
7. Remove the oil pan bolts. 8. Remove the oil pan. 9. Clean the oil pan and the engine block
gasket surface. Refer to Oil Pan Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/72.
Oil Pan
Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2272
1. Install the 8 mm (0.315 in) guides from the EN-46109 - set into the center oil pan rail bolt hole on
each side of the engine block.
2. Place a 3 mm (0.118 in) bead (1) of RTV sealant , on the block pan rail and the crankshaft rear
oil seal housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2273
3. Position the oil pan onto the block.
4. Remove the EN-46109 - set 8 mm (0.315 in) guides from the engine block.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2274
5. Loosely install the oil pan bolts.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
6. Tighten the oil pan bolts in sequence.
* The 8 mm bolts (1-11) to 23 Nm (17 lb ft).
* The 6 mm bolts (12, 13) to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
7. Install engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 8. Install the air conditioning (A/C) compressor.
Refer to Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement (LAF) (See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement)Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement (LF1) (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement).
9. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See:
Exhaust System/Catalytic Converter/Service and
Repair/Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side).
10. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2275
11. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine
Oil/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2280
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2281
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2282
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2283
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair
Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the oil pan scraper bolts. 3. Remove the oil pan scraper.
4. Remove the oil suction pipe bolts. 5. Remove the oil suction pipe.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2287
6. Remove the oil suction tube seal from the oil suction tube. Discard the oil suction tube seal.
Installation Procedure
1. Install a NEW oil suction tube seal onto the oil suction tube. DO NOT reuse the old oil suction
tube seal.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2288
2. Install the oil suction pipe.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the oil suction pipe bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
4. Install the oil pan scraper. 5. Install the oil pan scraper bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6.
Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine
Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure - Minimum @ Idle ...........................................................................................................
.......................................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) Oil Pressure - Minimum @ 2,000 RPM
....................................................................................................................................................... 138
kPa (20 psi)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine
Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2293
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing
Special Tools
* EN-47971 - Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter
* CH 48027 - Pressure Gauge
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
1. With the vehicle on a level surface, run the vehicle for a few minutes, allow adequate drain down
time, 2-3 minutes, and measure the oil level. 2. If required, add the recommended grade engine oil
and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures full on the oil level indicator. 3. Run the engine
briefly, 10-15 seconds, and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle gauge or light. 4. Listen for a
noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 5. Inspect for the following conditions:
* Oil diluted by water or glycol antifreeze
* Foamy oil
6. Remove the oil filter.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine
Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2294
Caution: Special new tool EN 47971 must be used. Due to the special size and thread pitch of the
oil filter adapter fitting ensure the proper tool is used or component damage will result.
7. Install the EN-47971 - adapter onto the oil filter adapter.
8. Install the 1/8 NPT fitting from the CH 48027 - gauge into the port on the EN-47971 - adapter.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine
Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2295
9. Install the CH 48027 - gauge flexible hose to the EN-47971 - adapter.
10. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure. 11. Compare the readings to Engine
Mechanical Specifications (LF1) (See: Specifications/Service Limits & General Specifications). 12.
If the engine oil pressure is below specifications, inspect the engine for 1 or more of the following
conditions:
* Oil pump worn or dirty. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Service and Repair) , Oil Pump
Disassemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/66. Oil Pump Disassemble) and Oil Pump
Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/67. Oil Pump Cleaning and
Inspection).
* Oil pump-to-engine block bolts loose. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Service and Repair).
* Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen
Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection).
* Oil pump screen O-ring seal missing or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen
Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe
and Screen Cleaning and Inspection).
* Oil pump pressure relief valve malfunction. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Service and
Repair).
* Engine bearing clearance excessive. Refer to Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/49. Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection) ,
Crankshaft and Bearing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/89. Crankshaft and Bearing
Installation) and Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/90. Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation).
* Cracked, porous, or restricted oil galleries.
* Oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed. Refer to Engine Block Assemble (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/88. Engine Block Assemble) and Cylinder Head Assemble (LF1 or LFW)
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/61. Cylinder Head Assemble).
* Valve lifters broken. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side (See:
Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter
Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side) and
Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning
and Inspection).
Caution: This engine uses a special high performance oil filter. Use of any other filter may lead to
filter failure and/or severe engine damage.
13. If the oil pressure reading on the CH 48027 - gauge , or equivalent, is within specifications,
inspect for the following conditions:
* Plugged or incorrect oil filter and/or malfunctioning oil bypass valve. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil
Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair).
* Malfunctioning oil pressure gauge or sensor. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) ( See: Oil Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement
Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C
Date: February 03, 2010
Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage
Models:
2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3
2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine).
When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring
the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result
in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken
pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the
engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the
valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently
bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the
cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold
should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum
configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning
difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake
manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in
the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause
damage or potential failure of the new service engine.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2300
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Intake manifold
First pass .............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) Second pass ....................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
(17 lb ft)
Throttle body ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................... 10 Nm (89 in lb)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement
Intake Manifold Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir upper bracket only. 2. Remove the power brake
booster vacuum check valve and hose. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and
Hose Replacement
(2.4L) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and
Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the coolant air bleed pipe. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1)
(See: Cooling System/Coolant Line/Hose/Service
and Repair).
4. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake
Manifold Cover Replacement).
5. Disconnect and remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube (1) from the intake
manifold and right camshaft cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2303
6. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) hose from the intake manifold and EVAP solenoid. 7.
Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement).
8. Unclip wire harnesses as necessary.
9. Remove the intake manifold bolts (1).
10. Remove the intake manifold assembly (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2304
11. Remove and discard the intake manifold gasket (1). 12. To clean the intake manifold, refer to
Intake Manifold Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/82.
Intake
Manifold Cleaning and Inspection).
13. To disassemble the intake manifold, refer to Intake Manifold Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/81. Intake Manifold
Disassemble).
Installation Procedure
1. Assemble the intake manifold if needed. Refer to Intake Manifold Assemble (LF1 or LFW) (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/83. Intake
Manifold Assemble).
2. Install the NEW intake manifold gasket (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2305
3. Install the intake manifold assembly (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the intake manifold bolts (1).
5. Tighten the intake manifold bolts in the sequence shown. 6. Tighten the intake manifold bolts in
sequence to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 7. Tighten the intake manifold bolts a second pass in sequence to 23
Nm (17 lb ft). 8. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2306
9. Connect the EVAP hose to the upper intake manifold and EVAP solenoid.
10. Connect the PCV tube assembly (1) to the upper intake manifold and the right camshaft cover.
11. Install coolant hose. 12. Install intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover
Replacement (See: Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 13. Install the coolant air bleed pipe.
Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling System/Coolant
Line/Hose/Service
and Repair).
14. Install the power steering fluid reservoir upper bracket. 15. Install the power brake booster
vacuum check valve and hose. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose
Replacement (2.4L)
(See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair)Power
Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2307
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Cover Replacement
Intake Manifold Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main
Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement
(See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing
Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/44.
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Removal).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing
Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/91.
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Installation).
2. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and
Repair). 3. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools
EN-29184 - Oil Seal Installer
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to remove the crankshaft oil seal.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2315
Note: Do not lubricate the crankshaft front oil seal or the crankshaft balancer sealing surfaces.
1. Use the EN-29184 - installer or equivalent to install the crankshaft front oil seal. 2. Install the
crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block
Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left
Side
Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side
Special Tools
* EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
* EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool
* EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor
* EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft,
Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side).
2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and
Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates,
disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required.
3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from
the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark
Plug/Service and Repair).
5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a
compressed air source.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2320
7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the
EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
9. Remove the valve keepers.
10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2321
12. Remove the valve spring.
13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2322
1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seal (2).
2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2323
4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown.
Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the
EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install
the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft,
Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side).
11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 12. Install the starter
motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter
Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2324
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right
Side
Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side
Special Tools
* EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
* EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool
* EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor
* EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft,
Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side).
2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and
Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates,
disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required.
3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from
the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark
Plug/Service and Repair).
5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a
compressed air source.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2325
7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the
EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
9. Remove the valve keepers.
10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2326
12. Remove the valve spring.
13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2327
1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seals (2).
2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page
2328
4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown.
Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2).
5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the
EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install
the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft,
Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm
Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side).
11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool. 12. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF)
(See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair
)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2334
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2335
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2336
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2337
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft position actuator ..................................................................................................................
......................................................... 58 Nm (43 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement
Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side).
4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side).
5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right
Side).
6. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal).
7. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain upper guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Removal - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper).
8. Remove the primary camshaft timing chain.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2346
1. Install the primary camshaft timing chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation).
2. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Installation - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper).
3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation).
4. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side).
5. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side).
6. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side).
7. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
8. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2347
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement Left Side
Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side).
4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side).
5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right
Side).
6. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal).
7. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Removal - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper).
8. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/20.
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal).
9. Remove the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/21. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side).
10. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side).
11. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/23. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side).
12. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/24. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Left Side).
13. Remove the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Removal - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/26. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Left Side).
14. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/110. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left
Side)
15. Clean and inspect all of the camshaft timing drive components. Refer to Camshaft Timing Drive
Components Cleaning and Inspection (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/65. Camshaft Timing Drive Components Cleaning and Inspection).
Replace components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2348
1. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. 2. Install the left bank camshaft intermediate
drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/109. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side).
3. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/111. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side).
4. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/112. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side).
5. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side).
6. Install the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/114. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side).
7. Install the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation).
8. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Installation - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper).
9. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation).
10. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side).
11. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side).
12. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side).
13. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
14. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2349
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement Right Side
Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side).
4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side).
5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain.
Installation Procedure
1. Ensure the stage 1 camshaft timing is correct. Refer to Setting Camshaft Timing (See: Service
and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2350
2. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side)
3. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side).
4. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side).
5. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
6. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower
Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement (See: Timing
Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair/Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner
Replacement).
2. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide bolts. 3. Remove the primary camshaft
drive chain lower guide.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2355
1. Position the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide to the oil pump.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide bolts and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 3.
Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Replacement (See: Timing
Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair/Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner
Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2356
Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Upper
Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Upper
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement (See: Timing
Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair/Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner
Replacement).
3. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Removal - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Removal - Lower (See: Service and
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2357
Repair/Overhaul/19. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Lower).
2. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation).
3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2358
Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Left Side
Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side).
3. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/111. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2359
2. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side).
3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2360
Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Right Side
Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the spark plugs in order to ease crankshaft/engine rotation. Refer to Spark Plug
Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2361
1. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side).
2. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 4. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See:
Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side
Timing Chain Idler Gear: Service and Repair Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side
Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side).
4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side).
5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right
Side).
6. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal).
7. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Removal - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper).
8. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/20.
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal).
9. Remove the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/21. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2366
10. If you are servicing the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler, perform the following
steps:
1. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side).
2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/23. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side).
3. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/24. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Left Side).
4. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/25. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Left
Side).
5. Remove the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Removal - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/26. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Left Side).
Installation Procedure
1. If you are servicing the left bank idler sprocket, perform the following steps:
1. Install the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket
Installation - Left Side (See: Service and
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2367
Repair/Overhaul/109. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side).
2. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Installation - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/110. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left
Side).
3. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Left Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/111. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side).
4. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/112. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side).
5. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side).
2. Install the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/114. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side).
3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation).
4. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Installation - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper).
5. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation).
6. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side).
7. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side).
8. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side).
9. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
10. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2368
Timing Chain Idler Gear: Service and Repair Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Right
Side
Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the spark plugs in order to ease crankshaft/engine rotation.
Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side).
5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side).
6. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right
Side).
7. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal).
8. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Removal - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper).
9. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/20.
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal).
10. Remove the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Removal - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/21. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side).
Installation Procedure
1. Ensure stage 1 camshaft timing is correct. Refer to Setting Camshaft Timing (See: Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2369
2. Install the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler
Sprocket Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/114. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side).
3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation).
4. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide
Installation - Upper (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper).
5. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation).
6. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side).
7. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side).
8. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side).
9. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
10. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 11. Install the engine front cover. Refer to
Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Camshaft drive chain tensioner
First Pass .............................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 5 Nm (44 lb in) Final Pass ........................................................
............................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm
(18 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Tensioner Replacement
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Note: If the entire camshaft timing system is not in Stage 2, Timing Chain Alignment Diagram (See:
Timing Component Alignment Marks/Locations) , mark the timing chain and sprockets in order to
ensure proper reassembly.
2. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate
Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2375
1. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation).
2. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2376
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Tensioner Replacement - Left Side
Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side).
2. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2377
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain
Tensioner Replacement - Right Side
Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
2. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2378
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe
Replacement - Left Side
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side).
3. Remove the secondary shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left
Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/23.
Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the secondary shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left
Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/112.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2379
Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side).
2. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain
Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side).
3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2380
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe
Replacement - Right Side
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe Replacement - Right Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner.
Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side).
3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft
Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive
Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement >
Page 2381
2. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing
Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side).
3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing
Cover/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component
Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations
Timing Chain Alignment Diagram
Camshaft Position Actuator Timing Marks
1 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 2 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator
Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 3 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark
- Circle 4 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 5 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator
Identifier 6 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 7 - Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark - Circle
Stage One
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component
Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 2385
1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive
Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left
Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for
the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window for the Left Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 12 - Primary
Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft Sprocket Timing
Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 16
- Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark
Stage Two
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component
Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 2386
1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive
Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left
Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for
the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left
Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive
Chain 12 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft
Sprocket Timing Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket 16 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket
Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 18 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive
Chain Sprocket Timing Mark/Window for the Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 19 -
Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 20 - Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 21 - Right
Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle 22 - Right Exhaust Secondary
Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 23 - Right Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive
Chain Timing Link
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component
Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 2387
24 - Right Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Engine front cover
Engine front cover bolts in the number (25) location are model dependent and may not apply
First pass bolts (1-23) ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................... 20 Nm (14 lb ft) Second pass bolts (1-23) .................................
............................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm
(14 lb ft) Third pass bolts (1-23) ..........................................................................................................
............................................................... additional 60 degrees Bolts (24) ..........................................
...........................................................................................................................................................
15 Nm (11 lb ft) Bolts (25) ...................................................................................................................
.................................................................................. 65 Nm (48 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2391
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover Replacement
Special Tools
EN-46109 - Engine Front Cover Installation Guide Pins
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the camshaft covers. Refer
to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve
Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side) and Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side
(LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover
Replacement - Right Side).
3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
4. Disconnect the purge vent hose from the water outlet. 5. Remove the water outlet with the
radiator hose and reposition aside. Refer to Water Outlet Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling
System/Coolant
Outlet/Service and Repair).
6. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft
Pulley/Service and Repair).
7. Remove the camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank
2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position
Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position
Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust)
and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
8. Remove the generator. Refer to Generator Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and
Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair
)Generator Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service
and Repair).
9. Remove the water pump pulley only.
10. Remove the drive belt tensioner. Refer to Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement (See: Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt
Tensioner/Service and Repair).
11. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid valves from the front cover. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service
and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Intake) , and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Exhaust).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2392
Note: There are a total of 22 M8 bolts that must be removed and 3 optional M12 bolts that may
need to be removed before the front cover will separate from the engine block.
12. Remove the engine front cover with the water pump. Refer to Engine Front Cover Removal
(See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/12. Engine Front
Cover Removal).
13. Disassemble the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Disassemble (See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/75. Engine Front Cover
Disassemble).
Note: Do NOT use sharp and/or metal gasket scrapers in order to clean the sealing surfaces.
14. Carefully clean the engine front cover sealing surfaces. Refer to Engine Front Cover Cleaning
and Inspection (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/76. Engine Front Cover Cleaning and Inspection).
Note: Insert a piece of cardboard between the oil pan front and the oil pump in order to prevent any
contaminants from falling into the oil pan.
15. Carefully clean the engine front cover sealing surfaces. Refer to Engine Front Cover Cleaning
and Inspection (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/76. Engine Front Cover Cleaning and Inspection).
16. Use compressed air in order to remove any engine coolant from the engine cooling passages
and from the top of the oil pan scraper (windage tray).
Installation Procedure
1. Assemble the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Assemble (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/77. Engine Front Cover Assemble).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2393
2. Use the EN-46109 - pins in order to install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover
Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/123. Engine Front Cover Installation).
3. Install the camshaft position actuator solenoid valves to the front cover. Refer to Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service
and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Intake) , and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left
Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side)
Exhaust).
4. Install the camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position
Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor
Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right
Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position
Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust)
and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake).
5. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Installation (See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/129. Crankshaft Balancer Installation
).
6. Install the generator bracket with the generator and the belt tensioner. Refer to Generator
Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and
Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair)Generator Replacement (LF1) (See:
Starting and Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair).
7. Install the water outlet. Refer to Water Outlet Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling System/Coolant
Outlet/Service and Repair). 8. Install the purge vent hose to the water outlet. 9. Fill the cooling
system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining
and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service
and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
10. Install the water pump pulley. 11. Install the drive belt tensioner. Refer to Drive Belt Tensioner
Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt
Tensioner/Service and Repair).
12. Install the camshaft covers. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See:
Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side) and Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side
(LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover
Replacement - Right Side).
13. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 14. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System
Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining
and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service
and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Camshaft Actuator System Description
Camshaft Actuator System Overview
1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the
camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil
Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator
Housing
The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft
timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the
camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid
valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft
timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance
concerns:
* Engine power output
* Fuel economy
* Lower tailpipe emissions
The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP)
sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses
the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions:
* The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
* The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT)
* The mass air flow (MAF) sensor
* The throttle position (TP) sensor
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
* The volumetric efficiency
Operation
The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside
the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is
applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The
movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the
exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2398
applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top
dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft
movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve
until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the
CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP
actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve
directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also
command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the
current camshaft position.
The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the
solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP
actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing
and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the
CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with
CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a
condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake
or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2402
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2403
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagrams
Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2404
Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2405
Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2406
Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF)
Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2407
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2410
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2411
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2412
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF)
....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa
(40-65 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2417
Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions
Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Special Tools
CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge
Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel/Service Precautions).
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove
the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100,
refer to the manufacture's directions.
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 2420
Warning
Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and
personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel
pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure
gauge is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps:
1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into
an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel
from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the
CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the
fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid
possible contamination in the system:
* The fuel pipe connections
* The hose connections
* The areas surrounding the connections
2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from
the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the
fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 2421
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis
Fuel System Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM
detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains
active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel
pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage
to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure.
The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces
the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank.
Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions.
An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank.
The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high
pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion
chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure,
fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM).
The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel
pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet
pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The
primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates
a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through
the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank.
Reference Information Description and Operation
Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information Special Tools
* CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge
* J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter
Circuit/System Verification
Note:
* Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic.
* Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding.
* Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding.
* The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and
Instructions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 2422
1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge
Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure
Gauge Installation and Removal).
Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the
fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580
kPa (84 psi).
2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel
pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and
does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module
Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between
276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
Circuit/System Testing
Note: *
The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* DO NOT start the engine.
* High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel
pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa
(84 psi).
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the
fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is
operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi).
‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed
below. If all items test normal, replace the primary
fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure:
1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel
Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel
feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter.
4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH
48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close
the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace
the primary fuel tank module.
3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease
more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank
module.
4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel
pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel
pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering.
‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test
normal, replace the primary fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections
5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls).
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement)
* Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2426
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW)
Description
The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct
idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for
production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for
reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for
example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned.
An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take
several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability
to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero.
The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow.
Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure
Reset Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* Ignition ON, engine OFF.
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph).
Learn Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM.
* The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa.
* The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s.
* The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts.
Throttle Learn
Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced)
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start
the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow
Compensation value should equal 0 percent and
the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed.
3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here.
Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced)
Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List
- Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle).
1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and
the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed
should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes.
6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal.
Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle
speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above
70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations
and extended idles.
7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat
step 6.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2427
8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that
referred you here.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2448
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2449
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Usage
* Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability
conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Powertrain Management/Ignition
System/Specifications) for the correct spark plug.
* Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the
following conditions:
- Spark plug fouling-Colder plug
- Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug
Spark Plug Inspection
* Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage.
- Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1).
- Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should
NOT move.
* Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical
charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the
following conditions:
- Inspect the spark plug boot for damage.
- Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or
water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2450
* Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack
instead of the electrodes (3, 4).
* Inspect for evidence of improper arcing.
- Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to
Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). An
excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation.
- Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug
operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack.
- Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4).
- Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3).
- Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug.
* A rattling sound indicates internal damage.
* A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity.
- Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the
gap.
- Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped.
- Inspect for excessive fouling.
* Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can
cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation.
Spark Plug Visual Inspection
* Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal
combustion by-products from fuels with additives.
* Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions:
- Rich fuel mixtures
* Leaking fuel injectors
* Excessive fuel pressure
* Restricted air filter element
* Incorrect combustion
- Reduced ignition system voltage output
* Weak coils
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2451
* Worn ignition wires
* Incorrect spark plug gap
- Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that
normal combustion deposits may not burn off.
* Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white
coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless
they form into a glazing over the electrode.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2452
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
Spark Plug Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service
and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning).
Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could
result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the
contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper
seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination.
2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity.
Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark
plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head
threads.
3. Remove the spark plug.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2453
Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that
are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type
can severely damage the engine.
Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set
gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check.
Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even
damage the engine.
1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition
System Specifications (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Specifications).
Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is
fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head.
Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust
blow-by, or thread damage.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the spark plug.
Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Check
Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less
than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2457
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine Compression Test
Special Tools
EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the
valves and the head gasket.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full
charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF.
Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument
panel (I/P) fuse block.
3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6.
Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure
the engine compression, using the following procedure:
1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into
the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression
strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5.
Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter
from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder.
9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders.
* The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading.
* No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
10. The following are examples of measurement problems:
* When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to
specified compression on each cylinder.
* When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and
tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves
considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler.
* When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and
does not build up even with the addition of oil.
* Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be
identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired
cylinders.
11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install
the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the
I/P fuse block.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 10 Nm (89 lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2461
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Water Pump Replacement (LF1)
Tools Required
EN 46104 - Water Pump Pulley Holder
For equivalent regional tools refer to Special Tools (See: Cooling System/Tools and Equipment)
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716))
2. Remove the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair)
3. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to retain the pulley.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2462
4. Remove the water pump pulley bolts. 5. Remove the water pump pulley.
6. Remove the water pump bolts. 7. Remove the water pump. 8. Remove and DISCARD the water
pump seal. 9. Carefully clean the water pump sealing surfaces.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2463
1. Install a NEW water pump seal. 2. Install the water pump.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution)
3. Install the water pump bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
4. Install the water pump pulley and the water pump pulley bolts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2464
5. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to hold the pulley. 6. Install the water pump pulley
bolts and tighten to 12 Nm (108 lb in). 7. Install the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt
Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair)
8. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining
and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service
and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716))
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Cooling System ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 10.8 quarts (10.2 liters)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2470
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant.
This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low.
CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire
and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: Gives freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage
aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly
damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle
could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair
Water Outlet Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Replacement
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Radiator Surge Tank Replacement
Radiator Surge Tank Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2481
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Reservoir Vent Hose Replacement
Coolant Recovery Reservoir Vent Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2482
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement
Coolant Recovery Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of the Engine Compartment Components
1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling
Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2487
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagrams
G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF)
G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2488
G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2489
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2493
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of the Engine Compartment Components
1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling
Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2497
Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Diagrams
R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Fan Shroud Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement
Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement
Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2512
Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement
Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Radiator Drain Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Radiator Drain Plug: Service and Repair
Radiator Drain Cock Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection
Pressure Cap Testing
Special Tools
* J 24460-01 - Cooling System Pressure Tester
* J 42401-1 - Radiator Cap / Surge Tank Test Adapter
Pressure Cap Testing
Warning
To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot.
The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if radiator cap or surge
tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot.
1. Remove the pressure cap. 2. Wash the pressure cap sealing surface with water.
Note: Lubricate J-42401-1 and pressure cap o-rings with coolant and press cap to seat o-ring on
J-42401-1 before turning to engage threads.
3. Use the J 24460-01 - Cooling System Pressure Tester (1) with J 42401-1 - Radiator Cap / Surge
Tank Test Adapter (2) in order to test the
pressure cap.
4. Test the pressure cap for the following conditions:
* Pressure release when the J 24460-01 - Cooling System Pressure Tester exceeds the pressure
rating of the pressure cap.
* Maintain the rated pressure for at least 10 seconds. Note the rate of pressure loss.
5. Replace the pressure cap under the following conditions:
* The pressure cap does not release pressure which exceeds the rated pressure of the cap.
* The pressure cap does not hold the rated pressure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement
Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement
Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Special Tools
J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service
and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling
(Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See:
Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake
Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the radiator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2524
5. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator inlet
hose from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install radiator inlet hose to the vehicle.
Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation.
2. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose
clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2525
4. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose
clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Install the intake manifold cover.
Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold
Cover Replacement).
7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling
(Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2526
Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement
Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Special Tools
J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service
and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling
(Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
3. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the radiator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2527
5. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose
Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator outlet
hose from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install radiator outlet hose to the vehicle.
Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation.
2. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose
clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2528
4. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose
clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the cooling
system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling
System Draining and Filling
(Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2533
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System
> Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Thermostat Diagnosis The 188 tempil stick melts at 87°C (188°F). The thermostat should begin to
open. The 206 tempil stick melts at 97°C (206°F). The thermostat should be fully open.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2542
Thermostat: Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Thermostat Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Thermostat Housing Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 10 Nm (89 lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2549
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Water Pump Replacement (LF1)
Tools Required
EN 46104 - Water Pump Pulley Holder
For equivalent regional tools refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment)
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service
and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling
(Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716))
2. Remove the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine/Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive
Belt/Service and Repair)
3. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to retain the pulley.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2550
4. Remove the water pump pulley bolts. 5. Remove the water pump pulley.
6. Remove the water pump bolts. 7. Remove the water pump. 8. Remove and DISCARD the water
pump seal. 9. Carefully clean the water pump sealing surfaces.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2551
1. Install a NEW water pump seal. 2. Install the water pump.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution)
3. Install the water pump bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
4. Install the water pump pulley and the water pump pulley bolts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2552
5. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to hold the pulley. 6. Install the water pump pulley
bolts and tighten to 12 Nm (108 lb in). 7. Install the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt
Replacement (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service
and Repair)
8. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling
(Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716))
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Catalyst Shield: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter Heat Shield Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair
Exhaust Flexible Pipe Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Muffler: Service and Repair
Exhaust Muffler Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body
Control Module
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A
Date: June 14, 2010
Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not
Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions
Models:
2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV,
Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro
2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet
Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL
2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming
event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS).
The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this
incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event.
This condition may be caused by the following:
- A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle
and the TIS2WEB terminal.
- The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event.
Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition.
SPS Programming Process Selection
Perform this procedure first.
1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS
application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When
selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new
BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS)
with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 2571
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
BCM Still Fails to Reprogram
If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following
modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes:
- BCM
- EBCM
- ECM
- IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox)
- TCM
3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to
turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace
and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using
the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to
the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2572
Body Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2573
Body Control Module: Diagrams
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2574
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2575
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2576
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2577
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2578
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2579
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2580
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2581
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2582
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2583
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Page 2584
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Body Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2593
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2594
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2595
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2596
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2602
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2607
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2608
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2609
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 2614
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 2615
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 2616
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative
Emission Diagnostics > Page 2617
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2623
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2628
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2629
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2630
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2631
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2632
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2633
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2634
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2635
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2636
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2637
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2638
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2639
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2640
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2641
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2642
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2643
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
Engine Control Module Description
The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems,
and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics
monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system
performance degrades.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type.
A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions
related DTC.
The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls
system. The ECM controls the following components:
* The fuel injection system
* The ignition system
* The emission control systems
* The on-board diagnostics
* The A/C and fan systems
* The throttle actuation control (TAC) system
The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls
the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs
diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and
alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The
condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making
repairs.
ECM Function
The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This
is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases,
even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too
low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure
accurate voltage readings.
The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the
transistors or a device called an output driver module.
EEPROM
The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory
that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and
calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation.
Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in
order to reprogram the ECM.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of
accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan
tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The
DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is
controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition
that affects the vehicle emissions.
ECM Service Precautions
The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are
associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading
any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the
ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be
tested with a DMM.
Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs
This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive
levels of the following emissions:
* Hydrocarbons (HC)
* Carbon monoxide (CO)
* Oxides of nitrogen (NOx)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2644
* Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses
Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in
excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC
that is associated with the condition.
Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment
Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on
vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems.
Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at
the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a
vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No
allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment.
Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the
powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle
electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing
any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle.
After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage
Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module
(ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM.
The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very
low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic
discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components.
There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of
charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding
across a car seat.
Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly
charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off
leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage,
therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.
Emissions Control Information Label
The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission
specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information.
This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in
liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated
emission components and vacuum hose schematic.
This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has
been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO).
Underhood Inspection
Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly.
Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing
the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further
steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection:
* Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects.
* Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see.
* Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions:
- Burned or chafed spots
- Pinched wires
- Contact with sharp edges
- Contact with hot exhaust manifolds
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2645
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Engine Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2646
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID > Page 2650
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2655
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2656
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application
and ID > Page 2660
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2665
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2674
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2675
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2679
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2690
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2691
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2692
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2693
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2694
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2695
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2696
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2697
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2698
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2699
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2700
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 2703
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 2704
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 2705
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2713
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2714
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2715
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2716
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2717
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2718
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2719
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2720
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2721
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2722
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2728
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2729
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2730
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2731
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2732
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2733
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2734
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2735
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2736
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2737
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2738
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2739
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2740
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2741
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2742
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2743
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2744
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2745
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2746
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2747
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2748
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2749
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2750
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2751
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2752
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2753
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2754
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2755
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2756
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2757
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2758
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2759
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2760
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2761
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2762
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2763
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2764
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2765
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2766
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2767
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2768
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2769
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2770
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2771
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2772
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2773
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2774
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2775
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2776
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2777
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2778
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2779
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2780
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2781
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2782
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2783
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2784
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2785
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2786
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2787
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2788
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2789
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2790
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2791
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2792
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2793
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2794
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2795
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2796
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2797
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2798
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2799
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2800
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2801
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2802
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2803
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2804
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2805
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2806
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2807
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2808
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2809
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2810
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2811
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2812
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2813
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2814
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2815
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2816
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2817
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2818
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2819
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2820
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2821
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2822
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2823
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2824
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2825
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2826
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2827
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2828
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2829
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2830
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2831
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2832
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2833
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2834
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2835
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2836
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2837
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2838
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2839
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2840
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2841
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2842
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2843
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2844
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2845
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2846
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2847
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2848
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2849
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2850
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2851
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2852
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2853
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2854
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2855
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2856
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2857
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2858
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2859
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2860
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2861
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2862
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2863
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2864
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2865
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2866
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2867
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2868
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2869
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2870
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2871
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2872
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2873
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2874
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2875
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2876
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2877
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2878
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2879
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2880
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2881
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2882
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2883
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2884
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2885
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2886
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2887
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2888
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2889
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2890
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2891
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2892
Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views
A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary
B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2893
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2894
Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management
diagrams.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2895
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2899
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2903
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2904
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2908
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 2913
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 2914
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 2915
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 2916
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2917
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2918
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2919
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock
Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock
Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2922
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2926
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2927
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2928
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 2933
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2934
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2935
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2936
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2940
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams
B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF)
B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942
B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943
B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944
B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945
B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2946
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated
Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen
sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation.
Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector
and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of
any type.
Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring,
connector, or terminal is damaged.
This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires.
Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air
reference and degraded sensor performance.
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance.
* Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are
exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause
performance problems.
* Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks
could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize
the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor.
Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance.
* Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to
prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's
Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered
since this could result in the air reference being obstructed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated
Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 2949
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following:
* A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set
* HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available
Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S
failure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated
Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 2950
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV
sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the
HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to
check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream
will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal
voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered
to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before
replacing the oxygen sensor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2953
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2954
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2955
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2960
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2961
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 2964
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 2965
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 2966
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2971
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2972
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2976
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Fuel Rail (LF1)
1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5
- Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2981
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Disassembled Views > Page 2982
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
2983
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed
Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 2986
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel
Injection Fuel Rail
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 2992
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 2993
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 2994
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 2995
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 2996
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2997
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2999
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3000
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3001
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3002
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3005
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3006
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3007
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3012
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3013
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3014
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3015
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3016
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3017
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 3018
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3019
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3020
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3021
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page
3026
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position.
4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or
similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch
housing.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder
Coding - Ignition (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page
3027
2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start
switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock
cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement
(See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3032
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3033
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3034
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3035
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3036
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3037
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3038
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1 > Page 3041
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF)
....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa
(40-65 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3046
Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions
Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Special Tools
CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge
Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction/Fuel/Service Precautions).
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove
the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100,
refer to the manufacture's directions.
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 3049
Warning
Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and
personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel
pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure
gauge is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps:
1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into
an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel
from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the
CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the
fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid
possible contamination in the system:
* The fuel pipe connections
* The hose connections
* The areas surrounding the connections
2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from
the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the
fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 3050
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis
Fuel System Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM
detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains
active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel
pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage
to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure.
The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces
the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank.
Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions.
An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank.
The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high
pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion
chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure,
fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM).
The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel
pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet
pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The
primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates
a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through
the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank.
Reference Information Description and Operation
Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Description and
Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information Special Tools
* CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge
* J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter
Circuit/System Verification
Note:
* Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic.
* Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding.
* Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding.
* The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and
Instructions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 3051
1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge
Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure
Gauge Installation and Removal).
Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the
fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580
kPa (84 psi).
2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel
pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and
does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module
Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between
276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
Circuit/System Testing
Note: *
The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* DO NOT start the engine.
* High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel
pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa
(84 psi).
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the
fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is
operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi).
‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed
below. If all items test normal, replace the primary
fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure:
1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel
Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel
feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter.
4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH
48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close
the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace
the primary fuel tank module.
3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease
more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank
module.
4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel
pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel
pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering.
‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test
normal, replace the primary fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections
5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls).
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Supply
Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement)
* Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Pump/Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed >
System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3055
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW)
Description
The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct
idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for
production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for
reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for
example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned.
An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take
several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability
to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero.
The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow.
Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure
Reset Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* Ignition ON, engine OFF.
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph).
Learn Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM.
* The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa.
* The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s.
* The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts.
Throttle Learn
Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced)
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start
the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow
Compensation value should equal 0 percent and
the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed.
3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here.
Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced)
Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List
- Vehicle (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle).
1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and
the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed
should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes.
6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal.
Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle
speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above
70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations
and extended idles.
7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat
step 6.
8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that
referred you here.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner
Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner
Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
System Information > Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3076
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3077
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Usage
* Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability
conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Ignition System/Specifications) for the
correct spark plug.
* Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the
following conditions:
- Spark plug fouling-Colder plug
- Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug
Spark Plug Inspection
* Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage.
- Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1).
- Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should
NOT move.
* Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical
charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the
following conditions:
- Inspect the spark plug boot for damage.
- Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or
water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3078
* Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack
instead of the electrodes (3, 4).
* Inspect for evidence of improper arcing.
- Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to
Ignition System Specifications (See: Ignition System/Specifications). An excessively wide electrode
gap can prevent correct spark plug operation.
- Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Ignition
System/Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over
torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack.
- Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4).
- Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3).
- Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug.
* A rattling sound indicates internal damage.
* A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity.
- Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the
gap.
- Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped.
- Inspect for excessive fouling.
* Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can
cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation.
Spark Plug Visual Inspection
* Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal
combustion by-products from fuels with additives.
* Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions:
- Rich fuel mixtures
* Leaking fuel injectors
* Excessive fuel pressure
* Restricted air filter element
* Incorrect combustion
- Reduced ignition system voltage output
* Weak coils
* Worn ignition wires
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3079
* Incorrect spark plug gap
- Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that
normal combustion deposits may not burn off.
* Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white
coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless
they form into a glazing over the electrode.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3080
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
Spark Plug Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and
Compressed Air Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses
and Compressed Air Warning).
Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could
result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the
contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper
seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination.
2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity.
Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark
plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head
threads.
3. Remove the spark plug.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3081
Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that
are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type
can severely damage the engine.
Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set
gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check.
Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even
damage the engine.
1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition
System Specifications (See: Ignition
System/Specifications).
Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is
fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head.
Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust
blow-by, or thread damage.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the spark plug.
Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression
Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Check
Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less
than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression
Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3085
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Engine Compression Test
Special Tools
EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the
valves and the head gasket.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full
charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF.
Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument
panel (I/P) fuse block.
3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6.
Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure
the engine compression, using the following procedure:
1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into
the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression
strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5.
Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter
from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder.
9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders.
* The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading.
* No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi).
10. The following are examples of measurement problems:
* When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to
specified compression on each cylinder.
* When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and
tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves
considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler.
* When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and
does not build up even with the addition of oil.
* Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be
identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired
cylinders.
11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install
the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the
I/P fuse block.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3093
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3094
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3098
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3102
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Diagrams
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body
Control Module
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A
Date: June 14, 2010
Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not
Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions
Models:
2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV,
Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro
2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet
Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL
2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming
event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS).
The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this
incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event.
This condition may be caused by the following:
- A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle
and the TIS2WEB terminal.
- The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event.
Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition.
SPS Programming Process Selection
Perform this procedure first.
1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS
application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When
selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new
BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS)
with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page
3113
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
BCM Still Fails to Reprogram
If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following
modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes:
- BCM
- EBCM
- ECM
- IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox)
- TCM
3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to
turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace
and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using
the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to
the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3114
Body Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3115
Body Control Module: Diagrams
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3116
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3117
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3118
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3119
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3120
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3121
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3122
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3123
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3124
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3125
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3126
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Body Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3131
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3132
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3133
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3134
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3135
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3136
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3137
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3138
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3139
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3140
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3141
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust >
Page 3144
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust >
Page 3145
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust >
Page 3146
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3154
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3155
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3156
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3157
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3158
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3159
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3160
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3161
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3162
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3163
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
Data Link Connector: Locations Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components > Page 3168
Data Link Connector: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Rear Underbody Components
1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3169
Data Link Connector: Diagrams
R6 Data Link Resistor
X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3170
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System Description
The engine control module (ECM) is the control center for the throttle actuator control (TAC)
system. The ECM determines the driver's intent based on input from the accelerator pedal position
sensors, then calculates the appropriate throttle response based on the throttle position sensors.
The ECM achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated voltage to the throttle
actuator motor. The throttle blade is spring loaded in both directions, and the default position is
slightly open.
Modes Of Operation
Normal Mode
During the operation of the TAC system, several modes, or functions, are considered normal. The
following modes may be entered during normal operations:
* Minimum pedal value-At key-up, the ECM updates the learned minimum pedal value.
* Minimum throttle position values-At key-up, the ECM updates the learned minimum throttle
position value. In order to learn the minimum throttle position value, the throttle blade is moved to
the Closed position.
* Ice break mode-If the throttle blade is not able to reach a predetermined minimum throttle
position, the ice break mode is entered. During the ice break mode, the ECM commands the
maximum pulse width several times to the throttle actuator motor in the closing direction.
* Minimum pedal value-At key-up, the ECM updates the learned minimum pedal value.
* Battery saver mode-After a predetermined time without engine RPM, the ECM commands the
Battery Saver mode. During the Battery Saver mode, the TAC module removes the voltage from
the motor control circuits, which removes the current draw used to maintain the idle position and
allows the throttle to return to the spring loaded default position.
Reduced Engine Power Mode
When the ECM detects a condition with the TAC system, the ECM may enter a reduced engine
power mode. Reduced engine power may cause one or more of the following conditions:
* Acceleration limiting-The ECM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control,
however, the vehicle acceleration is limited.
* Limited throttle mode-The ECM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control,
however, the maximum throttle opening is limited.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3174
* Throttle default mode-The ECM will turn OFF the throttle actuator motor, and the throttle will
return to the spring loaded default position.
* Forced idle mode-The ECM will perform the following actions:
- Limit engine speed to idle positioning the throttle position, or by controlling the fuel and spark if
the throttle is turned OFF.
- Ignore the accelerator pedal input.
* Engine shutdown mode-The ECM will disable fuel and de-energize the throttle actuator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3183
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3184
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3185
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3186
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3192
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3197
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3198
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3199
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A
> May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A
> May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3204
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A
> May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3205
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A
> May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3206
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A
> May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3207
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3213
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3218
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3219
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3220
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3221
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3222
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3223
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3224
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3225
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3226
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3227
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3228
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3229
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3230
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3231
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3232
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3233
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
Engine Control Module Description
The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems,
and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics
monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system
performance degrades.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type.
A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions
related DTC.
The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls
system. The ECM controls the following components:
* The fuel injection system
* The ignition system
* The emission control systems
* The on-board diagnostics
* The A/C and fan systems
* The throttle actuation control (TAC) system
The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls
the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs
diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and
alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The
condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making
repairs.
ECM Function
The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This
is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases,
even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too
low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure
accurate voltage readings.
The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the
transistors or a device called an output driver module.
EEPROM
The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory
that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and
calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation.
Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in
order to reprogram the ECM.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of
accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan
tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The
DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is
controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition
that affects the vehicle emissions.
ECM Service Precautions
The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are
associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading
any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the
ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be
tested with a DMM.
Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs
This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive
levels of the following emissions:
* Hydrocarbons (HC)
* Carbon monoxide (CO)
* Oxides of nitrogen (NOx)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3234
* Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses
Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in
excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC
that is associated with the condition.
Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment
Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on
vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems.
Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at
the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a
vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No
allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment.
Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the
powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle
electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing
any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle.
After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage
Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module
(ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM.
The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very
low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic
discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components.
There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of
charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding
across a car seat.
Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly
charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off
leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage,
therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.
Emissions Control Information Label
The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission
specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information.
This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in
liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated
emission components and vacuum hose schematic.
This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has
been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO).
Underhood Inspection
Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly.
Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing
the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further
steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection:
* Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects.
* Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see.
* Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions:
- Burned or chafed spots
- Pinched wires
- Contact with sharp edges
- Contact with hot exhaust manifolds
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3235
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Engine Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3236
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Mode Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Engine Mode Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory
Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Mode Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3240
Engine Mode Switch: Diagrams
S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3246
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3247
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3248
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3249
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3250
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3251
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3252
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3253
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3254
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3255
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3256
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3257
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3258
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3259
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3260
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3261
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3262
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3263
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3264
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3265
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3266
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3268
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3269
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3270
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3271
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3273
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3284
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3285
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3286
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3287
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3288
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3289
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3290
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3291
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3292
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3293
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3294
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3295
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3296
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3297
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3298
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3299
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3300
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3301
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3302
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3303
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3304
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3305
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3306
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3307
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3308
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3309
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3310
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3311
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3312
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3313
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3314
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3315
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3316
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3317
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3318
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3319
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3320
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3321
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3322
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3323
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3324
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3325
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3326
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3327
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3328
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3352
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3353
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3354
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3355
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3356
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3357
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3358
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3359
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3360
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3361
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3362
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3363
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3364
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3365
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3366
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3367
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3368
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3369
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3370
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3371
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3372
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3373
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3374
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3375
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3376
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3377
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3378
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3379
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3380
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3381
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3382
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3383
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3384
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3385
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Information Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3393
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3394
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3395
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3396
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3397
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3398
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3399
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3400
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3401
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3402
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3403
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3404
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3405
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3406
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3407
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3408
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3409
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3410
Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views
A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary
B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3411
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3412
Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management
diagrams.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3413
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3417
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3421
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3422
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3427
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3428
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3429
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3430
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3431
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3432
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3433
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3434
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3435
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3436
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3437
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3438
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3439
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3440
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3441
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3442
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3443
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3444
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3445
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3446
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3447
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3448
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3449
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3450
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3451
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3452
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3453
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3454
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3455
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3456
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3457
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3458
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3459
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3460
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3461
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3476
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3477
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3478
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3479
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3480
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3481
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3482
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3483
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3484
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3485
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3486
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3487
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3488
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3489
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3490
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3491
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3492
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3493
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3494
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3495
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3496
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3497
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3498
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3499
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3500
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3501
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3502
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3517
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3518
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3519
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3520
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3521
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3522
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3523
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3524
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3525
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3526
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3527
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3528
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3529
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3530
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3531
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3532
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3533
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3534
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3535
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3536
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3537
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3538
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3539
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3540
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3541
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3542
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3543
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3544
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3545
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3546
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3547
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3548
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3549
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3550
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3551
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3552
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3553
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3554
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3555
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3556
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3557
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3558
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3559
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3560
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3561
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3562
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3565
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3566
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3567
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3568
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3569
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3570
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3571
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3572
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3573
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3574
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3575
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3576
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3577
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3578
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3579
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3580
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3581
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3582
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3583
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3584
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3585
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3586
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3587
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3588
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3589
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3590
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3591
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
Data Communication Schematics
Low Speed GMLAN (1 of 2)
Low Speed GMLAN (2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3592
High Speed GMLAN (1 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3593
High Speed GMLAN (2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3594
Enable Serial Data
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3595
BCM Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus 1, 2, 3, 4 and Memory Seat LIN Bus
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3596
Radio/HVAC Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus and CAN Graphical Interface
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3597
Chassis Expansion Bus
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3598
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3599
Information Bus: Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Circuit Description
The communication among control modules is performed through the high speed GMLAN serial
data circuit, the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit, the mid speed GMLAN serial data
circuit, and the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time
communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network and the chassis high speed
GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The
purpose of the gateway is to translate serial data messages between the high speed GMLAN bus
and the low speed GMLAN bus. The gateway will interact with each network according to that
network's transmission protocol. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation ( See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Description and Operation) for more information about the
gateway.
High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN
serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500
Kb/s. The twisted pair is terminated with 120 ohms resistors. The resistors are used to reduce
noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a
differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-)
are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level, which is approximately 2.5
volts, is considered recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to
their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts one volt
from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0.
GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A
virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a
virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles functionality has been requested. A
virtual network is supported by virtual devices, which represents a collection of signals owned by a
single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal
supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not.
Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the
absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a heartbeat of a virtual device. If
such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual
device. Note: a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure of the module that the code is
set in.
Chassis High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The high speed GMLAN chassis expansion bus functions the same as the high speed GMLAN bus,
and the two buses operate in parallel. The expansion chassis bus was added to reduce message
congestion on the primary high speed bus. Since the high speed GMLAN chassis bus and primary
high speed GMLAN bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are the same.
Mid Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the mid speed GMLAN
serial data circuit. Modules connected to the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial
data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are
exchanged among the modules when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The mid
speed GMLAN serial data bus uses a terminating resistor that is in parallel with the mid speed
GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Low Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the low speed GMLAN serial
data circuit. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate control modules.
The transmission speed for low speed GMLAN is up to 83.33 Kb/s. Under normal vehicle operating
conditions, the speed of the bus is 33.33 Kb/s. This protocol produces a simple pulse train sent out
over the low speed GMLAN serial data bus. When a module pulls the bus high, 5 volts, this creates
a dominant logic state or 0 on the bus. When the bus is pulled low, 0 volts, it is translated as a
recessive logic state or 1. To wake the control modules connected to the low speed GMLAN serial
data bus, a high voltage wake up pulse is sent out over the bus, the voltage level of the pulse is
+10 volts. Modules connected to the low speed GMLAN bus can be part of a virtual network as
described in the previous paragraph. The modules on the low speed GMLAN serial data bus are
connected to the bus in a parallel configuration.
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Circuit Description
Serial data is transmitted over a Local Interconnect Network (LIN) single wire network circuit bus
between a primary control module and other control modules within a particular subsystem. If serial
data communication is lost between any of the control modules on the LIN bus network, a no
communication code against the non-communicating control module will be set.
CAN Graphical Interface (CGI) Circuit Description
The CAN graphical interface (CGI) is a high speed UART-based serial data interface utilizing a
CAN physical layer. It is used by the Entertainment sub-system to transfer high-rate display
graphics between the Radio and the Info Display Module and/or Radio/HVAC Control. In the case
where the Info Display Module and Radio/HVAC Control are separate control modules, the Radio
interfaces only with the Info Display Module and the Info Display Module communicates with the
Radio/HVAC Control through a LIN interface. The Info Display Module therefore is responsible for
passing information between the Radio and the Radio/HVAC Control. A bus wake up signal will be
generated by the Radio or by the Info Display Module when
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3600
the systems functionality is required. Once the CGI network is awake, all message transfers on the
CGI are initiated by the Radio. Slave devices such as the Info Display Module and Radio/HVAC
Control may not transmit unless they are responding to a request from the Radio.
Dual wire CGI networks have a termination resistance between the CGI+ (CAN- High) and CGI(CAN- Low) conductors at each end of the bus. Each termination resistance is 120 ohms.
The communication function of the CGI shall be enabled or disabled based on the voltage level of a
dedicated input (typically called "Center Stack Wake"). The network will stay awake as long as this
discrete signal is driven low to less than 1.5 V. When the Radio determines that the communication
bus needs to be operational or active, it shall generate the wake-up signal by pulling this signal
circuit low.
The Radio can execute a warm reset of the Info Display Module if the Info Display Module fails to
respond to Radio's request via the CGI interface. Center Stack Reset is a low-asserted pull down
output (less than 1.5 V) from the Radio to the Info Display Module and has the same electrical
characteristics as those for the Center Stack Wake signal defined above.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector. Connector design and
location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following:
* Pin 1 Low speed GMLAN communications terminal
* Pin 3 Mid speed GMLAN serial bus (+) terminal
* Pin 4 Scan tool power ground terminal
* Pin 5 Common signal ground terminal
* Pin 6 High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) terminal
* Pin 11 Mid speed GMLAN serial bus (-) terminal
* Pin 12 Chassis high speed GMLAN serial bus terminal
* Pin 13 Chassis high speed GMLAN serial bus terminal
* Pin 14 High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) terminal
* Pin 16 Scan tool power, battery positive voltage terminal
Serial Data Reference
The scan tool communicates over the various buses on the vehicle. When a scan tool is installed
on a vehicle, the scan tool will try to communicate with every module that could be optioned into
the vehicle. If an option is not installed on the vehicle, the scan tool will display No Comm for that
options control module. In order to avert misdiagnoses of No Communication with a specific
module, refer to Data Link References (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview) for a list of modules, the buses they communicate with, and the RPO codes
for a specific module.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Data Link References
This table identifies which serial data link that a particular module uses for in-vehicle data
transmission. Some modules may use more than one data link to communicate. Some modules
may have multiple communication circuits passing through them without actively communicating on
that data link. This table is used to assist in correcting a communication malfunction. Not all
modules listed will be applicable to all vehicles. Refer to the schematics to determine which
modules apply. For the description and operation of these serial data communication circuits refer
to Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3603
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3604
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3605
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3606
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptoms - Data Communications
Symptoms - Data Communications
Important: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle) before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true:
* There are no DTCs set.
* The control modules can communicate via the serial data links.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Data Link Communications Description and
Operation (See: Description and Operation).
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories).
* Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions
which could cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections ( See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
* Scan Tool Does Not Power Up (See: Scan Tool Does Not Power Up)
* Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device)
* Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device)
* Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device )
* Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool
Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device)
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3607
Circuit/System Description
The GMLAN high speed chassis expansion bus functions the same as the GMLAN high speed bus,
and the two buses operate in parallel. The expansion chassis bus was added to reduce message
congestion on the primary high speed bus. Since the GMLAN high speed chassis bus and primary
GMLAN high speed bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are the same.
The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted
pair is terminated with two 120 ohms resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM)
and the other can be a separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another control module. The
resistors are used as the load for the High Speed GMLAN buss during normal vehicle operation.
The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high
speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level of
approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN
serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts one volt from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-)
circuit. If serial data is lost, control modules will set a no communication code against the
non-communicating control module. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure
of the module that set it.
Diagnostic Aids
* Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a
history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status.
Loss-of-communication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they
are transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms.
Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles.
This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios:
- A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication
circuit is awake.
- Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis
- A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery
voltage drops below a certain threshold.
- Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did
not all re-initialize at the same time.
- If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never
be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
* Do not replace a control module reporting a U code. The U code identifies which control module
needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue.
* Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the high speed
GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both the high and
low speed GMLAN systems.
* An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not
communicate with the vehicle.
* The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data
bus.
* Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool.
* The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data
bus. These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module
(see bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
- Vehicle will not crank
- Vehicle cranks but will not start
- Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
- PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Reference Information Schematic Reference
* Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)
Connector End View Reference
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3608
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Testing
Note: Each control module may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematic to identify the following:
* Control modules the vehicle is equipped with
* Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors
* Control module locations on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
* Each control module chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more
control modules on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to
DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100).
2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3.
All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground
circuit terminal 5 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground:
* Terminal 12
* Terminal 13
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to
Voltage.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuits listed
below and ground:
* Terminal 12
* Terminal 13
‹› If not the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the
Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground.
6. Test for 50-70 ohm between the serial data circuits terminal 12 and terminal 13.
‹› If less than 35 ohm, test for a short between the serial data circuits. Refer to Testing the Serial
Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits. ‹› If 35-50 ohm there may be a third terminating
resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the incorrect control module is
installed. Some control modules are available with and without the terminating resistors installed to
reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness.
‹› If greater than 70 ohm but less than infinite, test the serial data circuit for an open/high
resistance. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for
an Open/High Resistance.
‹› If infinite, test the serial data circuits between the DLC and the first connection to the serial data
circuit for an open/high resistance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3609
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between
each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground.
Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V.
‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was
disconnected.
3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at another control module, in the
direction of the circuit shorted to voltage.
4. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits at the control module
connector that was just disconnected and ground.
Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V.
‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was
just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated:
* A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k
ohm between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected
and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm.
‹› If all serial data circuits are greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was
disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another control module, in the direction of the circuit
shorted to ground.
4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between the serial data circuits at the
control module connector that was just disconnected
and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm.
‹› If greater than the specified range for all serial data circuits, replace the control module that was
just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated:
* A short to ground on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at an easily accessible control module
that is not communicating.
2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at
the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is greater than the specified range, replace the control module
that was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the
harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control
module, in the direction of the
circuits shorted together.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at
the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is within the specified range, replace the control module that
was just disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
* Serial data circuits shorted together between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* Serial data circuits shorted together between a control module and a terminating resistor
* A shorted terminating resistor
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at an easily accessible control module
that is not communicating.
2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data
circuits at the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3610
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that
was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the
harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control
module, in the direction of the open
circuit.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data
circuits at the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that
was just disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
* An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if
equipped
* An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating
resistor
* An open/high resistance terminating resistor
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair.
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for
control module replacement, setup, and programming
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted
pair is terminated with two 120 ohms resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM)
and the other can be a separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another control module. The
resistors are used as the load for the High Speed GMLAN buss during normal vehicle operation.
The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high
speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level of
approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN
serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts one volt from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-)
circuit. If serial data is lost, control modules will set a no communication code against the
non-communicating control module. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure
of the module that set it.
Diagnostic Aids
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3611
* Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a
history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status.
Loss-of-communication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they
are transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms.
Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles.
This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios:
- A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication
circuit is awake.
- Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis.
- A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery
voltage drops below a certain threshold.
- Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did
not all re-initialize at the same time.
- If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never
be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
* Do not replace a control module reporting a U code. The U code identifies which control module
needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue.
* Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the high speed
GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both the high and
low speed GMLAN systems.
* An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not
communicate with the vehicle.
* The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data
bus.
* Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool.
* The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data
bus. These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module
(see bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
- Vehicle will not crank
- Vehicle cranks but will not start
- Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
- PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Reference Information Schematic Reference
* Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)
Connector End View Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Testing
Note: Each control module may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematic to identify the following:
* Control modules the vehicle is equipped with
* High speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors
* Control module locations on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
* Each control module's high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3612
1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more
control modules on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to
DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100).
2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3.
All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground
circuit terminal 5 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground:
* Terminal 6
* Terminal 14
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to
Voltage.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuits listed
below and ground:
* Terminal 6
* Terminal 14
‹› If not the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the
Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground.
6. Test for 50-70 ohm between the serial data circuits terminal 6 and terminal 14.
‹› If less than 35 ohm, test for a short between the serial data circuits. Refer to Testing the Serial
Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits. ‹› If 35-50 ohm there may be a third terminating
resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the incorrect control module is
installed. Some control modules are available with and without the terminating resistors installed to
reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness.
‹› If greater than 70 ohm but less than infinite, test the serial data circuit for an open/high
resistance. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for
an Open/High Resistance.
‹› If infinite, test the serial data circuits between the DLC and the first connection to the serial data
circuit for an open/high resistance.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between each
serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground.
Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V.
‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was
disconnected.
3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at another control module, in the direction of the
circuit shorted to voltage.
4. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits at the control module
connector that was just disconnected and ground.
Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V.
‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was
just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated:
* A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm
between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected
and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm.
‹› If all serial data circuits are greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was
disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
control module, in the direction of the circuit
shorted to ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3613
4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between the serial data circuits at the
control module connector that was just disconnected
and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm.
‹› If greater than the specified range for all serial data circuits, replace the control module that was
just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated:
* A short to ground on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module that is not
communicating.
2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at
the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is greater than the specified range, replace the control module
that was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the
harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in
the direction of the circuits
shorted together.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at
the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is within the specified range, replace the control module that
was just disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
* Serial data circuits shorted together between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* Serial data circuits shorted together between a control module and a terminating resistor
* A shorted terminating resistor
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module that is not
communicating.
2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data
circuits at the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that
was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the
harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in
the direction of the open circuit. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm
between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that
was just disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
* An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if
equipped
* An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating
resistor
* An open/high resistance terminating resistor
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair.
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for
control module replacement, setup, and programming
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3614
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
Modules connected to the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data
communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are
exchanged among the modules when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The mid
speed GMLAN serial data bus uses a terminating resistor that is in parallel with the mid speed
GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Diagnostic Aids
* Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a
history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-ofcommunication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they're
transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms.
Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles.
This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios:
- A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication
circuit is awake.
- Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis.
- A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery
voltage drops below a certain threshold.
- Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did
not all re-initialize at the same time.
- If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never
be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
* Do not replace a control module reporting a U code. The U code identifies which control module
needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue.
* Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the mid speed
GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using the high, mid, and
low speed GMLAN systems.
* An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not
communicate with the vehicle.
* The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the mid speed GMLAN serial data
bus.
* Technicians may find various Local Area Network communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool. These conditions may be
caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see bulletins). Some
customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
- Vehicle will not crank
- Vehicle cranks but will not start
- Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
- PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Reference Information Schematic Reference
* Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3615
Connector End View Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Testing
Note: Each control module may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematic to identify the following:
* Control modules the vehicle is equipped with
* Mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors
* Control module locations on the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits
* Each control module's mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more
control modules on the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to
DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100).
2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3.
All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground
circuit terminal 5 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground:
* Terminal 3
* Terminal 11
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to
Voltage.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuits listed
below and ground:
* Terminal 3
* Terminal 11
‹› If not the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the
Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground.
6. Test for 50-70 ohm between the serial data circuits terminal 3 and terminal 11.
‹› If less than 35 ohm, test for a short between the serial data circuits. Refer to Testing the Serial
Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits. ‹› If 35-50 ohm there may be a third terminating
resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the incorrect control module is
installed. Some control modules are available with and without the terminating resistors installed to
reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness.
‹› If greater than 70 ohm but less than infinite, test the serial data circuit for an open/high
resistance. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for
an Open/High Resistance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3616
‹› If infinite, test the serial data circuits between the DLC and the first connection to the serial data
circuit for an open/high resistance.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between each
serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground.
Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V.
‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was
disconnected.
3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at another control module, in the direction of the
circuit shorted to voltage.
4. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits at the control module
connector that was just disconnected and ground.
Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V.
‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was
just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated:
* A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm
between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected
and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm.
‹› If all serial data circuits are greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was
disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted
to ground.
4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between the serial data circuits at the
control module connector that was just disconnected
and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm.
‹› If greater than the specified range for all serial data circuits, replace the control module that was
just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated:
* A short to ground on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module that is not
communicating.
2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at
the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is greater than the specified range, replace the control module
that was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the
harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in
the direction of the circuits
shorted together.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at
the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is within the specified range, replace the control module that
was just disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
* Serial data circuits shorted together between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped
* Serial data circuits shorted together between a control module and a terminating resistor
* A shorted terminating resistor
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible control module that is not
communicating.
2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data
circuits at the control module connector that was just
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3617
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that
was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the
harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in
the direction of the open circuit. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm
between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just
disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits is greater than 100k ohm.
‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that
was just disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
* An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if
equipped
* An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating
resistor
* An open/high resistance terminating resistor
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair.
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for
control module replacement, setup, and programming
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate control modules. The
transmission speed for GMLAN low speed is up to 83.33 Kb/s. Under normal vehicle operating
conditions, the speed of the buss is 33.33 Kb/s. The control modules toggle the serial data circuit
between 0-5 V during normal communications. To wake the control modules connected to the
GMLAN low speed serial data circuit, a voltage wake up pulse of 10 V is sent out. If serial data is
lost, control modules will set a no communication code against the non-communicating control
module. Note: a loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the module
that set it.
Diagnostic Aids
* Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a
history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-ofcommunication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are
transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms.
Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles.
This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3618
- A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication
circuit is awake.
- Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis
- A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery
voltage drops below a certain threshold.
- Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did
not all re-initialize at the same time.
- If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never
be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
* Do not replace a control module reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which control module
needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue.
* Communication may be available between the body control module (BCM) and the scan tool with
the low speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both
the high and low speed GMLAN systems.
* An open in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit between the splice pack and a module will
only affect that specific module. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each
module effected, and the other modules will still communicate.
* An open in the data link connector (DLC) ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to
operate but not communicate with the vehicle.
* The engine may not start when there is a total malfunction of the low speed GMLAN serial data
circuit.
* Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTC) and no low speed LAN communications with the scan tool. These conditions may be
caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see bulletins). Some
customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
- Vehicle will not crank
- Vehicle cranks but will not start
- Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
- PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Circuit/System Testing
Note: Use the schematic to identify the following:
* Control modules the vehicle is equipped with
* Control module and splice pack locations on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit
* The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals for each control module, component, or splice
pack
1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more
control modules on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to
DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100).
‹› If one or more control modules are communicating but not all, refer to Testing the Serial Data
Circuit for an Open/High Resistance.
2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3.
All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground
circuit terminal 5 and ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3619
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to
Testing the Serial Data Circuit for a Short to
Voltage.
5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuit
terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If less than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing
the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground.
6. Disconnect the harness connector at the first splice pack closest in the circuit to the DLC. 7. Test
for less than 2 ohm between the DLC serial data circuit terminal 1 and the splice pack connector
serial data input terminal.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. If the
circuit tests normal, replace the splice pack.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connectors at the following components:
* All low speed serial data splice packs
* Any module or component between that may be between the splice packs
2. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the DLC serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, repair the short to voltage.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at each component connector and
ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, perform the appropriate test listed below:
* Serial data circuits with one control module, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. If the
circuit tests normal, replace the control module.
* Serial data circuits with 2 or more control modules, test each section of the serial data circuit for a
short to voltage. If the circuits test normal, replace the control module that causes the short to
voltage when connected.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connectors at the following components:
* All low speed serial data splice packs
* Any module or component between that may be between the splice packs
2. Test for infinite resistance between the DLC serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If not the specified value, repair the short to ground.
3. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between each serial data circuit at
the splice pack and ground.
‹› If less than the specified range, perform the appropriate test listed below:
* Serial data circuits with one control module, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. If the
circuit tests normal, replace the control module.
* Serial data circuits with 2 or more control modules, test each section of the serial data circuit for a
short to ground. If the circuits test normal, replace the control module that causes the short to
ground when connected.
Testing the Serial Data Circuit for an Open/High Resistance
1. If equipped with a second splice pack, ignition ON, verify the scan tool communicates with one
or more control modules connected to the second
splice pack.
‹› If all control modules on the second splice pack do not communicate, test the serial data circuit
between the first and second splice packs for
an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test the second splice pack for an open/high
resistance. If the splice pack tests normal, replace any module or component that may be between
those two splice packs.
2. If equipped with a third splice pack, ignition ON, verify the scan tool communicates with one or
more control modules connected to the third
splice pack.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3620
‹› If all control modules on the third splice pack do not communicate, test the serial data circuit
between the second and third splice packs for an
open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test the third splice pack for an open/high
resistance. If the splice pack tests normal, replace any module or component that may be between
the those two splice packs.
3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the splice pack containing the serial data circuits to the modules that
are not communicating. 4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the splice pack connector serial
data input terminal and a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit that is not
communicating:
5. Ignition ON, verify the scan tool communicates with the control modules connected to the low
speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
‹› If any control module does not communicate, test each section of the serial data circuit for an
open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal,
replace the control module that does not communicate when connected.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair.
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for
module replacement, setup, and programming
Scan Tool Does Not Power Up
Scan Tool Does Not Power Up
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and
location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following:
* Scan tool B+ voltage at terminal 16
* Scan tool ground at terminal 4
* Common ground at terminal 5
Diagnostic Aids
* The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some modules however, will not communicate
unless the ignition is ON and the power mode master module sends the appropriate power mode
message.
* If the B+ circuit, ground circuits, and connections of the DLC are functioning properly, the
malfunction must be due to the scan tool.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3621
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Test for less than 2.0 ohm between the ground circuits terminal 4 of the DLC and ground, and
terminal 5 of the DLC and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 16 at the DLC and
ground.
‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the voltage supply circuit for a short to ground or an
open/high resistance.
3. If all circuits test normal, refer to the scan tool user guide.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3626
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3627
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3628
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3629
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3630
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3631
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3632
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 3635
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Application and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 3639
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module
(ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit.
Diagnostic Aids
If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors with the engine
operating. Monitor the scan tool Circuit Test Status parameters for the component. The Circuit Test
Status parameter will change from OK or Not run to Fault if there is a condition with the circuit or a
connection.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
* Instrument Cluster Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators/System Diagram/Instrument Cluster Schematics)
* Engine Controls Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams)
Connector End View Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Electrical Information
Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool MIL Circuit Test Status parameters. Each of the MIL circuit
test status parameters should display OK or Not
Run.
2. Ignition ON, command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The MIL should turn ON and OFF
as commanded. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC
does not reset. You may also operate the vehicle within the
conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
Circuit/System Testing
1. If any other IPC indicators or gauges are inoperative, refer to Instrument Cluster Gauges
Inoperative (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative).
2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM harness connectors. Ignition ON, the MIL should not
illuminate.
‹› If the MIL is illuminated, test the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 for a short to ground. If the
circuit tests normal, replace the IPC.
3. Ignition ON, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 and
ground. The MIL should illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3643
‹› If the MIL does not illuminate, test the MIL control circuit for a short to voltage, or an open/high
resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace
the IPC/bulb.
4. If all circuits/connections test normal, replace the ECM.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the
diagnostic procedure.
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)
* Instrument Cluster Replacement (Equinox) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair)Instrument Cluster Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster /
Carrier/Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3647
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3648
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3649
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3654
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3655
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3656
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3657
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3661
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3662
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams
B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF)
B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3663
B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3664
B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3665
B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3666
B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3667
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen
sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation.
Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector
and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of
any type.
Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring,
connector, or terminal is damaged.
This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires.
Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air
reference and degraded sensor performance.
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance.
* Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are
exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause
performance problems.
* Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks
could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize
the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor.
Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance.
* Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to
prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's
Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered
since this could result in the air reference being obstructed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 3670
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following:
* A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set
* HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available
Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S
failure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 3671
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV
sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the
HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to
check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream
will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal
voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered
to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before
replacing the oxygen sensor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 3674
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 3675
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 3676
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body
Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body
Control Module
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A
Date: June 14, 2010
Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not
Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions
Models:
2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV,
Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro
2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet
Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL
2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming
event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS).
The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this
incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event.
This condition may be caused by the following:
- A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle
and the TIS2WEB terminal.
- The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event.
Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition.
SPS Programming Process Selection
Perform this procedure first.
1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS
application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When
selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new
BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS)
with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body
Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 3682
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
BCM Still Fails to Reprogram
If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following
modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes:
- BCM
- EBCM
- ECM
- IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox)
- TCM
3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to
turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace
and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using
the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to
the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3683
Body Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3684
Body Control Module: Diagrams
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3685
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3686
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3687
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3688
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3689
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3690
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3691
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3692
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3693
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3694
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3695
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Body Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3704
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3705
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3706
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3707
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket
Accessory Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket
Accessory Usage > Page 3713
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations > Page 3718
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations > Page 3719
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations > Page 3720
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3725
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3726
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3727
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics > Page 3728
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B
Date: November 18, 2010
Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed
Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it
necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of
these aftermarket components.
When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to
use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs,
special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the
same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty
repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM.
During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer
Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources,
the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order
the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers
written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or
warranted by General Motors.
It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and
accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed
by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design
characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully
understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use.
This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part
failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will
not be honored.
A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing
supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower
and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to
one or more of the following modifications:
- Propane injection
- Nitrous oxide injection
- Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems
- Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module
- Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector
- Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate
Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase
engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability
and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints,
drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the
installation of these devices.
General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when
installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or
06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for
calibration verification.
These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure
from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure
resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or
disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty.
Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal
inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory
Usage > Page 3734
results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories.
Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their
product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction
on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from
finding out that is has been installed.
Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada
by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair
is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the
customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the
appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors.
It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not
only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations > Page 3739
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations > Page 3740
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket
Calibrations > Page 3741
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3742
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3743
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3744
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3745
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3746
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3747
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3748
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3749
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3750
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3751
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3752
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3753
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3754
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
Engine Control Module Description
The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems,
and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics
monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system
performance degrades.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type.
A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions
related DTC.
The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls
system. The ECM controls the following components:
* The fuel injection system
* The ignition system
* The emission control systems
* The on-board diagnostics
* The A/C and fan systems
* The throttle actuation control (TAC) system
The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls
the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs
diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and
alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The
condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making
repairs.
ECM Function
The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This
is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases,
even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too
low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure
accurate voltage readings.
The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the
transistors or a device called an output driver module.
EEPROM
The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory
that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and
calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation.
Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in
order to reprogram the ECM.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of
accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan
tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The
DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is
controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition
that affects the vehicle emissions.
ECM Service Precautions
The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are
associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading
any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the
ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be
tested with a DMM.
Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs
This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive
levels of the following emissions:
* Hydrocarbons (HC)
* Carbon monoxide (CO)
* Oxides of nitrogen (NOx)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3755
* Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses
Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in
excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC
that is associated with the condition.
Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment
Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on
vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems.
Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at
the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a
vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No
allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment.
Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the
powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle
electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing
any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle.
After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage
Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module
(ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM.
The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very
low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic
discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components.
There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of
charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding
across a car seat.
Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly
charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off
leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage,
therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components.
Emissions Control Information Label
The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission
specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information.
This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in
liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated
emission components and vacuum hose schematic.
This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has
been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO).
Underhood Inspection
Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly.
Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing
the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further
steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection:
* Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects.
* Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see.
* Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions:
- Burned or chafed spots
- Pinched wires
- Contact with sharp edges
- Contact with hot exhaust manifolds
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3756
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Engine Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
3757
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID >
Page 3761
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3769
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3770
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3774
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 3785
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 3786
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 3787
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 3788
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
> Page 3789
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3792
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3793
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3794
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3795
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3798
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3799
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft
Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3800
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3808
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3809
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3810
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3811
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3812
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3813
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled
Views > Page 3814
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3815
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3816
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3817
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3823
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3824
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3825
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3826
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3827
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3828
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3829
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3830
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3831
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3832
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3833
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3834
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3835
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3836
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3837
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3838
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3839
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3840
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3841
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3842
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3843
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3844
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3845
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3846
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3847
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3848
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3849
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3850
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3851
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3852
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3853
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3854
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3855
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3856
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3857
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3858
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3859
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3860
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3861
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3862
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3863
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3864
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3865
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3866
Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3867
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3868
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3869
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3870
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3871
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3872
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3873
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3874
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3875
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3876
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3877
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3878
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3879
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3880
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3881
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3882
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3883
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3884
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3885
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3886
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3887
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3888
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3889
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3890
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3891
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3892
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3893
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3894
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3895
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3896
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3897
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3898
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3899
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3900
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3901
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3902
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3903
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3904
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3905
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3906
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3907
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3908
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3909
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3910
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3911
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3912
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3913
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3914
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3915
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3916
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3917
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3918
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3919
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3920
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3921
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3922
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3923
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3924
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3925
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3926
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3927
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3928
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3929
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3930
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3931
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3932
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3933
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3934
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3935
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3936
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3937
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3938
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3939
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3940
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3941
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3942
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3943
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3944
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3945
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3946
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3947
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3948
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3949
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3950
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3951
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3952
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3953
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3954
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3955
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3956
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3957
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3958
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3959
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3960
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3961
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3962
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3963
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3964
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3965
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3966
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3967
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Information Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3968
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3969
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3970
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3971
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3972
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3973
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3974
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3975
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3976
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3977
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3978
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3979
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3980
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3981
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3982
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3983
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3984
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3985
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3986
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3987
Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views
A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary
B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3988
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3989
Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management
diagrams.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3990
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3994
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3998
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3999
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4003
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page
4008
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page
4009
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page
4010
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page
4011
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4012
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4013
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4014
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor
Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor
Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4017
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4021
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4022
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4023
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Oil Filter Adapter
440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter
Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 4028
Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4029
Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4030
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4031
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4035
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4036
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams
B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF)
B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4037
B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4038
B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4039
B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4040
B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4041
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and
Oxygen Sensor Caution
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution
Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen
sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation.
Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector
and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of
any type.
Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring,
connector, or terminal is damaged.
This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires.
Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air
reference and degraded sensor performance.
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance.
* Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are
exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause
performance problems.
* Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks
could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize
the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor.
Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance.
* Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to
prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's
Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered
since this could result in the air reference being obstructed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and
Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 4044
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution
Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following:
* A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set
* HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available
Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S
failure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and
Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 4045
Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution
Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV
sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the
HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to
check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream
will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal
voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered
to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before
replacing the oxygen sensor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 4048
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 4049
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 4050
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views > Page 4055
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views > Page 4056
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4059
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4060
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4061
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4066
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4067
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page
4070
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page
4071
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page
4072
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Camshaft Actuator System Description
Camshaft Actuator System Overview
1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the
camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil
Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator
Housing
The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft
timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the
camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid
valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft
timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance
concerns:
* Engine power output
* Fuel economy
* Lower tailpipe emissions
The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP)
sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses
the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions:
* The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
* The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT)
* The mass air flow (MAF) sensor
* The throttle position (TP) sensor
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
* The volumetric efficiency
Operation
The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside
the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is
applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The
movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the
exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4076
applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top
dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft
movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve
until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the
CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP
actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve
directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also
command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the
current camshaft position.
The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the
solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP
actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing
and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the
CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with
CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a
condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake
or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4080
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4081
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagrams
Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4082
Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4083
Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4084
Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF)
Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4085
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 4088
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 4089
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid
Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 4090
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst
Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair
Catalyst Shield: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter Heat Shield Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views
Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 4101
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 4102
Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Fuel System Components
1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative
Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47
Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4103
Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagrams
Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LAF)
Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4104
Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4105
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4106
Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Solenoid Valve Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister. Refer to Evaporative Emission Canister
Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Rotate the EVAP canister vent valve counterclockwise
to release from the locked position.
3. Remove the vent valve from the EVAP canister.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4111
1. Insert the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve into the EVAP canister, with the valve aligned to
the released position.
2. Rotate vent valve clockwise to secure into the locked position. 3. Install the EVAP canister. Refer
to Evaporative Emission Canister Replacement (See: Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions
Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions
Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4120
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions
Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4121
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions
Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4122
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions
Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4123
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4129
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4130
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4131
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4132
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4133
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Line Replacement - Chassis to Canister
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement Front
PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Front
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement Front > Page 4139
PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Rear
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF)
....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa
(40-65 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 4144
Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions
Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Special Tools
CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge
Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service
Precautions).
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove
the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100,
refer to the manufacture's directions.
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4147
Warning
Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and
personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel
pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure
gauge is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps:
1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into
an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel
from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the
CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the
fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid
possible contamination in the system:
* The fuel pipe connections
* The hose connections
* The areas surrounding the connections
2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from
the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the
fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4148
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis
Fuel System Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM
detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains
active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel
pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage
to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure.
The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces
the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank.
Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions.
An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank.
The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high
pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion
chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure,
fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM).
The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel
pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet
pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The
primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates
a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through
the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank.
Reference Information Description and Operation
Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information Special Tools
* CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge
* J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter
Circuit/System Verification
Note:
* Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic.
* Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding.
* Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding.
* The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and
Instructions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4149
1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge
Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure
Gauge Installation and Removal).
Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the
fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580
kPa (84 psi).
2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel
pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and
does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module
Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between
276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
Circuit/System Testing
Note: *
The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* DO NOT start the engine.
* High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel
pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa
(84 psi).
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the
fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is
operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi).
‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed
below. If all items test normal, replace the primary
fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure:
1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel
Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel
feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter.
4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH
48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close
the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace
the primary fuel tank module.
3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease
more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank
module.
4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel
pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel
pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering.
‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test
normal, replace the primary fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections
5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls).
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe
Replacement)
* Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Fuel Pump/Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications > Page 4156
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW)
Description
The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct
idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for
production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for
reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for
example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned.
An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take
several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability
to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero.
The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow.
Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure
Reset Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* Ignition ON, engine OFF.
* The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph).
Learn Procedure
* DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120,
P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205,
P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606,
P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128,
P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set.
* The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM.
* The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa.
* The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s.
* The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts.
Throttle Learn
Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced)
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start
the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow
Compensation value should equal 0 percent and
the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed.
3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here.
Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced)
Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List
- Vehicle (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle).
1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and
the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed
should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes.
6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal.
Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle
speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above
70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations
and extended idles.
7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally.
‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat
step 6.
8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that
referred you here.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4160
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4161
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air
Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4172
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y.
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y.
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-015
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: General Motors' Position Regarding Use of E15 in Model Year 2007 and Newer Vehicles
Models:
2007-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
General Motors' position regarding the Environmental Protection Agency announcement allowing
the use of E 15 in 2007 and newer vehicles:
- General Motors' remains focused on securing a safe and positive driving experience for our
customers. GM believes that the waiver decision by the EPA regarding E 15 could lead to
confusion for consumers as to what fuel their vehicle should use. In response, we will continue to
encourage our customers to refer to their vehicle Owner Manual for proper fuel designation. The
vehicle Owner Manual specifies that fuels containing more than 10 percent ethanol should not be
used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation.
- GM has the largest fleet of flex fuel vehicles on the road today (over 4 million in the U.S.) and
these vehicles can safely use ethanol blends of up to 85 percent ethanol. So blends of E 15 (15
percent ethanol), as in the partial waiver announced, are appropriate for these vehicles. However,
ethanol blends greater than E 10 should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel
designation as they are not designed and certified to run on gasoline consisting of more than 10
percent ethanol-blend volume to avoid any unintended consequences, as per: their Owner Manual.
- We believe biofuels, especially E 85 ethanol, are an effective near-term solution to reduce
petroleum dependence and the carbon footprint of driving. As the global leader in producing
vehicles designed to handle ethanol blends from E 0 to E 85, GM offers 19 flexible-fuel vehicles for
the 2011 model year.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4177
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F
Date: December 13, 2010
Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise
Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and
Injectors
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011
Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011
GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L
VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that
operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and
ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when
outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and
is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise
on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel
pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick
at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel
injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal
direct injection fuel system operating properly.
DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The
clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may
wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4178
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G
Date: October 27, 2010
Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel
Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional
gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F
(Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate
Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I.
A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel
marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All
vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest
Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those
vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB
Top Tier Fuel Availability
Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first
national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada
began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began
offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline in May of 2010.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4179
Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards
The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane
grades :
Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta)
- Shell Canada (nationally)
- Petro-Canada (nationally)
- Sunoco-Canada (Ontario)
- Esso-Canada (nationally)
What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no
metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive
companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not
contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components.
Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased?
The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have
already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not
all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will
appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards.
Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW,
General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi.
Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in
gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a
detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to
keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency
requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any
detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of
detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed.
Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product.
Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER?
All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining
together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an
issue of concern to several automotive companies.
What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest
Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal
fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns.
Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline?
All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the
"Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have
experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website,
http://www.toptiergas.com/.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4180
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4181
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I
Date: August 17, 2009
Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance,
Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010
HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier
Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F.
A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel
marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All
vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest
Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related
concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive
Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards
As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline Standards:
- Chevron
- Chevron-Canada
- QuikTrip
- Conoco
Phillips 66
- 76
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4182
- Shell
- Shell-Canada
- Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area.
- MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri.
- Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa.
The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky.
Aloha Petroleum
- Tri-Par Oil Company
- Turkey Hill Minit Markets
- Texaco
- Petro-Canada
- Sunoco-Canada
- Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin
What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new,
voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the
detergent requirements imposed by the EPA.
Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased?
The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program
and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel
marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear
on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards.
Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers?
On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists.
Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi,
BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen.
Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in
gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However,
the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to
meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is
required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to
differentiate their product.
Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER?
All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining
together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies.
What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline?
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest
Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and
performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce
deposit related concerns.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4183
Fuel: Service Precautions
Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning
Warning
Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is
present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of
fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis
Fuel: Testing and Inspection Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis
Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Test Description
Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation,
stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector
at the lowest point in the fuel injection system and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system
is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust or deterioration.
Ethanol concentrations of greater than 10 percent can cause driveability conditions and fuel system
deterioration. Fuel with more than 10 percent ethanol could result in driveability conditions such as
hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. Excessive concentrations of ethanol used in vehicles
not designed for it may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and fuel
filter restriction.
Reference Information Special Tools
J 44175 Fuel Composition Tester
System Verification
The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank
will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear.
If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the
bottom of the sample, perform the Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure. If alcohol
contamination is suspected, perform the Alcohol in Fuel Testing procedure.
Alcohol in Fuel Testing with Special Tool
1. Test the fuel composition using J 44175 and Instruction Manual. 2. If water appears in the fuel
sample, clean the fuel system. 3. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM in order to obtain the
percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample. 4. If the fuel sample contains more than 15 percent
ethanol, add fresh, regular gasoline to the vehicle's fuel tank. 5. Test the fuel composition. 6. If
testing shows the ethanol percentage is still more than 15 percent, replace the fuel in the vehicle.
Alcohol in Fuel Testing without Special Tool
1. Using a 100 ml (3.38 oz) specified cylinder with 1 ml (0.034 oz) graduation marks, fill the cylinder
with fuel to the 90 ml (3.04 oz) mark. 2. Add 10 ml (0.34 oz) of water in order to bring the total fluid
volume to 100 ml (3.38 oz) and install a stopper. 3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10-15
seconds. 4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure. 5. Re-install the stopper
and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10-15 seconds. 6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for
approximately 5 minutes in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the
fuel, the
volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and water, will be more than 10 ml
(0.34 oz). For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml (0.51 oz), this
indicates at least 5 percent alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat
more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel.
Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure
1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter (0.53 qt) of fuel. 2. Place the
container on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow settling of the particulate
contamination. Particulate
contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white
or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis > Page 4186
3. Observe the fuel sample. If any physical contaminants or water are present, clean the fuel
system.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel System Cleaning (See: Service and Repair)
* Fuel Tank Draining (See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Procedures)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis > Page 4187
Fuel: Testing and Inspection Fuel Composition Diagnosis
Fuel Composition Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
When an E85 compatible vehicle is built, an engine control module (ECM) or powertrain control
module (PCM) replaced, or when the learned alcohol content has been reset with a scan tool, the
fuel system will need to contain ASTM gasoline with 15 % or less ethanol content. If the fuel in the
fuel system needs to be drained and replaced with ASTM gasoline, the engine will need to run at
operating temperature and consume at least 1 liter (0.3 gallon) of fuel before the system will
recognize the correct alcohol content. Either ASTM gasoline or ASTM E85 fuel can then be used.
In order that the ECM/PCM recognizes a proper next fuel fill, the amount must be 11 liters (3
gallons) or more, and the ethanol content must be between 0-85 %.
Reference Information Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan
tool information Special Tools
* J 44175 - Fuel Composition Tester
* J 44175-A - Fuel Composition Tester
Circuit/System Verification
1. Observe the Fuel Composition Learn parameter using the scan tool. The Fuel Composition
Learn parameter should display Inactive.
Note:
* The key needs to be turned OFF for at least 30 s after the parameter displays Inactive to properly
store the ethanol learned value in the ECM/PCM memory.
* The vehicle may need to be driven more than 11 km (7 mi) with the engine at operating
temperature.
‹› If the Fuel Composition Learn parameter displays Active, drive the vehicle until the Fuel
Composition Learn parameter displays Inactive.
2. Record the ECM/PCM estimated value of the ethanol content using a scan tool. 3. Record the
actual measured percentage of ethanol content using the J 44175 - Tester or J 44175-A - Tester.
The ECM/PCM estimated value
should be within 15 % of the ethanol content measured with the J 44175 - Tester.
‹› If the ECM/PCM estimated value is not within 15 % of the ethanol content measured with the
J44175 Tester continue with Circuit/System
Testing.
Circuit/System Testing - J44175 Ethanol Content Less Than 15 %
1. Use the scan tool to reset the Fuel Alcohol Content parameter to 3 %. 2. Use the scan tool to
reset the fuel trim values.
Circuit/System Testing - J44175 Ethanol Content More Than 15 %
1. Perform a complete key cycle, key ON, engine OFF, in order to ensure that the ECM/PCM
recognizes a refueling event.
Note: It may be necessary to partially drain the fuel tank.
2. Key OFF, add at least 11 liters (3 gallons) of non-blended gasoline to the fuel tank. 3. Use the
scan tool to reset the Fuel Alcohol Content parameter to 3 %.
Note: In order to ensure the non-blended gasoline has reached the fuel injectors, the vehicle may
need to be driven more than 11 km (7 mi) with
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis > Page 4188
the engine at operating temperature.
4. Drive the vehicle until the Fuel Composition Learn parameter displays Inactive. 5. Use the scan
tool to reset the fuel trim values.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel System Cleaning (See: Service and Repair)
* Fuel Tank Draining (See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Procedures)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Relief
Warning
Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS
depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure.
Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before
removing the high pressure fuel line.
1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low
pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine
stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the
scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up
Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F
Date: December 13, 2010
Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise
Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and
Injectors
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011
Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011
GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L
VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that
operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and
ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when
outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and
is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise
on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel
pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick
at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel
injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal
direct injection fuel system operating properly.
DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The
clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may
wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up > Page 4197
Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025D
Date: January 07, 2010
Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise
Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and
Injectors
Models:
2009-2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010 Cadillac SRX
2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2010 GMC Acadia 2010
GMC Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 2.8L, 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6
Engine (VINs 4, G, D, V - RPOs LAU, LF1, LLT)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and engine RPOs. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
The 2.8L, 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LAU, LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system
that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking
and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident
when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during
idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking
noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up
high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will
continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound
is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of
a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly.
DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The
clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may
wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4198
Fuel Injector: Specifications
Fuel Injector Resistance
............................................................................................................................................................
1.9-2.3 ohm at 20°C (68°F).
Initial injector opening ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................... 65 V Holding open .....................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
12V
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4199
Fuel Injector: Diagrams
Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LAF)
Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4200
Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LAF)
Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4201
Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4202
Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4203
Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LAF)
Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4204
Q17E Fuel Injector 5 (LF1)
Q17F Fuel Injector 6 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4205
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4206
Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection
Fuel Injector Solenoid Coil Test
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies a separate high voltage supply circuit and a high
voltage control circuit for each fuel injector. The injector high voltage supply circuit and the high
voltage control circuit are both controlled by the ECM. The ECM energizes each fuel injector by
grounding the control circuit. The ECM controls each fuel injector with 65 V. This is controlled by a
boost capacitor in the ECM. During the 65 V boost phase, the capacitor is discharged through an
injector, allowing for initial injector opening. The injector is then held open with 12 V. A fuel injector
coil winding resistance that is too high or too low will affect the engine driveability. The fuel injector
coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will
increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Component Testing
Note:
* The resistance test must be performed at the fuel injector or mis-diagnosis will occur.
* The DMM and test leads must be calibrated to 0 ohm in order to prevent mis-diagnosis.
1. Test for 1.9-2.3 ohm at 20°C (68°F) between the high voltage supply circuit terminal 2 and the
high voltage control circuit terminal 1 at the Q17
fuel injector.
‹› If not within the specified range, replace the Q17 fuel injector.
2. Measure the resistance between each terminal at the Q17 fuel injector and the Q17 fuel injector
housing/case. The DMM should display OL ohm.
‹› If less than the specified value, replace the Q17 fuel injector.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 (LF1) (See: Fuel Rail/Service and
Repair/Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1)
* Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2 (LF1) (See: Fuel Rail/Service and
Repair/Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4207
Fuel Injector: Service and Repair
Fuel Injector and Fuel Rail Replacement
Special Tools
EN-47909 - Fuel Injector Bore and Sleeve Cleaning Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools
and Equipment).
Removal Procedure
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
(LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and
Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
5. Remove the foam insulator from the fuel rails. 6. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder
Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head
Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side)
7. Remove the bolts (1) from the bank 2 fuel rail. 8. Remove the bank 1 fuel rail and injectors (1) as
an assembly. Refer to Cylinder Head Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble).
9. Disconnect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4208
10. If the bank 2 fuel rail or injectors are being serviced, remove them. Refer to Cylinder Head
Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling
and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble).
11. Disconnect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections.
Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the
fuel rail or cylinder head.
12. It is necessary to rebuild the fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and
Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
1. Clean the fuel injector bores using EN-47909 - kit. 2. Ensure that the fuel injectors have been
properly rebuilt and lubricated. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or
LFW) (
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors
Cleaning and Inspection).
3. Connect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections. 4. Position the
bank 2 fuel rail and evenly hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the
injector bores. Remove the bolts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4209
5. Connect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections. 6. Position the bank 1 fuel rail and evenly
hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the injector bores. 7. Start and hand
tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
8. Tighten the bank 1 and bank 2 fuel rail bolts.
* Tighten the inner fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
* Tighten the outer fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
9. Replace any wire harness tie straps cut from the fuel rails.
10. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head
Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side)
11. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1)
(See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel
Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
12. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure:
1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10
seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks.
Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well.
13. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 14. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake
Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
15. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply
Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
16. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service
Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service
Special Tools
* CH-41769 - Fuel Line Disconnect Tool Set
* CH-44581 - Fuel Line Disconnect Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools
and Equipment).
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service Precautions).
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the retainer from the quick-connect fitting.
Warning
Wear safety glasses when using compressed air, as flying dirt particles may cause eye injury.
3. Blow dirt out of the fitting using compressed air.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4214
4. Depending on the fuel line size and ability to access the fitting, choose the appropriate tool:
CH-41769 - fuel line disconnect tool set or CH-44581
- fuel line disconnect tool. Insert the CH-41769 - fuel line disconnect tool set or CH-44581 - fuel line
disconnect tool into the female connector, then push inward to release the locking tabs.
5. Pull the connection apart.
Caution: If necessary, remove rust or burrs from the fuel pipes with an emery cloth. Use a radial
motion with the fuel pipe end in order to prevent damage to the O-ring sealing surface. Use a clean
shop towel in order to wipe off the male tube ends. Inspect all the connections for dirt and burrs.
Clean or replace the components and assemblies as required.
6. Using a clean shop towel, wipe off the male pipe end. 7. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt
and burrs. 8. Clean or replace the components as required.
Installation Procedure
Warning
In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, before connecting fuel pipe fittings, always
apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends.
This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak.
During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent
proper reconnection if not lubricated.
1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end.
2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together to cause the retaining tabs to snap into
place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4215
3. Pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting to make sure the connection is secure.
4. Install the retainer to the quick-connect fitting. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition OFF, for 10
seconds. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition OFF. 5.
Inspect for leaks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4216
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service
Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service Precautions).
Note: There are several types of Plastic Collar Fuel and Evaporative Emission Quick Connect
Fittings used on this vehicle.
* Bartholomew (1)
* Q Release (2)
* Squeeze to Release (3)
* Sliding Retainer (4)
* Global Connect (5)
* TI Loc (6)
* Safe Lock (7)
The following instructions apply to all of these types of Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fittings except
where indicated.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel
Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair).
Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4217
2. Using compressed air, blow any dirt out of the quick-connect fitting.
3. This step applies to Bartholomew style connectors ONLY. Squeeze the plastic quick-connect
fitting release tabs.
4. This step applies to Q Release style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by Pushing the tab
toward the other side of the slot in the fitting.
5. This step applies to Squeeze to Release style connectors ONLY. Squeeze where indicated by
arrows on both sides of the plastic ring surrounding
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4218
the quick-connect fitting.
6. This step applies to Squeeze to Release style connectors ONLY. Push in the male side slightly
in order to slide the retainer away from the
retainers, squeeze where indicated by arrows on both sides of the plastic ring surrounding the
quick-connect fitting.
7. This step applies to Sliding Retainer style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by pressing on
one side of the release tab causing it to push in
slightly. If the tab doesn't move try pressing the tab in from the opposite side. The tab will only
move in one direction.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4219
8. This step applies to the Global Connector style only. Push the connector toward the tube in order
to release the pressure. Press and hold down the
release mechanism, and pull the connector straight out.
9. This step applies to the TI Loc style only. Push the connector toward the tube in order to release
the pressure. Release the redundant latch (1) with
two fingers or a flat bladed tool. Then press and hold down the bottom release mechanism (2) and
pull the connector straight out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4220
10. This step applies to the Safe Lock style only. Push the connector toward the tube in order to
release the pressure. Release the second latch (1) with
two fingers. Then press and hold down the bottom release mechanism (2) and pull the connector
straight out. Warning: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning (See: Fuel Pressure/Service
Precautions).
11. Using a clean shop towel, wipe off the male pipe end. 12. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt
and burrs. 13. Clean or replace components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Warning: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Warning (See: Service Precautions).
1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end.
2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together in order to cause the retaining feature to
snap into place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4221
3. Pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting to make sure the connection is secure.
4. Insert the tube in the connector until the retainer snaps in place. 5. Push down on the redundant
latch (1) until it is fully engaged and snapped into position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4222
6. Insert the tube in the connector until the retainer snaps in place. 7. Push down on the second
latch (1) in order to secure the connection. 8. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition OFF, for 10
seconds. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition OFF. 5.
Inspect for leaks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Fuel Rail (LF1)
1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5
- Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4227
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4228
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4229
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed
Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 4232
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel
Injection Fuel Rail
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF)
....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa
(40-65 psi).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 4237
Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions
Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal
Special Tools
CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge
Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service
Precautions).
Warning
Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in
order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small
amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the
connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a
shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an
approved container when the disconnection is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove
the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100,
refer to the manufacture's directions.
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4240
Warning
Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and
personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel
pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure
gauge is complete.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps:
1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into
an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel
from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the
CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the
fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container.
Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid
possible contamination in the system:
* The fuel pipe connections
* The hose connections
* The areas surrounding the connections
2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from
the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the
fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4241
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis
Fuel System Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM
detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains
active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel
pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage
to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure.
The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces
the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank.
Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions.
An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank.
The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high
pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion
chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure,
fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM).
The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel
pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet
pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The
primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates
a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through
the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank.
Reference Information Description and Operation
Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical
Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information Special Tools
* CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge
* J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter
Circuit/System Verification
Note:
* Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic.
* Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding.
* Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding.
* The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and
Instructions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4242
1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge
Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure
Gauge Installation and Removal).
Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the
fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580
kPa (84 psi).
2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel
pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and
does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module
Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between
276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
Circuit/System Testing
Note: *
The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest
possible fuel pressure.
* DO NOT start the engine.
* High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel
pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa
(84 psi).
1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the
fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is
operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi).
‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed
below. If all items test normal, replace the primary
fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure:
1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel
Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel
feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter.
4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH
48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close
the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace
the primary fuel tank module.
3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease
more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min.
‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank
module.
4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel
pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel
pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering.
‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test
normal, replace the primary fuel tank module.
* Restricted fuel feed pipe
* Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections
5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls).
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe
Replacement)
* Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4246
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4247
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1
Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 (LF1)
Special Tools
EN-49248 - Injector Rail Assembly Remover
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/Special Tools).
Removal Procedure
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
(LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and
Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
5. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side).
6. Remove the foam insulator from the fuel rails.
7. Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor electrical connector and cut the wire harness tie straps. 8.
Remove the fuel rail bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4252
9. Remove the fuel rail and injectors (1) as an assembly using the EN-49248 - remover.
10. Remove the fuel pressure sensor. Refer to Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection
Fuel Rail (LF1) (See: Fuel Pressure
Sensor/Switch/Service and Repair/Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail).
11. Remove and discard the direct fuel injector hold down clamps.
Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the
fuel rail or cylinder head.
12. Once the fuel rail is removed, remove the fuel injectors and rebuild them. Refer to Fuel Rail and
Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW)
(See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and
Injectors Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the fuel rail with injectors (2) into the cylinder head evenly. 2. Install NEW direct injector
hold down clamps to the injector. 3. Hand tighten the two outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injector in
the injector bores. 4. Start and hand tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts and tighten the fuel rail
bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4253
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the fuel rail bolts in the sequence shown:
1. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail bolts first pass to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 2. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail
bolts final pass to 23 Nm (17 lb ft).
6. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1)
(See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel
Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
7. Install the high pressure fuel sensor. Refer to Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel
Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) (See: Fuel Pressure
Sensor/Switch/Service and Repair/Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail).
8. Connect the fuel injector wiring harness electrical connector to the fuel injectors, fuel rail and fuel
pressure sensor. 9. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure:
1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10
seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks.
Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well.
10. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 11. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake
Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
12. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply
Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
13. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side).
14. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap. 15. Install the fuel tank cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4254
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2
Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2 (LF1)
Special Tools
EN-49248 - Injector Rail Assembly Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
(LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and
Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
5. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side).
6. Remove the fuel rail bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4255
7. Remove the fuel rail and injectors (1) as an assembly using the EN-49248 - remover. 8. Remove
and discard the direct fuel injector hold down clamps.
Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the
fuel rail or cylinder head.
9. Once the fuel rail is removed, remove the fuel injectors and rebuild them. Refer to Fuel Rail and
Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW)
(See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and
Injectors Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the fuel rail with injectors (2) into the cylinder head evenly. 2. Hand tighten the two outer
fuel rail bolts to seat the injector in the injector bores. 3. Start and hand tighten the remaining fuel
rail bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4256
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Tighten the fuel rail bolts in the sequence shown:
1. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail bolts first pass to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 2. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail
bolts a final pass to 23 Nm (17 lb ft).
5. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1)
(See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel
Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
6. Connect the fuel injector wiring harness electrical connector from the fuel injectors, fuel rail and
fuel pressure sensor. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure:
1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10
seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks.
Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well.
8. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 9. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold
Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
10. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply
Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
11. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side).
12. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap. 13. Install the fuel tank cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4257
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injector and Fuel Rail Replacement
Fuel Injector and Fuel Rail Replacement
Special Tools
EN-47909 - Fuel Injector Bore and Sleeve Cleaning Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools
and Equipment).
Removal Procedure
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure
Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
(LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and
Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
5. Remove the foam insulator from the fuel rails. 6. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder
Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head
Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side)
7. Remove the bolts (1) from the bank 2 fuel rail. 8. Remove the bank 1 fuel rail and injectors (1) as
an assembly. Refer to Cylinder Head Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble).
9. Disconnect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4258
10. If the bank 2 fuel rail or injectors are being serviced, remove them. Refer to Cylinder Head
Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling
and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble).
11. Disconnect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections.
Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the
fuel rail or cylinder head.
12. It is necessary to rebuild the fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and
Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection).
Installation Procedure
1. Clean the fuel injector bores using EN-47909 - kit. 2. Ensure that the fuel injectors have been
properly rebuilt and lubricated. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or
LFW) (
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors
Cleaning and Inspection).
3. Connect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections. 4. Position the
bank 2 fuel rail and evenly hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the
injector bores. Remove the bolts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4259
5. Connect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections. 6. Position the bank 1 fuel rail and evenly
hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the injector bores. 7. Start and hand
tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
8. Tighten the bank 1 and bank 2 fuel rail bolts.
* Tighten the inner fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
* Tighten the outer fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
9. Replace any wire harness tie straps cut from the fuel rails.
10. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head
Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side)
11. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1)
(See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel
Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement).
12. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure:
1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10
seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks.
Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well.
13. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 14. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake
Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
15. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply
Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield
Replacement).
16. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Line - Chassis
Fuel Line Replacement - Chassis
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis > Page 4264
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement
Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis > Page 4265
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis > Page 4266
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement
Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Filler Neck: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Housing Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Application and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 4277
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4282
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4283
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page
4287
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4292
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4293
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4297
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Fuel Rail (LF1)
1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5
- Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 4302
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views >
Page 4303
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4304
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure
Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed
Pipe
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure
Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 4307
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel
Injection Fuel Rail
Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Diagrams
Throttle Body: Diagrams
Q38 Throttle Body
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Throttle Body: Procedures
Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning
Note: Over extended time and mileage, deposits may accumulate on the back of the throttle valve
plate. The source of the deposit is exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) gas. Typically these deposits
pose no problem. Occasionally the deposit may accumulate to a point where perceived pedal effort
or throttle valve movement is effected. This procedure should not be performed on vehicles with
mileage under 80 450 km (50,000 mi).
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement (See: Air
Cleaner Housing/Air Cleaner Fresh Air
Duct/Hose/Service and Repair).
Warning
Turn OFF the ignition before inserting fingers into the throttle bore. Unexpected movement of the
throttle blade could cause personal injury.
Caution: Do not insert any tools into the throttle body bore in order to avoid damage to the throttle
valve plate.
2. Inspect the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate for deposits. You will need to open the
throttle valve in order to inspect all surfaces.
Caution: Do not use any solvent that contains Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent may
damage fuel system components.
3. Clean the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate using a clean shop towel with GM top
engine cleaner, GM P/N 1052626 (Canadian P/N
993026) or AC-Delco Carburetor Tune-Up Conditioner, P/N X66-P, or an equivalent product.
4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement (See: Air
Cleaner Housing/Air Cleaner Fresh Air
Duct/Hose/Service and Repair).
5. Perform the idle learn procedure. Refer to Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle/Idle Learn).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4313
Throttle Body: Removal and Replacement
Throttle Body Assembly Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > System Information >
Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
Information not supplied by the manufacturer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4325
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4326
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4327
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4328
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4329
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4330
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4331
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4332
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4333
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4334
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4335
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4338
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4339
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4340
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4345
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4346
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4347
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4348
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4349
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4350
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4351
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4352
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4353
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4354
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LAF)
T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4358
T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4359
T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4360
T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4361
T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4362
T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4363
T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4364
T8E Ignition Coil 5 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4365
T8F Ignition Coil 6 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4366
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4367
Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection
Electronic Ignition System Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The ignition system on this engine uses individual ignition coils and ignition control circuits for each
cylinder. Ignition voltage is supplied to each bank of ignition coils. The engine control module
(ECM) controls the ignition system operation. The ECM controls each coil using the ignition control
circuits. The ECM commands the ignition control circuit low when a spark event is requested. The
sequencing and timing are controlled by the ECM.
Diagnostic Aids
* The ignition coils for each bank are fused separately. If a fuse opens or the ignition voltage circuit
opens between the fuse and the splice, all the ignition coils for one bank of the engine would be
inoperative. If the ground circuit opens at the engine block, the ignition coils would be inoperative
for one bank of the engine.
* Inspect the ignition coils for aftermarket devices. An aftermarket device connected to the ignition
coil circuits, may cause a condition with the ignition coils.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Electronic Ignition System Description (See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and
Operation/Electronic Ignition System Description) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information Special Tools
* EL 26792 - Spark Tester
* For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools
and Equipment).
Circuit/System Testing
Note: Do not perform this diagnostic procedure if you were not sent here from a misfire DTC or the
Engine Cranks but Does Not Run diagnostic.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector of the affected T8 ignition coil. 2. Ignition ON,
test for battery voltage between the ignition voltage circuit terminal D or 2 and ground.
‹› If less than B+, test the ignition voltage circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If
the circuit tests normal and the ignition
circuit fuse is open, test all the components connected to the ignition voltage circuit and replace as
necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4368
3. Crank or start the engine. Test for 200-400 mV between the appropriate ignition control circuit
terminal C or 1 and ground.
‹› If less than the specified value, test the ignition control circuit for a short to ground or an
open/high resistance. If the circuit/connection tests
normal, replace the K20 ECM.
‹› If greater than the specified value, test the ignition control circuit for a short to voltage. If the
circuit/connection tests normal, replace the K20
ECM.
4. Ignition OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, this may take up to 2 min, test for less than 5 ohm
between the low reference circuit terminal B or 3 and the
K20 ECM housing.
‹› If greater than the specified value, test for an open/high resistance in the low reference circuit. If
the circuit/connection tests normal, replace
the K20 ECM.
5. Test for less than 5 ohm between the ground circuit terminal A or 4 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified value, test for an open, or high resistance in the ground circuit.
6. Remove the T8 ignition coil from the engine. Connect the harness. 7. Remove the fuse for the
fuel pump or the fuel pump control module, if equipped. 8. Crank the engine and test for strong
spark using the EL 26792 - Tester.
‹› If no spark or weak spark is observed, replace the T8 ignition coil.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and
Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1)
* Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for ECM
replacement, setup, and programming
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1
Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
2. Disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (1) from the ignition coil(s) (4).
3. Remove the ignition coil bolt(s). 4. Remove the ignition coil(s).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4371
1. Install the ignition coil(s).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the ignition coil bolt(s).
Tighten the bolt(s) to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
3. Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (1) to the ignition coil(s) (4). 4. Install
the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4372
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2
Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (5) from the ignition coil(s) (4).
3. Remove the ignition coil bolt(s). 4. Remove the ignition coil(s).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4373
1. Install the ignition coil(s).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the ignition coil bolt(s).
Tighten the bolt(s) to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
3. Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (5) to the ignition coil(s) (4). 4. Install
the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Ignition Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4377
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4382
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4383
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4384
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4385
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4386
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4387
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4388
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4391
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System >
Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System >
Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4396
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Camshaft Timing Components
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4402
17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower
Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right
Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary
Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Engine Front Cover
1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump
Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position
Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front
Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4403
13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump
Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4404
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4405
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4406
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4407
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4408
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4409
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4410
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4411
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4412
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank
2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank
2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4415
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
(Left Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank
2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4416
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Exhaust
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank
2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4417
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
(Right Side) Intake
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake
Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump
Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine
Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4422
17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat
Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt
- Long
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4423
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Camshaft Cover Assembly
250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4424
253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft
Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft
Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting
O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator
704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug
719 - Spark Plug
Camshaft Timing Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4425
1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake
Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft
Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left
Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary
Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary
Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4426
25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4427
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4428
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4429
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4430
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn
Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the
following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set:
* An engine replacement
* An engine control module (ECM) replacement
* A crankshaft balancer replacement
* A crankshaft replacement
* A crankshaft position sensor replacement
* Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship.
Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to
continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure.
1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except
DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform
the following:
1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from
OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle
engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral.
Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine
starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to
throttle position after the learn procedure is complete.
9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs.
4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify
DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle.
‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set.
7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft
position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF
the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4431
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 4436
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position.
4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or
similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch
housing.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder
Coding - Ignition (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 4437
2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start
switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock
cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement
(See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views
Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1)
1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock
Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor
Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder
Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine
Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat
Housing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4442
17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long
19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate
Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump
Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32
- Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block
Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4443
Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4444
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4445
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4446
Knock Sensor: Diagrams
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4447
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4448
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4451
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4455
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Ignition System Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4456
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Usage
* Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability
conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Specifications) for the correct spark plug.
* Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the
following conditions:
- Spark plug fouling-Colder plug
- Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug
Spark Plug Inspection
* Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage.
- Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1).
- Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should
NOT move.
* Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical
charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the
following conditions:
- Inspect the spark plug boot for damage.
- Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or
water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4457
* Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack
instead of the electrodes (3, 4).
* Inspect for evidence of improper arcing.
- Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to
Ignition System Specifications (See: Specifications). An excessively wide electrode gap can
prevent correct spark plug operation.
- Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See:
Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark
plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack.
- Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4).
- Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3).
- Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug.
* A rattling sound indicates internal damage.
* A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity.
- Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the
gap.
- Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped.
- Inspect for excessive fouling.
* Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can
cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation.
Spark Plug Visual Inspection
* Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal
combustion by-products from fuels with additives.
* Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions:
- Rich fuel mixtures
* Leaking fuel injectors
* Excessive fuel pressure
* Restricted air filter element
* Incorrect combustion
- Reduced ignition system voltage output
* Weak coils
* Worn ignition wires
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4458
* Incorrect spark plug gap
- Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that
normal combustion deposits may not burn off.
* Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white
coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless
they form into a glazing over the electrode.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4459
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
Spark Plug Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition
Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning).
Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could
result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the
contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper
seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination.
2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity.
Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark
plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head
threads.
3. Remove the spark plug.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4460
Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that
are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type
can severely damage the engine.
Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set
gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check.
Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even
damage the engine.
1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition
System Specifications (See: Specifications).
Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is
fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head.
Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust
blow-by, or thread damage.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the spark plug.
Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition Coil/Service
and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank
1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil
Replacement - Bank 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4468
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4469
Shift Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4474
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4475
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4476
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4477
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4478
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4479
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4480
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4481
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4482
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4483
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4484
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4485
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4486
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4487
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4488
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4489
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4490
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4491
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4492
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4493
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4494
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4495
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4496
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4497
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4498
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4499
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4500
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4501
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4502
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4503
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4504
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4505
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4506
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4507
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4508
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4509
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4510
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4511
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4512
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4513
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4514
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4515
Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4516
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4517
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4518
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4519
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4520
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4521
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4522
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4523
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4524
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4525
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4526
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4527
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4528
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4529
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4530
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4531
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4532
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4533
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4534
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4535
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4536
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4537
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4538
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4539
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4540
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4541
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4542
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4543
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4544
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4545
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4546
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4547
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4548
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4549
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4550
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4551
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4552
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4553
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4554
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4555
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4556
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4557
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4558
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4559
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4560
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4561
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4562
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4563
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4564
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4565
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4566
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4567
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4568
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4569
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4570
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4571
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4572
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4573
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4574
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4575
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4576
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4577
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4578
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4579
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4580
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4581
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4582
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4583
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4584
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4585
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4586
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4587
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4588
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4589
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4590
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4591
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4592
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4593
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4594
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4595
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4596
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4597
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4598
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4599
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4600
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4601
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4602
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4603
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4604
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4605
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4606
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4607
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4608
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4609
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4610
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4611
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4612
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4613
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4614
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4615
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4616
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4617
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4618
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4619
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4620
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4621
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4622
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4623
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4624
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4625
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4626
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4627
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4628
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4629
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4630
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4631
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4632
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4633
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4634
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4635
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4636
Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid
Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed
Sensor Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4637
16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual
Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input
Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill
Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential
Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly
Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2)
400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403
- Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve
405 - Control Valve Body Assembly
Component Location
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4638
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly
17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4639
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front
Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump
Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4640
20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and
Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case
Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve
Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual
Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4641
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 -
Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque
Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model
Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input
Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover
Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4642
Shift Solenoid: Connector Views
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4643
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4649
6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. 7. Remove the control solenoid valve
assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4650
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4651
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4652
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4653
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4654
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4659
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4660
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4661
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4662
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4663
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4664
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4665
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4666
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4667
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4668
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4669
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4670
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4671
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4672
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4673
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4674
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4675
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4676
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4677
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4678
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4679
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4680
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4681
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4682
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4683
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4684
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4685
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4686
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4687
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4688
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4689
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4690
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4691
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4692
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4693
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4694
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4695
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4696
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4697
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4698
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4699
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4700
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4701
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4702
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4703
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4704
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4705
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4706
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4707
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4708
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4709
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4710
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4711
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4712
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4713
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4714
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4715
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4716
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4717
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4718
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4719
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4720
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4721
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4722
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4723
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4724
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4725
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4726
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4727
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4728
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4729
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4730
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4731
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4732
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4733
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4734
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4735
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4736
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4737
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4738
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4739
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4740
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4741
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4742
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4743
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4744
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4745
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4746
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4747
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4748
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4749
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4750
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4751
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4752
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4753
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4754
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4755
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4756
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4757
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4758
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4759
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4760
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4761
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4762
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4763
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4764
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4765
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4766
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4767
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4768
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4769
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4770
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4771
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4772
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4773
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4774
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4775
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4776
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4777
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4778
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4779
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4780
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4781
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4782
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4783
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4784
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4785
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4788
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4789
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4790
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4791
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4806
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4807
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4808
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4809
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4810
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4811
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4812
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4813
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4814
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4815
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4816
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4817
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4818
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4819
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4820
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4821
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4822
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 4838
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 4839
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed
Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot
Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot
Data Using (GDS) > Page 4849
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot
Data Using (GDS) > Page 4850
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4853
6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. 7. Remove the control solenoid valve
assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4854
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4855
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4856
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4857
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4858
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
Transmission Mode Switch: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4868
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4869
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4872
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4873
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4874
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4878
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4879
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4880
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4881
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4882
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4883
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4884
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4887
16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch
Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction
Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4888
11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans
Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output
Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring
Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal
Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and
Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter
Assembly
3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly
500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft
Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston
Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch
Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate
508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510
- 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4889
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4890
14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential
Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and
Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch
Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control
Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid
Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4891
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4892
25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque
Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin
- Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent
31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans
Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons
400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS
O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal
Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer
Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4895
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5.
Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4896
1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve
body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4897
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4898
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
> Page 4907
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
> Page 4908
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
> Page 4909
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
> Page 4910
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift
Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift
Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4921
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4922
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4923
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4928
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4929
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4930
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4931
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 4941
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 4942
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 4943
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C
Date: August 13, 2010
Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas
Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009
HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only
Attention:
This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines,
refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter
part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control
calibrations being used.
When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects
powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear
axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses,
and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a
policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining
warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a
non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is
subsequently removed.
Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at
time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches
the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions
performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from
calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components,
leading to poor performance and or shortened life.
Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same
emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes,
individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the
parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties.
This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM
recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or
transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being
replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure
be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated.
The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a
picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing
any V8 gas powered engine replacement.
If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining
powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be
notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission.
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select:
Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID
Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If
"I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order
to display the calibration information.
‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain
the CVN information.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4949
8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine
Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as
shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair
order.
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
9. E-mail a copy of the picture to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the
phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification
Number Screen
If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then
perform the following steps:
1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90
seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle.
Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation.
‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds
again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the
same screen for proper operation.
Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle
This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on
Global A vehicles.
1. Turn OFF the ignition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4950
2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow
the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic
Screen will appear.
Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in
Step 18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID
Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear.
Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen
Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events.
23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on
the screen:
- Calibration History Buffer
- Number of Calibration History Events Stored
- Calibration Part Number History
- Calibration Verification Number History
24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and
retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4951
Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file.
27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to
[email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail
include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN
and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC.
Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern.
Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail
reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM.
28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details.
‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM
Technical Assistance to discuss warranty
concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be
directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada).
29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the
assembly. This will provide them time to receive,
review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual
documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC.
Warranty Information
- The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use
of labor operation Z1111.
- Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the
situation.
- All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval.
- Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected
Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504
Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09333A
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission
Diagnostics
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include
instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to
completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued
January 2010.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions
diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year
Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require
reprogramming of the engine control module.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km)
base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for
vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles
within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and
Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts.
Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency
situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order.
Claim Information
For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty:
1. Submit a claim using the table below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4956
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2).
3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions
canister (1).
4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP
jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large
diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter
8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4957
5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP
emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller
diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in)
EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between
the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan.
7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2)
into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6)
through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or
fuel line with the tie wrap.
9. Cut off excess tie strap (6).
10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the
fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the
front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel
drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top
of the park brake cable routing.
12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear
right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to
the fuel tank.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4958
14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose.
Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent
the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area.
15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right
(passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9)
with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration.
16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the
Claim section of the bulletin.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service
Procedure in this bulletin.
ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE
Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for
this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface
(MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the
calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it
will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123.
Do NOT attempt to reprogram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4959
For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System
(TIS) terminal.
1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a
charge during programming. Only use an approved
Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming.
2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System
(SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if
required.
1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle.
Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen.
2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming
Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported
Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 4967
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4968
Shift Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4971
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4972
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4973
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4974
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4975
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4976
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4977
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4978
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4979
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4980
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4981
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4982
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4983
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4984
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4985
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4986
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4987
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4988
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4989
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4990
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4991
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4992
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4993
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4994
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4995
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4996
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4997
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4998
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 4999
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5000
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5001
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5002
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5003
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5004
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5005
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5006
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5007
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5008
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5009
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5010
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5011
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5012
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5013
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5014
Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5015
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5016
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5017
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5018
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5019
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5020
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5021
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5022
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5023
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5024
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5025
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5026
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5027
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5028
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5029
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5030
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5031
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5032
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5033
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5034
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5035
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5036
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5037
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5038
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5039
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5040
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5041
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5042
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5043
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5044
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5045
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5046
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5047
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5048
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5049
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5050
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5051
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5052
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5053
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5054
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5055
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5056
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5057
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5058
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5059
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5060
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5061
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5062
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5063
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5064
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5065
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5066
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5067
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5068
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5069
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5070
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5071
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5072
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5073
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5074
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5075
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5076
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5077
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5078
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5079
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5080
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5081
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5082
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5083
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5084
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5085
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5086
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5087
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5088
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5089
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5090
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5091
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5092
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5093
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5094
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5095
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5096
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5097
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5098
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5099
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5100
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5101
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5102
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5103
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5104
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5105
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5106
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5107
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5108
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5109
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5110
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5111
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5112
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5113
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5114
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5115
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5116
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5117
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5118
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5119
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5120
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5121
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5122
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5123
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5124
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5125
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5126
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5127
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5128
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5129
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5130
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5131
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5132
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5133
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5134
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5135
Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid
Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed
Sensor Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5136
16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual
Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input
Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill
Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential
Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly
Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2)
400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403
- Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve
405 - Control Valve Body Assembly
Component Location
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5137
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly
17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5138
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front
Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump
Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5139
20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and
Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case
Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve
Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual
Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5140
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 -
Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque
Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model
Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input
Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover
Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5141
Shift Solenoid: Connector Views
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5142
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5143
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5144
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5145
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5148
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5149
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5150
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5151
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5152
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5153
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5158
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5159
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5160
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5161
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5162
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5163
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5164
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5165
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5166
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5167
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5168
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5169
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5170
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5171
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5172
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5173
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5174
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5175
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5176
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5177
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5178
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5179
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5180
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5181
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5182
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5183
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5184
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5185
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5186
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5187
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5188
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5189
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5190
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5191
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5192
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5193
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5194
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5195
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5196
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5197
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5198
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5199
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5200
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5201
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5202
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5203
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5204
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5205
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5206
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5207
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5208
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5209
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5210
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5211
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5212
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5213
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5214
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5215
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5216
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5217
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5218
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5219
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5220
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5221
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5222
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5223
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5224
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5225
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5226
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5227
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5228
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5229
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5230
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5231
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5232
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5233
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5234
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5235
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5236
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5237
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5238
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5239
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5240
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5241
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5242
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5243
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5244
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5245
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5246
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5247
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5248
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5249
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5250
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5251
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5252
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5253
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5254
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5255
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5256
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5257
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5258
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5259
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5260
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5261
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5262
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5263
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5264
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5265
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5266
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5267
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5268
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5269
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5270
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5271
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5272
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5273
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5274
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5275
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5276
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5277
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5278
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5279
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5280
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5281
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5282
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5283
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5284
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5285
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5286
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5287
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5288
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5289
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5290
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5291
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5292
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5293
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5294
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5295
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5296
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5297
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5298
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5299
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5300
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5301
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5302
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5303
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5304
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5305
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5306
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5307
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5308
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5309
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5310
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5311
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5312
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5313
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5314
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5315
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5316
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5317
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5318
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5319
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5320
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5321
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5328
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5329
Shift Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5332
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5333
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5334
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5335
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5336
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5337
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5338
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5339
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5340
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5341
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5342
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5343
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5344
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5345
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5346
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5347
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5348
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5349
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5350
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5351
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5352
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5353
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5354
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5355
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5356
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5357
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5358
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5359
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5360
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5361
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5362
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5363
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5364
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5365
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5366
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5367
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5368
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5369
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5370
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5371
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5372
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5373
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5374
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5375
Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5376
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5377
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5378
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5379
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5380
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5381
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5382
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5383
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5384
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5385
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5386
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5387
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5388
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5389
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5390
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5391
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5392
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5393
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5394
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5395
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5396
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5397
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5398
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5399
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5400
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5401
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5402
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5403
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5404
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5405
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5406
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5407
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5408
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5409
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5410
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5411
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5412
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5413
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5414
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5415
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5416
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5417
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5418
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5419
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5420
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5421
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5422
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5423
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5424
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5425
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5426
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5427
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5428
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5429
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5430
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5431
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5432
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5433
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5434
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5435
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5436
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5437
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5438
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5439
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5440
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5441
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5442
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5443
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5444
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5445
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5446
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5447
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5448
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5449
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5450
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5451
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5452
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5453
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5454
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5455
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5456
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5457
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5458
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5459
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5460
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5461
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5462
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5463
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5464
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5465
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5466
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5467
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5468
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5469
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5470
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5471
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5472
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5473
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5474
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5475
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5476
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5477
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5478
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5479
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5480
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5481
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5482
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5483
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5484
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5485
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5486
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5487
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5488
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5489
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5490
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5491
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5492
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5493
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5494
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5495
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5496
Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid
Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed
Sensor Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5497
16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual
Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input
Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill
Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential
Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly
Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2)
400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403
- Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve
405 - Control Valve Body Assembly
Component Location
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5498
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly
17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5499
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front
Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump
Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5500
20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and
Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case
Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve
Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual
Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5501
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 -
Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque
Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model
Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input
Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover
Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5502
Shift Solenoid: Connector Views
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5503
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5504
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5505
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
5506
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5509
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5510
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5511
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5512
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5513
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 -
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5514
Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5519
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5520
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5521
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5522
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5523
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5524
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5525
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5526
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5527
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5528
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5529
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5530
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5531
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5532
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5533
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5534
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5535
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5536
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5537
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5538
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5539
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5540
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5541
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5542
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5543
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5544
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5545
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5546
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5547
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5548
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5549
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5550
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5551
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5552
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5553
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5554
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5555
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5556
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5557
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5558
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5559
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5560
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5561
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5562
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5563
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5564
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5565
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5566
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5567
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5568
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5569
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5570
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5571
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5572
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5573
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5574
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5575
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5576
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5577
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5578
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5579
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5580
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5581
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5582
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5583
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5584
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5585
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5586
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5587
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5588
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5589
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5590
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5591
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5592
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5593
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5594
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5595
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5596
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5597
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5598
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5599
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5600
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5601
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5602
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5603
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5604
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5605
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5606
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5607
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5608
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5609
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5610
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5611
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5612
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5613
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5614
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5615
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5616
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5617
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5618
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5619
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5620
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5621
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5622
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5623
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5624
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5625
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5626
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5627
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5628
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5629
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5630
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5631
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5632
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5633
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5634
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5635
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5636
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5637
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5638
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5639
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5640
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5641
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5642
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5643
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5644
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5645
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5646
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5647
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5648
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5649
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5650
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5651
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5652
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5653
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5654
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5655
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5656
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5657
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5658
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5659
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5660
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5661
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5662
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5663
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5664
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5665
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5666
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5667
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5668
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5669
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5670
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5671
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5672
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5673
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5674
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5675
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5676
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5677
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5678
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5679
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5680
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5681
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and
Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5682
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A
> Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A
> Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5696
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A
> Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5697
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A
> Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed
Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A >
Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A >
Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5707
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A >
Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5708
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5711
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5712
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5713
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5714
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5715
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 -
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5716
Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B
Date: November 01, 2010
Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission
components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or
ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder
during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement.
Indications of water in the ATF may include:
- ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube.
- ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a
strawberry milkshake.
- Visible water in the oil pan.
- A milky white substance inside the pan area.
- Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case.
- Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not
compressed.
- Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components.
If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a
leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in
the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of
ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be
obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement.
This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking
and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These
test kits can be obtained from:
Nelco Company
Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped
standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One
test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost
of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the
warranty claim as a net item.
The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure.
Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be
replaced.
- Replace all of the rubber-type seals.
- Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands.
- Replace all of the nylon parts.
- Replace the torque converter.
- Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter.
Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing.
Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096
TransFlow.
- Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 5721
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts)
6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts)
6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug
.................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal
................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul ....................................................................................................
........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5724
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission
DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check
This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself.
Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in
transmission internal damage.
Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the
transmission. With the vehicle off and the transmission fluid temperature at approximately 20-25°C
(68-77°F) there must be at least enough fluid to drain out of the fluid level hole. This will ensure that
there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle is started.
Non Dipstick Level Checking Procedure
1. Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range,
pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever
back to PARK (P).
3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate
and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the
brake pedal.
Note: If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the
vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range,
perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification.
Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature.
4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver
Information Center or a scan tool.
Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature
(TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow
the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in
either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An
under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled
transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation.
5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift
lever in the PARK range.
6. While the vehicle is idling, remove the oil level set plug. Allow any fluid to drain.
Oil Level Plug (1)
* If the fluid is flowing as a steady stream, wait until the fluid begins to drip.
* If no fluid comes out, add fluid until fluid drips out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5727
7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces
and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the
transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair
the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
8. Inspect for external leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis).
9. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.
Dipstick Level Checking Procedure (If equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK
(P). Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range,
pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever
back to PARK (P).
3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate
and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the
brake pedal.
4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver
Information Center or a scan tool.
Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature
(TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow
the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in
either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An
under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled
transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation.
Note: *
If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the
vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range,
perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification.
* Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is at between 85-95°C (185-203°F). The fluid
level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission fluid
temperature is at the specified temperature.
Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature.
5. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range. 6.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid
should be red or dark brown.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces
and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the
transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair
the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
8. Install the dipstick. Wait three seconds and then remove it again.
Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent cap to ensure it
is clean and unclogged.
Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the
crosshatch band is acceptable.
9. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level.
10. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading.
Note: Do not add more than one half pint (0.25L) at a time without rechecking the level. Once the
oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch
band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid
Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis).
11. If the fluid level is not within the crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is at 90°C
(194°F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into
the crosshatch band.
12. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5728
13. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.
Fluid Condition Inspection
* Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal
use, and does not always indicate contamination.
Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or
overheating.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission) to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions
are found.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5729
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check
This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself.
Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in
transmission internal damage.
Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the
transmission. With the vehicle off there must be at least enough fluid to wet the end of the dipstick
bullet. This will ensure that there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle
is started.
Level Checking Procedure
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK
(P). 2. Start the engine. 3. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear
range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever
back to PARK (P).
4. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 1 minute. Release the brake pedal. 5. Keep the
engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information
Center or a scan tool.
Note: If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise
the fluid temperature to the specified range.
6. If the TFT reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or
operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is
reached. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is within the specified range.
Note: Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and
93°C). The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the
transmission fluid temperature is within range.
7. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 8. Inspect the fluid color. The
fluid should be red or dark brown.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces
and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the
transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair
the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine
Coolant/Water in Transmission).
9. Install the dipstick and tighten. Wait three seconds and then remove it again.
Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent assembly to
ensure it is clean and unclogged.
10. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level.
Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the
crosshatch band is acceptable.
11. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading. 12. If the fluid level is not within the
crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and 93°C),
add or drain
fluid as necessary to bring the level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough fluid to bring the level into the crosshatch band. Note: Do not add more than one pint (0.5L)
at a time without rechecking the level. Once the oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much
more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is
low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid
Leak Diagnosis).
13. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick. 14. If the fluid was changed, reset
the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.
Fluid Condition Inspection
* Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal
use, and does not always indicate contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5730
Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or
overheating.
* If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal
particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission) to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions
are found.
* Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or
water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine
Coolant/Water in Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fluid drain plug (1). 3. Drain
transmission fluid into a suitable container.
Caution: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle
Damage Warnings/Component Fastener Tightening Caution).
4. Install the fluid drain plug (1) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5733
1. Lower the vehicle. 2. Remove the fluid fill cap (1). 3. Fill the transmission to the proper level with
the correct fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check ) and Fluid Capacity Specifications
(6T40/45/50) (See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission).
4. Install the fluid fill cap (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5734
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
2. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to
Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect
Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ).
Note: Do not remove the upper and lower transaxle oil cooler fittings from the radiator at the same
time other wise the transaxle oil cooler will fall inside the radiator end tank.
3. Remove the oil cooler fitting from the radiator.
Installation Procedure
1. Inspect the new O-ring seals for cracks, cuts or damage. Replace if necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5739
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: The correct thread engagement is critical. Cross-threaded fittings can achieve proper
tightness and still leak.
2. Install the oil cooler fitting to the radiator and tighten to 38 Nm (28 lb ft). 3. Install the transaxle oil
cooler hoses to the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe
Quick-Connect Fitting
Disconnection and Connection (See: ).
4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
5. Adjust the transmission fluid level. 6. Inspect for fluid leaks.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection
Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection
Removal Procedure
Important: Perform the following procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from
the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission.
1. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm
(2 in). 2. Using a bent-tip screwdriver, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to
rotate the retaining ring around the quick connect fitting
until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed.
3. Remove the retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5740
5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting.
Installation Procedure
Important: *
Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion.
* Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect
fittings. Install new retaining rings.
* Ensure the following procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the
fittings.
1. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using the following procedure:
2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting.
3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all three ears
through the three slots on the fitting.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5741
4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring.
5. Ensure that the three retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining
ring moves freely in the fitting slots.
6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick
connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt.
8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9.
Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick
connect fitting.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5742
Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap.
10. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when
installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect
fitting.
11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting.
12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting.
13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting.
14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the
proper level with DEXRON(R) VI transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and
Condition Check (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5743
Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe Replacement
Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe Replacement
Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe Replacement
Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5744
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5745
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator
Removal Procedure
1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
2. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to
Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect
Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ).
Note: Do not remove the upper and lower transaxle oil cooler fittings from the radiator at the same
time other wise the transaxle oil cooler will fall inside the radiator end tank.
3. Remove the oil cooler fitting from the radiator.
Installation Procedure
1. Inspect the new O-ring seals for cracks, cuts or damage. Replace if necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5746
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: The correct thread engagement is critical. Cross-threaded fittings can achieve proper
tightness and still leak.
2. Install the oil cooler fitting to the radiator and tighten to 38 Nm (28 lb ft). 3. Install the transaxle oil
cooler hoses to the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe
Quick-Connect Fitting
Disconnection and Connection (See: ).
4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE
47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System
Draining and Filling (GE 47716)).
5. Adjust the transmission fluid level. 6. Inspect for fluid leaks.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and CONNECTION1
Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection
Special Tools
J 41623-B - Cooler Quick Connect Tool
Removal Procedure
Important: Perform the following procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from
the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission.
1. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm
(2 in). 2. Using J 41623-B - Cooler Quick Connect Tool to remove the retaining ring. 3. Remove the
retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5747
5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting.
Installation Procedure
Important: *
Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion.
*
Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect
fittings. Install new retaining rings.
* Ensure the following procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the
fittings.
1. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using the following procedure:
2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting.
3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all three ears
through the three slots on the fitting.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5748
4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring.
5. Ensure that the three retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining
ring moves freely in the fitting slots.
6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick
connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt.
8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9.
Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick
connect fitting.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5749
Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap.
10. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when
installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect
fitting.
11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting.
12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting.
13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting.
14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the
proper level with DEXRON(R) VI transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and
Condition Check (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic
Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5750
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Front
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Front
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Rear
Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5751
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Fluid Pan: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control valve body cover .....................................................................................................................
..................................................... 12 Nm (106 lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5756
Fluid Pan: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Valve Body Cover
Cover bolts (1) M6 x 30 .......................................................................................................................
..................................................... 12 Nm (106 lb in) Cover studs (2) M6 x 30 ....................................
........................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm (106
lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise
Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F
Date: February 05, 2010
Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3
2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32,
M70)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin
05-07-30-012.
Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift.
During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift
can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same
torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band
applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in
the transfer case.
This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Parking Pawl: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5765
Parking Pawl: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A >
Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5780
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5781
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed
Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control
Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control
Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5791
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control
Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5792
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission >
Page 5795
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission >
Page 5796
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission >
Page 5797
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission >
Page 5798
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission >
Page 5799
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 -
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission >
Page 5800
Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5805
Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement
Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement
Special Tools
* J 45201 Cooler Line Seal Remover
* J-46626 Seal Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the manual shaft and position
switch assembly. Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly
Replacement (
See: Sensors and Switches - A/T/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5806
3. Remove the manual shaft seal (1) using J 45201.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the manual shaft and position switch assembly. Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with
Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement (
See: Sensors and Switches - A/T/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
2. Install the manual shaft seal (1) using J-46626. 3. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray
Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5807
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5808
Input Speed Sensor Seal Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Seal Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5809
Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement
Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T
> System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5810
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Mode Switch: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5819
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5820
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5823
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5824
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5825
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5829
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5830
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5831
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5832
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5833
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5834
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5835
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
> Page 5838
16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch
Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction
Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
> Page 5839
11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans
Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output
Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring
Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal
Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and
Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter
Assembly
3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly
500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft
Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston
Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch
Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate
508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510
- 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
> Page 5840
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
> Page 5841
14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential
Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and
Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch
Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control
Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid
Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
> Page 5842
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
> Page 5843
25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque
Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin
- Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent
31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans
Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons
400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS
O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal
Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer
Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5846
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5.
Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5847
1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve
body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5848
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 5849
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5854
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5855
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5856
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5857
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5858
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5859
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5860
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5861
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5862
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5863
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5864
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5865
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5866
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5867
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5868
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5869
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5870
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5871
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5872
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5873
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5874
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5875
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5876
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5877
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5878
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5879
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5880
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5881
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5882
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5883
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5884
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5885
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5886
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5887
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5888
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5889
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5890
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5891
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5892
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5893
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5894
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5912
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5913
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5914
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5915
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5916
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5917
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5918
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5919
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5920
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5921
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5922
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5923
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5924
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5925
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5926
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5927
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5928
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5929
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5930
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5931
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5932
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5933
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5934
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5935
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5936
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5937
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5938
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5939
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5940
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5941
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5942
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5943
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5972
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5973
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5974
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5975
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5976
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5977
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5978
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5979
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5980
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5981
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5982
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5983
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5984
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5985
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5986
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5987
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5988
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5989
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5990
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5991
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5992
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5993
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6016
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6017
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6018
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
Shift Lock Control Schematics
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6019
Shift Interlock: Description and Operation
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Description and Operation
The automatic transmission park lock control system is a safety device that prevents an inadvertent
shift out of PARK. The driver must press the brake pedal before moving the park lever out of the
PARK position. The system consists of the following components:
* The automatic transmission park lock solenoid (serviced as the automatic transmission shift lock
actuator), is located within the floor shift control assembly.
* The body control module, which controls the voltage supply circuit of the park lock control
solenoid.
* The engine control module.
The body control module controls the voltage to the park lock control solenoid through the park lock
control solenoid controlled voltage circuit. The following conditions must be met before the body
control module will supply voltage to the park lock solenoid:
* The ignition is in the ON position.
* The engine control module sends an input via GMLAN serial data to the body control module
indicating the transmission is in the PARK position.
* The body control module determines the brake pedal is applied according the brake pedal
position.
Since the park lock control solenoid is permanently grounded, the body control module supplies
voltage to the automatic transmission park lock control solenoid, unlocking the park lever allowing
the driver to move the park lever out of the PARK position as the solenoid energizes. When the
brake pedal is not applied, the body control module turns the control voltage output of the park lock
control solenoid OFF, de-energizing the park lock control solenoid. The de-energized solenoid
mechanically locks the park lever in the PARK position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
Shift Interlock: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
Important: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle) before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of the following are
true:
* There are no DTCs set.
* The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation).
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the automatic transmission
shift lock control. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories).
* Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions
which could cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections ( See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure in order to diagnose the symptom:
Transmission Control Lever Malfunction (See: Transmission Control Lever Malfunction)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control > Page 6022
Shift Interlock: Testing and Inspection Transmission Control Lever Malfunction
Transmission Control Lever Malfunction
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The body control module controls the automatic transmission park lock control solenoid by
providing a battery positive voltage to the solenoid. The body control module controls the voltage
supply circuit to the automatic transmission park lock control solenoid. The BCM monitors the
voltage and current flow of the control circuit.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Shift Lock Control Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Description and Operation (See: Description and
Operation) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Brake Applied Output Signal parameter while pressing and
releasing the brake pedal. The parameter should
change from ON to OFF when the brake pedal is depressed.
‹› If the parameter does not change, refer to Stop Lamps Malfunction (See: Lighting and
Horns/Testing and Inspection/Stop Lamps Malfunction
).
2. While pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle operator should be able to move the shifter lever out
of the park position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control > Page 6023
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S3 shift lock actuator. 2. Ignition OFF, test
for less than 1.0 Ohms between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
3. Install a test lamp between the ground circuit terminal 2 and the control circuit terminal 4. 4.
Ignition ON, command the scan tool Shift Lock Solenoid Actuator ON and OFF. The test lamp
should turn ON and OFF when changing between
the commanded states.
‹› If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal,
replace the K9 body control module. ‹› If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for
short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9
body control module.
5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the S3 shift lock actuator.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Transmission Control Replacement (See: Shifter A/T/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Transmission Control Replacement)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for ECM
replacement, setup, and programming
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6028
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 6029
Shift Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6032
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6033
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6034
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6035
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6036
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6037
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6038
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6039
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6040
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6041
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6042
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6043
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6044
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6045
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6046
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6047
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6048
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6049
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6050
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6051
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6052
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6053
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6054
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6055
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6056
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6057
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6058
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6059
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6060
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6061
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075
Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6100
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6101
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6102
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6103
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6104
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6105
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6106
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6107
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6108
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6109
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6110
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6111
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6112
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6113
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6115
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6116
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6117
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6118
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6119
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6120
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6121
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6122
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6123
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6124
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6125
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6126
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6127
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6128
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6129
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6130
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6131
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6132
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6133
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6134
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6136
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6137
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6138
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6139
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6140
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6141
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6142
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6143
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6144
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6145
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6146
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6147
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6148
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6149
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6150
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6151
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6152
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6153
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6154
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6155
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6156
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6157
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6158
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6159
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6160
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6161
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6162
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6163
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6164
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6165
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6166
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196
Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid
Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed
Sensor Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197
16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual
Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input
Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill
Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential
Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly
Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2)
400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403
- Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve
405 - Control Valve Body Assembly
Component Location
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly
17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front
Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump
Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200
20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and
Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case
Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve
Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual
Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque
Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model
Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input
Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover
Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6202
Shift Solenoid: Connector Views
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6203
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6204
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6205
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6206
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6209
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6210
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6211
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6212
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6213
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 -
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6214
Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Shifter A/T: Diagrams
S3 Transmission Shift Lever
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement
Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement
Transmission Control Replacement
Transmission Control Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6220
Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement
Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6221
2. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) from the transmission
manual shift lever pin. 3. Press the locking tabs inward in order to release the transmission range
selector lever cable (2) from the cable bracket.
Warning
Hold the transmission range selector lever while removing or installing the lever retaining nut.
Failure to hold the lever can cause damage to the transmission internal park system components
which could allow the vehicle to roll when placed in the park position.
4. Remove the transmission range selector lever nut (1). 5. Remove the transmission range
selector lever (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6222
Warning
Hold the transmission range selector lever while removing or installing the lever retaining nut.
Failure to hold the lever can cause damage to the transmission internal park system components
which could allow the vehicle to roll when placed in the park position.
1. Install the transmission range selector lever (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the transmission range selector lever nut (1) and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb ft).
3. Install the transmission range selector lever cable (2) to the cable bracket. 4. Connect the
transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) to the transmission manual shift lever pin. 5.
Check the range selector cable adjustment. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See:
Shift Linkage/Shift Cable/Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6223
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement
Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement
Transmission Control Replacement
Transmission Control Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6224
Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement
Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6225
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Cable: Adjustments 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
Note: Adjust the automatic transmission range selector cable while the transmission and the gear
selector are in the Park position only. Failure to do so may cause mis-adjustment.
1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Verify the transmission range select lever is in the
park position. 3. Verify the transmission manual shift lever is in the park position.
4. Pull the retaining collar (1) forward, then release the range select cable adjuster clip (2).
5. Slide the two halves (1, 2) of the range select cable together until all free play is removed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6231
6. Depress the adjuster clip (1) locking the adjuster clip completely, then release the retaining
collar. 7. Pull both halves of the range select cable in opposite directions to verify the cable adjuster
is secured. 8. Check the transmission range select lever in all gear selections for proper operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6232
Shift Cable: Adjustments 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
Note: Adjust the automatic transmission range selector cable while the transmission and the gear
selector are in the Park position only. Failure to do so may cause mis-adjustment.
1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Verify the transmission range select lever is in the
park position. 3. Verify the transmission manual shift lever is in the park position.
4. Pull the retaining collar (1) forward, then release the range select cable adjuster clip (2).
5. Slide the two halves (1, 2) of the range select cable together until all free play is removed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6233
6. Depress the adjuster clip (1) locking the adjuster clip completely, then release the retaining
collar. 7. Pull both halves of the range select cable in opposite directions to verify the cable adjuster
is secured. 8. Check the transmission range select lever in all gear selections for proper operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Cable: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement
Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels.
2. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) from the transmission
manual shift lever pin (6). 3. Slide the retainer (4) rearward to release the transmission range
selector lever cable from the bracket. 4. Remove the left front floor lower console extension. Refer
to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Equinox) (
See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower
Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover
Replacement - Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service
and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6236
5. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable retainers (2) from the support bracket. 6.
Remove the grommet (1) and cable assembly from the floor panel.
7. Slide the transmission range selector lever cable retainer forward (1) and remove the
transmission range selector cable from the transmission
control base.
8. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) from the shift lever pin. 9.
Remove the transmission range selector lever cable from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the transmission range selector lever cable in the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6237
2. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) to the shift lever pin.
3. Install the transmission range selector cable to the transmission control base, then slide the
transmission range selector lever cable retainer
rearward (1) to lock the cable in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6238
4. Install the grommet (1) and cable assembly into the floor panel. 5. Connect the transmission
range selector lever cable retainers (2) to the support bracket. 6. Install the front floor console
extension. Refer to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side
(Equinox) (See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side
Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and
Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side).
7. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) to the transmission manual shift
lever pin (6). 8. Install the cable in the bracket, then slide the retainer (4) forward to lock the
transmission range selector lever cable in the bracket. 9. Adjust the cable. Refer to Range Selector
Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments)
Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement
Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6239
1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels.
2. Disconnect the range selector cable end (1) from the range selector lever. 3. Disconnect the
range selector cable (2) from the range selector cable bracket.
4. Remove the transmission range selector cable bracket bolts (1). 5. Remove the transmission
range selector cable bracket (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6240
1. Install the transmission range selector cable bracket (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the transmission range selector cable bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
3. Connect the range selector cable (2) to the range selector cable bracket. 4. Connect the range
selector cable end (1) to the range selector lever. 5. Check the range selector cable adjustment.
Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6241
Shift Cable: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement
Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels.
2. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) from the transmission
manual shift lever pin (6). 3. Slide the retainer (4) rearward to release the transmission range
selector lever cable from the bracket. 4. Remove the left front floor lower console extension. Refer
to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Equinox) (
See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower
Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover
Replacement - Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service
and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6242
5. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable retainers (2) from the support bracket. 6.
Remove the grommet (1) and cable assembly from the floor panel.
7. Slide the transmission range selector lever cable retainer forward (1) and remove the
transmission range selector cable from the transmission
control base.
8. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) from the shift lever pin. 9.
Remove the transmission range selector lever cable from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the transmission range selector lever cable in the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6243
2. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) to the shift lever pin.
3. Install the transmission range selector cable to the transmission control base, then slide the
transmission range selector lever cable retainer
rearward (1) to lock the cable in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6244
4. Install the grommet (1) and cable assembly into the floor panel. 5. Connect the transmission
range selector lever cable retainers (2) to the support bracket. 6. Install the front floor console
extension. Refer to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side
(Equinox) (See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side
Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and
Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side).
7. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) to the transmission manual shift
lever pin (6). 8. Install the cable in the bracket, then slide the retainer (4) forward to lock the
transmission range selector lever cable in the bracket. 9. Adjust the cable. Refer to Range Selector
Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments)
Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement
Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6245
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T >
Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6246
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6251
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6252
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6253
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6254
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6255
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6256
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6257
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6258
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6259
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6260
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6261
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6262
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6263
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6264
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6265
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6266
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6267
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6268
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6269
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6270
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6271
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6272
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6273
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6274
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6275
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6276
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6277
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6278
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6279
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6280
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6281
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6282
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6283
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6284
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6285
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6286
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6287
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6288
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6289
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6290
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6291
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6292
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6293
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6294
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6295
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6296
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6297
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6298
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6299
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6300
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6301
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6302
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6303
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6304
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6305
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6306
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6307
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6308
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6309
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6310
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6311
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6312
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6313
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6314
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6315
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6337
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6338
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6339
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6340
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6341
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6342
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6343
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6344
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6345
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6346
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6347
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6348
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6349
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6350
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6351
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6352
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6353
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6354
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6355
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6356
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6357
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6358
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6359
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6360
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6361
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6362
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6363
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6364
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6365
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6366
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6367
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6368
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6369
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6370
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6371
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6372
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6373
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6374
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6375
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6376
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6377
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6378
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6379
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6380
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6381
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6382
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6383
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6384
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6385
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6386
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6387
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6388
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6389
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6390
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6391
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6392
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6393
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6394
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6395
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6396
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6397
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6398
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6399
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6400
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6401
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6402
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6403
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6404
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6405
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6406
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6407
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6408
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6409
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6410
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6411
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6412
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6413
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6414
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G
Date: March 02, 2011
Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096
TransFlow(R)
Models:
2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010
HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include
labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system.
The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J
35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and
DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled
through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid
stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris.
In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil
cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along
with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles
and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel
has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material
that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum
evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can
be used for verification of flow test results.
Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic
transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and
light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo).
The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership
personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The
Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different
than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic
transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the
flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the
Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid.
Notice
Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure.
The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature.
Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of
the ATF in the supply vessel.
Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F)
Important
- The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It
is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature
remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use.
- Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil
dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the
supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair
expense would be the dealer's responsibility.
- A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system
flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110
volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a
thermostat to hold a constant temperature.
Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room
where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F).
Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J
45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is
maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the
machine on
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6419
each repair.
With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of
time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the
reservoir.
Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the
reservoir to the rays of the warm sun.
Flush / Flow Test Procedure
Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require
the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the
transmission oil cooler system.
Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the
appropriate procedure.
Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison
equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission
Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure.
Machine Displays
After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair
order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096,
Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position.
- Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM)
- Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit)
- Cycle number (a number)
- Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2)
Warranty Information
Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include
labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system.
Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts)
of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6420
of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the
repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be
shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document.
The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and
placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to
contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent
will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing
authorization for the warranty claim.
The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card,
entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and
placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to
contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent
will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing
authorization for the warranty claim.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6421
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B
Date: November 01, 2010
Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission
components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or
ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder
during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement.
Indications of water in the ATF may include:
- ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube.
- ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a
strawberry milkshake.
- Visible water in the oil pan.
- A milky white substance inside the pan area.
- Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case.
- Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not
compressed.
- Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components.
If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a
leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in
the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of
ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be
obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement.
This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking
and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These
test kits can be obtained from:
Nelco Company
Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped
standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One
test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost
of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the
warranty claim as a net item.
The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure.
Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be
replaced.
- Replace all of the rubber-type seals.
- Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands.
- Replace all of the nylon parts.
- Replace the torque converter.
- Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter.
Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing.
Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096
TransFlow.
- Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler,
A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6422
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode
Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Mode Switch: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side
Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the underhood electrical center. 3.
Support the engine and transmission. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking
the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
5. Remove the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6430
6. Remove the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1). 7. Lower the
vehicle.
8. Remove the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6431
9. Remove the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1).
10. Lower the transmission enough to provide clearance for the left transmission mount. 11.
Remove the left transmission mount (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the left transmission mount (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 3. Raise
the transmission until the transmission contacts the left transmission mount.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6432
4. Install the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 5.
Raise the vehicle.
6. Install the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 110
Nm (81 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6433
7. Install the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 8. Lower
the vehicle. 9. Remove the engine and transmission support.
10. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 11. Install the underhood electrical center.
Transmission Front Mount Replacement
Transmission Front Mount Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6434
Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement
Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement (FWD)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6435
Transmission Rear Mount Replacement
Transmission Rear Mount Replacement (FWD)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6436
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6437
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side
Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the underhood electrical center. 3.
Support the engine and transmission. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking
the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
5. Remove the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6438
6. Remove the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1). 7. Lower the
vehicle.
8. Remove the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6439
9. Remove the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1).
10. Lower the transmission enough to provide clearance for the left transmission mount. 11.
Remove the left transmission mount (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the left transmission mount (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 3. Raise
the transmission until the transmission contacts the left transmission mount.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6440
4. Install the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 5.
Raise the vehicle.
6. Install the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 110
Nm (81 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6441
7. Install the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 8. Lower
the vehicle. 9. Remove the engine and transmission support.
10. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 11. Install the underhood electrical center.
Transmission Front Mount Replacement
Transmission Front Mount Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6442
Transmission Rear Mount Replacement
Transmission Rear Mount Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6443
Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement
Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement (FWD)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount,
A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6444
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6449
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6450
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page
6453
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page
6454
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page
6455
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure
Test Port, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure
Test Port, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6460
Transmission Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6464
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6465
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6466
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6467
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6468
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6469
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6470
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6473
16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch
Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction
Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6474
11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans
Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output
Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring
Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal
Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and
Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter
Assembly
3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly
500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft
Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston
Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch
Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate
508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510
- 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6475
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6476
14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential
Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and
Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch
Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control
Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid
Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6477
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6478
25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque
Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin
- Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent
31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans
Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons
400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS
O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal
Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer
Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6481
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5.
Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6482
1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve
body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6483
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6484
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Locations > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Valve Body: Locations 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Ball Check Valve Locations
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Locations > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6489
Valve Body: Locations 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Ball Check Valve Locations
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Valve Body: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Valve Body Cover Replacement
Control Valve Body Cover Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
2. Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. Refer to Radiator Outlet Hose
Replacement (LAF) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose)Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose).
3. Remove the oil cooler inlet (1) and outlet (2) hoses from the retainer (2) on the control valve
body cover. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the front transmission mount. Refer to
Transmission Front Mount Replacement (See: Transmission Mount/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement).
6. Drain the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6492
7. Disconnect the control valve body transmission control module (TCM) electrical connector (1),
then the wiring harness from the cover.
8. Remove the control valve body cover bolts (1). 9. Support the transmission with a transmission
jack.
10. Using the transmission jack raise the transmission to gain clearance for removal of the control
valve body cover. 11. Remove the control valve body cover. 12. Remove the control valve body
cover gasket.
Caution: Support the control solenoid valve assembly around the connector when removing the
seal. Excessive pulling force can damage the internal electrical connections.
13. Remove the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal. 14. Remove all traces of the
old gasket material. Clean the transmission case and control valve body cover gasket surfaces.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6493
1. Install the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal (4). 2. Install the control valve
body cover gasket (3) to the control valve body cover. 3. Install the control valve body cover (2). 4.
Lower the transmission and remove the transmission jack. 5. Hand start the control valve body
cover bolts (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all control valve body cover bolts and studs by hand then torque all bolts and studs in
sequence.
6. Install the control valve body cover bolts. Tighten the bolts in sequence to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6494
7. Connect the control valve body TCM electrical connector (1), then clip the wiring harness to the
cover. 8. Install the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front Mount Replacement
(See: Transmission Mount/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement).
9. Lower the vehicle.
10. Install the oil cooler inlet (1) and outlet (5) hoses to the retainer (2) on the control valve body
cover. 11. Connect the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. Refer to Radiator Outlet Hose
Replacement (LAF) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator Hose)Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose).
12. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
13. Fill the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement (). 14. Check for leaks.
Control Valve Body Replacement
Control Valve Body Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6495
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6496
Valve Body: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Valve Body Cover Replacement
Control Valve Body Cover Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses from the retainer on the control valve body cover. 3.
Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 4. Remove the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front
Mount Replacement (See: Transmission Mount/Service and
Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement).
5. Remove the lower nuts from the left transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Mount
Replacement - Left Side (See: Transmission
Mount/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Mount
Replacement - Left Side).
6. Drain the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6497
7. Disconnect the control valve body transmission control module (TCM) electrical connector (1).
8. Remove the 2 control valve body cover studs M6 x 30. 9. Remove the 12 control valve body
cover bolts M6 x 30.
10. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 11. Using the transmission jack raise the
transmission to gain clearance for removal of the control valve body cover. 12. Remove the control
valve body cover. 13. Remove the control valve body cover gasket.
Caution: Support the control solenoid valve assembly around the connector when removing the
seal. Excessive pulling force can damage the internal electrical connections.
14. Remove the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal. 15. Remove all traces of the
old gasket material. Clean the transmission case and control valve body cover gasket surfaces.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6498
Note: The holes in the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal must face toward the
control solenoid valve assembly. If the holes face toward the valve body cover, there is a potential
for a leak around the seal.
1. Install the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal. 2. Install the control valve body
cover gasket to the control valve body cover. 3. Install the control valve body cover. 4. Lower the
transmission and remove the transmission jack.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all control valve body cover bolts and studs by hand then torque all bolts and studs in
sequence.
5. Install the 12 control valve body cover bolts (1) M6 x 30 and tighten the bolts in sequence to 12
Nm (106 lb in). 6. Install the 2 control valve body cover studs (2) M6 x 30 and tighten the studs in
sequence to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
7. Connect the control valve body TCM electrical connector (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6499
8. Install the lower nuts to the left transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service
and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left
Side).
9. Install the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front Mount Replacement (See:
Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75
- Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement).
10. Lower the vehicle.
11. Install the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses to the retainer on the control valve body cover. 12.
Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 13. Fill the transmission. Refer to Transmission
Fluid Replacement (). 14. Check for leaks.
Control Valve Lower Body and Upper Body Replacement
Control Valve Lower Body and Upper Body Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6500
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with removal of lower control valve body. 7. Remove the 2
control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove
the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve body assembly filter plate (6).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6501
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the PCS switch feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS switch
seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
13. Remove the 8 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 65. 14. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts
(1) M6 x 55. 15. Remove the manual shaft detent assembly (3). 16. Remove the control valve body
assembly (4). 17. The control solenoid valve spring can now be fully removed from the lower
control valve body assembly.
Note: The clutch fluid passage seal is not reusable.
18. Remove the 1-2-3-4 clutch fluid passage seal (5).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6502
Note: The clutch fluid passage seal is not reusable.
1. Install a NEW 1-2-3-4 clutch fluid passage seal (3).
Note: *
Ensure the control solenoid valve spring is attached to the lower control valve body assembly.
* Align the manual valve (2) to the detent lever assembly while installing the lower control valve
body assembly.
2. Install the control valve body assembly (1).
Note: Ensure proper alignment of the detent assembly to the detent lever assembly with position
switch while tightening the bolt. The detent assembly can move and hit the valve body assembly
that could cause improper engagement with the detent lever assembly.
3. Install the manual shaft detent assembly (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6503
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 8 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 5. Install the 2
control valve body bolts (3) M6 x 55 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
6. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
7. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 8. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
9. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6504
10. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 11. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x
95. 12. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 13. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4)
M6 x 65.
14. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 15. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 16. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 17. Install the
control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Control Valve
Body Cover Replacement). 18. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
19. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information
Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls Snapshot Data Upload Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-010B
Date: June 19, 2009
Subject: Procedure to Take Snapshot Data with a Tech 2(R) and Upload Data to a Computer Using
TIS Software
Models:
2004-2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Truck (Including Saturn; excluding Astra models)
2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2004-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Sending a Snapshot to GM TAC section
and add the 2010 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-07-30-010A (Section
07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Important Global Diagnostic System (GDS) will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles
when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This new diagnostic tool
platform and software will be required for use with all GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles
beginning with the 2010 Chevrolet Camaro, followed later by the Buick Allure/LaCrosse, Chevrolet
Equinox, Cadillac SRX and the GMC Terrain. These vehicles will no longer permit Tech 2(R)
communication for diagnostic purposes. For further information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
09-00-89-019 (Introduction of New Global Diagnostic System (GDS)).
This procedure is intended to show the user how to take snapshot data with a Tech 2(R) and
upload it to a computer. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission data snapshot on a
Saturn AURA, but is similar for all applications. This procedure is written with the assumption the
user has a basic understanding of how to use a Tech 2(R) already.
Capturing a Snapshot of the Vehicle Data Stream
1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle Data Link Connector (DLC) as shown above. Use a CANdi
module as required. 2. Power up the Tech 2(R) and press the ENTER key at the start-up screen.
3. From the Main Menu select F0: Diagnostics. 4. Enter all vehicle information as requested on the
scan tool's display. Bolded selections are vehicle specific.
- Select "2007"
- Select "Passenger Car (F0)"
- Select "Saturn"
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6509
- Select "Z"
- Select "Aura"
- Select "Powertrain"
- Select "3.6L LY7"
- Select "Transmission"
- Select "Transmission Data"
5. From the application menu, select F3: Snapshot.
- Choose trigger type and trigger point, as described above.
- It is preferred to trigger on "Any Code" (F1)
- If multiple codes are setting, select "Single Code" and enter the code you are trying to capture on
the next screen.
- Select "Center (F5)" for the trigger point. This allows the requester/viewer of the data to see the
events before and after the code sets.
6. Press the Record Snapshot soft key. The Tech 2(R) screen will display the parameters it is going
to record for live viewing.
- When the fault occurs, the Tech 2(R) will automatically start recording if the preferred settings (F1
and F5) are selected.
- If manual trigger is selected during the setup procedure, you will have to hit the "Trigger" soft key
to actually record data. Otherwise, it will automatically start recording when a DTC is set.
- Allow the Tech 2(R) to record the data. Please note that a Tech 2(R) can record a maximum of 1
minute of data (30 seconds before and 30 seconds after the trigger point if center trigger is
selected).
Important The Tech(R)2 can only record two snapshots prior to uploading to a computer. If a third
snapshot is requested, the first snapshot will be overwritten.
7. When the snap shot data has been recorded, exit to the Main Menu, then power down and
disconnect the Tech 2(R) from the vehicle.
Uploading and Sending a Snapshot via TIS2WEB
Figure 8
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6510
Figure 9
1. Once TIS2WEB is launched and you're at the main screen, select Snapshot, indicated with a
arrow in Figure 8. 2. Select the Upload from Handheld button to launch the device selection screen
just like the TIS 2000 procedure described above.
Figure 10
3. Select the top button, "Upload from Handheld" which will launch the screen displayed in Figure
10. Make sure the Tech 2(R) is connected to the
computer and plugged in. Select Tech 2(R) under Device and select OK. The screen of your Tech
2(R) should start blinking and a line will start scrolling across the screen indicating it is
communicating with your computer.
Figure 11
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6511
4. Once communication is established and you select the file you want to upload, you will see a
screen similar to below. You can email the file
directly from TIS2WEB by going to the Snapshot drop down menu and selecting "Send to e-mail"
as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 12
5. After selecting Send to e-mail, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 12 will be displayed. Fill
in the information as requested and then click
send. Include the VIN in the subject line.
6. After all the information is entered, hit the send button. After sending the file, you will receive a
confirmation box letting you know the e-mail was
sent successfully.
7. It is recommended to now save the file to your computer using the same procedure as if you
were using TIS 2000 in case your recipient doesn't
receive your email with the snapshot data.
Important Sending the file via e-mail through TIS2WEB does NOT save the file locally and there is
no way to access your sent mail in TIS2WEB like a regular e-mail program.
Sending a Snapshot to GM TAC
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6512
During your call with GM TAC on a current case, you may be advised to send a copy of the Tech
2(R) or VDR Snapshot Data to the TAC e-mail box.
U.S. Dealers - send to e-mail box
[email protected]
Canadian Dealers - send to e-mail box
[email protected]
Please complete the following:
- Be sure to review the procedures listed above for uploading and sending a Snapshot via
TIS2WEB.
- If you are using a VDR to capture Snapshot Data, information can be accessed in the Techlink
Website in the articles (December 2002, December 2003, July 2004 and January 2006).
- Please be sure to identify the snapshot by placing the TAC Case Number, the last eight digits of
the VIN and the type of data (i.e. engine or transmission) in the subject line of your e-mail. The
email Subject Line MUST contain the TAC case number and last 8 digits of the VIN or their email
can not be processed and will be deleted.
Please send only REQUESTED Snapshot Data to the TAC e-mail box.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6513
Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Engine
Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info.
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-06-01-029E
Date: April 29, 2010
Subject: Unnecessary Flushing Services, Additive Recommendations and Proper Utilization of GM
Simplified Maintenance Schedule to Enhance Customer Service Experience
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add information about the
proper transmission flush procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-01-029D
(Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System).
An Overview of Proper Vehicle Service
General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools and equipment to support a
subsystem flushing procedures. These dedicated machines are in addition to many engine oil,
cooling system, fuel system, A/C, transmission flush and steering system additives available to the
consumer. GM Vehicles under normal usage do not require any additional procedures or additives
beyond what is advised under the former Vehicle Maintenance Schedules or the current Simplified
Maintenance Schedules. Do not confuse machines available from Kent-Moore/SPX that are
designed to aid and accelerate the process of fluid changing with these flushing machines.
Engine Crankcase Flushing
General Motors Corporation does not endorse or recommend engine crankcase flushing for any of
its gasoline engines. Analysis of some of the aftermarket materials used for crankcase flushing
indicate incompatibility with GM engine components and the potential for damage to some engine
seals and bearings. Damage to engine components resulting from crankcase flushing IS NOT
COVERED under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty.
GM Authorized Service Information: Detailed, Descriptive, and Complete
If a specific model vehicle or powertrain need is identified, GM will issue an Authorized Service
Document containing a procedure and, if required, provide, make available, or require the specific
use of a machine, tool or chemical to accomplish proper vehicle servicing. An example of this is
fuel injector cleaning. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, GM has
recognized the need for fuel injector cleaning methods on some engines, though under normal
circumstances, this service is not part of the maintenance requirements.
GM has published several gasoline fuel injector cleaning bulletins that fully outline the methods to
be used in conjunction with GM Part Numbered solutions to accomplish proper and safe cleaning
of the fuel injectors with preventative maintenance suggestions to maintain optimum performance.
You may refer to Corporate Bulletin Numbers 03-06-04-030 and 04-06-04-051 for additional
information on this subject.
Subsystem Flushing
Flushing of A/C lines, radiators, transmission coolers, and power steering systems are recognized
practices to be performed after catastrophic failures or extreme corrosion when encountered in
radiators. For acceptable A/C flushing concerns, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 01-01-38-006.
This practice is NOT required or recommended for normal service operations.
The use of external transmission fluid exchange or flush machines is NOT recommended for the
automatic or manual transmission. Use of external machines to replace the fluid may affect the
operation or durability of the transmission. Transmission fluid should only be replaced by draining
and refilling following directions in SI. Refer to Automatic/Manual Transmission Fluid and Filter
Replacement.
Approved Transmission Flushing Tool (Transmission Cooler Only)
The Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Tool is recommended for GM
vehicles. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Flushing and Flow Test in SI using the J 45096.
Service Is Important to You and Your Customer
General Motors takes great pride in offering our dealerships and customers high quality vehicles
that require extremely low maintenance over the life of the vehicle. This low cost of ownership
builds repeat sales and offers our customers measurable economy of operation against competing
vehicles.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6514
Providing responsible services at the proper intervals will greatly aid your dealership with repeat
business, and additional services when required. Most customers appreciate and gain trust in the
dealership that informs and offers them just what they need for continued trouble-free operation.
Examine your service department's practices and verify that all Service Consultants and
Technicians focus on customer satisfaction, vehicle inspections, and other products at time of
service. Use this opportunity to upgrade the services you provide to your customers. Here are a
few suggestions:
- Take the time required to align your dealership service practices with the new GM Simplified
Maintenance Schedule. Use the new vehicle Owner's Manual Maintenance I and II schedules to
create a "mirror image" in your advertising and dealer service pricing that is easily understandable
to your customer. Taking advantage of this new service strategy may greatly increase your
dealership service sales and customer retention while decreasing the frequency of visits and
inconvenience to your customer.
- Review your program to ensure that all vehicles coming in are evaluated for safety and wear
items. Examine all vehicles for tire condition, signs of misalignment, brake wear, exterior lamp
functionality, exhaust condition, A/C cooling performance, SRS or Air Bag MIL, along with Service
Engine Soon or Check Engine indicators. If the Service Engine Soon or Check Engine MIL is
illuminated, it is vital that you inform the customer of the concerns with ignoring the indicator and
what the required repair would cost. In addition to the possibility of increased emissions and
driveability concerns, many customers are unaware that lower gas mileage may also result, with
additional cost to the customer.
- Be complete in your service recommendations. Some sales opportunities are not being fully
pursued nationally. Focus on overlooked but required maintenance that has real benefits to the
customer. Many vehicles are equipped with cabin air filters. If these filters are used beyond
replacement time, they may impede airflow decreasing A/C and heating performance. Make sure
these filters are part of your recommended service. Note that some of our vehicles may not have
been factory equipped but will accept the filters as an accessory.
- Express the value in maintaining the finish quality of the customer's vehicle at the Maintenance I
and II visits. More fully utilize the vehicle prep personnel you already have in place. In today's
world, many people simply ignore the finish of their vehicle, at best infrequently using an automatic
car wash for exterior cleaning. Offer vehicle detailing services in stages from just a wash and wax
to a complete interior cleaning. When paired with the Simplified Maintenance visit, this will increase
customer satisfaction. On return, the customer gets a visibly improved vehicle that will be a source
of pride of ownership along with a vehicle that is now fully maintained. Also, reinforce the improved
resale value of a completely maintained vehicle.
- For customers who clean and maintain the appearance of their vehicles themselves encourage
the use of GM Vehicle Care products. Many customers may have never used GM Car Wash/Wax
Concentrate, GM Cleaner Wax or a longtime product, GM Glass Cleaner, which is a favorite of
many customers who try it just once. If your dealership give samples of these products with new
car purchases, customers may already be sold on the product but not willing to make a special trip
to the dealership. Capitalize on sales at this time. Stock shelves right at the Service counter with
these products and consider instituting compensation programs for Service Consultants who
suggest these products. Many consumers faced with an intimidating wall full of car care products
sold at local auto parts stores may find it comforting to purchase a fully tested product sold by GM
that they know will not harm the finish of their vehicle. We suggest these competitively priced basic
vehicle care products to emphasize:
In USA:
- #12378401 GM Vehicle Care Wash/Wax Concentrate 16 fl. oz. (0.473L)
- #89021822 GM Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner Aerosol 18 oz. (510 g)
- #12377966 GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax 16 fl. oz. (0.473L)
- #1052929 GM Vehicle Care Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner 16 fl. oz. (0.473L)
- #88861431 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 24 fl. oz. (0.710L)
In Canada:
- #10953203 GM Vehicle Care Wash & Wax Concentrate 473 mL
- #992727 GM Glass Cleaner Aerosol 500 g
- #10952905 GM Vehicle Care Liquid Cleaner/Wax 473 mL
- #10953013 GM Vehicle Care Chrome Cleaner and Polish 454 mL
- #10953202 GM Vehicle Care Wheel Brite 473 mL
- #88901678 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 473 mL
- Display signboards with the installed price for popular GM Accessories such as running boards
and Tonneau Covers. Customers may not think to ask about these desirable items at the time of a
service visit.
- Finally, take advantage of the GM Goodwrench initiatives (Tire Program, Goodwrench Credit
Card, etc. / Dealer Marketing Association (DMA) Promotions in Canada) to provide the customer
with more reasons to identify your dealership as the best place to go for parts and service.
Remember to utilize ALL of the service aspects you possess in your dealership to satisfy and
provide value to your customer. Many businesses exist profitably as an oil change location, a
vehicle repair facility, or a detailing shop alone. You already have the capabilities of all three and
provide these services with the inherent trust of your customer, under the GM Mark of Excellence.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 >
Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration
Differential Mount: Customer Interest Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B
Date: June 07, 2010
Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM
and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN
Breakpoint A6247602
Please Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction
section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions:
- Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and
usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate
the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing
(orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may
require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then
repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a
turn at lower speeds.
- Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph)
and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard
acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it).
- Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs
during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up
and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other
times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can
be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of
vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle).
Cause
This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too
high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary
based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints.
Correction
Important Do Not replace the front drive axles.
Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 >
Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6524
Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the
bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the
condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and
replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts.
Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the
exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission
jack stand.
4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1).
5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain
access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7.
Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts.
Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft).
9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts.
Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft).
10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower
the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front
Springs.
Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only
1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM
P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 >
Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6525
Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut
Component, and Spring Replacement in SI.
Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the
front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM
electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the
correct front wheel drive shaft.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun >
10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration
Differential Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard
Acceleration
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B
Date: June 07, 2010
Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM
and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN
Breakpoint A6247602
Please Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction
section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions:
- Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and
usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate
the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing
(orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may
require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then
repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a
turn at lower speeds.
- Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph)
and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard
acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it).
- Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs
during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up
and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other
times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can
be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of
vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle).
Cause
This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too
high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary
based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints.
Correction
Important Do Not replace the front drive axles.
Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun >
10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6531
Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the
bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the
condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and
replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts.
Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the
exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission
jack stand.
4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1).
5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain
access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7.
Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts.
Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft).
9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts.
Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft).
10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower
the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front
Springs.
Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only
1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM
P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun >
10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6532
Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut
Component, and Spring Replacement in SI.
Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the
front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM
electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the
correct front wheel drive shaft.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection
Constant Velocity Joint: Testing and Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection
Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection
Disassembly Procedure
1. Remove the outer constant velocity (CV) joint and boot from the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front
Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot
Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot
Replacement).
2. Remove any lubricant from the CV joint.
Note: Position the cage and the inner race so they are level.
3. Install the outer CV joint assembly in a soft jawed vise.
Note: The following procedure will have to be repeated until all the ball bearing are removed form
the cage.
4. Using a brass drift (1), gentle tap the cage until the ball bearing can be removed from the cage.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection >
Page 6539
5. Using a small screwdriver, remove the ball bearings (1) from the CV joint (2).
6. Remove the ball bearings from the CV joint in sequence.
Note: Position the cage so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are facing up.
7. Position the cage (1) at a 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). 8. Align the cage
windows with the lands of the outer race (2). 9. Lift and remove the cage (1) and the inner race
from the outer race (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection >
Page 6540
10. Position the cage (2) and the inner race (1) so that the larger radius corners of the cage
windows are up. 11. Rotate the inner race (1) 90 degrees to the center line of the cage (2). 12.
Align the lands of the inner race (1) with the windows of the cage (2). 13. Move the inner race (1)
land into the cage window (2). 14. Rotate the inner race (1) down and remove it from the cage (2).
15. Clean the following items thoroughly with the proper cleaning solvent:
* The inner race
* The outer race
* The cage
* The ball bearings
* The exposed end of the wheel drive shaft
Note: The internal parts of the CV joint are NOT SERVICED separately. The outer CV joint is
serviced as an assembly.
16. If any of the above items are found to have excessive wear or are damaged, replace the outer
CV joint as an assembly.
Assembly Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection >
Page 6541
1. Position the cage (2) so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are up. 2. Position
the inner race (1) 90 degrees to the centerline of the cage (2). 3. Insert the inner race (1) through
the bottom of the cage (2). 4. Align the lands of the inner race (1) with the windows of the cage (2).
5. Move the inner race (1) land into the cage window (2). 6. Rotate the inner race (1) down and
remove it from the cage (2). 7. Rotate the inner race (1) within the cage (2) so that the grooved
surface of the inner race (1) is facing up. 8. Align the inner race (1) ball bearing tracks with the
cage (2) windows.
9. Wrap a clean shop towel around the CV joint outer race splined shaft.
10. Place the outer race (2) vertically in a bench vise. 11. Position the cage (1) and the inner race
at a 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). 12. With the inner race and the cage (1)
assembly in a vertical position, insert the cage and the inner race into the outer race (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection >
Page 6542
Note: The larger radius corners of the cage windows should be positioned up and the grooved
surface of the inner race should be visible.
13. Position the cage (2) and the inner race so that they are level in the vise. 14. Rotate the
appropriate component(s), and align the cage windows and the inner race ball bearing (1) tracks
with the outer race ball bearing tracks. 15. Position a cage window and the inner race ball bearing
track for the ball bearing installation.
Note: When performing the following procedure, the opposing cage (2) window and the inner ball
bearing (1) track will be accessible for the ball bearing installation.
16. Press down on the cage following one of the outer race ball bearing (1) tracks. 17. Install the
ball bearing through the cage window onto the inner race ball bearing (1) track.
Note: The following service procedure will have to be performed after each ball bearing (1) has
been installed.
18. After the first ball bearing (1) has been installed, use a brass drift and a hammer and gently tap
the cage in order to drive the cage and the inner
race down completely in the outer race.
Note: After the ball bearing (1) has been installed, there should be NO GAP between the ball
bearing and the inner race.
19. Position the cage and the inner race so that they are level. 20. Using a plastic hammer, lightly
tap the ball bearing (1) into place.
21. Install the ball bearings in sequence. 22. Repeat steps 18 thru 20 until all the ball bearings are
installed. 23. Install the outer CV joint and boot on the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel
Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Service
and Repair/Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection >
Page 6543
Constant Velocity Joint: Testing and Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection
Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection
Inspection Procedure
1. Remove the front wheel drive shaft inner joint and boot. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner
Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Service and
Repair/Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement).
2. Remove the wheel drive shaft tripod bushing (1) from the tripod housing (3). 3. Remove the
wheel drive shaft tripod housing (3) from the wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove the wheel drive shaft
tripod joint boot bushing (1). 5. Using a suitable cleaner, remove the excess grease from the tripod
assembly. 6. Inspect the following items for damage or excessive wear:
* The wheel drive shaft tripod boot
* The wheel drive shaft tripod assembly
* The wheel drive shaft tripod joint housing
* The wheel drive shaft tripod joint bushing
* The wheel drive shaft
7. If any of the internal parts are found to be excessively worn or damaged, replace the wheel drive
shaft inner joint and boot. Refer to Front Wheel
Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Front Wheel Drive Shaft
Inner Joint and Boot Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement
Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement
Special Tools
J 35910 - Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers
Note: The tripot assembly and the internal parts for the tripot assembly are not service. If the tripot
assembly is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an
assembly.
Disassemble Procedure
1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement
(See: Service and Repair).
2. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6546
3. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove boot retaining clamp (2) from the boot (3) for the tripod housing
(1). 4. Using side cutters, remove the boot clamp (4) from the boot (3) for the wheel drive shaft (5).
5. Remove the tripod housing (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6547
6. Remove the retaining clip (1) and the tripod spider (2) from the wheel drive shaft (3).
7. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 8. Inspect the wheel drive shaft inner joint for
damage and excessive wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection (See: Testing and
Inspection/Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection).
Assemble Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6548
Note: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove.
1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2).
2. Install the tripot spider assembly (2) to the wheel drive shaft (3), until seated against shoulder. 3.
Install the retaining ring (1) in the wheel drive shaft. 4. Place approximately half of the grease in the
kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6549
5. Install the tripod housing (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2).
6. Install the boot clamp (2) on the boot (3) for the tripod housing (1). 7. Install the boot clamp (4)
on the boot (3) for the wheel drive (5).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6550
8. Using the J 35910 - pliers breaker bar, torque wrench and or ratchet (1) , close the boot clamp
(2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in).
9. Using the J 35910 - pliers (3), breaker bar (5), torque wrench and or ratchet (4), close the clamp
until the gap (6) measures 1.9 mm (0.070 in).
10. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. 11. Install the
wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service
and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6551
Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot
Replacement
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement
Special Tools
* CH 48894 - Wheel Drive Shaft Boot Clamp Pliers
* J 35910 - Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers
Note: The outer Constant Velocity Joint is not service separately. If the CV joint is found to have
excessive wear or damage, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly.
Disassemble Procedure
1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement
(See: Service and Repair)
2. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6552
Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting
through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant
velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and
premature wear of the constant velocity joint.
3. Use a flat-bladed tool, remove the boot clamp (2) from the constant velocity (CV) joint (1) and
the boot (3). 4. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the boot clamp (4) from the boot
(3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). Replace with NEW clamps.
5. Using a block of wood and a hammer, remove the CV joint (2) from the wheel drive shaft (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6553
6. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 7. Inspect the outer CV joint for damage and
wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection/Wheel Drive
Shaft Outer Joint Inspection).
Assemble Procedure
1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6554
2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3).
3. Place approximately half the lubricant (2) inside the CV joint boot (1) and the other half in the CV
joint (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6555
4. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft (1).
5. Install the boot clamp (4) on the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 6. Install the boot clamp
(2) on the boot (3) and the CV joint housing (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6556
Note: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the
boot.
7. Using the J 35910 - pliers (1), close the clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.85 in).
Note: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the
boot.
8. Using the CH 48894 - pliers (1), close the boot clamp (3). 9. Remove the wheel drive shaft from
the bench vise.
10. Move the CV joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times to distribute the lubricant. 11. Install the
wheel drive shaft in the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement
Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement
Special Tools
J 35910 - Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers
Note: The tripot assembly and the internal parts for the tripot assembly are not service. If the tripot
assembly is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an
assembly.
Disassemble Procedure
1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement
(See: Service and Repair).
2. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6561
3. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove boot retaining clamp (2) from the boot (3) for the tripod housing
(1). 4. Using side cutters, remove the boot clamp (4) from the boot (3) for the wheel drive shaft (5).
5. Remove the tripod housing (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6562
6. Remove the retaining clip (1) and the tripod spider (2) from the wheel drive shaft (3).
7. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 8. Inspect the wheel drive shaft inner joint for
damage and excessive wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection (See: Constant
Velocity Joint/Testing and Inspection/Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection).
Assemble Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6563
Note: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove.
1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2).
2. Install the tripot spider assembly (2) to the wheel drive shaft (3), until seated against shoulder. 3.
Install the retaining ring (1) in the wheel drive shaft. 4. Place approximately half of the grease in the
kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6564
5. Install the tripod housing (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2).
6. Install the boot clamp (2) on the boot (3) for the tripod housing (1). 7. Install the boot clamp (4)
on the boot (3) for the wheel drive (5).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6565
8. Using the J 35910 - pliers breaker bar, torque wrench and or ratchet (1) , close the boot clamp
(2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in).
9. Using the J 35910 - pliers (3), breaker bar (5), torque wrench and or ratchet (4), close the clamp
until the gap (6) measures 1.9 mm (0.070 in).
10. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. 11. Install the
wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service
and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6566
Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot
Replacement
Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement
Special Tools
* CH 48894 - Wheel Drive Shaft Boot Clamp Pliers
* J 35910 - Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers
Note: The outer Constant Velocity Joint is not service separately. If the CV joint is found to have
excessive wear or damage, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly.
Disassemble Procedure
1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement
(See: Service and Repair)
2. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6567
Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting
through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant
velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and
premature wear of the constant velocity joint.
3. Use a flat-bladed tool, remove the boot clamp (2) from the constant velocity (CV) joint (1) and
the boot (3). 4. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the boot clamp (4) from the boot
(3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). Replace with NEW clamps.
5. Using a block of wood and a hammer, remove the CV joint (2) from the wheel drive shaft (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6568
6. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 7. Inspect the outer CV joint for damage and
wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection (See: Constant Velocity Joint/Testing and
Inspection/Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection).
Assemble Procedure
1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6569
2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3).
3. Place approximately half the lubricant (2) inside the CV joint boot (1) and the other half in the CV
joint (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6570
4. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft (1).
5. Install the boot clamp (4) on the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 6. Install the boot clamp
(2) on the boot (3) and the CV joint housing (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot
Replacement > Page 6571
Note: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the
boot.
7. Using the J 35910 - pliers (1), close the clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.85 in).
Note: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the
boot.
8. Using the CH 48894 - pliers (1), close the boot clamp (3). 9. Remove the wheel drive shaft from
the bench vise.
10. Move the CV joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times to distribute the lubricant. 11. Install the
wheel drive shaft in the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6580
transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft.
Seal Installation
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer
Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6586
transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft.
Seal Installation
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate
Inoperative from Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 6592
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6593
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622
Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6594
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the
input shaft.
Seal Installation
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622
Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6595
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the
input shaft.
Seal Installation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6596
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6602
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Mechanical Specifications
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6612
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Fluid Type Specifications
Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6613
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation
Propeller Shaft Description and Operation
The propeller shaft assembly is a 2-piece design. The front shaft consists of a plunging A-type
constant velocity joint at the front and a universal joint and yoke at the rear.
The rear shaft consists of a center bearing and a center yoke, which are pressed onto the rear half
of the propshaft and retained by a snap ring. The front and rear shafts are joined together at the
yokes with a universal joint. The rear shaft attaches to the axle with a flange which is attached to
the rear shaft with a universal joint.
The center bearing provides support where the front and rear shafts mate and is bolted to the
underbody. The front constant velocity joint is bolted to the power take-off unit (PTU), and the rear
universal joint flange is bolted to the rear differential.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Propeller Shaft
Symptoms - Propeller Shaft
Strategy Based Diagnostics
Review the system operations in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Propeller Shaft Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) , Transfer Case
Description and Operation () for the Getrag 760 transfer case, and Rear Drive Axle Description and
Operation () in this service manual. All diagnosis on a vehicle should follow a logical process.
Strategy based diagnostics is a uniform approach for repairing all systems. The diagnostic flow
may always be used in order to resolve a system problem. The diagnostic flow is the place to start
when repairs are necessary. For a detailed explanation, refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis (See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis).
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the vehicle. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories).
Note: The constant velocity (CV) joint is not serviceable. If the boot is torn or the joint is worn or
damaged, replace the propeller shaft as an assembly.
* Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions
which could cause the symptom:
- Inspect the CV joint boot for rips or cracks.
- Rotate the CV joint to inspect for binding.
- Inspect the CV joint for grease or oil leakage.
* Verify the exact operating conditions under which the concern exists. Note factors such as speed,
road conditions, ambient temperature, and other specifics.
* Compare the driving characteristics or sounds, if applicable, to a known good vehicle and make
sure you are not trying to correct a normal condition.
Intermittent
Test the vehicle under the same conditions that the customer reported in order to verify the system
is operating properly.
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
* Ping, Snap, or Click Noise (See: Ping, Snap, or Click Noise)
* Knock or Clunk Noise (See: Knock or Clunk Noise)
* Scraping Noise (See: Scraping Noise)
* Squeak Noise (See: Squeak Noise)
* Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed (See: Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6616
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Knock or Clunk Noise
Knock or Clunk Noise
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6617
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Ping, Snap, or Click Noise
Ping, Snap, or Click Noise
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6618
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Scraping Noise
Scraping Noise
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6619
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection
Symptoms - Propeller Shaft
Symptoms - Propeller Shaft
Strategy Based Diagnostics
Review the system operations in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Propeller Shaft Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) , Transfer Case
Description and Operation () for the Getrag 760 transfer case, and Rear Drive Axle Description and
Operation () in this service manual. All diagnosis on a vehicle should follow a logical process.
Strategy based diagnostics is a uniform approach for repairing all systems. The diagnostic flow
may always be used in order to resolve a system problem. The diagnostic flow is the place to start
when repairs are necessary. For a detailed explanation, refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis (See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis).
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the vehicle. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories).
Note: The constant velocity (CV) joint is not serviceable. If the boot is torn or the joint is worn or
damaged, replace the propeller shaft as an assembly.
* Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions
which could cause the symptom:
- Inspect the CV joint boot for rips or cracks.
- Rotate the CV joint to inspect for binding.
- Inspect the CV joint for grease or oil leakage.
* Verify the exact operating conditions under which the concern exists. Note factors such as speed,
road conditions, ambient temperature, and other specifics.
* Compare the driving characteristics or sounds, if applicable, to a known good vehicle and make
sure you are not trying to correct a normal condition.
Intermittent
Test the vehicle under the same conditions that the customer reported in order to verify the system
is operating properly.
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
* Ping, Snap, or Click Noise (See: Ping, Snap, or Click Noise)
* Knock or Clunk Noise (See: Knock or Clunk Noise)
* Scraping Noise (See: Scraping Noise)
* Squeak Noise (See: Squeak Noise)
* Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed (See: Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed)
Knock or Clunk Noise
Knock or Clunk Noise
Ping, Snap, or Click Noise
Ping, Snap, or Click Noise
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6620
Scraping Noise
Scraping Noise
Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed
Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed
Squeak Noise
Squeak Noise
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6621
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair
Propeller Shaft Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Place the transmission in neutral (N). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and
Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Mark the relationship
of the propeller shaft to the rear differential drive flange and the transfer case. 4. Support the
propeller shaft at the rear differential.
5. Remove the mounting bolts for the propeller shaft at the rear differential drive flange. 6. Support
propeller shaft at the transfer case.
7. Remove the mounting bolts for the propeller shaft at the transfer case. 8. Support the propeller
shaft at the center support bearing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6622
9. Remove the mounting bolts for the center support bearing.
10. With the aide of an assistant, remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Thoroughly clean the mounting bolts for center bearing and the front and rear propeller shaft
flanges. Apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297
(Canadian P/N 10953488), to the bolt threads.
2. With the aide of an assistant, position the propeller shaft on the supports. 3. Align the reference
marks on the front and rear of the propeller shaft to the transfer case and rear differential.
4. Position the propeller shaft on the transfer case output flange. 5. Finger tighten the mounting
bolts for the propeller shaft at the transfer case output flange.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6623
6. Position the center support bearing of the propeller shaft on the vehicle. 7. Finger tighten the
mounting bolts for the center support bearing.
8. Position the propeller shaft on the rear differential drive flange. 9. Finger tighten the rear
mounting bolts for the propeller shaft.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
10. Tighten the front mounting bolts for the propeller shaft.
Tighten the mounting bolts to 35 Nm (25 lb ft).
11. Tighten the mounting bolts for the center support bearing.
Tighten the mounting bolts to 25 Nm (19 lb ft).
12. Tighten the rear mounting bolts for the propeller shaft yoke to rear drive axle.
Tighten the mounting bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6624
13. Remove the supports for the propeller shaft. 14. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Flex plate
First pass .............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Final pass ........................................................
...................................................................................................................................................... 45
degrees
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6628
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
Engine Flywheel Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement (FWD) ()Transmission
Replacement (AWD) (). 2. Remove the flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Removal (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/8. Engine
Flywheel Removal)
3. Clean and inspect the flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Cleaning and Inspection (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/51. Engine Flywheel Cleaning and Inspection). If the flywheel teeth are damaged,
inspect the starter for proper operation. Replace the starter if you find excessive wear or damage to
the starter drive.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Installation (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/128. Engine
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6629
Flywheel Installation)
2. Install the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement (FWD) ()Transmission
Replacement (AWD) ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics
Manual Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission - M/T Operating
Characteristics
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 03-07-29-004G
Date: December 15, 2010
Subject: Manual Transmission Operating Characteristics
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior
Chevrolet and GMC Medium Duty Trucks 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Manual Transmission
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and to add Cold Operation
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-29-004F (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle).
Important Even though this bulletin attempts to cover operating characteristics of manual
transmissions, it cannot be all inclusive. Be sure to compare any questionable concerns to a similar
vehicle and if possible, with similar mileage. Even though many of the conditions are described as
characteristics and may not be durability issues, GM may attempt to improve specific issues for
customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this bulletin is to assist in identifying characteristics of manual transmissions that
repair attempts will not change. The following are explanations and examples of conditions that will
generally occur in all manual transmissions. All noises will vary between transmissions due to build
variation, type of transmission (usually the more heavy duty, the more noise), type of flywheel and
clutch, level of insulation, etc.
Basic Information
Many transmission noises are created by the firing pulses of the engine. Each firing pulse creates a
sudden change in angular acceleration at the crankshaft. These changes in speed can be reduced
with clutch damper springs and dual mass flywheels. However, some speed variation will make it
through to the transmission. This can create noise as the various gears will accel and decel against
each other because of required clearances.
Cold Operation
Manual transmission operation will be affected by temperature because the transmission fluid will
be thicker when cold. The thicker fluid will increase the amount of force needed to shift the
transmission when cold. The likelihood of gear clash will also increase due to the greater time
needed for the synchronizer assembly to perform its function. Therefore when the transmission is
cold, or before it has reached operating temperature, quick, hard shifts should be avoided to
prevent damage to the transmission.
Gear Rattle
Rattling or grinding (not to be confused with a missed shift type of grinding, also described as a
combustion knock type of noise) type noises usually occur while operating the engine at low RPMs
(lugging the engine). This can occur while accelerating from a stop (for example, a Corvette) or
while operating at low RPMs while under a load (for example, Kodiak in a lower gear and at low
engine speed). Vehicles equipped with a dual-mass flywheel (for example, a 3500 HD Sierra with
the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)) will have reduced noise levels as compared to vehicles
without (for example, a 4500 Kodiak with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)). However,
dual-mass flywheels do not eliminate all noise.
Neutral Rattle
There are often concerns of rattle while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged. This is related to
the changes in angular acceleration described earlier. This is a light rattle, and once again, vehicles
with dual mass flywheels will have reduced noise. If the engine is shut off while idling in neutral with
the clutch engaged, the sudden stop of the engine will create a rapid change in angular
acceleration that even dual mass flywheels cannot compensate. Because of the mass of all the
components, this will create a noise. This type of noise should not be heard if the clutch is released
(pedal pushed to the floor).
Backlash
Backlash noise is created when changing engine or driveline loading. This can occur when
accelerating from a stop, coming to a stop, or applying and releasing the throttle (loading and
unloading the driveline). This will vary based on vehicle type, build variations, driver input, vehicle
loading, etc. and is created from the necessary clearance between all of the mating gears in the
transmission, axle(s) and transfer case (if equipped).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics > Page 6634
Shift Effort
Shift effort will vary among different style transmissions and synchronizer designs. Usually the
more heavy duty the transmission, the higher the shift effort because of the increased mass of the
components. Shift effort can also be higher in cold weather because the fluid will be thicker.
Medium duty transmissions will not shift as quickly as a Corvette transmission. To reduce shift
effort, do not attempt to rush the shift - allow the synchronizers to work as designed. Shifting harder
will only increase the chance of rushing past the synchronizer leading to grinding while shifting.
Non-Synchronized Gears
Some light duty truck transmissions in 1st gear (creeper-gear) and reverse gears in various
transmissions, along with all gears in some medium duty transmissions, may be non-synchronized.
This means there is not a mechanism to match input and output shaft speeds to allow for a smooth
shift. This function is left up to the driver. This can be noticed if a shift into 1st or reverse is
attempted while the vehicle is rolling or before the input shaft stops rotating leading to a gear grind.
The grinding can be reduced by coming to a complete stop and pausing for a moment before
shifting into the 1st or reverse gear. Some slight grinding can be expected. In medium duty
non-synchronized transmissions, the driver must match input shaft (engine) speed to output shaft
(driveshaft) speed with every shift. This can be accomplished by double clutching, or by using other
methods. If the driver is not able to perform this function properly, there will be gear grinding with
each improperly completed shift. Driver training may be required to correct this condition. Clutch
brakes are used in medium duty non-synchronized transmissions to allow a shift into gear at a
stop. The clutch brake is used to stop the input shaft from spinning, allowing a shift into gear at a
stop without grinding. The clutch brake is activated by pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the
floor. When the clutch brake is used, it is possible to have a blocked shift with the vehicle
stationary. If this occurs, engage the clutch slightly to rotate the input gear to allow the shift. The
clutch brake is intended to only be used while at a stop. Care must be taken to not activate the
clutch brake while shifting between gears. This could lead to excessive grinding or a blocked or
missed shift.
Skip Shift
Currently, the Cadillac CTS-V, Pontiac GTO, Chevrolet Corvette and Camaro SS (other models
may follow) equipped with the 6-speed manual transmission have a feature referred to as a
"skip-shift." This feature only allows a shift from 1st to 4th gear when the indicator lamp is
illuminated on the dash. Dealers cannot disable this feature as it was established to help meet fuel
economy standards. The conditions for this feature are: engine coolant at normal operating
temperature, vehicle speed of 24-31 km/h (15-19 mph), 21% or less throttle being used (refer to
Service Information or the Owner Manual for more details.)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6650
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6651
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed
Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6661
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6662
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 6665
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 6666
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 6667
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 6668
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 6669
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission > Page 6670
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Mode Switch: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views > Page 6680
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views > Page 6681
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6684
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6685
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6686
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6690
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6691
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6692
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6693
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6694
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6695
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6696
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6699
16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch
Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction
Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6700
11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans
Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output
Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring
Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal
Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and
Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter
Assembly
3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly
500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft
Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston
Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch
Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate
508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510
- 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6701
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6702
14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential
Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and
Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch
Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control
Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid
Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6703
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6704
25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque
Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin
- Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent
31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans
Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons
400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS
O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal
Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer
Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6707
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5.
Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6708
1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve
body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6709
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6710
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 >
Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 >
Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6720
transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft.
Seal Installation
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A
> Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer
Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A
> Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6726
transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft.
Seal Installation
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6727
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622
Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6728
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the
input shaft.
Seal Installation
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622
Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6729
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel
Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal)
Models:
2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010
Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP
2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75
AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic
Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area.
Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from
the transmission, near the passenger side.
Cause
The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient
temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input
shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Correction
Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal.
Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update.
Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New
Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI.
For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
For Suzuki XL-7
- For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green).
- For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322
(Green).
Notice
Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design
seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the
input shaft.
Seal Installation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6730
Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft
Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of
the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6738
Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6739
Shift Solenoid: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6742
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6743
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6744
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6751
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6752
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6753
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6759
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6760
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6761
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6762
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6763
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6764
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6765
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6766
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6767
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6768
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6769
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6770
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6771
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6772
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6773
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6774
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6775
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6776
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6777
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6778
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6779
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6780
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6781
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6782
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6783
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6784
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6785
Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6786
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6787
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6788
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6789
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6790
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6791
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6792
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6793
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6794
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6795
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6796
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6797
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6798
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6799
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6800
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6801
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6802
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6803
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6804
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6805
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6806
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6807
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6808
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6809
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6810
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6811
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6812
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6813
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6814
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6815
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6816
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6817
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6818
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6819
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6820
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6821
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6822
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6823
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6824
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6825
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6826
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6827
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6828
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6829
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6830
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6831
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6832
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6833
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6834
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6835
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6836
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6837
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6838
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6839
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6840
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6841
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6842
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6843
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6844
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6845
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6846
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6847
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6848
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6849
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6850
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6851
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6852
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6853
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6854
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6855
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6856
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6876
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6877
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6878
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6879
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6880
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6881
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6882
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6883
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6884
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6885
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6891
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6892
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6893
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6894
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6895
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6896
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6897
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6898
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6899
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6900
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6901
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6902
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6903
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6904
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6905
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6906
Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid
Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed
Sensor Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6907
16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual
Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input
Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill
Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential
Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly
Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2)
400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403
- Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve
405 - Control Valve Body Assembly
Component Location
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6908
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly
17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly
Component Location
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6909
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front
Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump
Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6910
20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and
Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case
Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve
Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual
Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6911
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 -
Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque
Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model
Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input
Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover
Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6912
Shift Solenoid: Connector Views
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6913
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6914
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6915
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6916
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6919
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6920
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6921
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6922
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6923
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6924
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6929
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6930
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6931
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6932
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6933
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6934
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6935
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6936
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6937
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6938
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6939
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6940
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6941
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6942
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6943
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6944
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6945
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6946
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6947
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6948
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6949
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6950
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6951
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6952
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6953
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6954
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6955
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6956
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6957
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6958
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6959
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6960
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6961
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6962
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6963
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6964
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6965
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6966
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6967
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6968
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6969
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6970
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6971
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6972
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6973
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6974
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6975
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6976
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6977
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6978
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6979
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6980
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6981
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6982
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6983
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6984
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6985
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6986
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6987
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6988
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6989
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6990
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6991
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6992
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6993
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6994
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6995
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6996
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6997
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6998
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6999
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7000
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7001
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7002
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7003
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7004
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7005
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7006
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7007
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7008
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7009
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7010
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7011
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7012
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7013
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7014
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7015
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7016
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7017
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7018
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7019
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7020
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7021
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7022
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7023
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7024
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7025
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7026
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7027
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7028
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7029
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7030
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7031
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7032
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7033
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7034
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7035
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7036
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7037
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7038
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7039
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7040
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7041
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7042
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7043
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7044
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7045
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7046
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7047
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7048
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7049
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7050
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7051
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7052
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7053
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7054
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7055
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7056
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7057
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7058
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7059
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7060
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7061
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7062
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7063
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7064
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7065
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7066
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7067
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7068
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7069
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7070
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7071
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7072
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7074
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7075
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7076
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7077
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7078
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7079
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7080
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7081
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7082
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7083
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7084
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7085
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7086
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7087
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7088
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7089
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7090
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7091
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7092
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 7108
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 7109
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed
Shifting
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A
Date: November 25, 2009
Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM)
Models:
2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn
OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6)
Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70
(RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn
AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the
Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle).
Condition
Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting
at the wrong time.
Correction
A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the
transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service
Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the
Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation
for programming instructions, if required.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot
Data Using (GDS)
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A
Date: June 11, 2010
Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS),
Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Attention:
For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number:
16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In
Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking
on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number
referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002
(Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle).
The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take
the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle
on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with
all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet
Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and
Buick Regal.
The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data
screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The
procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens.
Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating
an E-mail
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle.
Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection:
3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from
TIS2WEB.
Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS
was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to
download.
4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID
Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect.
10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11.
Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step,
turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to
the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The
Diagnostic Screen will appear.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot
Data Using (GDS) > Page 7119
Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step
18.
18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select:
Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23.
Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken.
Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle
is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of
snapshot recording time.
24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert:
Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the
snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear
with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech
Support.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error
message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT
contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information
here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a
short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC
Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have
REQUESTED.
1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to
Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear.
Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result
in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent.
5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an
error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address.
Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces.
7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain
any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN
Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and
will be deleted.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot
Data Using (GDS) > Page 7120
9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone
number.
Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC.
10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts
(2) M6 x 97.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7123
7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module.
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not
reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any
damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as
necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid
seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand
start the control valve body bolts (1, 2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7124
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor
electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the
transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7125
Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed
sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring
(8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7126
7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95.
10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body
and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5).
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6).
* Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable.
* Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control
solenoid valve assembly as necessary.
* Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage
around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage
around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing
retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly,
resulting in possible damage or contamination.
1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7127
2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid
valve spring (7) into position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence.
4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x
55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6
x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch
electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7128
Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement).
13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References
(See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning).
Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt
procedure should be performed.
14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
Transmission Mode Switch: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views
6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl
Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park
Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft
609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent
Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin
6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Disassembled Views
Park System Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7138
500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503
- Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator
Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator
Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever
Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7139
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Special Tools
* DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover
* J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift
shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2).
Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator
rod from the transmission case.
5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7142
Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly.
1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4).
Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift
shaft seal during installation.
2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550.
Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in).
Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly
secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack.
4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper
engagement with the case.
Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in).
5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and
Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7143
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7144
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7148
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel
Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1
Left Rear Engine Components (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7149
1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F
Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve
Top of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7150
1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E
Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7151
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7152
1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12
Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position
Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft
Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid
Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock
Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1
Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7153
1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1
Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
Automatic Transmission Electronic Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7154
1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A
Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and
TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly
11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring
Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7157
16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch
Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction
Sun Gear Assembly
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body
Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control
Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control
Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7158
11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans
Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output
Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring
Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal
Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and
Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter
Assembly
3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly
500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft
Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston
Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch
Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate
508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510
- 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7159
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Component Location
Component Location
Component Locations
1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier
Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear
Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid
Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7160
14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and
Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential
Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and
Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch
Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control
Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid
Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve
Disassembled Views
Disassembled Views
Case and Associated Parts
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7161
1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid
Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve
Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body
Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt
13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM)
Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft
Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly
20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter
Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7162
25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque
Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin
- Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent
31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans
Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt
A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons
400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS
O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal
Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer
Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover
Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7165
2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1).
3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5.
Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7166
1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve
body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic
Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement).
6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive
Values Learn (See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7167
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Output Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Input Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7168
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7174
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7175
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7176
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7177
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with
the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the EBCM/EBTCM.
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV)
area of any dirt or debris. 4. Disconnect the EBCM electrical connector by lifting the locking lever
upward.
5. Remove the 4 EBCM bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7178
Note: Do not pry the components apart.
6. Carefully pull the EBCM (1) from the BPMV. 7. Remove the 12 EBCM seals, if necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the EBCM seals, if removed. 2. Install the EBCM (1) to the BPMV.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7179
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the 4 EBCM bolts (1) and tighten the bolts in a cross pattern to 3 Nm (27 lb in). 4. Install
the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
5. If installing a new EBCM, program the EBCM. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). 6. Without starting the engine, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection
Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Pressure Sensor Calibration
The brake pressure sensor does not require calibration often. Calibration of the brake pressure
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Brake pressure modulator valve assembly replacement
The Brake Pressure Sensor Calibration procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3.
Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Brake Pressure
Sensor Calibration in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool
directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Clear any DTCs that may be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement
Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with
the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the EBCM/EBTCM.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector by lifting the locking
tabs. 4. Disconnect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) at the brake pressure modulator valve
(BPMV). 5. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and
contamination. 6. Disconnect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 7. Cap the brake
pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7185
8. Disconnect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake
pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
10. Disconnect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 11. Cap the
brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
12. Disconnect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 13. Cap the brake pipe fitting and
plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 14. Disconnect the right
rear brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 15. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet
port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7186
16. Remove the BPMV bolt (1).
Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV.
17. Carefully remove the BPMV assembly (1) by pulling straight upward. 18. Inspect the insulators
for damage and replace, if necessary. 19. If replacing the BPMV, remove the EBCM. Refer to
Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See: Electronic Brake Control
Module/Service and Repair).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the EBCM, if removed. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See:
Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7187
2. Install the BPMV assembly (1) to the bracket.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7188
4. Connect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 5.
Connect the right rear brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft).
6. Connect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16
lb ft). 7. Connect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21
Nm (16 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7189
8. Connect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 9.
Connect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft).
10. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 11. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
12. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
13. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 14. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
(See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle).
15. Observe the brake pedal feel after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now
feels spongy, air may have been in, or may have been
introduced into the primary circuit.
16. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7190
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Bracket Replacement
Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) bolt (1).
Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV.
4. Without disconnecting the brake pipe fittings, carefully lift the BPMV assembly (1) upward to
release the mounting pins from the BPMV bracket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7191
insulators.
5. Position the BPMV assembly aside and secure with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
6. Remove the 2 BPMV bracket nuts (1).
7. Remove the BPMV bracket bolt (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7192
8. Remove the BPMV bracket (1). 9. Inspect the insulators for damage and replace, if necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the BPMV bracket (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7193
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the BPMV bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
3. Install the BPMV bracket nuts (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement > Page 7194
4. Carefully position the BPMV assembly (1) to the BPMV bracket insulators.
5. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Install the accessory wiring junction
block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and
Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory
Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7198
Traction Control Switch: Diagrams
S75 Traction Control Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7199
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Electronic Traction Control and Vehicle Stability Control Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Wheel Components
1 - B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front 2 - B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear 3 - B5LR
Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear 4 - B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7203
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams
B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7204
B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7205
B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7206
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the front brake hose bracket nut (1). 5. Release the front wheel speed sensor harness
from the retainers on the front brake hose.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7209
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1).
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor (1) by pulling the sensor straight upward from the steering
knuckle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the wheel speed sensor (1) to the steering knuckle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7210
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
3. Install the front brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the wheel
speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the front wheel speed sensor harness to the retainers
on the front brake hose. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7211
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components
1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7215
Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams
B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7216
Yaw Rate Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Vehicle Yaw Sensor Learn
Note: The Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor is also known as the Inertia Sensor Module (IMU) in SPS
and the Yaw Rate Sensor in the scan tool. The sensor must be configured using SPS before the
vehicle yaw sensor learn is performed.
The multi-axis acceleration sensor requires a SPS configuration and a yaw rate sensor learn. This
is required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as
follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Multi-axis acceleration sensor replacement
* Vehicle yaw sensor replacement
* Vehicle yaw sensor with lateral and longitudinal accelerometer sensor replacement
The yaw rate sensor learn procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps:
1. Place vehicle on a level surface. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P
position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Reset in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset
Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset
Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 9. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that
may be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7217
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Yaw Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure
Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Note: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform
a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). The automated bleed
procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist:
* Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel
* Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred
* Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly
The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run
the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed
off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation.
The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in
these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners.
Automated Bleed Procedure
Caution: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing
the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be
given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment
per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid
causing damage to components and painted surfaces.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. Refer
to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair).
3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes
(See: Hydraulic System/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes). Repair or
replace components as needed.
4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test (See:
Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test).
6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish
communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the
Special Functions
menu.
9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See:
)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ).
11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed
procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed
procedure:
* If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) and diagnose the appropriate DTC.
* If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) ( See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure)
(See: ).
13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14.
Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
17. Inspect the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic
System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7222
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Manual)
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With
the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort
increases significantly, in order to deplete the
brake booster power reserve.
3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you
disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you
must perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add
GM approved brake fluid from a clean,
sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada)
(See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside
of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal.
2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front
brake pipe from the front port of the brake
master cylinder.
3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4.
Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant
slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the
same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe,
then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps
3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe
installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the
master cylinder,
loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8.
10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake
pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly
tightened.
4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake
fluid container. Ensure that the brake master
cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to
maintain the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake
Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the
outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm.
5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6.
Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the
transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the
pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit.
10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15
seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12.
With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been
purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit,
install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With
the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left front hydraulic circuit, install
a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With
the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a
proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After
completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel
hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly
tightened.
19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal.
Observe the feel of the brake pedal.
Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior
to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed.
21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still
feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure,
perform the following steps:
1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection
(See: Hydraulic System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection).
2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in
the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7223
22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated.
Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired.
23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7224
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Pressure)
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure)
Special Tools
* J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent
* J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Hydraulic System/Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With
the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort
increases significantly, in order to deplete the
brake booster power reserve.
3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you
disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you
must perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add
GM approved brake fluid from a clean,
sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada)
(See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside
of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal.
2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front
brake pipe from the front port of the brake
master cylinder.
3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4.
Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant
slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the
same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe,
then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps
3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe
installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the
master cylinder,
loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8.
10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake
pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly
tightened.
4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer
to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and
around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm.
5. Install the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6.
Check the brake fluid level in the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent
, or equivalent. Add GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the
half-full point.
7. Connect the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, to
the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder
Adapter.
8. Charge the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, air
tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder,
or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to
enter the brake system.
10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to
ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid
leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure.
11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the
transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
14. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air
bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then
tighten the bleeder valve.
15. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been
purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit,
install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With
the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left front hydraulic circuit, install
a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. With
the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7225
proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve
20. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 21. After
completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel
hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly
tightened.
22. Close the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent,
fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J-29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, from the J-35589-A Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter.
23. Remove the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter from the brake master cylinder
reservoir. 24. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved
brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 25. Slowly depress and release the brake
pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal.
Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior
to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed.
26. If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the following steps:
1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection
(See: Hydraulic System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection).
2. Using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove
any air that may have been trapped in the brake
pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ).
27. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated.
Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired.
28. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7226
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Flushing
Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination:
* Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended
brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system
- Swirled appearance - oil-based substance
- Layered appearance - silicone-based substance
* Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into
the brake hydraulic system
- Cloudy appearance - moisture
- Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust
2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder
grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid
contamination.
3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated
by fluid separation and/or a swollen master
cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform
the following:
1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains
internal rubber seals/linings which have been
contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the
procedures indicated:
* Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement)
* Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement)
* Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement)
* Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure
Modulator Valve Replacement)
2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake
pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed
and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber
seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic
system. Refer to the procedures indicated:
* Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement); also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder
reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered
air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master
Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and
Repair). Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm.
* Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement)
* Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement)
* Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement)
* Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure
Modulator Valve Replacement)
4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but
WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust,
corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The
diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system.
5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed brake fluid container as specified
in the owners manual.
6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder
reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct
brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the instrument carrier. Refer to Instrument Carrier Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement)Instrument Carrier
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement).
2. Remove the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to Accelerator Pedal with Position Sensor
Assembly Replacement () or Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
(See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal
Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Replacement).
4. Remove the brake booster pushrod nut (1). 5. Disconnect the brake booster pushrod from the
brake pedal pivot pin.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7230
6. Remove the brake pedal bracket bolt (1). 7. Remove the instrument carrier. Refer to Instrument
Carrier Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement)Instrument Carrier
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement).
8. Remove the brake pedal bracket nuts (1) and the brake pedal assembly.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7231
1. Install the brake pedal assembly to the dash panel reinforcement plate.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the brake pedal bracket nuts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
3. Install the brake pedal bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7232
4. Connect the brake booster pushrod from the brake pedal pivot pin. 5. Install the brake booster
pushrod nut (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 6. Install the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal
Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Replacement).
7. Install the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to Accelerator Pedal with Position Sensor
Assembly Replacement () or Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor/Service and Repair).
8. Install the instrument carrier. Refer to Instrument Carrier Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement)Instrument Carrier
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection
Brake Caliper Inspection
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these
conditions are present, the brake caliper requires
replacement.
2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper
seating in the caliper body. If any of these
conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement.
3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake
pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid
leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement.
4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores:
The movement of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores should be smooth and even. If the
caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement.
* For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in
front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against
the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore.
* For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in
front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against
the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1).
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the
brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7239
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper
guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7240
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font
brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to
40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7241
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake
caliper.
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent
brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7242
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8.
Remove the brake caliper.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7243
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting
gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose
fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake
System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7244
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7245
5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal.
Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with
the upper guide pin.
6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
Installation Procedure
Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins.
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the
brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7246
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7247
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7248
5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is
fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins
and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7249
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7250
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair
Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1).
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the
brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7251
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper
guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7252
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font
brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to
40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7253
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake
caliper.
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent
brake fluid loss and contamination.
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8.
Remove the brake caliper.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7254
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting
gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose
fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake
System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7255
Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7256
5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal.
Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with
the upper guide pin.
6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
Installation Procedure
Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins.
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the
brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7257
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7258
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7259
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is
fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins
and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7260
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7261
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
5. Remove the inner brake pad (1). 6. Remove the outer brake pad (2).
7. Remove the brake pad springs (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7262
8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1).
9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7263
1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 190 Nm (140 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7264
3. Install the brake pad springs (1).
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
4. Install the inner brake pad (1). 5. Install the outer brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to
the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7265
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7266
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
5. Remove the outer brake pad (1). 6. Remove the inner brake pad (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7267
7. Remove the brake pad springs (1).
8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1).
9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7268
1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7269
3. Install the brake pad springs (1).
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
4. Install the outer brake pad (1). 5. Install the inner brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to
the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7270
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake Pads - Front and Rear Minimum Thickness ..............................................................................
...................................................................................................... 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7274
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection
Brake Pad Inspection
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Inspect the disc brake pads at regular intervals, or whenever the tire and wheel assemblies are
removed from the vehicle. 2. If replacement is necessary, always replace disc brake pads in axle
sets. 3. Inspect both edges of the disc brake pad friction surfaces (3). The highest rate of wear
normally occurs at the trailing edge of the disc brake pads. 4. Inspect the thickness of the disc
brake pads (3) in order to ensure that they have not worn prematurely. The disc brake pad wear
should be
approximately even per axle set.
5. Both front and rear disc brake pads have integral, audible wear sensors (1). When the disc brake
pad wear reaches the minimum allowable
thickness, the wear sensor contacts the disc brake rotor (2). The wear indicator will then produce
an audible, high-pitched warning noise during wheel rotation.
6. Replace the disc brake pads when the friction surface (3) is worn to within 0.76 mm (0.030 in) of
the mounting plates. 7. Remove the brake calipers and inspect the friction surfaces of the inner and
outer disc brake pads to ensure that they are level. Place the disc brake
pad friction surfaces together and measure the gap between the surfaces. If more than 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) gap exists midway between the length of the disc brake pads, replace the disc brake
pads.
8. Verify that any disc brake pad shims that may be required are in place and not damaged or
excessively corroded. Replace any missing or damaged
shims in order to preserve proper disc brake performance.
9. Replace the disc brake pads if any have separated from the mounting plates.
10. Inspect the disc brake pads friction surfaces for cracks, fractures, or damage which may cause
noise or otherwise impair disc brake performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Pad: Procedures
Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing
Warning
Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any
maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead
to serious personal injury and vehicle damage.
Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking
surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system.
This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or
replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced.
1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph).
Note: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step.
3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the
brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow
sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly
burnish the brake pads and rotors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7277
Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement
Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement
Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway
between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be
removed before
proceeding.
3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum
allowable level, remove brake fluid to the
midway point before proceeding.
4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
6. Place a large C-clamp over the brake caliper body and against the outer brake pad. 7. Using the
C-clamp, compress the brake caliper piston fully into the brake caliper bore.
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
8. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the lower brake
caliper guide pin bolt (1). 9. Pivot the brake caliper upward.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7278
Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation.
10. Remove the inner brake pad (1) and the outer brake pad (2).
11. Remove the upper and lower brake pad springs (1). 12. If installing new brake pads, discard
the springs.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7279
Note: If installing new brake pads, install new springs.
1. Install the upper and lower brake pad springs (1).
Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation.
2. Install the inner brake pad (1) and the outer brake pad (2). 3. Pivot the brake caliper to the
installed position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7280
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, install the lower brake
caliper guide pin bolt (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20
lb ft).
5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the
brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait
15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the
brake caliper piston and brake pads. 9. Fill the master cylinder reservoir. Refer to Master Cylinder
Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
10. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See:
Procedures).
Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement
Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway
between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be
removed before
proceeding.
3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum
allowable level, remove brake fluid to the
midway point before proceeding.
4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7281
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
6. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt (1).
7. Pivot the brake caliper (1) upward. 8. Place a block of wood or an old brake pad against the
brake caliper pistons. 9. Using a brake pad spreader tool or equivalent, fully seat the caliper piston
in the caliper bore.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7282
Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation.
10. Remove the outer brake pad (1) and the inner brake pad (2).
11. Remove the upper and lower brake pad springs (1). 12. If installing new brake pads, discard
the springs.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7283
Note: If installing new brake pads, install new springs.
1. Install the upper and lower brake pad springs (1).
Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation.
2. Install the outer brake pad (1) and the inner brake pad (2). 3. Pivot the brake caliper to the
installed position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7284
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, install the lower brake
caliper guide pin bolt (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20
lb ft).
5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the
brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait
15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the
brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 9. Fill the master cylinder reservoir. Refer to Master Cylinder
Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
10. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See:
Procedures).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-05-22-002L Date: 090326
Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-05-22-002L
Date: March 26, 2009
Subject: Disc Brake Warranty Service and Procedures
Models: 1999-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 1999-2004 Isuzu Light Duty Trucks (Canada Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
(Canada Only) 1999-2010 Saturn Vehicles (Canada Only)
EXCLUDING 2009-2010 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to inform you that due to improvements in vehicle brake
corner and wheel design, assembly plant build processes and dealership required tools like the
On-Car Lathe, measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) is no longer a required step when performing
base brake service. Due to this change, you are no longer required to enter the LRO measurement
on the repair order or in the warranty system failure code section. The bulletin information below
and the base brake labor operations have been updated accordingly. Due to this change it is more
important than ever to properly maintain your brake lathe (per the Brake Lathe Calibration
Procedure in this bulletin). Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002K (Section 05 Brakes).
For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all GM's Standard Brake Service
Procedures and Policy Guidelines for brake rotor and brake pad service and wear. For additional
information, the Service Technical College lists a complete index of available Brake courses. This
information can be accessed at www.gmtraining.com > resources > training materials > brakes
courseware index. In Canada, refer to Service Know How course 55040.00V and Hydraulic Brake
Certification program 15003.16H.
Important
PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR
NEXT GM BRAKE SERVICE.
The following four (4) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a
successful brake service.
1. Measure and Document Pre-Service Rotor Thickness* (REQUIRED on Repair Order) determine rotor clean-up/refinish/replace
2. Properly clean ALL brake corner mating surfaces - hub, rotor and wheel
3. Properly clean-up/refinish rotor, measure and document post-service rotor thickness
(REQUIRED on Repair Order)
Important If it is determined the rotor needs to be refinished, verify lathe equipment is properly
calibrated.
4. Properly reassemble the brake corner using proper torque tools, torque specification and torque
sequence - wheel lug nuts.
* The bulletin refers to Minimum Thickness specification as the minimum allowable thickness after
refinish. Always refer to SI to verify the spec stamped on the rotor is the minimum thickness spec
after refinish and not the discard spec.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7289
Bulletin Format
***REPAIR ORDER REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7290
Important
When using any one of the brake labor operations listed in this bulletin (except for H9709 - Brake
Burnish), the following two rotor measurements (1. Original Rotor Thickness, 2. Refinished Rotor
Thickness are required and MUST be written/documented on the repair order, or for your
convenience, complete the form (GM Brake Service Repair Order Documentation for Required
Measurements) shown above and attach it to the repair order. If the Warranty Parts Center
generates a request, this Documentation/Form must be attached to the repair order that is sent
back.
Important
Documentation of brake lathe maintenance and calibration as recommended by the lathe
manufacturer must be available for review upon request.
Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Original And Refinished Thickness - REQUIRED
When resurfacing a brake rotor or drum, the ORIGINAL thickness (measured thickness before
refinish) and REFINISHED thickness (measured thickness after refinish) MUST be
written/documented on the repair order hard copy for each rotor serviced. If a rotor replacement is
necessary, only the original thickness measurement needs to be recorded.
Repair Order Documentation - Explanation of Part Replacement - REQUIRED
If replacement of a brake component is necessary, proper documentation on the repair order is
required. See the following examples:
^ Brake rotor replacement - Customer comment was brake pulsation. Rotor was refinished on a
prior brake service. After rotor measurement, it was determined that refinishing the rotor again
would take it under the Minimum Thickness specification.
^ Brake pad replacement - Customer comment was brake squeak noise. On inspection, found pads
contaminated by fluid leak at caliper.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7291
TOOL INFORMATION
CORRECTION PLATE PART INFORMATION
Refer to TSB 01-05-23-001 for the Brake Align(R) application chart.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates should be
submitted in the Net Amount at cost plus 40%. Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates are
available through the following suppliers:
- Dealer Equipment and Services
- Brake Align(R) LLC (U.S. Dealers Only)
* We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers
of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items, which may be available from
other sources.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7292
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7293
WORKSHEET - BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION
Important
Brake lathe calibration should be performed and recorded monthly or if you are consistently
measuring high LRO after rotor refinishing.
Disclaimer
GM Brake Service Procedure
GM BRAKE SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the wheel and caliper.
2. Measure rotor thickness. In order to determine if the rotor can be refinished, do the following
steps:
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7294
If performing routine Brake Service for worn pads only, and the rotors are not damaged and
measure within specification - DO NOT REFINISH ROTORS.
1. Remove the rotor(s).
2. Measure the rotor for original thickness using a brake micrometer. Multiple measure points
should be taken and the lowest measurement
should be recorded.
3. Reference the Minimum Thickness specification stamped on the backside of the rotor or SI for
Minimum Thickness specification/other. In
most cases, the rotor should be refinished unless the measurement taken makes it obvious that
refinishing the rotor would take the measurement under the Minimum Thickness specification (then
replacement is necessary). DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications.
3. ***Record the lowest ORIGINAL rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy as
noted in the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor
Refinish" section of this bulletin.
4. Clean all of the mating surfaces between the hub, the rotor and the wheel using the J 42450A Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit and J 41013 - Whiz
Wheel(R).
If rotors are not to be refinished - Go To Step 8.
Important Cleaning all mating surfaces and making them free of corrosion, burrs and other debris
(which includes removal of Hubless rotors) is critical and MUST be performed whether using an
On-Car or Bench Lathe Refinish Procedure.
5. Be sure to follow the appropriate refinishing procedure listed below for the type of lathe you are
using.
Important Only replace the rotors if they do not meet the Minimum Thickness specification.
Important DO NOT REFINISH NEW ROTORS.
Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that
equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a
floating caliper.
Important Prior to making the cut, install the recommended clip-on style disc silencer supplied with
the lathe. Use of this silencer is critical to prevent chatter from occurring during the cut.
Bench Type Lathe
1. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and
parallel surfaces.
2. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of
debris or burrs. For more information, see the
"Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure (Bench-Type)" section in this bulletin.
3. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake
pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools
into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a
full turn
4. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed
during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn.
5. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the
brake pad contact area. Do the same
procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero.
6. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the
full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the
zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface.
7. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side
using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper
to obtain a non-directional finish.
On-Car Type Lathe
1. Reinstall the rotor(s).
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7295
When using the On-Car lathe on vehicles equipped with limited slip (or posi-trac) rear system, it is
critical that the rear drive shaft is disconnected/disengaged prior to operation of the On-Car lathe.
Remember to mark and re-index the drive shaft correctly on re-assembly to prevent creating
driveline vibration. Whenever the lathe drive motor is being switched on, the operator MUST keep
their body out of the wheel well area until the machine has reached its normal operating RPM.
2. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and
parallel surfaces.
Important When raising the vehicle on the lift, be sure to have it at a good working height (waist
high is average) to accommodate mounting the On-Car lathe. Optimally, the center piston on the
lathe trolley will be mid-travel. If the lathe trolley center piston is completely compressed (bottoming
out) or inversely fully extended and hanging off the vehicle hub, this could affect the calibration time
of the lathe.
3. Select the correct adapter for the vehicle you're working on and mount it to the hub with the
vehicle lug nuts. Hand tighten 34-41 Nm (25-30 lb
ft) the nuts using equal torque. DO NOT use impact wrenches, excessive torque will damage the
adapter.
Important Ensure the adapter sits flush on the rotor hat surface. Be sure to remove any rust, rotor
retaining clips, etc. that may preclude the adapter from sitting flat on the mounting surface.
4. Connect the lathe to the adapter, turn on the lathe and activate the computer to compensate for
run-out in the hub.
5. Once the computer indicates the compensation process was successful, on the outboard area of
the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth
of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the
rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn.
6. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed
during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn.
7. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the
brake pad contact area. Do the same
procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero.
8. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the
full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters
to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface.
9. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side
using a sanding block and 130-150 grit
sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish.
10. Dismount the lathe, but leave the lathe adapter attached to the vehicle.
6. Once the rotor has been properly machined, wash the rotor with soap and water (use a mild dish
washing soap) or wipe it clean with GM approved
brake cleaner, P/N 88862650 (Canadian P/N 88901247).
Important Thoroughly cleaning the rotor will prevent the possible transfer of finite metal dust left as
a by-product of machining to the pad material during the seating process, thus reducing the
opportunity for squeaks or other noises to occur.
7. ***Record the REFINISHED rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy. Refer
to the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor
Refinish" section of this bulletin.
8. Setting up to measure for Lateral Run Out (LRO):
Important Measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) (steps 8 - 15) is no longer required however, these
steps are being left in the overall procedure as a good check to be performed in the case of a
repeat pulsation complaint. If you are not checking for LRO, go to step 16.
Bench-Type Lathe
1. Ensure that the mating surfaces of the rotor hat section and the hub mating surface are clean
and free of debris.
2. Mount the new, original or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub.
Important Always hold the rotor on the bottom half so any debris that may be dislodged from the
vents will fall out instead of falling into the mounting area. Any movement or jarring from the rotor
falling over on the studs can release rust from the vents on the rotor.
3. Tilt the top of the rotor in towards the vehicle so you can see the studs and ease the rotor onto
the studs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7296
4. Slide the rotor all the way to the hub and hold it in place until you have placed one of the conical
washers (with the tapered hole side facing
out) and run the first lug nut up tight by hand so the rotor doesn't move when you release it.
5. Place the conical washers on the rest of the studs (with the tapered hole side facing out), start
and snug the lug nuts by hand.
6. Using the one half inch drive impact wrench and a torque stick (J 39544) or equivalent, start with
the lug nut opposite of the one you first
tightened by hand and tighten the lug nuts using a star pattern until they touch the hub but do not
completely torque. Then again, starting with the first lug nut you tightened by hand, tighten all the
lug nuts in a star pattern to the specific vehicle torque specification.
7. DO NOT reinstall the caliper or the wheel at this time.
On-Car Type Lathe
1. Leave the On-Car adapter on the wheel.
2. Proceed to Step 9.
9. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor
outboard friction surface approximately 6.35 mm
(0.25 in) from the rotor's outer edge. The stylus should be perpendicular to the friction surface of
the rotor.
Important Make sure the dial indicator needle tip is screwed tight, a loose tip could cause false
readings.
10. Measure for LRO. Follow the procedure below to determine if the LRO is within specification
(0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS).
1. Rotate the rotor and locate the point on the rotor where the lowest dial indicator reading is
indicated and set the dial indicator to zero.
2. Rotate the rotor from the low point and locate the point with the highest dial indicator reading
(rotor "high spot"). Note the amount and mark
the location of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location.
If the high point falls between two studs, mark both studs. In instances where the vehicle has
"capped lug nuts" you should mark the hub.
11. If the Lateral Run Out (LRO) measurement is 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS, no correction is
necessary. Go to Step 15 if this is the first rotor
completed. Go to Step 16 if this is the second rotor completed. If the LRO is GREATER than 0.050
mm (0.002 in), go to Step 12.
12. If the LRO measurement is greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), use the following procedure to
correct for LRO:
Important If the LRO measurement is over 0.279 mm (0.011 in), determine the source or cause of
the LRO and correct it (i.e. verify drive axle nut torque specification, refinished rotor is source of
LRO due to a lathe qualification issue - see "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure").
Hubless Rotor
1. Remove the rotor and using the Brake Align(R) application chart (found in TSB 01-05-23-001B),
choose the correct plate to bring the rotor
LRO to 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or less. The plates come in 0.0762 mm (0.003 in), 0.1524 mm (0.006
in) and 0.2286 (0.009 in) compensation. For more information on proper plate selection, see the
instruction video/DVD included in the "Brake Align(R)" kit or TSB 01-05-23-001B.
2. Align the V-notch of the selected Brake Align(R) correction plate to the marked wheel stud ("high
spot") or between the two points marked (if
the "high spot" is between two wheel studs).
Important IF Brake Align(R) Correction Plates are not available for the vehicle being serviced, refer
to SI Document - Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction for correcting LRO.
Important Per Brake Align(R) manufacturer, NEVER attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates
together on one hub. NEVER attempt to reuse a previously installed Correction Plate.
3. Reinstall the rotor using the same method and precautions as the first time - found in Step 8.
Make sure to index the rotor correctly to the
marks made in step 10, otherwise LRO will be comprised.
Hubbed / Captured / Trapped Rotor
1. Measure the rotor thickness.
2. Refinish or replace the rotor (see Service Information for further details).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7297
13. Use a Dial Indicator to measure the rotor to verify the LRO is within specification.
14. If using,
BENCH LATHE - DO NOT remove conical washers and lug nuts at this time.
ON-CAR LATHE - You must remove adapter and install conical washers and lug nuts to retain
rotor position.
Important For Hubless rotor design, while removing the adapter, you must hold the rotor tight to the
hub and install the top conical washer and lug nut first to ensure no debris falls between the
surface while removing the adapter. Then, install the remaining conical washers and lug nuts.
Otherwise, LRO will be comprised.
15. Perform Steps 1 through 7 on the opposite side of the vehicle (steps 1-12, if performing LRO).
16. Reinstall the rotors on both sides of the vehicle and perform the following steps:
1. Reinstall the calipers and pads.
2. Pump the brakes to pressurize the calipers.
3. Remove the lug nuts/conical washers.
4. Install and properly torque the wheels.
Important It is critical to follow the star pattern wheel torque procedure and use the proper tools
(torque stick or torque wrench) as referenced in SI.
17. Road test the vehicle to verify the repairs.
Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure
BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Calibration of the brake lathe should be performed and recorded monthly or whenever post-service
brake rotor LRO measurements are consistently reading above specification.
BENCH-TYPE LATHE
Use the following procedure to calibrate a Bench-type brake lathe:
1. After refinishing a rotor, loosen the arbor nut and while holding the inside bell clamp to keep it
from rotating, rotate the rotor 180 degrees.
2. Retighten the arbor nut and set the dial indicator on the rotor using the same instructions as
checking the run out on the vehicle.
3. Rotate the arbor and read the runout.
4. Divide the reading by two and this will give you the amount of runout the lathe is cutting into the
rotor.
Important If there is any runout, you will need to machine the inside bell clamp in place on the lathe
(this procedure is for a Bench type lathe ONLY, DO NOT machine inside the bell clamp on an
On-Car type lathe).
Machining the Inside Bell Clamp (Bench Type Lathe Only)
Any nicks or burrs on the shoulder of the arbor must be removed. An 80-grit stone can be used to
accomplish this. Spray WD-40(R) on the shoulder and with the lathe running, hold the stone flat
against the shoulder surface using slight pressure. When the burrs are gone, clean the surface.
Burrs must also be removed from the hub of the inside bell clamp. This can be accomplished with
the stone and WD-40(R). Keep the stone flat on the hub while removing the burrs. After removing
the burrs, clean the hub.
Place the bell clamp on the arbor of the lathe and use the small radius adapters first and then
spacers to allow you to tighten the arbor nut to secure the bell clamp to the lathe. Position the tool
bit in the left hand of the rotor truer so you can machine the face of the bell clamp. Machine the
face of the bell clamp taking just enough off of it to cut the full face of the clamp the full 360
degrees. Before you loosen the arbor nut, match mark the hub of the bell clamp to the arbor and
line up these marks before machining a rotor. A magic marker can be used to make the match
marks. Machine a rotor and recheck the calibration. Repeat this procedure on all Inside Bell
Clamps used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7298
Important
If runout is still present, contact the brake lathe supplier.
ON-CAR TYPE LATHE
Use the following procedure to calibrate an On-Car brake lathe:
1. Connect the lathe to a vehicle using the appropriate adapter.
2. Attach a vise-grip dial indicator to a fixed point in the wheel well and bring the dial indicator to a
flat surface on the cutting head.
3. Turn on the lathe and press the "start" button so the lathe begins to compensate.
4. Once compensation is complete, note the runout as measured by the dial indicator. Measured
runout at this point is overstated given that it is
outside the rotor diameter.
5. If runout is in excess of 0.1016 mm (0.004 in) (0.050 mm (0.002 in) as measured within the rotor
diameter), calibration must be tightened. Follow
manufacturer's instructions for tightening the calibration of the lathe. This information is found in the
manual supplied with the lathe.
Important If the machine is taking a long time to compensate during normal use, prior to checking
the lathe calibration, it is recommended that the machine be disconnected from the adapter and the
adapter (still connected to the vehicle) is rotated 180 degrees and the machine reattached. This will
accomplish two things: - It will re-verify the machine is properly attached to the adapter. - It will
change the location of the runout (phase) relative to the machine and thus possibly allow for quick
compensation as a result of the position change.
The following information has been added as a reference to ensure your Pro-Cut PFM lathe
provides a consistent smooth surface finish over long term usage.
Cutting Tips / Depth of Cut / Tip Life
The cutting tips must be right side up. Reference marks always face up. The cutting tips may not
have chips or dings in the surface of the points. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will
provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. When cleaning or rotating the cutting bits,
make sure that the seat area for the tip on the tool is free and clear of debris.
Cutting Head
On each brake job, the technician must center the cutting head for that particular vehicle using one
of the mounting bolt holes on the slide plate. Once the head is centered, it is vital that the
technician use one hand to push the head firmly and squarely back into the dovetail on the slide
plate while using the other hand to tighten the Allen-Hex bolt that secures the head. Failure to do
this could result in chatter occurring during the cut.
Tool Holder Plate (Cutting Head)
The tool holder plate is the plate that the cutting arms are attached to. It can bend or break if a
technician accidently runs the cutting arms into the hub of the rotor while the rotor is turning. (Cuts
of more than 0.508 mm (0.020 in) can also bend this plate). Once bent, the lathe will most likely not
cut properly until the tool holder plate is replaced. In order to verify the condition of the tool holder
plate on a machine that will not cut right, remove the mounting bolt and remove the cutting head
from the slide plate. With the cutting head titled at an angle, lay the long edge of the tool holder
plate down on the flat part of the slide plate. If any gap can be seen between the edge and the slide
plate, the tool holder plate is bent and the source of vibration. Also check to ensure that the cutting
arms are lying flat on the upper side of the tool holder plate. If the mounting arm post is bent, it will
show itself by having the back of the cutting arm lifting off the surface of the tool holder.
Gib Adjustment / Loose Gib
As wear occurs between the slide plate and the box it rides on, you must take up the slack. You do
this by way of a moveable wedge, which we call the gib. Your lathe manual details adjustment
process, which you should perform when required after monthly checks or whenever surface finish
is inconsistent.
Brake Pulsation
BRAKE PULSATION
Brake pulsation is caused by brake rotor thickness variation. Brake rotor thickness variation causes
the piston in the brake caliper, when applied, to "pump" in and out of the caliper housing. The
"pumping" effect is transmitted hydraulically to the brake pedal. Brake pulsation concerns may
result from two basic conditions:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7299
1. Thickness Variation Pulsation is Caused by Lateral Run Out (LRO). LRO on a brake corner
assembly is virtually undetectable unless measured
(with a dial indicator after the brake service) and will not be detected as brake pulsation during an
after brake service test drive. If the brake corner is assembled with excessive LRO (greater than
0.050 mm (0.002 in), thickness variation will develop on the brake rotor over time and miles.
Excessive LRO will cause the brake pads to wear the brake rotors unevenly, which causes rotor
thickness variation. Pulsation that is the result of excessive Lateral Run Out usually develops in
4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi). The more excessive the LRO, the faster the pulsation will
develop. LRO can also be induced when uneven torque is applied to wheel nuts (lug nuts).
Improper wheel tightening after tire rotation, spare tire usage, brake inspection, etc. can be the
cause of brake pulsation. Again, it usually takes 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) AFTER the
service event for the condition to develop. The customer does not usually make the connection
between the service event and the awareness of the pulsation. The proper usage of torque
wrenches and/or torque sticks (torque limiting sockets) will greatly reduce or eliminate the pulsation
conditions after wheel service events. The improper use of impact wrenches on wheel nuts greatly
increases the likelihood of pulsation after wheel service.
The following are examples of pulsation conditions and reimbursement recommendations:
- If the customer noticed the condition between 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) and it gradually
got worse, normally the repair would be covered. The customer may tolerate the condition until it
becomes very apparent.
- If a GM dealer performed a prior brake service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly
reinforce proper brake lathe maintenance.
- If the customer had the brake service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not
offer any assistance.
- If a customer indicated they had wheel service, ask who performed the service. Then;
- If a GM dealer performed the service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce
the use of torque sticks at the dealer. Two common size torque sticks cover 90% of all GM
products. Each technician needs to use torque sticks properly every time the wheel nuts are
tightened.
- If the customer had the wheel service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not
offer any assistance.
2. Thickness Variation Pulsation Caused by Brake Rotor Corrosion - Rotor corrosion is another
form of thickness variation, which can cause a
pulsation concern and can be addressed as follows:
- Cosmetic Corrosion:
In most instances rotor corrosion is cosmetic and refinishing the rotor is unnecessary.
- Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (Lot Rot / Low Miles - 0-321 km (0-200 mi):
At times more extensive corrosion can cause pulsation due to thickness variation. This usually
happens when the vehicle is parked for long periods of time in humid type conditions and the
braking surface area under the pads corrodes at a different rate compared to the rest of the braking
surface area. Cleaning up of braking surfaces (burnishing) can be accomplished by 10 - 15
moderate stops from 56- 64 km/h (35 - 40 mph) with cooling time between stops. If multiple
moderate braking stops do not correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure"
below.
- Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (without rotor flaking / higher mileage 3,200-8,000 km (2,000-5,000 mi):
In some cases, more extensive corrosion that is not cleaned up by the brake pad over time and
miles can cause the same type of pulsation complaint due to thickness variation. In these cases,
the rotor surface is usually darker instead of shiny and a brake pad foot print can be seen against
the darker surface. This darker surface is usually due to build-up, on the rotor material surface,
caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. To correct this condition, follow the
"Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" below.
- Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (with rotor flaking / higher mileage - 8,000 +
km (5,000 + miles) :
At times, more extensive corrosion over time and miles can cause pulsation due to thickness
variation (flaking). This flaking is usually a build up, mostly on the rotor material surface, caused by
a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. When rotor measurements are taken, the low
areas are usually close to the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement and the high areas
usually measure more than the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement (depending on
mileage and normal wear). To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure"
described below.
Important In some flaking instances, cleaning-up this type of corrosion may require more rotor
material to be removed then desired. Customer consideration should be taken in these situations
and handled on a case by case basis, depending on the amount/percentage of rotor life remaining
and the vehicle's warranty time and miles.
Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7300
BRAKE ROTOR CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE
Clean-up the rotors on an approved, well-maintained brake lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and
parallel surfaces. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is
clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure"
section in this bulletin.
1. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake
pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the
rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn.
2. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed
during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn.
3. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the
brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If
zero is passed during the process, reset zero.
4. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the
full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the
zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface.
5. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side
using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper
to obtain a non-directional finish.
Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that
equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a
floating caliper.
Important In many of these instances, such a minimal amount of material is removed from the rotor
that customer satisfaction is not a concern for future brake services. This procedure is intended to
"Clean-up" the rotor surface and should be conveyed to the customer as such - not as "cut",
"refinish" or "machine", which tends to be terms understood as a substantial reduction of rotor
material/life. If the brake lathe equipment being used is not capable of removing minor amounts of
material while holding tolerances, further lathe maintenance, repair, updates or equipment
replacement may be necessary.
Brake Noise
BRAKE NOISE
Some brake noise is normal and differences in loading, type of driving, or driving style can make a
difference in brake wear on the same make and model. Depending on weather conditions, driving
patterns and the local environment, brake noise may become more or less apparent. Verify all
metal-to-metal contact areas between pads, pad guides, caliper and knuckles are clean and
lubricated with a thin layer of high temperature silicone grease. Brake noise is caused by a
"slip-stick" vibration of brake components. While intermittent brake noise may be normal,
performing 3 to 4 aggressive stops may temporarily reduce or eliminate most brake squeal. If the
noise persists and is consistently occurring, a brake dampening compound may be applied to the
back of each pad. This allows parts to slide freely and not vibrate when moving relative to each
other. Use Silicone Brake Lubricant, ACDelco P/N 88862181 (Canadian P/N 88862496) or
equivalent.
The following noises are characteristics of all braking systems and are unavoidable. They may not
indicate improper operation of the brake system.
Squeak/Squeal Noise:
- Occurs with front semi-metallic brake pads at medium speeds when light to medium pressure is
applied to the brake pedal.
- Occasionally a noise may occur on rear brakes during the first few stops or with cold brakes
and/or high humidity.
Grinding Noise:
- Common to rear brakes and some front disc brakes during initial stops after the vehicle has been
parked overnight.
- Caused by corrosion on the metal surfaces during vehicle non-use. Usually disappears after a few
stops.
Groan Noise:
A groan type noise may be heard when stopping quickly or moving forward slowly from a complete
stop. This is normal. On vehicles equipped with ABS, a groan or moan type noise during hard
braking applications or loose gravel, wet or icy road conditions is a normal function of the ABS
activation.
Key Points - Frequently Asked Questions
KEY POINTS - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
- Q: How do on-car lathes react to Axle Float? Does the play affect the machining of the rotor,
either surface finish or LRO?
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7301
A: Because the Pro-Cut on-car lathe adjusts in a live mode while spinning the hub/rotor, the
dynamics of a floating axle are effectively eliminated. Once the lathe is compensated, there is no
difference in the cutting/surface finish and LRO are just the same as with a non-floating axle.
- Q: Which lathe is essential for performing brake work, the bench or on-car?
A: Dealers must have a well maintained bench lathe and well maintained on-car lathe. These
lathes need to be calibrated on a monthly basis. BOTH lathes are essential to providing quality
brake service.
- Q: What is the expected tip life for an on-car lathe?
A: The geometry and composition of the Pro-Cut tips are designed for "single pass" cutting. When
using the Pro-Cut the cutting depth should be set to take all material needed to get below rust
grooves, eliminate all run-out and resurface the entire disc in a single pass. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381
mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. No "skim cut" or
"finish cut" is needed. Failure to follow this procedure will shorten tip life. The Pro-cut tips will last
between 7-12 cuts per corner. With three usable corners, a pair of tips is good for at least 21 cuts.
- Q: Why does GM recommend the use of single pass (referred to as "positive rake") bench and
on-car brake lathes?
A: GM Service and GM Brake Engineering have performed competitive evaluations on a significant
number of bench and on-car brake lathes. These tests measured critical performance
characteristics such as flatness, surface finish and the ability of the lathe to repeat accuracy over
many uses. In each test, single pass lathe designs out performed the competitors. Single pass
brake lathes are more productive requiring less time to perform the same procedure.
- Q: Is it okay to leave the caliper/pads installed while cutting rotors using an on-car lathe?
A: On-car lathes should never be used with the pads and calipers installed on the vehicle. The
debris from cutting the rotors can contaminate the brake pads/calipers which can lead to other
brake concerns and comebacks.
- Q: What information needs to be documented on the Repair Order?
A: Any claim that is submitted using the labor operations in this bulletin, must have the Original
Rotor Thickness and Refinish Rotor Thickness (if refinished) documented on the repair order. For
more information, refer to the "Repair Order Required Documentation" section of this bulletin.
All Warranty Repair Orders paid by GM, are subject to review for compliance and may be debited
where the repair does not comply with this procedure.
Brake Warranty
BRAKE WARRANTY
Brake Rotors:
- Brake rotor warranty is covered under the terms of the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Reference the vehicle's warranty guide for verification.
- Rotors should not be refinished or replaced during normal/routine pad replacement.
- Rotors should not be refinished or replaced and is ineffective in correcting brake squeal type
noises and/or premature lining wear out.
- Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for cosmetic corrosion. Clean up of braking surfaces
can be accomplished by 10-15 moderate stops from 56-64 km/h (35-40 mph) with cooling time
between stops.
- Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for rotor discoloration/hard spots.
- Rotors should be refinished NOT replaced for Customer Pulsation concerns. This condition is a
result of rotor thickness variation, usually caused by LRO (wear induced over time and miles) or
corrosion (Lot Rot).
- When rotor refinishing, only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor
and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake
system using a floating caliper.
- Rotors should be refinished for severe scoring - depth in excess of 1.5 mm (0.060 in).
Important If the scoring depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in) after the rotor is refinished, it should
be replaced.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7302
- It is not necessary to replace rotors in pairs. Rotors may be replaced individually. However,
caution should be exercised, as a variance in surface finish may cause a brake pull condition.
- New rotors should not be refinished before installation. Original equipment rotor surfaces are
ground to ensure smooth finish and parallelism between mounting and friction surfaces. If a new
rotor has more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in) Lateral Run Out (LRO) when properly mounted on the
hub, correct it using one of the following methods:
1. For hubless rotor designs, use the correction plate procedure found in the "GM Brake Service
Procedure for Hubless Rotors" outlined in this
bulletin.
2. For hubbed/trapped/captured rotor designs, refinish the rotor using an On-Car lathe and the
procedure outlined in this bulletin.
- Never reuse rotors that measure under the Minimum Thickness specification. In this instance, the
rotor should be replaced.
Important If the Minimum Thickness specification is not visible on the rotor, reference Service
Information (SI) for the specific vehicle application. DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor
specifications.
Brake Pads:
Important When determining the warranty coverage (as an example) - if all four front or four rear
brake pads are excessively worn evenly, that would NOT be covered under warranty since this
type of wear is most likely due to driving habits or trailering. However, if the brake pads are
excessively worn un-evenly, side-to-side or same side/inner-to-outer pads, then consideration
should be given to cover this under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to poor
operation of other braking components.
- Consideration should be given for covering brake pads up to 39,000 km (24,000 mi) (excluding
owner abuse, excessive trailering, or the situations that would not be considered normal use).
- Installation of new rotors does not require pad replacement. Do not replace pads unless their
condition requires it - excessively worn, damage or contaminated.
Brake Wear:
Several factors impact brake lining wear and should be taken into account when reviewing related
issues:
- heavy loads / high temperatures / towing / mountainous driving / city driving / aggressive driving /
driver braking characteristics (left foot or two feet)
The following are conditions that may extend brake lining wear:
- light loads / highway driving / conservative driving / level terrain
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7303
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Front Disc Brake Rotor Diameter.........................................................................................................
........................................................................................321.00 mm (12.64 in) Discard Thickness.....
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................27.00 mm (1.06 in) Maximum Allowable Lateral Runout...................................................
......................................................................................................0.06 mm (0.002 in) Maximum
Allowable Scoring.................................................................................................................................
......................................1.60 mm (0.06 in) Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation..........................
.....................................................................................................................0.025 mm (0.001 in)
Rear Disc Brake Rotor Diameter..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................303.00 mm (11.93 in) Discard Thickness......
..............................................................................................................................................................
..................18.40 mm (0.72 in) Maximum Allowable Lateral Runout....................................................
.....................................................................................................0.06 mm (0.002 in) Maximum
Allowable Scoring.................................................................................................................................
......................................1.60 mm (0.06 in) Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation..........................
.....................................................................................................................0.025 mm (0.001 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction
Note:
* Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
* Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can
cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km
(3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor
Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement).
Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within
specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired.
* The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate
between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to
correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 in). Refer to Brake Rotor
Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction - Correction Plates).
* The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through
compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction On Vehicle Lathe).
If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be
suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7306
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Correction Plates
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates
Special Tools
* CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent
* CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Note: *
Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
* Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness
variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km (3,000-7,000
mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor
assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face
upward.
2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed
during the assembled LRO measurement procedure
and/or the indexing correction procedure.
3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are
no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's
instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement.
For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 in), the 0.076 mm (0.003
in) correction plate would be used. If the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7307
measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the 0.152 mm (0.006 in) correction plate would be used.
5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during
the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement
procedure.
Note: *
Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO.
* Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in
an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO.
6. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to
align with the high spot mark (3), that was
positioned to face upward.
7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for
proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and
install one of the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1) and one lug nut
(2) onto the upper-most wheel stud.
9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7308
10. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the
wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a
star-pattern.
11. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the
lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to
properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable
specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction).
14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper
and depress the brake pedal several times to secure
the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug
nuts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7309
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On
Vehicle Lathe
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe
Special Tools
CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Note: *
Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
* Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness
variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000
mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from
contacting any rotating components, such as the brake
rotor.
2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed
during the assembled LRO measurement procedure
and/or the indexing correction procedure.
3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are
no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's
instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6.
After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness
Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness
Measurement).
7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish
specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After
replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10.
8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired
non-directional finish:
1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional
finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish:
* If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum
oxide sandpaper.
* If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding
block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper.
3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with
denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake
cleaner.
9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle.
10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable
specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction).
12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress
the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in
place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7310
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement
Special Tools
* CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent
* CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit
* CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit
* CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge
* CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Note:
* Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can
cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km
(3,000-7,000 mi).
* Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
1. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs if this has not been done already.
Note: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or
contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces.
Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which
could lead to brake pulsation.
2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no
foreign particles, corrosion, rust, or debris
remaining. If the wheel hub/axle flange and/or if the brake rotor mating surfaces exhibit these
conditions, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the brake rotor from the vehicle. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Brake Rotor Replacement) and/or Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement).
2. Using the CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from
the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 3. Using the CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit ,
thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the brake rotor. 4. Clean the
friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner.
3. Install the rotor to the hub/axle flange using the matchmark made prior to removal.
4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the CH-45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1), and one lug
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7311
nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud.
5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand.
6. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the wheel
studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a
star-pattern.
7. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the lug
nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to
properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
8. If the brake rotor has been REFINISHED or REPLACED with a new rotor, proceed to step 14. 9.
If the brake rotor meets the following criteria, proceed to step 10.
* The rotor is within specifications and is being REUSED.
* The rotor has NOT been refinished.
* The rotor does NOT exhibit thickness variation exceeding the maximum allowable level.
10. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the
steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it
contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from
the outer edge of the rotor.
11. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7312
1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to
zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the
high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO.
12. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification:
* Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
* Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specifications, proceed to step 18.
If the brake rotor assembled LRO exceeds the specification, refinish the rotor to ensure true
parallelism. Refer to Brake Rotor Refinishing (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Brake Rotor
Refinishing). After refinishing the rotor, proceed to step 14.
14. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the
steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it
contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from
the outer edge of the rotor.
15. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor.
1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to
zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the
high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO.
16. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification:
* Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
* Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
17. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to
within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction).
18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper
and depress the brake pedal several times to secure
the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug
nuts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7313
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction
Note:
* Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
* Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can
cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km
(3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor
Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement).
Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within
specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired.
* The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate
between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to
correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 in). Refer to Brake Rotor
Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction - Correction Plates).
* The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through
compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction On Vehicle Lathe).
If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be
suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern.
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates
Special Tools
* CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent
* CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7314
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Note: *
Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
* Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness
variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km (3,000-7,000
mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor
assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face
upward.
2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed
during the assembled LRO measurement procedure
and/or the indexing correction procedure.
3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are
no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's
instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement.
For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 in), the 0.076 mm (0.003
in) correction plate would be used. If the measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the 0.152 mm
(0.006 in) correction plate would be used.
5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during
the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement
procedure.
Note: *
Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO.
* Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in
an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO.
6. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to
align with the high spot mark (3), that was
positioned to face upward.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7315
7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for
proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and
install one of the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1) and one lug nut
(2) onto the upper-most wheel stud.
9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand.
10. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the
wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a
star-pattern.
11. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the
lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to
properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable
specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction).
14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper
and depress the brake pedal several times to secure
the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug
nuts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7316
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe
Special Tools
CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Note: *
Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
* Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness
variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000
mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from
contacting any rotating components, such as the brake
rotor.
2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed
during the assembled LRO measurement procedure
and/or the indexing correction procedure.
3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are
no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's
instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6.
After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness
Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness
Measurement).
7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish
specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After
replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10.
8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired
non-directional finish:
1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional
finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish:
* If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum
oxide sandpaper.
* If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding
block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper.
3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with
denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake
cleaner.
9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle.
10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Measurement).
11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable
specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral
Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction).
12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress
the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in
place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts.
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement
Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement
Special Tools
* CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent
* CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit
* CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit
* CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge
* CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7317
Note:
* Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can
cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km
(3,000-7,000 mi).
* Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout
(LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation.
Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation
Measurement).
1. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs if this has not been done already.
Note: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or
contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces.
Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which
could lead to brake pulsation.
2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no
foreign particles, corrosion, rust, or debris
remaining. If the wheel hub/axle flange and/or if the brake rotor mating surfaces exhibit these
conditions, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the brake rotor from the vehicle. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Brake Rotor Replacement) and/or Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement).
2. Using the CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from
the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 3. Using the CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit ,
thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the brake rotor. 4. Clean the
friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner.
3. Install the rotor to the hub/axle flange using the matchmark made prior to removal.
4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the CH-45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1), and one lug
nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud.
5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7318
6. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the wheel
studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a
star-pattern.
7. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the lug
nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to
properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
8. If the brake rotor has been REFINISHED or REPLACED with a new rotor, proceed to step 14. 9.
If the brake rotor meets the following criteria, proceed to step 10.
* The rotor is within specifications and is being REUSED.
* The rotor has NOT been refinished.
* The rotor does NOT exhibit thickness variation exceeding the maximum allowable level.
10. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the
steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it
contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from
the outer edge of the rotor.
11. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor.
1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to
zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7319
3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and
record the amount of LRO.
12. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification:
* Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
* Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specifications, proceed to step 18.
If the brake rotor assembled LRO exceeds the specification, refinish the rotor to ensure true
parallelism. Refer to Brake Rotor Refinishing (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Brake Rotor
Refinishing). After refinishing the rotor, proceed to step 14.
14. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the
steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it
contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from
the outer edge of the rotor.
15. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor.
1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to
zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the
high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO.
16. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification:
* Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
* Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
17. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to
within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled
Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction).
18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper
and depress the brake pedal several times to secure
the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug
nuts.
Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection
Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the
caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake
Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Disc
Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement).
2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved
brake cleaner. 3. Inspect the friction surfaces of the brake rotor for the following Braking Surface
Conditions:
* Heavy rust and/or pitting Light surface rust can be removed with an abrasive disc. Heavy surface
rust and/or pitting must be removed by refinishing the rotor.
* Cracks and/or heat spots
* Excessive blueing discoloration
4. If the friction surfaces of the brake rotor exhibit one or more of the Braking Surface Conditions,
the rotor requires refinishing or replacement.
5. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch,
measure and record the scoring depth of any grooves
present on the rotor friction surfaces.
6. Compare the groove scoring depth recorded to the following specification:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7320
Brake rotor maximum allowable scoring: 1.60 mm (0.06 in)
7. If the brake rotor scoring depth exceeds the specification, or if an excessive amount of scoring is
present, the rotor requires refinishing or
replacement.
Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement
Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the
caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake
Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Disc
Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement).
2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved
brake cleaner. 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or
ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the lowest thickness of the brake
rotor at 4 or more points, equally spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only
taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the
outside edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 in), for each measurement.
4. Compare the lowest thickness measurement recorded to the following specifications:
Brake rotor discard thickness: 27.0 mm (1.063 in)
Brake rotor discard thickness: 18.4 mm (0.724 in)
5. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is above the minimum allowable
thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may be
able to be refinished, depending upon surface and wear conditions which may be present.
6. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the minimum allowable
thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may
not be refinished.
7. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the discard thickness
specification, the rotor requires replacement.
Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement
Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Note: Any disc brake rotor that exhibits thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable
level must be refinished or replaced. Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level
can cause brake pulsation.
1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the
caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake
Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Disc
Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement).
2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved
brake cleaner.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7321
3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch,
measure and record the thickness of the brake rotor at
4 or more points, evenly spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only taken
within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outer
edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 in), for each measurement.
4. Calculate the difference between the highest and lowest thickness measurements recorded to
obtain the amount of thickness variation. 5. Compare the thickness variation measurement to the
following specification:
Brake rotor maximum allowable thickness variation: 0.025 mm (0.001 in)
Note: Whenever a brake rotor is refinished or replaced, the assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the
rotor must be measured to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes.
6. If the brake rotor thickness variation measurement exceeds the specification, the rotor requires
refinishing or replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures
Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing
Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing
Warning
Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any
maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead
to serious personal injury and vehicle damage.
Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking
surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system.
This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or
replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced.
1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph).
Note: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step.
3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the
brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow
sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly
burnish the brake pads and rotors.
Brake Rotor Refinishing
Brake Rotor Refinishing
Special Tools
* J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit
* J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit
Note: Do NOT refinish the brake rotors in order to correct any of the following complaints:
* Growl or squeal brake noise
* Premature brake lining wear
* Cosmetic or superficial corrosion of the rotor braking surface
* Rotor discoloration
Refinish the brake rotors ONLY when 1 or more of the following conditions exist:
* Groove depth in excess of specification
* Severe scoring of the rotor braking surface
* Brake pulsation caused by the following:
- Lateral runout in excess of specification
- Brake rotor thickness variation in excess of specification
- Corrosion or pitting that is deeper than the rotor braking surface
1. Use the J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit in order to clean the wheel bearing/hub. 2. Use
a micrometer in order to measure the thinnest point of the brake rotor. If the thinnest point of the
brake rotor exceeds the brake rotor minimum
thickness, do NOT refinish the brake rotor. Replace the brake rotor.
3. Use the J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit in order to THOROUGHLY clean the rust from the
brake rotor flange. 4. Refinish the brake rotor. Refer to the brake lathe manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Note: Failure to obtain the best possible braking surface finish may cause the vehicle to stop with
difficulty.
5. After machining the rotor, use 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper and a non-directional rotor
finisher, if available, in order to create a
non-directional braking surface.
6. Clean the braking surfaces with GM P/N 12377981 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent,
brake parts cleaner.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7324
Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement
Front Brake Rotor Replacement
Front Brake Rotor Replacement
Special Tools
* J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit
* J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and bracket assembly and support with heavy mechanics wire or
equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7325
5. Remove the brake rotor bolt (1) and the brake rotor.
Installation Procedure
1. Using the J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from
the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly
clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the rotor to the hub/axle flange.
3. Install the brake rotor.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the brake rotor bolt (1) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 5. Position the brake caliper and
bracket assembly to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7326
6. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 190 Nm (140 lb ft). 7. Install the tire and
wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair). 8. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor
Burnishing (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Procedures).
Rear Brake Rotor Replacement
Rear Brake Rotor Replacement
Special Tools
* J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit
* J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7327
3. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and bracket assembly and support with heavy mechanics wire or
equivalent.
5. Remove the brake rotor bolt (1) and the brake rotor. 6. If the brake rotor is difficult to remove,
remove the park brake shoe adjuster access plug on the face of the brake rotor to gain access to
the park
brake adjuster and loosen the park brake shoe adjuster.
Installation Procedure
1. Using the J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from
the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly
clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the rotor to the hub/axle flange. 3. Install the
brake rotor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7328
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the brake rotor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
5. Position the brake caliper and bracket assembly to the vehicle. 6. Install the brake caliper
bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb ft). 7. If necessary, adjust the park brake. Refer to
Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Parking Brake System/Adjustments). 8. Install the tire and wheel
assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair). 9. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor
Burnishing (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Procedures).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure
Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Note: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform
a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). The automated bleed
procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist:
* Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel
* Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred
* Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly
The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run
the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed
off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation.
The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in
these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners.
Automated Bleed Procedure
Caution: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing
the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be
given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment
per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid
causing damage to components and painted surfaces.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. Refer
to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair).
3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes
(See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes). Repair or replace components as needed.
4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test (See:
Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test).
6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish
communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the
Special Functions
menu.
9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See:
)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ).
11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed
procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed
procedure:
* If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) and diagnose the appropriate DTC.
* If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) ( See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure)
(See: ).
13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14.
Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
17. Inspect the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master
Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7334
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Manual)
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See:
Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With
the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort
increases significantly, in order to deplete the
brake booster power reserve.
3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you
disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you
must perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add
GM approved brake fluid from a clean,
sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada)
(See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside
of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal.
2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front
brake pipe from the front port of the brake
master cylinder.
3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4.
Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant
slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the
same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe,
then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps
3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe
installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the
master cylinder,
loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8.
10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake
pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly
tightened.
4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake
fluid container. Ensure that the brake master
cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to
maintain the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of
the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm.
5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6.
Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the
transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the
pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit.
10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15
seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12.
With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been
purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit,
install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With
the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left front hydraulic circuit, install
a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With
the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a
proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After
completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel
hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly
tightened.
19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal.
Observe the feel of the brake pedal.
Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior
to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed.
21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still
feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure,
perform the following steps:
1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection
(See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection).
2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in
the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7335
22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated.
Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired.
23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7336
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Pressure)
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure)
Special Tools
* J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent
* J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With
the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort
increases significantly, in order to deplete the
brake booster power reserve.
3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you
disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you
must perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add
GM approved brake fluid from a clean,
sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada)
(See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside
of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal.
2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front
brake pipe from the front port of the brake
master cylinder.
3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4.
Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant
slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the
same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe,
then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps
3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe
installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the
master cylinder,
loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8.
10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake
pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly
tightened.
4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer
to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and
around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm.
5. Install the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6.
Check the brake fluid level in the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent
, or equivalent. Add GM approved brake fluid
from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the
half-full point.
7. Connect the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, to
the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder
Adapter.
8. Charge the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, air
tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder,
or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to
enter the brake system.
10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to
ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid
leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure.
11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the
transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
14. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air
bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then
tighten the bleeder valve.
15. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been
purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit,
install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With
the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left front hydraulic circuit, install
a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve.
18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. With
the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged
from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a
proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7337
20. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 21. After
completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel
hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly
tightened.
22. Close the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent,
fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J-29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, from the J-35589-A Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter.
23. Remove the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter from the brake master cylinder
reservoir. 24. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved
brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 25. Slowly depress and release the brake
pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal.
Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior
to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed.
26. If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the following steps:
1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection
(See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection).
2. Using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove
any air that may have been trapped in the brake
pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ).
27. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp
remains illuminated.
Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired.
28. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7338
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Flushing
Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination:
* Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended
brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system
- Swirled appearance - oil-based substance
- Layered appearance - silicone-based substance
* Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into
the brake hydraulic system
- Cloudy appearance - moisture
- Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust
2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder
grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid
contamination.
3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated
by fluid separation and/or a swollen master
cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform
the following:
1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains
internal rubber seals/linings which have been
contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the
procedures indicated:
* Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement)
* Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose
Replacement)
* Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose
Replacement)
* Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper
Replacement)
* Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper
Replacement)
* Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement)
2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake
pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed
and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber
seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic
system. Refer to the procedures indicated:
* Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement); also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using
denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the
reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir
Replacement (See: Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). Replace the brake master cylinder
reservoir cap diaphragm.
* Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose
Replacement)
* Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose
Replacement)
* Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper
Replacement)
* Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper
Replacement)
* Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement)
4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but
WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust,
corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The
diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system.
5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with approved brake fluid from a
clean, sealed brake fluid container as specified
in the owners manual.
6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder
reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct
brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection
Brake Caliper Inspection
Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these
conditions are present, the brake caliper requires
replacement.
2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper
seating in the caliper body. If any of these
conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement.
3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake
pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid
leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement.
4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores:
The movement of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores should be smooth and even. If the
caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement.
* For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in
front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against
the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore.
* For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in
front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against
the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1).
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the
brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7344
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper
guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7345
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font
brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to
40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7346
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake
caliper.
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent
brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7347
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8.
Remove the brake caliper.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7348
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting
gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose
fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake
System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7349
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7350
5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal.
Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with
the upper guide pin.
6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
Installation Procedure
Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins.
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the
brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7351
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7352
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7353
5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is
fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins
and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7354
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7355
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair
Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1).
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the
brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7356
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper
guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7357
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font
brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to
40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding
(Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7358
3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake
caliper.
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent
brake fluid loss and contamination.
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8.
Remove the brake caliper.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7359
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake caliper.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and
tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft).
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting
gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose
fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake
System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7360
Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7361
5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal.
Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with
the upper guide pin.
6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
Installation Procedure
Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins.
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal.
5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the
brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7362
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7363
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7364
1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2.
Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is
fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins
and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of
the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7365
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7366
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
5. Remove the inner brake pad (1). 6. Remove the outer brake pad (2).
7. Remove the brake pad springs (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7367
8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1).
9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7368
1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 190 Nm (140 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7369
3. Install the brake pad springs (1).
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
4. Install the inner brake pad (1). 5. Install the outer brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to
the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7370
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
Note: *
DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7371
* Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while
removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in
contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake
caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied.
3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
5. Remove the outer brake pad (1). 6. Remove the inner brake pad (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7372
7. Remove the brake pad springs (1).
8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1).
9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7373
1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7374
3. Install the brake pad springs (1).
Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation.
4. Install the outer brake pad (1). 5. Install the inner brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to
the bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7375
7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27
Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Hydraulic Brake System: DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in Canada
89021320).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7382
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7383
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7384
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block
Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector.
3. While compressing the retaining tabs on the inboard side of the brake fluid level indicator switch
(1), carefully remove the switch from the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
Installation Procedure
Note: Ensure the retaining tabs on the brake fluid level indicator switch are fully engaged in the
master cylinder reservoir.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7385
1. Install the brake fluid level indicator switch (1) by carefully inserting the switch into the master
cylinder reservoir. 2. Connect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Install the
accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Brake Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair
Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Discard
the brake fluid into an approved container.
3. Disconnect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Remove and discard
the master cylinder reservoir retaining pins (2) by compressing the locking tabs.
5. Carefully remove the master cylinder reservoir (1) by pulling the reservoir straight up.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7389
6. Remove the master cylinder reservoir seals (1).
Installation Procedure
1. Lubricate the master cylinder reservoir seals with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed
brake fluid container.
2. Install the master cylinder reservoir seals (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7390
3. Install the master cylinder reservoir (1) to the master cylinder. 4. Ensure the master cylinder
reservoir bayonets are fully seated in the master cylinder.
5. Connect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 6. Install new master
cylinder reservoir retaining pins (2). 7. Ensure the retaining pins are fully seated and the locking
tabs are fully deployed. 8. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the proper level. Refer to Master
Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
9. Observe the brake pedal feel after filling the master cylinder reservoir. If the pedal feels spongy,
bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to
Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Pipe Replacement
Brake Pipe Replacement
Special Tools
J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Warning
Always use double walled steel brake pipe when replacing brake pipes. The use of any other pipe
is not recommended and may cause brake system failure. Carefully route and retain replacement
brake pipes. Always use the correct fasteners and the original location for replacement brake
pipes. Failure to properly route and retain brake pipes may cause damage to the brake pipes and
cause brake system failure.
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Note: When servicing the brake pipes, note the following:
* If sectioning the brake pipe, use replacement pipe of the same type and outside diameter.
* Use fittings of the appropriate size and type.
* Only create flares of the same type or design as originally equipped on the vehicle.
1. Inspect the area of brake pipe to be repaired or replaced. 2. Release the brake pipe to be
replaced from the retainers, as required. 3. Select an appropriate location to section the brake pipe,
if necessary.
* Allow adequate clearance in order to maneuver the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit.
* Avoid sectioning the brake pipe at bends or mounting points.
4. Using a string or wire, measure the length of the pipe to be replaced including all pipe bends. 5.
Add to the measurement taken the appropriate additional length required for each flare to be
created.
* 6.35 mm (0.250 in) for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe
* 9.50 mm (0.374 in) for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) diameter pipe
* 12.67 mm (0.499 in) for 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7395
Note: Ensure that the brake pipe end to be flared is cut at a square, 90 degree angle to the pipe
length.
6. Using the pipe cutter included in the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit , carefully cut the brake pipe
squarely to the measured length. 7. Remove the sectioned brake pipe from the vehicle. 8. Select
the appropriate size of brake pipe and tube nuts, as necessary. The brake pipe outside diameter
determines brake pipe size.
9. Strip the nylon coating from the brake pipe end to be flared, if necessary.
1. Select the appropriate blade on the coating stripping tool included in the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring
Tool Kit , by unthreading the blade block from
the stripping tool and installing the block with the desired blade facing the tool rollers.
* 6.35 mm (0.250 in) blade for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe
* 9.50 mm (0.374 in) blade for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) and 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe
2. Insert the brake pipe end to be flared into the stripping tool to the depth of the ledge on the tool
rollers. 3. While holding the brake pipe firmly against the stripping tool roller ledges, rotate the
thumbwheel of the tool until the blade contacts the brake
pipe coated surface.
Note: Do not gouge the metal surface of the brake pipe.
4. Rotate the stripping tool in a clockwise direction, ensuring that the brake pipe end remains
against the tool roller ledges. 5. After each successive revolution of the stripping tool, carefully
rotate the thumbwheel of the tool clockwise, in order to continue stripping the
coating from the brake pipe until the metal pipe surface is exposed.
6. Loosen the thumbwheel of the tool and remove the brake pipe.
Note: Ensure that all loose remnants of the nylon coating have been removed from the brake pipe.
7. Inspect the stripped end of the brake pipe to ensure that the proper amount of coating has been
removed.
* 6.35 mm (0.250 in) for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe
* 9.50 mm (0.374 in) for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) and 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7396
10. Chamfer the inside and outside diameter of the pipe with the de-burring tool included in the
J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit. 11. Install the tube nuts on the brake pipe, noting their orientation.
12. Clean the brake pipe and the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit of lubricant, contaminants, and
debris.
13. Loosen the die clamping screw of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit. 14. Select the
corresponding die set and install the die halves into the die cage with the full, flat face of one die
facing the clamping screw, and the
counterbores of both dies facing the forming ram.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7397
15. Place the flat face of an unused die (1) against the die halves in the clamping cage and hold
firmly against the counterbored face of the dies. 16. Insert the prepared end of the pipe to be flared
through the back of the dies until the pipe is seated against the flat surface of the unused die (1).
17. Remove the unused die (1). 18. Ensure that the rear of both dies are seated firmly against the
enclosed end of the die cage. 19. Firmly hand tighten the clamping screw (2) against the dies.
20. Select the appropriate forming mandrel and place into the forming ram. 21. Rotate the hydraulic
fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 22. Rotate the body of the J-45405 - Pipe
Flaring Tool Kit until it bottoms against the die cage.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7398
23. While guiding the forming mandrel into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever
of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until the
forming mandrel bottoms against the clamping dies.
24. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the
hydraulic forming ram to retract.
25. Insert the finishing cone into the forming ram. 26. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve
clockwise to the closed position. 27. Rotate the body of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until it
bottoms against the die cage. 28. While guiding the finishing cone into the exposed end of pipe to
be flared, operate the lever of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until the
finishing cone bottoms against the dies.
29. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the
hydraulic forming ram to retract. 30. Loosen the die clamping screw and remove the dies and pipe.
31. If necessary, lightly tap the dies until the die halves separate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7399
32. Inspect the brake pipe flare for correct shape and diameter (a).
* 6.74-7.10 mm (0.265-0.279 in) flare diameter for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe
* 8.57-9.27 mm (0.344-0.358 in) flare diameter for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) diameter pipe
* 10.42-10.79 mm (0.410-0.425 in) flare diameter for 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe
33. If necessary, using the removed section of brake pipe as a template, shape the new pipe with a
suitable brake pipe bending tool.
Note: When installing the pipe, maintain a clearance of 19 mm (3/4 in) from all moving or vibrating
components.
34. Install the pipe to the vehicle with the appropriate brake pipe unions, as required. 35. If
previously released, secure the brake pipe to the retainers. 36. Bleed the hydraulic brake system.
Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and
Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
37. With the aid of an assistant, inspect the brake pipe flares for leaks by starting the engine and
applying the brakes.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7400
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Hose Replacement
Front Brake Hose Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Disconnect the brake pipe fitting (1) from the brake hose. 4. Cap the brake pipe fitting to prevent
brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7401
5. Remove the brake hose bracket nut (1).
6. Release the wheel speed sensor harness retaining clips (1) and release the harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7402
7. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt (1).
8. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1) from the brake hose and the caliper.
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
9. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose (3).
10. Remove the brake hose.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7403
1. Install the brake hose.
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
2. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the brake
hose (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake hose and the caliper and tighten the brake hose
fitting bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb ft).
4. Install the brake hose bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7404
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness and secure the retaining clips (1).
6. Install the brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7405
7. Connect the brake pipe fitting (1) to the brake hose and tighten to and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft).
8. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
9. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7406
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Hose Replacement
Rear Brake Hose Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Disconnect the brake pipe fitting (1) from the brake hose. 4. Cap the brake pipe fitting to prevent
brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7407
5. Remove the brake hose bolt (1) securing the brake hose bracket to the wheelhouse.
6. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7408
7. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1) from the brake hose and the caliper. 8. Remove the brake
hose (2) from the caliper.
Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets.
9. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3).
10. Remove the brake hose.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the brake hose.
Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets.
2. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting
gaskets (3).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7409
3. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft).
4. Install the brake hose bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft).
5. Install the brake hose bolt (1) and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7410
6. Connect the brake pipe fitting (1) and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 7. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and
Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection
Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Pressure Sensor Calibration
The brake pressure sensor does not require calibration often. Calibration of the brake pressure
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Brake pressure modulator valve assembly replacement
The Brake Pressure Sensor Calibration procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3.
Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Brake Pressure
Sensor Calibration in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool
directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Clear any DTCs that may be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement
Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with
the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the EBCM/EBTCM.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector by lifting the locking
tabs. 4. Disconnect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) at the brake pressure modulator valve
(BPMV). 5. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and
contamination. 6. Disconnect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 7. Cap the brake
pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7416
8. Disconnect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake
pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
10. Disconnect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 11. Cap the
brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
12. Disconnect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 13. Cap the brake pipe fitting and
plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 14. Disconnect the right
rear brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 15. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet
port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7417
16. Remove the BPMV bolt (1).
Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV.
17. Carefully remove the BPMV assembly (1) by pulling straight upward. 18. Inspect the insulators
for damage and replace, if necessary. 19. If replacing the BPMV, remove the EBCM. Refer to
Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and Repair).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the EBCM, if removed. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7418
2. Install the BPMV assembly (1) to the bracket.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7419
4. Connect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 5.
Connect the right rear brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft).
6. Connect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16
lb ft). 7. Connect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21
Nm (16 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7420
8. Connect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 9.
Connect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft).
10. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 11. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
12. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
13. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 14. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
(See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle).
15. Observe the brake pedal feel after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now
feels spongy, air may have been in, or may have been
introduced into the primary circuit.
16. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7421
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Bracket Replacement
Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) bolt (1).
Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV.
4. Without disconnecting the brake pipe fittings, carefully lift the BPMV assembly (1) upward to
release the mounting pins from the BPMV bracket
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7422
insulators.
5. Position the BPMV assembly aside and secure with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent.
6. Remove the 2 BPMV bracket nuts (1).
7. Remove the BPMV bracket bolt (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7423
8. Remove the BPMV bracket (1). 9. Inspect the insulators for damage and replace, if necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the BPMV bracket (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7424
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the BPMV bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
3. Install the BPMV bracket nuts (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page
7425
4. Carefully position the BPMV assembly (1) to the BPMV bracket insulators.
5. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Install the accessory wiring junction
block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and
Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures
Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding
Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding
Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the
primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 3. Install
suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also
provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings installed to the master
cylinder ports, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Fill the master cylinder
reservoir to at least the half-way point with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake
fluid container. Refer to
Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling).
6. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the master cylinder reservoir are fully
submerged in the brake fluid. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the
primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 in), several times.
Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary
pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will
decrease.
8. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no
evidence of air bubbles. 9. Remove the transparent hoses from the master cylinder reservoir.
10. Install the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 11. Remove the fittings with the
transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth
to prevent brake
fluid spills.
12. Remove the master cylinder from the vise.
Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling
Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Visually inspect the brake fluid level through the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake
fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, the brake system should be
inspected for wear and possible
brake fluid leaks.
3. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, and an
inspection of the brake system did not reveal wear or
brake fluid leaks, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level.
4. If brake system service was just completed, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the
maximum-fill level. 5. If the brake fluid level is above the half-full point, adding brake fluid is not
recommended under normal conditions. 6. If brake fluid is to be added to the master cylinder
reservoir, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing
the cap and diaphragm. Use only GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid
container.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7430
Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Master Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Discard
the brake fluid into an approved container.
3. Disconnect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Disconnect the
master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (2).
Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the master cylinder outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and
contamination.
5. Disconnect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (3).
Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the master cylinder outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and
contamination.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7431
6. Remove the 2 master cylinder nuts (1). 7. Remove the master cylinder (2). 8. If installing a new
master cylinder, remove the master cylinder reservoir and cap. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir
Replacement (See: Brake
Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair).
9. If removing the master cylinder reservoir, discard the reservoir retaining pins and seals.
Installation Procedure
1. If the master cylinder reservoir was removed, install new master cylinder reservoir seals. 2. If
installing a new master cylinder, install the master cylinder reservoir and cap using new reservoir
retaining pins. Refer to Master Cylinder
Reservoir Replacement (See: Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair).
3. If installing a new master cylinder, bench bleed the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder
Bench Bleeding (See: Procedures/Master Cylinder
Bench Bleeding).
4. Install the master cylinder (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7432
5. Install the 2 master cylinder nuts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
6. Connect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the master
cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (2) and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 8. Connect the master cylinder
secondary brake pipe fitting (3) and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system.
Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and
Repair)Hydraulic
Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Actuator >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Actuator: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement
Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement
Special Tools
J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
2. Loosen the park brake cable locknut (1) at the equalizer to relieve tension on the park brake
cable.
3. Disconnect the front park brake cable (1) from the rear park brake cable.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7441
4. Using the J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , remove the front park brake cable from
the park brake cable bracket on the body by
compressing the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2).
5. Remove the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel
Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement).
6. Lift the driver floor carpet to expose the front park brake cable routing clip. 7. Release the park
brake cable routing clip from the floor stud.
8. Release the front park brake cable pass through grommet.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7442
9. Disconnect the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal clevis (1).
10. Remove the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal assembly by compressing the
locking tabs on the cable conduit (2). 11. Remove the front park brake cable assembly.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the front park brake cable assembly. 2. Connect the front park brake cable to the park
brake pedal clevis (1). 3. Install the front park brake cable to the park brake pedal assembly. 4.
Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake pedal
assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7443
5. Route the front park brake cable through the vehicle floor and seat the pass through grommet.
6. Position the park brake cable routing clip to the floor stud. 7. Position the driver floor carpet to
the vehicle floor. 8. Connect the park brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 9. Install
the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7444
10. Install the front park brake cable (1) to the park brake cable bracket on the body. 11. Ensure
the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake cable bracket. 12.
Connect the front park brake cable to the rear park brake cable. 13. Adjust the park brake. Refer to
Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7445
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left)
Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left)
Special Tools
J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Release the park brake. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the
Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the park brake equalizer locknut (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7446
4. Using the J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , release the park brake cable from the
park brake cable bracket (1) by compressing the
locking tabs on the cable conduit (2).
5. Remove the park brake cable from the bracket and the equalizer.
6. Remove the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) from the vehicle underbody.
7. Remove the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) and nut (2) from the lower trailing arm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7447
8. Disconnect the park brake cable eyelet (1) from the park brake actuator. 9. Using the J-37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , remove the parking brake cable (2) from the park brake cable
bracket.
10. Remove the park brake cable from the cable bracket (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the park brake cable eyelet (1) to the park brake actuator. 2. Install the parking brake
cable (2) to the park brake cable bracket. 3. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit are fully
engaged to the cable bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7448
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) and nut (2) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 5. Install
the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) to the vehicle underbody and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
6. Install the park brake cable to the park brake cable bracket (1). 7. Ensure the locking tabs on the
cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake cable bracket. 8. Install the park brake cable
to the equalizer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7449
9. Loosely install the park brake equalizer locknut (1).
10. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7450
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)
Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)
Special Tools
J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Release the park brake. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the
Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
3. Loosen, but do not remove the park brake equalizer locknut (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7451
4. Disconnect the front park brake cable (1) from the right park brake cable. 5. Using the J-37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , release the park brake cable from the park brake equalizer (2)
by compressing the locking
tabs on the cable conduit (3).
6. Remove the 2 park brake cable bracket bolts located on top of the crossmember above the rear
suspension module. 7. Remove the park brake cable bracket bolt from the lower trailing arm.
8. Disconnect the park brake cable eyelet (1) from the park brake actuator. 9. Using the J-37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , compress the locking tabs on the park brake cable conduit.
10. Remove the park brake cable from the cable bracket (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Position the park brake cable over the rear suspension module.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7452
2. Connect the park brake cable eyelet (1) to the park brake actuator. 3. Compress the park brake
cable spring and install the park brake cable to the cable bracket (2). 4. Ensure the locking tabs on
the cable conduit are fully engaged to the cable bracket.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Install the park brake cable bracket bolt to the lower trailing arm and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
6. Install the 2 park brake cable bracket bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 7. Position the park
brake cable to the equalizer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7453
8. Connect the front park brake cable (1) to the right park brake cable. 9. Install the park brake
cable to the park brake equalizer (2).
10. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (3) are fully engaged to the equalizer.
11. Loosely install the park brake equalizer locknut (1). 12. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking
Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Lever Replacement
Special Tools
J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
2. Loosen the park brake cable locknut (1) at the equalizer to relieve tension on the park brake
cable. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body
Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement).
5. Disconnect the park brake warning indicator switch electrical connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7457
6. Disconnect the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal clevis (1). 7. Using the J-37043
- Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , remove the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal
assembly by compressing the
locking tabs on the cable conduit (2).
8. Remove the lower park brake pedal nut (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7458
9. Remove the 2 upper park brake pedal nuts (1).
10. Remove the park brake pedal assembly.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the park brake pedal assembly.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the 2 upper park brake pedal nuts (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7459
3. Install the lower park brake pedal nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
4. Connect the front park brake cable to the park brake pedal clevis (1). 5. Install the front park
brake cable to the park brake pedal assembly. 6. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2)
are fully engaged to the park brake pedal assembly. 7. Connect the park brake warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 8. Install the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge
Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement).
9. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7463
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7467
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
B80 Park Brake Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7468
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7473
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7474
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7475
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L)
Removal Procedure
1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal
becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake
booster vacuum reserve.
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the power vacuum brake booster.
5. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the power
brake booster vacuum sensor (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7476
Installation Procedure
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
1. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to
the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2).
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
2. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the power vacuum brake booster. 3.
Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the intake manifold
cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump >
Component Information > Diagrams
Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump: Diagrams
G6 Brake Booster Pump - Auxiliary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7480
Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump: Service and Repair
Power Brake Booster Pump Replacement (3.0L)
Removal Procedure
1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal
becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake
booster vacuum reserve.
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3). 4. Release the power
brake booster vacuum hose from the routing clip (2) on the power brake booster auxiliary pump. 5.
Disconnect the power brake booster auxiliary pump electrical connector. 6. Release the power
brake booster auxiliary pump electrical connector retainer from the pump bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7481
7. Remove the power brake booster auxiliary pump nuts (1). 8. Remove the power brake booster
auxiliary pump.
9. If removing the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket, remove the power brake booster
auxiliary pump bracket bolts (1).
10. Remove the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket (1).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7482
1. If removed, install the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7483
3. Install the power brake booster auxiliary pump to the pump bracket. 4. Install the power brake
booster auxiliary pump nuts (1) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in)
5. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3). 6. Connect the power brake
booster auxiliary pump electrical connector. 7. Secure the power brake booster auxiliary pump
electrical connector retainer to the pump bracket. 8. Secure the power brake booster vacuum hose
from the routing clip (2) on the power brake booster auxiliary pump. 9. Install the intake manifold
cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Power Vacuum Brake Booster Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
1. Remove the vacuum brake booster vacuum sensor and hose from the vacuum brake booster
and position aside. Refer to Power Brake Booster
Vacuum Sensor Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and
Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum
Sensor/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic
System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement).
3. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve
Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure
Modulator Valve Replacement).
4. Remove the BPMV bracket. Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement
(See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure
Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement).
5. Remove the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
(See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal
Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Replacement).
6. Remove the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer nut (1). 7. Disconnect the vacuum brake
booster pushrod from the brake pedal.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7487
8. Remove the 4 vacuum brake booster nuts (1).
9. Carefully pull the vacuum brake booster forward until the mounting studs clear the dash panel.
Note: Ensure the foam insulator on the mounting surface of the vacuum brake booster withdraws
with the booster.
10. Remove the vacuum brake booster (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7488
11. Inspect the vacuum brake booster gasket (1) for damage and replace if necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the vacuum brake booster gasket (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7489
Note: Ensure the foam insulator on the mounting surface of the vacuum brake booster is properly
installed on the booster.
2. While guiding the brake booster pushrod and mounting studs through the dash panel, install the
vacuum brake booster (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the vacuum brake booster nuts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft)..
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7490
4. Connect the vacuum brake booster pushrod to the brake pedal. 5. Install the vacuum brake
booster pushrod retainer. 6. Rotate the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer 360 degrees to
ensure it is properly installed. 7. Install the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer nut (1) and
tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).. 8. Install the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position
Sensor Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal
Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Replacement).
9. Install the BPMV bracket. Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement (See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure
Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement).
10. Install the BPMV. Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement).
11. Install the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic
System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement).
12. Install the vacuum brake booster vacuum sensor (1) and hose to the vacuum brake booster.
Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair
Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (3.0L)
Removal Procedure
1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal
becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake
booster vacuum reserve.
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
4. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake
manifold vacuum port. 5. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2) from the power
vacuum brake booster. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle
(See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 7. Disconnect the power brake booster
vacuum hose quick connect (3) from the power brake booster pump. 8. Remove the power brake
booster vacuum hose and check valve assembly. 9. Remove the power brake booster vacuum
sensor. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster
Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L)
(See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum
Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair).
2. Install the power brake booster vacuum hose and check valve assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7494
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
3. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to
the intake manifold vacuum port. 4. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2) from the
power vacuum brake booster. 5. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3)
from the power brake booster pump. 6. Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical
connector. 7. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See:
Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes >
Component Information > Locations
Vacuum Pump Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7498
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7503
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7504
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7505
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7506
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning).
Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings).
Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with
the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the EBCM/EBTCM.
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block.
Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV)
area of any dirt or debris. 4. Disconnect the EBCM electrical connector by lifting the locking lever
upward.
5. Remove the 4 EBCM bolts (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7507
Note: Do not pry the components apart.
6. Carefully pull the EBCM (1) from the BPMV. 7. Remove the 12 EBCM seals, if necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the EBCM seals, if removed. 2. Install the EBCM (1) to the BPMV.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7508
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the 4 EBCM bolts (1) and tighten the bolts in a cross pattern to 3 Nm (27 lb in). 4. Install
the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
5. If installing a new EBCM, program the EBCM. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). 6. Without starting the engine, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations
Vacuum Pump Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control >
Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 7512
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7517
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7518
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7519
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L)
Removal Procedure
1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal
becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake
booster vacuum reserve.
2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the power vacuum brake booster.
5. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the power
brake booster vacuum sensor (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7520
Installation Procedure
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
1. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to
the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2).
Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap.
2. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the power vacuum brake booster. 3.
Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the intake manifold
cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7524
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7525
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7526
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block
Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector.
3. While compressing the retaining tabs on the inboard side of the brake fluid level indicator switch
(1), carefully remove the switch from the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
Installation Procedure
Note: Ensure the retaining tabs on the brake fluid level indicator switch are fully engaged in the
master cylinder reservoir.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7527
1. Install the brake fluid level indicator switch (1) by carefully inserting the switch into the master
cylinder reservoir. 2. Connect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Install the
accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction
Block Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7531
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
B80 Park Brake Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7532
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory
Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7536
Traction Control Switch: Diagrams
S75 Traction Control Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7537
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Electronic Traction Control and Vehicle Stability Control Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views
Wheel Components
1 - B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front 2 - B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear 3 - B5LR
Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear 4 - B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7541
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams
B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7542
B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7543
B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7544
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair
).
3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the front brake hose bracket nut (1). 5. Release the front wheel speed sensor harness
from the retainers on the front brake hose.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page
7547
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1).
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor (1) by pulling the sensor straight upward from the steering
knuckle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the wheel speed sensor (1) to the steering knuckle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page
7548
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in).
3. Install the front brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the wheel
speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the front wheel speed sensor harness to the retainers
on the front brake hose. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control >
Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page
7549
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw
Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components
1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw
Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7553
Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams
B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw
Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7554
Yaw Rate Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Vehicle Yaw Sensor Learn
Note: The Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor is also known as the Inertia Sensor Module (IMU) in SPS
and the Yaw Rate Sensor in the scan tool. The sensor must be configured using SPS before the
vehicle yaw sensor learn is performed.
The multi-axis acceleration sensor requires a SPS configuration and a yaw rate sensor learn. This
is required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as
follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Multi-axis acceleration sensor replacement
* Vehicle yaw sensor replacement
* Vehicle yaw sensor with lateral and longitudinal accelerometer sensor replacement
The yaw rate sensor learn procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps:
1. Place vehicle on a level surface. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P
position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Reset in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset
Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset
Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 9. Select
Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that
may be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw
Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7555
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Yaw Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7565
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position.
4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or
similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch
housing.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder
Coding - Ignition (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7566
2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start
switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock
cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement
(See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service
and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7571
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System
Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Replacement
Negative: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Replacement
Battery Negative Cable Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Record all of the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery
Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Disconnect the battery current sensor from the body harness (1) 4. Remove the battery negative
cable ground nut (2) from the frame rail.
5. Remove the battery negative cable engine ground bolt (1) from the engine block. 6. Remove the
battery negative cable (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System
Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Replacement > Page 7578
Note: Observe how the battery negative cable was routed within the engine compartment.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
1. Install the battery negative cable engine ground nut (1) to the engine and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb
ft).
2. Install the battery negative cable frame ground nut (1)to the frame rail and tighten to 25 Nm (18
lb ft). 3. Install battery negative cable clamp to the battery post.Refer to Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery Negative
Cable Disconnection and Connection)
4. Reset the radio channel presets.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System
Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Replacement > Page 7579
Negative: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System
Information > Service and Repair
Positive: Service and Repair
Battery Positive Cable Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Record all of the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery
Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Negative/Service and Repair/Battery
Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
3. Remove the ECM mounting bracket.
4. Remove the battery positive post clamp nut (2). 5. Remove the battery retainer bracket and the
battery.Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery
Replacement).
6. Remove battery positive terminal (1) at the fuse block. 7. Disconnect retainers (3) holding battery
positive cable (4).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7583
8. Remove generator boot (1) and nut (2) from the generator B+ stud. 9. Remove the starter
solenoid nut (3).
10. Remove the battery positive (Starter) cable (4) and the battery positive (Generator) cable (5)
from the vehicle.
Note: Observe how the battery positive cable was routed within the engine compartment.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
1. Install the battery positive cable nut (2) to the B+ generator stud and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft).
2. Install battery positive cable nut (3) and terminals (Starter/Generator),to the starter
solenoid.Tighten to 10 Nm (88 lb in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7584
3. Install the battery positive cable terminal nut (1) to the fuse block and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft).
4. Install battery positive cable clamp nut (2) to the battery post and tighten to 10 Nm (88 lb in) 5.
Install engine control module (ECM) and battery cover. 6. Reset the radio channel presets.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Battery Tray
Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray
Battery Tray Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Battery Tray > Page 7592
Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray Support
Battery Tray Support Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications
Alternator: Specifications
Generator Usage
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7597
Alternator: Diagrams
G13 Generator X1
G13 Generator X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7598
Alternator: Service and Repair
Generator Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
2. Reposition the positive battery cable boot at the generator terminal. 3. Disconnect the engine
harness electrical connector (1) from the generator. 4. Remove the positive battery cable nut (2) at
the generator. 5. Remove the positive battery cable terminal (3) from the generator. 6. Remove the
drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair).
7. Remove the idler pulley bolt (1) and idler pulley (2). Refer to Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement
(See: Engine, Cooling and
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7599
Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Idler Pulley/Service and Repair).
8. Remove the generator bolts (3).
Note: When removing the generator from the vehicle, it may be necessary to maneuver the
generator to remove it from the vehicle.
9. Remove the generator(4).
Installation Procedure
1. Position the generator (4) to the engine. 2. Loosely install the generator bolts (3). 3. Install the
idler pulley. Refer to Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets
and Accessories/Idler Pulley/Service and Repair).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Tighten the generator bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 7600
5. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair).
6. Connect the engine harness electrical connector (1) to the generator. 7. Install the positive
battery cable terminal (3) to the generator. 8. Install the positive battery cable nut (2) at the
generator and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 9. Position the positive battery cable boot at the generator
terminal.
10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service
and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid >
Component Information > Locations
Ignition Lock Solenoid: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7606
Ignition Lock Solenoid: Diagrams
M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7611
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position.
4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or
similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch
housing.
Installation Procedure
1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder
Coding - Ignition (See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7612
2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start
switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock
cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement
(See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement).
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service
and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure
Key: Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-029F
Date: January 05, 2011
Subject: Key Cutting Procedure for Obtaining Replacement Key
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2011
Chevrolet Cruze, Volt 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
Attention:
This bulletin applies to the United States and Canada only. Export dealers are to contact their local
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for further information.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the Chevrolet Volt. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information).
Due to the uniqueness of the ignition/door lock key, special equipment is required to cut a key. If
you do not have the required equipment, you may order a cut/coded key through GM CC&A.;
To obtain a replacement key, the following procedure is suggested:
1. Obtain the vehicle key code.
U.S. Dealers: Access the "Key Code Look Up" application through GM GlobalConnect under the
Parts Workbench. Canadian Dealers: Access the "KeyCode Look-Up" feature within the
OEConnection D2DLink application.
2. Submit a part order through the GM CC&A; Parts System for a key blank. Be sure to include the
key code in the "note" field of the order. 3. DO NOT ORDER AN UNCODED KEY AS YOU WILL
RECEIVE A BLANK KEY THAT WILL REQUIRE CODING ON THE
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT LISTED BELOW.
Note
The key code is five digits. Some vehicle records do not have the first digit displayed (i.e., vehicle
records show the key code as "1234"). When ordering a cut/coded key, refer to the key code table.
Important The order will be shipped the same day if received by 12:00 p.m. (noon) EST, or within
24 hours, Monday through Friday via FedEx (Canadian dealers should place their orders for these
parts using a CSO order type only. Do not order using the CSO3 order type).
Important The remote control transmitter and the key shank are not serviced separately.
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7617
If a key is received with an incorrect cut contact the SPAC department for assistance.
Tip The new key and transmitter will need to be programmed to the vehicle. Refer to Key and
Transmitter Programming in SI for details.
Parts Information
For part numbers and usage, refer to Key in Group 02.187 of the appropriate parts catalog.
Important As an alternate to Step 2, the following equipment can be purchased through
1-800-GM-TOOLS or by visiting www.GMDEsolutions.com (U.S.) or www.des-canada.ca
(Canada).
General Motors highly recommends the use of the following key machines. General Motors has
identified superior equipment through testing and evaluation. General Motors believes these
sources and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such
equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the equipment from these firms or for any such items which may be available for
other sources.
Equipment Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7618
Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010
Date: May 27, 2010
Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada
Only)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior
Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu
Attention:
This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode
security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer
operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin
should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference.
Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009.
Where Are Key Codes Located?
General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to
a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a
small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it.
Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed
on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code
Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers.
The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the
OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model
years from the current model year.
When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original
vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have
access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been
completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors.
Tip
Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not.
GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers
All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and
Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates &
keys").
Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this
application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently
goes back 17 years from current model year.
Important notes about security:
- Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously.
- Users may only request one KeyCode at a time.
- KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes.
- Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password.
- Never share your password with others.
- User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts.
- User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days.
- Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews.
- The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee
termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off
immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership.
- If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at
1-800-265-0573.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7619
Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is
used.
Key Code User Agreement
- Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle
owner.
- Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to
criminal and civil penalties.
- This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone
unless authorized.
I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information:
1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership.
Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and
possibly the
receipt for payment recorded as well.
Important
- GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving
out key codes.
- When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the
information.
Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never
be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the
expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this
bulletin or other materials.
- Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet.
- Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions.
Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following:
- Government issued picture ID (Drivers License)
- Registration or other proof of ownership.
- Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key
to the customer.
- Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up
to either GM or law enforcement officials.
- Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions.
- Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers
How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered?
Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the
ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien
holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is
the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short
description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on
file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field.
How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed?
The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered
repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of
the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for
documentation.
What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle?
Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will
have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's
ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and
or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be
involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the
owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information.
Can I get a print out of the information on the screen?
It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or
proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results
must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper
or illegal use.
Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application?
Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is
authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership
parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up
application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system
includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7620
What if I input the VIN incorrectly?
If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN
or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message.
If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home?
Yes.
What if I suspect key code misuse?
Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any
suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems
Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892.
Whose key codes can I access through the system?
At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet,
Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu
(up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years.
What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information?
Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This
may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information
may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN,
you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892.
How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down?
If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling
dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at
1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have
the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911.
What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle?
On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In
cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting
equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to
verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the
KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at
1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock
cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding
a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary.
How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records?
Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years.
Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system?
Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed.
Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892.
What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or
KeyCode information?
The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and
registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the
dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough
information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided.
How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key?
The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed
copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name,
address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included
in your dealer KeyCode file.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7621
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote
Start
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A
Date: October 26, 2009
Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information
Models:
2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT
2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse
2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent
2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY
Attention:
This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information).
This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM
Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems.
Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use
entire kit for warranty or repair work.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start >
Page 7627
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start >
Page 7628
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start >
Page 7629
Parts Information
Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems
Transmitter Battery 12493150
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations
Starter Motor: Locations
Powertrain Component Views
Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2)
1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position
Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator
Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7633
1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel
Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor
2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C
Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7634
Starter Motor: Diagrams
M64 Starter Motor X1
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LAF)
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LF1)
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7635
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7636
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
Starter Replacement (LF1)
Removal Procedure
1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
3. Remove the heat shield (2) from the starter. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor connector. 5.
Disconnect and remove the bank 1 sensor 2 oxygen sensor after the left catalytic converter. Refer
to Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1
Sensor 2 (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Oxygen
Sensor/Service and Repair)
6. Remove the battery positive nut (1) and the engine harness connector (2), from the starter
solenoid (3).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7637
7. Remove the starter motor bolts (1). 8. Remove the starter motor (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the starter motor (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the starter motor mounting bolts. Tighten to 58 Nm (43 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7638
3. Install the battery positive cable and engine harness connector to the starter. Tighten the battery
positive cable nut (1) to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 4. Install the engine harness connector to the starter
solenoid.
5. Install the starter heat shield (2) and tighten the bolt (1) to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 6. Connect the knock
sensor connector. 7. Install and connect the bank 1 sensor 2 oxygen sensor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7642
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7647
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7648
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7649
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7650
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7651
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7656
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7657
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7658
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7659
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7660
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7661
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7662
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7663
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7664
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7665
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7666
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7667
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7668
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7669
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7670
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7671
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7672
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7673
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7674
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7675
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7676
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7677
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7678
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7679
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7680
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7681
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7682
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7683
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7684
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7685
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7686
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7687
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7688
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7689
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7690
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7691
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7692
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7693
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7694
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7695
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7696
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7697
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7698
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7699
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7700
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7701
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7702
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7703
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7704
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7705
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7706
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7707
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7708
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7709
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7710
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7711
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7712
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7713
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7714
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7715
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7716
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7717
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7718
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7719
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7720
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7721
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7722
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7723
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7724
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7725
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7726
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7727
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7728
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7729
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7730
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7731
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7732
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7733
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7734
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7735
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7736
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7737
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7738
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7739
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7740
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7741
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7742
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7743
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7744
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7745
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7746
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7747
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7748
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7749
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7750
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7751
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7752
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7753
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7754
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7755
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7756
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7757
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7758
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7759
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7760
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7761
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7762
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7763
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7764
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7765
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7766
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7767
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7768
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7769
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7770
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7771
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7772
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7773
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7774
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7775
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7776
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7777
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7778
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7779
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7780
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7781
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7782
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7783
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7784
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7785
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7786
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7787
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7788
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7789
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7790
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7791
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7792
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7793
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7794
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7795
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7796
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7797
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7798
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7799
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7800
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7801
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7802
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7803
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7804
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7805
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7806
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7807
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7808
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7809
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7810
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7811
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7812
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7813
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7814
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7815
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7816
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7817
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7818
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7819
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7820
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7821
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
Power Outlets Description and Operation
12 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Description and Operation
The accessory power receptacle in the rear of the vehicle is supplied battery voltage at all times.
The accessory power receptacles located in the center console and the instrument panel are
supplied battery voltage when the ignition is on or in the accessory position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Power Outlets
Symptoms - Power Outlets
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the power outlets. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories)
* Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage
or for obvious conditions which can cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
Symptom List
Refer to Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction (See: Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120
VAC)) in order to diagnose the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 7824
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120 VAC)
Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The accessory power receptacle located in rear of the vehicle is supplied B+ all the time. The
accessory power receptacles located in the instrument panel and center console are supplied B+
when the ignition is on or in the accessory position.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Power Outlets Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information
Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate X80 accessory power
receptacle. 2. Test for less than 5 ohm between the ground circuit terminal C and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
3. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminate between the B+/ignition circuit terminal A and
ground.
‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+/ignition circuit for a short to ground or an
open/high resistance.
4. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the X80 accessory power receptacle.
Repair Instructions
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 7825
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement (See: Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7826
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair
Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement
Special Tools
J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block. 2. Remove the receptacle:
1. Look into the receptacle. There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the
front of the receptacle. The J 42059 pushes the
plastic latches from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out.
2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the J 42059 into the tab window. The J 42059 will not fit
straight into the receptacle. Angle the J 42059
slightly for insertion into the receptacle.
3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window.
You must move the J 42059 handle toward horizontal to engage the other tab window.
4. Use the J 42059 to pull the receptacle straight out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7827
3. If J 42059 tool fails to release the lighter socket from the retainer, perform the following alternate
method:
1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket. 2. Remove the plastic latches in
the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows. 3. Use the J 42059 as directed above to remove the socket.
Installation Procedure
1. Route the connector through the retainer. Align the accessory power receptacle retainer to the
slot in the opening. 2. Install the retainer by pressing into place fully seated. 3. Connect the
electrical connector to the receptacle. 4. Align the tabs on the receptacle to the slots in the retainer.
Install the accessory power receptacle by pressing into place until fully seated. 5. Install the
accessory power receptacle fuse.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7828
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Tools and Equipment
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
Electronic Noise Suppressor: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D
Date: July 29, 2009
Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise
Suppression Filter)
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the
OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or
decrease in engine speed.
Cause
This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication
Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio.
Correction
Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery
voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached
wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the
single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single
yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground.
Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most
effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical
noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting
the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing
the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding
the capacitor lead.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 7837
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
Electronic Noise Suppressor: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using
OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D
Date: July 29, 2009
Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise
Suppression Filter)
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the
OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or
decrease in engine speed.
Cause
This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication
Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio.
Correction
Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery
voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached
wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the
single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single
yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground.
Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most
effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical
noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting
the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing
the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding
the capacitor lead.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: >
07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 7843
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual
Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7848
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7849
To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and lift it straight up.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J-Case Fuses ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Usage
Fuse 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. Cool Fan 1 Fuse 2 .................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Cool Fan
2 Fuse 3 ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................ Rear Defog Fuse 4 .............................................................
.............................................................................................................................. Power Windows Right Fuse 5 ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................... Memory Seat Module Fuse 6 .......................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Power
Seat - Left Fuse 7 ................................................................................................................................
................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 1 Fuse 8 ...............................................
................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel
Fuse Block 2 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................... Starter Fuse 10 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
. Brake Booster Fuse 11 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Sunroof Fuse 12 .....................................
........................................................................................................................................... Antilock
Brake System Pump Fuse 13 ..............................................................................................................
................................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 Fuse 14 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Power Windows - Left Fuse 15 ............................................................................................................
................................................................. Antilock Brake System Module
Mini Fuses ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Fuse 16 ................................................................................................................................................
................... Transmission Control Module Battery Fuse 17 ...............................................................
.............................................................................................................................. Trailer Parking
Light Fuse 18 .......................................................................................................................................
...................................... Engine Control Module Battery Fuse 19 .......................................................
................................................................................................................................................. Heated
Mirror Fuse 20 .....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Trailer Left Fuse 21 ....................................................
............................................................................................................................................... Lift Gate
Module Fuse 22 ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... Power Lumbar Fuse 23 ..................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
Trailer Right Fuse 24 ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................. Canister Vent Fuse 25 ..........................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Memory
Mirror Module Fuse 26
............................................................................................................................................................
Regulated Voltage Control Battery Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7850
Fuse 27 ................................................................................................................................................
................................ Rear Accessory Power Outlet Fuse 28 ..............................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Wiper Fuse 29 .....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Rear Wiper Fuse 30 ...................................................
............................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning
Compressor Fuse 31 ...........................................................................................................................
................................................................................... Rear Latch Fuse 32 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
................ Horn Fuse 33 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................ Right High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 34 .....................................
............................................................................................................................................... Left
High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 35 ...........................................................................................................
....................................................................................... Ignition Even Coil Fuse 36 ...........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......... Ignition Odd Coil Fuse 37 .........................................................................................................
....................................................................................... Windshield Washer Fuse 38 ........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.............. Front Fog Lamps Fuse 39 ....................................................................................................
........................................................... Post Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 40 ..................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Engine Control Module Fuse 41 ................................................................................................
................................................................ Pre-Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 42 ..............
..............................................................................................................................................................
... Transmission Control Module Fuse 43 ............................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ Mirror Fuse 44 ............
..............................................................................................................................................................
. Chassis Control Module Ignition Fuse 45 ..........................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Spare Fuse 46 ........
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......................... Rear Drive Module Fuse 47 ......................................................................................
................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Logic Fuse 48 .......
.............................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Ignition Fuse 49 ....................................................................................
............................................................................................................ Heated Seat - Front Fuse 50 ..
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................... Chassis Control Module Fuse 51 ..............................................................................
........................................................................................................... Engine Control Module Fuse
52 .........................................................................................................................................................
...................................... Rear Vision Camera
Midi Fuse .............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Fuse 53 ................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Electric Power Steering
Micro Relays ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Relay 54 ..............................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Rear Defogger Relay 55 .............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan
Low Relay 56 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................. Head Lamp High Beam Relay 57 ......................................................
....................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan
Control Relay 58 ..................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Wiper On/Off Control Relay 59 ...................................................
........................................................................................................................... Air Conditioning
Compressor Relay 60 ..........................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Wiper Speed Relay 61 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Fog Lamp Relay 62 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Engine Control Relay 63 ......................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... Starter Relay 64 ...................................................................................................................
......................................................................................... Run/Crank
Mini Relays ..........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Relay 65 ..............................................................................................................................................
................................................... Cooling Fan High Relay 66 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Brake
Booster
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7851
Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual
INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7852
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7853
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side panel of the center console. To
access the fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling it out.
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs on the bottom of the door into the console first, then push the
door back into its original location.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Mini Fuses ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Fuse 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
............................................... Steering Wheel DM Fuse 2 .................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Spare Fuse 3 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Spare Fuse 4 .....................................................
...................................................................................................................................... Body Control
Module 1 Fuse 5 ..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Infotainment Fuse 6 .................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... Body
Control Module 7 Fuse 7 .....................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Noise Control Module Fuse 8 .....................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Body Control Module 4 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................
........................................................................................................... Radio Fuse 10 .........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... SEO Battery Fuse 11 ......................................................................................................
.............................................................. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid Module Fuse 12
................................................................................................................................................. Heater,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery Fuse 13 ................................................................................
........................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power Front Fuse 14
................................................................................................................................................ Heater,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ignition Fuse 15 ................................................................................
................................................................................................................................... Display Fuse 16
..............................................................................................................................................................
........................... Body Control Module 5 Fuse 17 ..............................................................................
.............................................................................................................. Auxiliary Power Rear Fuse
18 .........................................................................................................................................................
................. Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition Fuse 19 ........................................................................
................................................................................................................................... PDI Module
Fuse 20 ................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Body Control Module 6 Fuse 21 ................................................................
............................................................................................................ SEO Retained Accessory
Power Fuse 22 ....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... SDM Ignition Fuse 23 ....................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.... Spare Fuse 24 ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................... Spare Fuse 25 ..............................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... PRNDL Fuse 26 ...........................................................................................................................
........................................................................................... Spare Fuse 27 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... Spare
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7854
Fuse 28 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... Spare Fuse 30 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................................... Body Control Module
3 Fuse 31 .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. Amplifier Fuse 32 ..............................................................
................................................................................................................ Discrete Logic Ignition
Switch Fuse 33 ....................................................................................................................................
................................ Communications Integration Module Fuse 34 ....................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Body Control
Module 2 Fuse 35 ................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................... SDM Battery Fuse 36 ...............................................
............................................................................................................................................. Data Link
Connection Fuse 37 ............................................................................................................................
............................................... Instrument Panel Cluster Battery Fuse 38
..............................................................................................................................................................
IOS Module (Passenger Sensing System) Fuse 39 ............................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... Spare
J-Case Fuses ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Usage
Fuse 29 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................... Front Blower Motor Fuse 40 ................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Body Control Module
8
Relays ..................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Relay 41 ..............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. LOG Relay Relay 42 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................... Retained Accessory Power
Relay
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7857
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7858
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7859
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7860
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7861
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7862
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7863
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7864
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7865
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7866
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7867
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7868
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7869
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7870
Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7871
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7872
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7873
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7874
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7875
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7876
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7877
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 7882
Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 7883
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7886
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7887
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7888
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7889
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7890
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7891
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7892
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7893
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7894
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7895
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7896
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7902
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7903
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7904
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7905
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7906
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7907
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7908
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7909
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7910
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7911
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7912
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7913
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7914
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7915
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7916
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7917
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7918
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7919
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7920
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7921
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7922
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7923
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7924
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7925
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7926
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7927
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7928
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7929
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7930
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7931
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7932
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7933
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7934
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7935
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7936
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7937
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7938
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7939
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7940
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7941
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7942
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7943
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7944
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7945
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7946
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7947
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7948
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7949
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7950
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7951
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7952
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7953
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7954
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7955
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7956
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7957
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7958
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7959
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7960
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7961
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7962
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7963
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7964
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7965
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7966
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7967
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7968
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7969
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7970
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7971
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7972
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7973
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7974
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7975
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7976
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7977
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7978
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7979
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7980
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7981
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7982
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7983
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7984
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7985
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7986
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7987
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7988
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7989
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7990
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7991
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7992
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7993
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7994
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7995
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7996
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7997
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7998
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7999
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8000
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8001
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8002
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8003
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8004
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8005
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8006
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8007
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8008
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8009
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8010
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8011
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8012
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8013
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8014
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8015
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8016
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8017
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8018
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8019
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8020
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8021
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8022
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8023
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8024
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8025
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8026
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8027
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8028
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8029
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8030
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8031
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8032
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8033
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8034
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8035
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8036
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8037
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8038
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8039
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8040
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8041
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8042
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8043
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8044
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8045
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8046
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8047
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8048
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8049
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Fuse Block: Procedures
Ground Repair
Electrical Grounds
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, positive, corrosion-free ground connections.
Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and
loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and
component replacements.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of, three
attachment methods:
* Welded M6 stud and nut
* Welded M6 nut and bolt
* Welded M8 nut and bolt
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
Determine which attachment method is used, and carry out the appropriate repair.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible.
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
5. Select a replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part
number and application. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet
stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement.
Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation
of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding.
8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the
repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair ().
10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material
applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud
threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud
threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the
electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
(See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to
the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new rivet stud. 16.
Select a new, conductive M6 nut. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and
application.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
17. Install the M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 18. Check for proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a new, conductive
self-threading M7 bolt may be used to secure the
ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive, self-threading M7 bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8052
threads.
5. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
6. Install the electrical ground terminal to the new, conductive M7 bolt.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Install the M7 bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Check for proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair)
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 bolt
and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and
application.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance behind the
panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush,
apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M6
bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M6 bolt to the ground location.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a
conductive M8 bolt and a conductive M8 nut may be
used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and
application.
2. Select a location adjacent to M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush,
apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M8
bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M8 bolt to the ground location.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Install the conductive M8 nut and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8053
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair)
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a
conductive M6 rivet stud and a conductive M6 nut
may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers
and application.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new, conductive M6 rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a rivet stud
installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely
fastened, with no detectable movement.
Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation
of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding.
8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the
repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair ().
10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material
applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud
threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud
threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the
electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
(See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to
the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new, conductive M6
rivet stud.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
16. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 17. Check for proper system
operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8054
Fuse Block: Removal and Replacement
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8055
Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement
Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8056
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B
Date: October 25, 2010
Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with
Conductive Finish
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Electrical Ground Repair Overview
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground
connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system
function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary
repairs and component replacement.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the
following attachment methods:
- Welded M6 stud and nut
- Welded M6 nut and bolt
- Welded M8 nut and bolt
Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as
described in this bulletin.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is
visible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8061
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8062
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8063
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8064
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8065
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8066
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Multiple Junction Connector: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8075
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8076
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8077
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8083
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC
P2138/Reduced Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8089
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8094
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8095
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8096
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC
P2138/Reduced Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8102
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167
> Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167
> Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8108
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167
> Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8109
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167
> Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8110
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Name
A3 - B39
Component Connector End Views
A3L Sunshade - Left Front
A3R Sunshade - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8113
A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8114
A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8115
A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8116
A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC with UYS or PCJ or without UVC or UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8117
A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC without UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8118
A11 Radio X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8119
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8120
A11 Radio X3 (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8121
A11 Radio X4 (UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8122
A20 Radio/HVAC Controls
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8123
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8124
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8125
A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8126
A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8127
A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8128
A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8129
B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8130
B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8131
B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8132
B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8133
B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8134
B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8135
B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8136
B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8137
B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8138
B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8139
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8140
B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8141
B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch
B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8142
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8143
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8144
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8145
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8146
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8147
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8148
B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8149
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8150
B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8151
B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LF1)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8152
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8153
B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8154
B46 - C1
B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8155
B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8156
B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8157
B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF)
B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8158
B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8159
B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8160
B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8161
B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8162
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8163
B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8164
B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8165
B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8166
B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8167
B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8168
B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8169
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8170
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8171
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8172
B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8173
B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8174
B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8175
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8176
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8177
B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8178
B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8179
B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8180
B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8181
B80 Park Brake Switch
B87 Rearview Camera (UVC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8182
B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8183
B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8184
B101 Immobilizer Antenna
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8185
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8186
B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8187
B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8188
C1 Battery C1 Battery C1 Battery +
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8189
E1 - E37
E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (TSQ)
E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8190
E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8191
E1K Accent Lamp - Right Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8192
E1L Accent Lamp - Overhead Console (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8193
E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8194
E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8195
E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8196
E2LF Side Marker Lamp - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8197
E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8198
E2RF Side Marker Lamp - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8199
E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8200
E4E Head Lamp - Left High Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8201
E4F Head Lamp - Right High Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8202
E4G Head Lamp - Left Low Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8203
E4H Head Lamp - Right Low Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8204
E4N Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8205
E4P Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8206
E5A Backup Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8207
E5AC Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8208
E5AD Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8209
E5B Backup Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8210
E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8211
E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8212
E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8213
E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8214
E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8215
E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8216
E7R License Plate Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8217
E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8218
E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8219
E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8220
E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8221
E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8222
E18 Rear Defogger Grid X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8223
E18 Rear Defogger Grid X2
E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8224
E29LF Fog Lamp - Left Front (T96)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8225
E29RF Fog Lamp - Right Front (T96)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8226
E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8227
E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8228
E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8229
E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8230
F105 - K27
F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8231
F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8232
F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8233
F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8234
F106L Side Air Bag - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8235
F106R Side Air Bag - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8236
F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8237
F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8238
F112D Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8239
F112P Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8240
F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8241
F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8242
G6 Brake Booster Pump - Auxiliary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8243
G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8244
G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8245
G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8246
G13 Generator X1
G13 Generator X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8247
G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8248
G24 Windshield Washer Pump
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8249
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8250
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8251
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8252
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8253
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8254
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8255
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8256
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8257
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8258
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8259
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8260
K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8261
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8262
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8263
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8264
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8265
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8266
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8267
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8268
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8269
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8270
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8271
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8272
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8273
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8274
K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8275
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8276
K29 - M55
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8277
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8278
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8279
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8280
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8281
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8282
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8283
K33 HVAC Control Module X1 (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8284
K33 HVAC Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8285
K33 HVAC Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8286
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8287
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8288
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8289
K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8290
K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8291
K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8292
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8293
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8294
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8295
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8296
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8297
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8298
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8299
K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8300
K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8301
K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8302
K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8303
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8304
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8305
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8306
K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8307
K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8308
K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8309
M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8310
M8 Blower Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8311
M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5)
M37 Mode Door Actuator
M45 Rear Wiper Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8312
M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8313
M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8314
M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8315
M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver
M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8316
M56 - Q6
M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8317
M64 Starter Motor X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8318
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LAF)
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LF1)
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8319
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LF1)
M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8320
M74D Window Motor - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8321
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8322
M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8323
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8324
M75 Windshield Wiper Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8325
M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8326
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8327
P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8328
P12B Horn - Low Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8329
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8330
P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8331
P16 Instrument Cluster
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8332
P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8333
P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8334
P19AC Speaker - Subwoofer (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8335
P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8)
P19G Speaker - Left Front (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8336
P19G Speaker - Left Front (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8337
P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8338
P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8339
P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8340
P19U Speaker - Right Front (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8341
P19U Speaker - Right Front (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8342
P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8343
P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8344
P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8345
P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8346
P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8347
Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8348
Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8349
Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8350
Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8351
Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8352
Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF)
Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8353
Q8 - S70
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8354
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8355
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8356
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8357
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8358
Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8359
Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8360
Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8361
Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8362
Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8363
Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LAF)
Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8364
Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LAF)
Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8365
Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8366
Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8367
Q17E Fuel Injector 5 (LF1)
Q17F Fuel Injector 6 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8368
Q38 Throttle Body
R6 Data Link Resistor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8369
R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF)
S3 Transmission Shift Lever
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8370
S12 Dome Lamp Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8371
S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8372
S33 Horn Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8373
S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8374
S39 Ignition Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8375
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8376
S46 Liftgate Handle Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8377
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8378
S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8379
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8380
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8381
S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8382
S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8383
S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8384
S72 - X88
S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8385
S75 Traction Control Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8386
S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8387
S79D Window Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8388
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8389
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8390
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8391
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8392
S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8393
S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8394
S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8395
T3 Audio Amplifier X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8396
T3 Audio Amplifier X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8397
T3 Audio Amplifier X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8398
T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8399
T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8400
T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8401
T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8402
T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8403
T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8404
T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8405
T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8406
T8E Ignition Coil 5 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8407
T8F Ignition Coil 6 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8408
T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8409
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8410
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8411
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8412
X83 Auxiliary Audio Input (without UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8413
X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8414
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8415
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8416
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8417
X88 Trailer Connector (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8418
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8419
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Number
X108
Inline Harness Connector End Views
X108 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 1 Harness (LF1)
X109
X109 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 2 Harness (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8420
X110
X110 Forward Lamp Harness to Left Front Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8421
X112
X112 Engine Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8422
X115
X115 Forward Lamp Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8423
X116
X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8424
X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LF1)
X120
X120 Forward Lamp Harness to Right Front Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8425
X121
X121 Body Harness to Negative Battery Cable Harness
X136
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8426
X136 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Harness (LAF)
X203
X203 Airbag Extension Harness to Instrument Panel Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8427
X206
X206 Body Harness to Instrument Panel Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8428
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8429
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8430
X209
X209 Instrument Panel Harness to Headliner Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8431
X210
X210 Instrument Panel Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8432
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8433
X211
X211 Console Harness to Instrument Panel Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8434
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8435
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8436
X213
X213 Instrument Panel Harness to POA HVAC Extension Harness
X214
X214 Console Harness to CD Slot Extension Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8437
X215
X215 Console Harness to Seat Heating Power Extension Harness (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8438
X302
X302 Driver Seat Cushion Harness to Driver Seat Back Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8439
X300
X300 Headliner Harness to Body Harness
X303
X303 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8440
X304
X304 Driver Seat Back Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8441
X307
X307 Driver Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8442
X308
X308 Body Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8443
X310
X310 Body Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8444
X315
X315 Headliner Harness to Overhead Console Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8445
X316
X316 Overhead Console Harness to Dome/Reading Lamps Harness
X309
X309 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8446
X401
X401 Headliner Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8447
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8448
X405
X405 Body Harness to POA Fuel Tank Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8449
X406
X406 Body Harness to Rear Bumper Harness (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8450
X407
X407 Body Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8451
X408
X408 Body Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8452
X411
X411 Body Harness to Chassis Harness
X416
X416 Headliner Harness to POA Sunroof Harness (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8453
X444
X444 Trailer Extension Harness to Body Harness (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8454
X450
X450 Trailer Pigtail Harness to Trailer Extension Harness (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8455
X500
X500 Body Harness to Driver Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8456
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8457
X505
X505 Driver Door Harness to Driver Door Trim Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8458
X600
X600 Body Harness to Passenger Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8459
X605
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8460
X605 Passenger Door Harness to Passenger Door Trim Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8461
X700 - X799
X700 Body Harness to Left Rear Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8462
X800 - X899
X800 Body Harness to Right Rear Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8463
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8464
X900
X900 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8465
X901
X901 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8466
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8467
X902
X902 Liftgate Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8468
X903
X903 Liftgate Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness (GMC)
X904
X904 License Lamp Harness to Liftgate Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8469
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8470
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Splices By Number
JX201
Splice Pack Connector End Views
JX201
JX202
Splice Pack Connector End Views
JX202
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8471
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component
Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the
vehicle.
2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks.
Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners
or tape.
4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that
originally held the relay in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8476
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Special Tools
J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification
Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay
exists.
Note: *
Always note the orientation of the relay.
* If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the
new relay is installed with the notch in the same location.
* Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals.
3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2).
Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of
pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center.
4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8477
1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8482
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8483
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8484
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8485
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8486
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement
(Attached to Wire Harness)
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component
Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the
vehicle.
2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks.
Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners
or tape.
4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that
originally held the relay in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement
(Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8491
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Special Tools
J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification
Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay
exists.
Note: *
Always note the orientation of the relay.
* If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the
new relay is installed with the notch in the same location.
* Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals.
3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2).
Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of
pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center.
4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement
(Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8492
1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8497
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8498
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8499
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8500
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8501
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8502
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8503
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8504
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8505
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8506
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8507
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8508
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8509
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8510
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8511
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8512
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8513
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8514
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8515
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8516
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8517
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8522
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8523
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8524
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8525
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8526
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8527
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8528
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8529
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8530
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8531
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8532
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8533
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8534
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8535
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8536
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8537
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8538
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8539
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8540
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8541
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component
Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8542
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector
Wiring Harness: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector > Page 8551
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector > Page 8552
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector > Page 8553
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light
On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light
On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8559
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light
On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8560
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light
On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8561
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 8566
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set
By Various Control Modules
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set
By Various Control Modules > Page 8571
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set
By Various Control Modules > Page 8572
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set
By Various Control Modules > Page 8573
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent
MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent
MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8578
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8584
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8585
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8586
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11
> Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11
> Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 8591
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10
> Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10
> Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8596
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10
> Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8597
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10
> Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8598
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B
Date: October 25, 2010
Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with
Conductive Finish
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Electrical Ground Repair Overview
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground
connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system
function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary
repairs and component replacement.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the
following attachment methods:
- Welded M6 stud and nut
- Welded M6 nut and bolt
- Welded M8 nut and bolt
Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as
described in this bulletin.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is
visible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8603
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8604
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8605
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8606
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8607
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10
> Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8608
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10
> Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10
> Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8613
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8618
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8619
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8620
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8626
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8627
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 >
Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8628
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 >
Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 >
Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 8633
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 >
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 >
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8638
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 >
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8639
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 >
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8640
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B
Date: October 25, 2010
Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with
Conductive Finish
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Electrical Ground Repair Overview
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground
connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system
function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary
repairs and component replacement.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the
following attachment methods:
- Welded M6 stud and nut
- Welded M6 nut and bolt
- Welded M8 nut and bolt
Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as
described in this bulletin.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is
visible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8645
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8646
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8647
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8648
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8649
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8650
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 >
Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 >
Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8655
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8661
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8662
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8663
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8664
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8665
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 >
Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8666
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8671
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8672
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8673
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8678
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8679
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8680
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8681
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8682
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8687
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8688
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8689
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8690
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8691
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8692
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8693
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8694
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8695
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8696
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8697
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8698
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8699
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8700
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8701
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8702
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8703
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8704
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8705
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8706
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8707
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8708
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8709
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8710
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8711
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8712
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8713
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8714
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8715
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8716
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8717
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8718
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8719
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8720
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8721
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8722
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8723
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8724
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8725
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8726
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8727
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8728
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8729
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8730
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8731
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8732
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8733
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8734
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8735
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8736
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8737
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8738
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8739
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8740
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8741
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8742
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8743
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8744
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8745
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8746
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8747
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8748
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8749
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8750
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8751
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8752
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8753
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8754
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8755
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8756
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8757
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8758
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8759
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8760
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8761
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8762
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8763
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8764
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8765
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8766
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8767
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8768
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8769
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8770
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8771
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8772
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8773
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8774
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8775
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8776
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8777
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8778
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8779
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8780
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8781
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8782
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8783
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8784
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8785
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8786
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8787
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8788
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8789
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8790
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8791
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8792
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8793
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8794
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8795
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8796
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8797
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8798
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8799
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8800
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8801
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8802
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8803
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8804
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8805
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8806
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8807
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8808
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8809
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8810
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8811
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8812
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8813
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8814
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8815
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8816
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8817
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8818
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8819
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8820
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8821
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8822
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8823
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8824
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8825
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8826
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8827
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8828
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8829
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8830
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8831
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8832
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8833
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8834
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8835
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8836
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8837
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8838
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8839
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8840
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8841
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8842
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8843
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8844
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8845
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8846
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8847
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8848
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8849
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8850
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8851
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8852
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
Power Outlets Description and Operation
12 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Description and Operation
The accessory power receptacle in the rear of the vehicle is supplied battery voltage at all times.
The accessory power receptacles located in the center console and the instrument panel are
supplied battery voltage when the ignition is on or in the accessory position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Power Outlets
Symptoms - Power Outlets
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the power outlets. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories)
* Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage
or for obvious conditions which can cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
Symptom List
Refer to Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction (See: Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120
VAC)) in order to diagnose the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 8855
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120 VAC)
Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The accessory power receptacle located in rear of the vehicle is supplied B+ all the time. The
accessory power receptacles located in the instrument panel and center console are supplied B+
when the ignition is on or in the accessory position.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Power Outlets Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information
Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate X80 accessory power
receptacle. 2. Test for less than 5 ohm between the ground circuit terminal C and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
3. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminate between the B+/ignition circuit terminal A and
ground.
‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+/ignition circuit for a short to ground or an
open/high resistance.
4. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the X80 accessory power receptacle.
Repair Instructions
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 8856
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement (See: Service and Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 8857
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair
Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement
Special Tools
J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block. 2. Remove the receptacle:
1. Look into the receptacle. There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the
front of the receptacle. The J 42059 pushes the
plastic latches from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out.
2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the J 42059 into the tab window. The J 42059 will not fit
straight into the receptacle. Angle the J 42059
slightly for insertion into the receptacle.
3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window.
You must move the J 42059 handle toward horizontal to engage the other tab window.
4. Use the J 42059 to pull the receptacle straight out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 8858
3. If J 42059 tool fails to release the lighter socket from the retainer, perform the following alternate
method:
1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket. 2. Remove the plastic latches in
the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows. 3. Use the J 42059 as directed above to remove the socket.
Installation Procedure
1. Route the connector through the retainer. Align the accessory power receptacle retainer to the
slot in the opening. 2. Install the retainer by pressing into place fully seated. 3. Connect the
electrical connector to the receptacle. 4. Align the tabs on the receptacle to the slots in the retainer.
Install the accessory power receptacle by pressing into place until fully seated. 5. Install the
accessory power receptacle fuse.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 8859
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Tools and Equipment
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio
System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
Electronic Noise Suppressor: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D
Date: July 29, 2009
Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise
Suppression Filter)
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the
OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or
decrease in engine speed.
Cause
This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication
Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio.
Correction
Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery
voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached
wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the
single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single
yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground.
Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most
effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical
noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting
the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing
the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding
the capacitor lead.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio
System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 8868
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 >
Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
Electronic Noise Suppressor: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using
OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D
Date: July 29, 2009
Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise
Suppression Filter)
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the
OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or
decrease in engine speed.
Cause
This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication
Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio.
Correction
Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery
voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached
wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the
single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single
yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground.
Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most
effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical
noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting
the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing
the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding
the capacitor lead.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 >
Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 8874
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual
Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8879
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8880
To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and lift it straight up.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J-Case Fuses ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Usage
Fuse 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. Cool Fan 1 Fuse 2 .................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Cool Fan
2 Fuse 3 ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................ Rear Defog Fuse 4 .............................................................
.............................................................................................................................. Power Windows Right Fuse 5 ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................... Memory Seat Module Fuse 6 .......................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Power
Seat - Left Fuse 7 ................................................................................................................................
................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 1 Fuse 8 ...............................................
................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel
Fuse Block 2 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................... Starter Fuse 10 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
. Brake Booster Fuse 11 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................ Sunroof Fuse 12 .....................................
........................................................................................................................................... Antilock
Brake System Pump Fuse 13 ..............................................................................................................
................................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 Fuse 14 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Power Windows - Left Fuse 15 ............................................................................................................
................................................................. Antilock Brake System Module
Mini Fuses ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Fuse 16 ................................................................................................................................................
................... Transmission Control Module Battery Fuse 17 ...............................................................
.............................................................................................................................. Trailer Parking
Light Fuse 18 .......................................................................................................................................
...................................... Engine Control Module Battery Fuse 19 .......................................................
................................................................................................................................................. Heated
Mirror Fuse 20 .....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Trailer Left Fuse 21 ....................................................
............................................................................................................................................... Lift Gate
Module Fuse 22 ...................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... Power Lumbar Fuse 23 ..................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
Trailer Right Fuse 24 ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................. Canister Vent Fuse 25 ..........................................
.............................................................................................................................................. Memory
Mirror Module Fuse 26
............................................................................................................................................................
Regulated Voltage Control Battery Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8881
Fuse 27 ................................................................................................................................................
................................ Rear Accessory Power Outlet Fuse 28 ..............................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Wiper Fuse 29 .....................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Rear Wiper Fuse 30 ...................................................
............................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning
Compressor Fuse 31 ...........................................................................................................................
................................................................................... Rear Latch Fuse 32 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
................ Horn Fuse 33 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................ Right High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 34 .....................................
............................................................................................................................................... Left
High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 35 ...........................................................................................................
....................................................................................... Ignition Even Coil Fuse 36 ...........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......... Ignition Odd Coil Fuse 37 .........................................................................................................
....................................................................................... Windshield Washer Fuse 38 ........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.............. Front Fog Lamps Fuse 39 ....................................................................................................
........................................................... Post Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 40 ..................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Engine Control Module Fuse 41 ................................................................................................
................................................................ Pre-Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 42 ..............
..............................................................................................................................................................
... Transmission Control Module Fuse 43 ............................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ Mirror Fuse 44 ............
..............................................................................................................................................................
. Chassis Control Module Ignition Fuse 45 ..........................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Spare Fuse 46 ........
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......................... Rear Drive Module Fuse 47 ......................................................................................
................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Logic Fuse 48 .......
.............................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Ignition Fuse 49 ....................................................................................
............................................................................................................ Heated Seat - Front Fuse 50 ..
..............................................................................................................................................................
......................... Chassis Control Module Fuse 51 ..............................................................................
........................................................................................................... Engine Control Module Fuse
52 .........................................................................................................................................................
...................................... Rear Vision Camera
Midi Fuse .............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Fuse 53 ................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Electric Power Steering
Micro Relays ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Relay 54 ..............................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Rear Defogger Relay 55 .............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan
Low Relay 56 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................. Head Lamp High Beam Relay 57 ......................................................
....................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan
Control Relay 58 ..................................................................................................................................
........................................................ Wiper On/Off Control Relay 59 ...................................................
........................................................................................................................... Air Conditioning
Compressor Relay 60 ..........................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Wiper Speed Relay 61 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Fog Lamp Relay 62 ......................................................................................................................
............................................................................... Engine Control Relay 63 ......................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... Starter Relay 64 ...................................................................................................................
......................................................................................... Run/Crank
Mini Relays ..........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Usage
Relay 65 ..............................................................................................................................................
................................................... Cooling Fan High Relay 66 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Brake
Booster
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8882
Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual
INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8883
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8884
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side panel of the center console. To
access the fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling it out.
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs on the bottom of the door into the console first, then push the
door back into its original location.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Mini Fuses ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Fuse 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
............................................... Steering Wheel DM Fuse 2 .................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................
Spare Fuse 3 .......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Spare Fuse 4 .....................................................
...................................................................................................................................... Body Control
Module 1 Fuse 5 ..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Infotainment Fuse 6 .................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... Body
Control Module 7 Fuse 7 .....................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Noise Control Module Fuse 8 .....................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Body Control Module 4 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................
........................................................................................................... Radio Fuse 10 .........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... SEO Battery Fuse 11 ......................................................................................................
.............................................................. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid Module Fuse 12
................................................................................................................................................. Heater,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery Fuse 13 ................................................................................
........................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power Front Fuse 14
................................................................................................................................................ Heater,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ignition Fuse 15 ................................................................................
................................................................................................................................... Display Fuse 16
..............................................................................................................................................................
........................... Body Control Module 5 Fuse 17 ..............................................................................
.............................................................................................................. Auxiliary Power Rear Fuse
18 .........................................................................................................................................................
................. Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition Fuse 19 ........................................................................
................................................................................................................................... PDI Module
Fuse 20 ................................................................................................................................................
......................................... Body Control Module 6 Fuse 21 ................................................................
............................................................................................................ SEO Retained Accessory
Power Fuse 22 ....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... SDM Ignition Fuse 23 ....................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.... Spare Fuse 24 ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................... Spare Fuse 25 ..............................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... PRNDL Fuse 26 ...........................................................................................................................
........................................................................................... Spare Fuse 27 .........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............... Spare
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine
Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8885
Fuse 28 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... Spare Fuse 30 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................................... Body Control Module
3 Fuse 31 .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. Amplifier Fuse 32 ..............................................................
................................................................................................................ Discrete Logic Ignition
Switch Fuse 33 ....................................................................................................................................
................................ Communications Integration Module Fuse 34 ....................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Body Control
Module 2 Fuse 35 ................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................... SDM Battery Fuse 36 ...............................................
............................................................................................................................................. Data Link
Connection Fuse 37 ............................................................................................................................
............................................... Instrument Panel Cluster Battery Fuse 38
..............................................................................................................................................................
IOS Module (Passenger Sensing System) Fuse 39 ............................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... Spare
J-Case Fuses ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................... Usage
Fuse 29 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................... Front Blower Motor Fuse 40 ................................................................
......................................................................................................................... Body Control Module
8
Relays ..................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ Usage
Relay 41 ..............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. LOG Relay Relay 42 ..............................................................
........................................................................................................... Retained Accessory Power
Relay
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood
Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8888
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8889
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8890
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8891
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8892
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8893
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8894
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8895
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8896
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8897
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8898
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8899
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8900
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8901
Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8902
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8903
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8904
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8905
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8906
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8907
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID >
Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8908
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations >
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations >
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 8913
Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations >
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 8914
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8925
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8926
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8927
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8928
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8929
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8930
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8931
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8932
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8933
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8934
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8935
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8936
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8937
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8938
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8939
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8940
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8941
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8942
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8943
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8944
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8945
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8946
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8947
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8948
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8949
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8950
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8951
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8952
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8953
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8954
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8955
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8956
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8957
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8958
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8959
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8960
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8961
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8962
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8963
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8964
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8965
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8966
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8967
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8968
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8969
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8978
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8979
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8980
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8981
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8982
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8987
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8988
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8989
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8990
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8991
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8992
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8993
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8994
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8995
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8996
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8997
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8998
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8999
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9000
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9001
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9002
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9003
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9004
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9005
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9006
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9007
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9008
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9009
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9010
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9011
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9012
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9013
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9014
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9015
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9016
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9017
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9018
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9019
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9020
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9021
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9022
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9023
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9024
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9025
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9026
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9027
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9028
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9029
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9030
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9031
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9032
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9033
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9034
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9035
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9036
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9037
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9038
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9039
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9040
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9041
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9042
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9043
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9044
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9045
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9046
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9047
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9048
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9049
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9050
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9051
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9052
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9053
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9054
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9055
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9056
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9057
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9058
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9059
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9060
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9061
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9062
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9063
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9064
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9065
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9066
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9067
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9068
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9069
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9070
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9071
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9072
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9073
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9074
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9075
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9076
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9077
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9078
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9079
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9080
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures
Fuse Block: Procedures
Ground Repair
Electrical Grounds
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, positive, corrosion-free ground connections.
Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and
loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and
component replacements.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of, three
attachment methods:
* Welded M6 stud and nut
* Welded M6 nut and bolt
* Welded M8 nut and bolt
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
Determine which attachment method is used, and carry out the appropriate repair.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible.
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
5. Select a replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part
number and application. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet
stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement.
Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation
of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding.
8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the
repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair ().
10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material
applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud
threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud
threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the
electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
(See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to
the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new rivet stud. 16.
Select a new, conductive M6 nut. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and
application.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
17. Install the M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 18. Check for proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a new, conductive
self-threading M7 bolt may be used to secure the
ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive, self-threading M7 bolt
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 9083
threads.
5. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
6. Install the electrical ground terminal to the new, conductive M7 bolt.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Install the M7 bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Check for proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair)
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 bolt
and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and
application.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance behind the
panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush,
apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M6
bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M6 bolt to the ground location.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a
conductive M8 bolt and a conductive M8 nut may be
used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and
application.
2. Select a location adjacent to M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush,
apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M8
bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M8 bolt to the ground location.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
9. Install the conductive M8 nut and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 9084
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair)
Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a
conductive M6 rivet stud and a conductive M6 nut
may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers
and application.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new, conductive M6 rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer
from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a rivet stud
installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely
fastened, with no detectable movement.
Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation
of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding.
8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the
repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair ().
10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material
applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud
threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud
threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the
electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
(See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to
the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new, conductive M6
rivet stud.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
16. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 17. Check for proper system
operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 9085
Fuse Block: Removal and Replacement
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement
Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 9086
Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement
Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Procedures > Page 9087
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B
Date: October 25, 2010
Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with
Conductive Finish
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Electrical Ground Repair Overview
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground
connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system
function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary
repairs and component replacement.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the
following attachment methods:
- Welded M6 stud and nut
- Welded M6 nut and bolt
- Welded M8 nut and bolt
Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as
described in this bulletin.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is
visible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9092
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9093
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9094
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9095
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9096
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9097
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Multiple Junction Connector: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector >
Page 9106
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector >
Page 9107
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector >
Page 9108
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC
P2138/Reduced Power
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC
P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9114
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 >
Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC
P2138/Reduced Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 >
Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9120
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9125
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9126
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 >
Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9127
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 >
Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC
P2138/Reduced Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 >
Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9133
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9139
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9140
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9141
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Name
A3 - B39
Component Connector End Views
A3L Sunshade - Left Front
A3R Sunshade - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9144
A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9145
A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9146
A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9147
A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC with UYS or PCJ or without UVC or UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9148
A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC without UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9149
A11 Radio X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9150
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9151
A11 Radio X3 (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9152
A11 Radio X4 (UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9153
A20 Radio/HVAC Controls
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9154
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9155
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9156
A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9157
A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9158
A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9159
A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9160
B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9161
B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9162
B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9163
B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9164
B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9165
B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9166
B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9167
B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9168
B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9169
B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9170
B18 Battery Current Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9171
B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9172
B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch
B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9173
B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9174
B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9175
B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9176
B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9177
B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9178
B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9179
B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9180
B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9181
B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9182
B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LF1)
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9183
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9184
B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9185
B46 - C1
B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9186
B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9187
B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9188
B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF)
B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9189
B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9190
B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9191
B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9192
B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9193
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9194
B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9195
B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9196
B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9197
B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9198
B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9199
B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9200
B68 Knock Sensor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9201
B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9202
B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9203
B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9204
B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9205
B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9206
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9207
B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9208
B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9209
B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9210
B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9211
B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9212
B80 Park Brake Switch
B87 Rearview Camera (UVC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9213
B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9214
B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9215
B101 Immobilizer Antenna
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9216
B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9217
B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9218
B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9219
C1 Battery C1 Battery C1 Battery +
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9220
E1 - E37
E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (TSQ)
E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9221
E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9222
E1K Accent Lamp - Right Lower Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9223
E1L Accent Lamp - Overhead Console (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9224
E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9225
E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9226
E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9227
E2LF Side Marker Lamp - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9228
E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9229
E2RF Side Marker Lamp - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9230
E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9231
E4E Head Lamp - Left High Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9232
E4F Head Lamp - Right High Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9233
E4G Head Lamp - Left Low Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9234
E4H Head Lamp - Right Low Beam
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9235
E4N Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9236
E4P Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9237
E5A Backup Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9238
E5AC Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9239
E5AD Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9240
E5B Backup Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9241
E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9242
E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9243
E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9244
E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9245
E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9246
E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9247
E7R License Plate Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9248
E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9249
E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9250
E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9251
E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9252
E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9253
E18 Rear Defogger Grid X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9254
E18 Rear Defogger Grid X2
E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9255
E29LF Fog Lamp - Left Front (T96)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9256
E29RF Fog Lamp - Right Front (T96)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9257
E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9258
E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9259
E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9260
E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9261
F105 - K27
F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9262
F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9263
F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9264
F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9265
F106L Side Air Bag - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9266
F106R Side Air Bag - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9267
F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9268
F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9269
F112D Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9270
F112P Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9271
F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9272
F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9273
G6 Brake Booster Pump - Auxiliary
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9274
G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9275
G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9276
G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9277
G13 Generator X1
G13 Generator X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9278
G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9279
G24 Windshield Washer Pump
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9280
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9281
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9282
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9283
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9284
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9285
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9286
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9287
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9288
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9289
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9290
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9291
K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9292
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9293
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9294
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9295
K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9296
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9297
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9299
K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9300
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9301
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9302
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9303
K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9304
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9305
K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9306
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9307
K29 - M55
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9308
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9309
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9310
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9311
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9312
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9313
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9314
K33 HVAC Control Module X1 (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9315
K33 HVAC Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9316
K33 HVAC Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9317
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9318
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9319
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9320
K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9321
K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9322
K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9323
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9324
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9325
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9326
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9327
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9328
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9329
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9330
K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9331
K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9332
K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9333
K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9334
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9335
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9336
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9337
K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9338
K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9339
K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9340
M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9341
M8 Blower Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9342
M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5)
M37 Mode Door Actuator
M45 Rear Wiper Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9343
M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9344
M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9345
M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9346
M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver
M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9347
M56 - Q6
M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9348
M64 Starter Motor X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9349
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LAF)
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LF1)
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9350
M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LF1)
M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9351
M74D Window Motor - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9352
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9353
M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9354
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9355
M75 Windshield Wiper Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9356
M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9357
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9358
P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9359
P12B Horn - Low Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9360
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9361
P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9362
P16 Instrument Cluster
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9363
P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9364
P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9365
P19AC Speaker - Subwoofer (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9366
P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8)
P19G Speaker - Left Front (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9367
P19G Speaker - Left Front (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9368
P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9369
P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9370
P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9371
P19U Speaker - Right Front (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9372
P19U Speaker - Right Front (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9373
P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9374
P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9375
P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9376
P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9377
P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9378
Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9379
Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9380
Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9381
Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9382
Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9383
Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF)
Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9384
Q8 - S70
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9385
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9386
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9387
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9388
Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9389
Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9390
Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9391
Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9392
Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9393
Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9394
Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LAF)
Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9395
Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LAF)
Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9396
Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9397
Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9398
Q17E Fuel Injector 5 (LF1)
Q17F Fuel Injector 6 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9399
Q38 Throttle Body
R6 Data Link Resistor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9400
R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF)
S3 Transmission Shift Lever
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9401
S12 Dome Lamp Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9402
S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9403
S33 Horn Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9404
S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9405
S39 Ignition Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9406
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9407
S46 Liftgate Handle Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9408
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9409
S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9410
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9411
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9412
S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9413
S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9414
S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9415
S72 - X88
S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9416
S75 Traction Control Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9417
S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9418
S79D Window Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9419
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9420
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9421
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9422
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9423
S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9424
S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9425
S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9426
T3 Audio Amplifier X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9427
T3 Audio Amplifier X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9428
T3 Audio Amplifier X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9429
T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9430
T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9431
T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9432
T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9433
T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9434
T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9435
T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9436
T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9437
T8E Ignition Coil 5 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9438
T8F Ignition Coil 6 (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9439
T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9440
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9441
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9442
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9443
X83 Auxiliary Audio Input (without UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9444
X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9445
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9446
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9447
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9448
X88 Trailer Connector (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9449
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9450
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Number
X108
Inline Harness Connector End Views
X108 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 1 Harness (LF1)
X109
X109 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 2 Harness (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9451
X110
X110 Forward Lamp Harness to Left Front Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9452
X112
X112 Engine Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9453
X115
X115 Forward Lamp Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9454
X116
X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9455
X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LF1)
X120
X120 Forward Lamp Harness to Right Front Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9456
X121
X121 Body Harness to Negative Battery Cable Harness
X136
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9457
X136 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Harness (LAF)
X203
X203 Airbag Extension Harness to Instrument Panel Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9458
X206
X206 Body Harness to Instrument Panel Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9459
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9460
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9461
X209
X209 Instrument Panel Harness to Headliner Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9462
X210
X210 Instrument Panel Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9463
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9464
X211
X211 Console Harness to Instrument Panel Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9465
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9466
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9467
X213
X213 Instrument Panel Harness to POA HVAC Extension Harness
X214
X214 Console Harness to CD Slot Extension Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9468
X215
X215 Console Harness to Seat Heating Power Extension Harness (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9469
X302
X302 Driver Seat Cushion Harness to Driver Seat Back Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9470
X300
X300 Headliner Harness to Body Harness
X303
X303 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9471
X304
X304 Driver Seat Back Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9472
X307
X307 Driver Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9473
X308
X308 Body Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9474
X310
X310 Body Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9475
X315
X315 Headliner Harness to Overhead Console Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9476
X316
X316 Overhead Console Harness to Dome/Reading Lamps Harness
X309
X309 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9477
X401
X401 Headliner Harness to Body Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9478
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9479
X405
X405 Body Harness to POA Fuel Tank Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9480
X406
X406 Body Harness to Rear Bumper Harness (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9481
X407
X407 Body Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9482
X408
X408 Body Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9483
X411
X411 Body Harness to Chassis Harness
X416
X416 Headliner Harness to POA Sunroof Harness (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9484
X444
X444 Trailer Extension Harness to Body Harness (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9485
X450
X450 Trailer Pigtail Harness to Trailer Extension Harness (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9486
X500
X500 Body Harness to Driver Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9487
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9488
X505
X505 Driver Door Harness to Driver Door Trim Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9489
X600
X600 Body Harness to Passenger Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9490
X605
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9491
X605 Passenger Door Harness to Passenger Door Trim Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9492
X700 - X799
X700 Body Harness to Left Rear Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9493
X800 - X899
X800 Body Harness to Right Rear Door Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9494
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9495
X900
X900 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9496
X901
X901 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9497
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9498
X902
X902 Liftgate Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9499
X903
X903 Liftgate Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness (GMC)
X904
X904 License Lamp Harness to Liftgate Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9500
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9501
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Splices By Number
JX201
Splice Pack Connector End Views
JX201
JX202
Splice Pack Connector End Views
JX202
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9502
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component
Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the
vehicle.
2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks.
Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners
or tape.
4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that
originally held the relay in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 9507
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Special Tools
J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification
Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay
exists.
Note: *
Always note the orientation of the relay.
* If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the
new relay is installed with the notch in the same location.
* Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals.
3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2).
Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of
pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center.
4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 9508
1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9513
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9514
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9515
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9516
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9517
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component
Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the
vehicle.
2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks.
Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners
or tape.
4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position
assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that
originally held the relay in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
> Page 9522
Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Special Tools
J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification
Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay
exists.
Note: *
Always note the orientation of the relay.
* If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the
new relay is installed with the notch in the same location.
* Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals.
3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2).
Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of
pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center.
4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness)
> Page 9523
1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9528
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9529
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9530
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9531
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9532
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9533
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9534
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9535
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9536
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9537
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9538
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9539
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9540
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9541
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9542
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9543
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9544
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9545
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9546
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9547
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution >
Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9548
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9553
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9554
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9555
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9556
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9557
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9558
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9559
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9560
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9561
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9562
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9563
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9564
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9565
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9566
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9567
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9568
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9569
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9570
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9571
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9572
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID
> Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9573
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Wiring Harness: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9582
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9583
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9584
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021
Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021
Set > Page 9590
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021
Set > Page 9591
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021
Set > Page 9592
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page
9597
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules > Page 9602
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules > Page 9603
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules > Page 9604
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power > Page 9609
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9615
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9616
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9617
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 9622
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL
ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL
ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9627
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL
ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9628
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL
ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9629
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B
Date: October 25, 2010
Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with
Conductive Finish
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Electrical Ground Repair Overview
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground
connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system
function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary
repairs and component replacement.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the
following attachment methods:
- Welded M6 stud and nut
- Welded M6 nut and bolt
- Welded M8 nut and bolt
Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as
described in this bulletin.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is
visible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9634
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9635
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9636
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9637
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9638
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information
For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9639
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent
MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent
MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9644
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9649
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9650
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9651
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9657
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9658
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9659
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 9664
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9669
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9670
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9671
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B
Date: October 25, 2010
Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with
Conductive Finish
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Electrical Ground Repair Overview
Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground
connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system
function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary
repairs and component replacement.
In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the
following attachment methods:
- Welded M6 stud and nut
- Welded M6 nut and bolt
- Welded M8 nut and bolt
Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as
described in this bulletin.
M6 Weld Stud Replacement
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in)
clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is
visible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9676
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9677
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9678
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9679
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9680
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9681
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent
MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced
Power
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D
Date: June 28, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced
Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion
System)
Condition
- Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being
Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power.
- The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History.
Cause
This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness
connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a
voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value
for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138.
Correction
Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs.
1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or
low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM
5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI.
2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle.
‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any
5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3.
3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick
panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the
vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI.
Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped)
and windshield/cowl sealing.
4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the
leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks
in SI.
‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair.
5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in
SI.
‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary.
6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle
and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair
Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent
MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9686
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the
water leak
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9692
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9.
Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and
corrosion-free electrical ground.
10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9693
15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6
conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive
nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
19. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive
self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground
wire terminal.
2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged
or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the
Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N
12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading
bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt.
8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
9. Verify proper system operation.
M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt
and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure
the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M6 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9694
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8
conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be
used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this
bulletin.
2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel
surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding
the new electrical ground site.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface
surrounding the ground location and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the
area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive
bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground
location.
10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the
M8 conductive nut to the bolt and:
Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free
electrical ground.
12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation.
M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair
Caution
Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground
repair.
1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6
conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut
may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal.
2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind
the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance
surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange.
3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site
and allow to dry.
Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled.
4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9695
5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is
visible.
Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of
0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any
air gaps to ensure a good ground.
6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit.
7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool
(2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet
stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3).
8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive
rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement.
10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9696
Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the
installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable
and corrosion-free electrical ground.
11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective
material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet
stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet
stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric
Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet
stud.
Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is
a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the
electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase.
16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground
wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18.
Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6
conductive nut to the rivet stud and:
Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in)
20. Verify proper system operation.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For
Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9697
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline
Connector
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09167
Date: July 23, 2009
Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on
Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline
connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a
seal on the engine-to-body inline connector.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important:
Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry
System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via
UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday,
July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than
Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC,
and requesting WPC P/N 479.
Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals
will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call
for these parts
Service Procedure
1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door.
2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press).
3. Release the hood latch.
4. Exit the vehicle and close the door.
5. Open the hood of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9702
6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner
assembly (3). Refer to the illustration.
7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and
away from the shock tower.
8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the
back.
9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not
cracked, cut, or damaged.
1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands,
stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing.
2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of
the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9703
3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of
connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly.
4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that
the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1)
and properly installed (2) connector seal.
10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without
pressing on the unlocking tabs.
11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the
connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip.
12. Close the hood.
13. Open the front driver's side door.
14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door.
Note
If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is
required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are
NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to
ensure proper installation of the seal and connector.
15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON
solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing
Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9704
16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale
comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present.
The vehicle PASSES this inspection point.
20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection
point.
Claim Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications
WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION
Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C
Date: December 09, 2010
Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty
administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF
WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT
SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension).
Purpose
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors'
warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel
alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel
Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty
service.
Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING
YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE.
The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a
successful wheel alignment service.
1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension
and steering configurations. Vehicles
modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty.
2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is
within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for
labor operations E2000 and E2020.
The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order:
- Customer concern in detail
- What corrected the customer concern?
- If a wheel alignment is performed:
- Consult SI for proper specifications.
- Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings.
- Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin)
5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the
appropriate calibration maintenance schedules.
Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper
labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel
Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for
other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment
operation.).
The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be
used whenever a wheel alignment is performed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9710
Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle
- Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are
on the vehicle.
- Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have
NOT been done to the vehicle.
- Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision
damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles,
suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact.
- Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving
may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle.
- Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as
large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in
trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and
wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed
semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of
these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with
equipment such as the above.)
Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy"
Possible Concerns
The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service:
1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of
effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle's straight heading."
Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle
Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull
concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare
circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered
"Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that
this is "Normal Operation."
Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a
level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is
"steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel.
2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined
as the steering wheel angle (clocking)
deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road.
3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the
shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and
should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of
the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled
mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the
customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from
aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition.
Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is
"normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can
show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance
and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance
records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are
being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be
performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9711
Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center
Ribs
Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder
Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear
Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear
Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the
repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center
wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF,
LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life,
etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to
Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C.
4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as
suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle
adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock,
steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment.
Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls
for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor
operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations.
Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in
the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are
NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns.
"Normal Operation" Conditions
Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope:
As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope.
Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize
the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires
significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be
looked into further.
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9712
A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within
"Normal Operation."
Mileage Policy
The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note
Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana
Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing
the vehicles.
- 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to
the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal
operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have
accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within
this mileage range.
- 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi):
- If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle
steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be
apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies:
- Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT,
Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and
Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required
- All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above:
E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required
- 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible
for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time
customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component
required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation
will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component
repair.
Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN.
Warranty Documentation Requirements
When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be
clearly documented on/with the repair order:
- Customer concern in detail
- What corrected the customer concern?
- If a wheel alignment is performed:
- Consult SI for proper specifications.
- Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings.
- Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin)
1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the
warranty administration system. Preferred examples:
- Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or
clocking position.
- Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe,
Moderate or Slight.
- RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering.
Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of
lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the
repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim.
Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the
wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder.
2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples:
- Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees
to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees.
- Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of
+0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle.
- Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees.
3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the
Repair Order or if print-out capability is not
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9713
available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment
Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin.
4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of
"Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to
the Repair Order and retain for use by GM.
Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process
Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when
performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please
refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment
Requirements and Recommendations.
Requirements:
- Computerized four wheel alignment system.
- Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports.
- Computer capable of time and date stamp printout.
- Racking system must have jacking capability
- Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
- Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification
- Built-in turn plates and slip plates
- Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels
- Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck
- Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment
Recommendations:
Racking should have front and rear jacking capability.
Equipment Maintenance and Calibration:
Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most
manufacturers recommend the following:
- Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if
necessary) every six months.
- Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be
checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year.
- Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in).
- If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way,
check the calibration immediately.
Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration
schedule.
Wheel Alignment Process
When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be
taken:
Preliminary Steps:
1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels
and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4.
Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for
looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to
stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate
for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI).
Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the
wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the
specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads,
such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Measure/Adjust:
Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify
that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date
by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year
in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments,
irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9714
Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear
wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles.
Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles:
1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front
and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment
angles and record the readings.
If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after
measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI.
Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only
source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year.
Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9715
Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9716
What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified?
Please Explain: .............
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener
Tightening Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener
Tightening Specifications > Page 9719
Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Specifications
Trim Height Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener
Tightening Specifications > Page 9720
Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications
Wheel Alignment Specifications
Note: Specification relative to Caster Sweep measurement method
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description
Caster Description
Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when
viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-).
Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is
affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height.
Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the
vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive
caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension
moves to a less positive caster.
With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be
diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that
wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead
to the side with the least amount of positive caster.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9723
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description
Camber Description
Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle.
When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at
the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical.
Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear.
Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side
with the most positive camber.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9724
Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description
Toe Description
Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a
straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are
turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The
purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel.
Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is
rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the
wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving.
Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9725
Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description
Setback Description
Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may
be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The
first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9726
Alignment: Description and Operation
Caster Description
Caster Description
Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when
viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-).
Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is
affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height.
Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the
vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive
caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension
moves to a less positive caster.
With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be
diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that
wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead
to the side with the least amount of positive caster.
Camber Description
Camber Description
Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle.
When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at
the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical.
Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear.
Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause
excessive wear on the suspension parts.
Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side
with the most positive camber.
Toe Description
Toe Description
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9727
Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a
straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are
turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The
purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel.
Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is
rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the
wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving.
Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability.
Setback Description
Setback Description
Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may
be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The
first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree.
Thrust Angles Description
Thrust Angles Description
The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action
relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the
thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2).
In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The
resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle.
If the thrust angle is not set properly the vehicle may "dog track", the steering wheel may not be
centered or it could be perceived as a bent axle. Thrust angle can be checked during a wheel
alignment.
Positive thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the right hand side (RHS) of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9728
Negative thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the left hand side (LHS) of the vehicle.
If the thrust angle is out of specification, moving the axle to body relationship will change the thrust
angle reading.
If the vehicle is out in the Positive (+) direction-moving the RHS forward and/or LHS rearward will
move the thrust angle towards zero degrees.
If the vehicle is out in the Negative (-) direction-moving the RHS rearward and/or LHS forward will
move the thrust angle towards zero degrees.
Lead/Pull Description
Lead/Pull Description
At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at
the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path.
Important: Vehicles will tend to lead/pull in the direction of the road slope as part of normal
operation.
Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors:
* Road slope
* Variability in tire construction
* Wheel alignment (front cross caster and camber)
* Unbalanced steering gear
* Electronic Power Steering (EPS) steering position and torque sensors not calibrated correctly, if
equipped.
Torque Steer Description
Torque Steer Description
A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the
other direction during deceleration.
The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle:
* A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front
tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar,
change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the
most significant effect on torque steer correction.
* A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure
* Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a
vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the
wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level
ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan
(shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle.
Memory Steer Description
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Caster Description > Page 9729
Memory Steer Description
Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned
the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in
that direction.
Wander Description
Wander Description
Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with
hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external
disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel.
Scrub Radius Description
Scrub Radius Description
Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the
tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the
SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle
to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller
the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have
additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause
the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius.
A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub
radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected
geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Page 9730
Alignment: Testing and Inspection
Trim Height Inspection
Trim Height Measurement
Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights
can cause the vehicle to bottom out over bumps, damage to the suspension components and
symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing
suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment.
Perform the following before measuring the trim heights:
* Set the tire pressure to the specifications shown on the certification label. Refer to Vehicle
Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle
Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
* Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. One U.S. gallon of
gasoline weighs approximately 6.5 lbs. One liter of gasoline weights approximately 0.70 kg.
* Make sure the passenger and rear compartments are empty, except for the spare tire.
* Make sure the vehicle is on a flat and level surface, such as an alignment rack.
* For vehicles equipped with automatic level control, ensure the system is functioning properly.
* Check that all the vehicle doors are securely closed.
* Check that the vehicle hood and rear deck lids are securely closed.
* Check for installed after market accessories or modifications that could affect trim height
measurement:
- Larger of smaller than production wheels and tires
- Lifting or lowering kits
- Wheel opening flares or ground affects
Measuring the P and R Heights
Note: The left and right P and R height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in).
Use the following procedure to measure the P and R dimensions:
1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure vertically
from the ground to the bottom lip of the wheel opening through the centerline of the front wheel, P
height. 5. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 6. Gently remove your
hands and let the vehicle settle. 7. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 8.
Re-measure the P height as in step 4.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Page 9731
9. The true P height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim
Height Specifications (See:
Suspension/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Trim Height Specifications).
10. Repeat the above steps at the rear of the vehicle for the R heights. 11. If the P and R heights
are outside of specifications, measure the Z and D heights.
Measuring the Z Height
Note:
* In order to obtain the proper measurement, Z will equal inner minus the outer.
* The left and right Z height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in).
Use the following procedure to measure the Z height:
1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Repeat this
jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 5. Measure from the center of the forward
lower control arm attaching bolt tip (a) to the alignment rack. 6. Measure from the center of the ball
joint (b) to the alignment rack. 7. The difference between these 2 measurements (a-b) is the Z
height. 8. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 9. Gently remove your
hands and let the vehicle settle.
10. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 11. Re-measure the Z height as in
step 4. 12. The true Z height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to
Trim Height Specifications (See:
Suspension/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Trim Height Specifications).
If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions:
* Worn or damage suspension components
* Collision damage
Measuring the D Height
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Page 9732
Important:
* In order to obtain the proper measurement, D will equal inner minus the outer.
* The left and right D height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in).
Use the following procedure to measure the D height:
1. Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure from the
center of the inner pivot bolt (A) to the alignment rack. 5. Measure from the center of the outer pivot
bolt (B) to the alignment rack. 6. The difference between these 2 measurements is the D height. 7.
Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Gently remove your hands and let
the vehicle settle. 9. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times.
10. Re-measure the D height as in step 4. 11. The true D height is the average of the
measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See:
Suspension/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Trim Height Specifications).
If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions:
* Worn or damage suspension components
* Collision damage
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement
Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement
Wheel Alignment Measurement
Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible
cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly
manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical
straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without
pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and
Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull
Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem.
Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in
order to ensure correct alignment readings:
* Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary.
* Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear
(See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire
Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear).
* Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See:
Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics).
* Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
(See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel
Bearings Diagnosis).
* Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications
(See: Steering/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications).
* Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to
Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Suspension/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber
Testing - On Vehicle).
* Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Suspension/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim Height Inspection).
* Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or
suspension components.
* Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load
added.
Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in
the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give
consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the
setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred
specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles:
1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front
and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment
angles and record the readings.
Note: *
Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements.
* When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe
adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles.
* The rear camber and caster is not adjustable.
4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9735
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment
Front Camber Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire
and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts.
4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle.
Note:
* Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to
within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first
* Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9736
* If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer.
2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If
decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole.
5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts.
6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer
to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire
assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9737
Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe
Adjustment
Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment
1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward
position.
2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts.
Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to
rotate.
3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or
decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper
adjustment and adjust as necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9738
Alignment: Service and Repair
Wheel Alignment Measurement
Wheel Alignment Measurement
Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible
cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly
manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical
straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without
pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and
Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull
Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem.
Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in
order to ensure correct alignment readings:
* Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary.
* Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear
(See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire
Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear).
* Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See:
Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics).
* Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
(See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel
Bearings Diagnosis).
* Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear.
* Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications
(See: Steering/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications).
* Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to
Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Suspension/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber
Testing - On Vehicle).
* Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Suspension/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim Height Inspection).
* Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or
suspension components.
* Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load
added.
Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in
the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give
consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the
setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred
specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles:
1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front
and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment
angles and record the readings.
Note: *
Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements.
* When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe
adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles.
* The rear camber and caster is not adjustable.
4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment
Specifications).
Front Camber Adjustment
Front Camber Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire
and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9739
3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts.
4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle.
Note:
* Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to
within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first
* Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation
* If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer.
2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If
decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9740
5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts.
6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer
to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire
assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair).
Front Caster Adjustment
Front Caster Adjustment
The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for
suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Replace any damaged
suspension components as necessary.
Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment
Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9741
1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward
position.
2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts.
Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to
rotate.
3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or
decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See:
Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper
adjustment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Camber Adjustment
Rear Camber Adjustment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9742
1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement.
Note: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the
designated location.
2. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the
camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time.
4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the
procedure for the other rear wheel.
Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. Loosen the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel
Alignment Measurement > Page 9743
Note: If experiencing problems in adjusting the rear toe, replace the existing nut with the service
cam nut to eliminate the adjustment problem.
2. Rotate the suspension adjustment nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. 3.
Snug the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the
rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the
procedure for the other rear wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF)
K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9749
K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9750
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9751
Steering Control Module: Service and Repair
Power Steering Control Module Calibration
Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning
Warning
An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power
steering (EPS) and result in personal injury.
Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after
certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows:
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Power steering assist motor replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement
* Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement
Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop
learning.
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program)
refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches - Steering and
Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and
Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle sensor (w/o electronic
stability program) can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal
steering angle sensor is activated.
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan
tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering
procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center
position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the
steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed.
Software Endstop Learning
The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle
sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal.
1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset
procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the
Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the
on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS
System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9762
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page
9765
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9770
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page
9773
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS
System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
9779
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
9780
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
9781
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels
and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle.
Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Wheels and
Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors
and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
9782
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Wheels and
Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure
sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
Power Steering System Bleeding
Note: *
Use clean, new power steering fluid only. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See:
Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications).
* Hoses touching the frame, body or engine may cause system noise. Ensure the hoses do not
touch any other part of the vehicle.
* Loose connections may not leak, but could allow air into the steering system. Ensure all hose
connections are tight.
* Maintain the power steering fluid level throughout the bleeding procedure.
1. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the minimum system level, the FULL COLD
level, or the middle of the hash mark on the cap
stick fluid level indicator, as applicable.
2. Raise the vehicle until the front wheels are off the ground. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the
Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair).
3. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to
stop 12 times.
If the vehicle is equipped with longer length power steering hoses, turn the steering wheel from
stop to stop 15 to 20 times.
4. Verify the power steering fluid level. Refer to Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid (See:
Service and Repair/Checking and Adding Power
Steering Fluid).
5. Start the engine. Rotate the steering wheel from left to right. Inspect the power steering system
for signs of cavitation or fluid aeration, like pump
noise or whining.
6. Verify the fluid level. Repeat the bleed procedure, if necessary. 7. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Hydraulic Power Steering System (V6 Engines Only) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Lower
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement Lower
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Lower
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Lower > Page 9795
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement Upper
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Upper
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 >
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09334A
Date: March 24, 2010
Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line
Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to
use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the
power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334,
issued December 2009.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty period.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on
certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return
hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to
the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped
around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve
and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the
VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
No parts are required for this service update.
Claim Information
1. Submit a claim using the table above.
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 >
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9804
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if
there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the
frame on the front passenger side of
the vehicle.
- If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3.
- If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and
Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required.
3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation in SI.
4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement
-Right Side in SI.
Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the
heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line
brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either
at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between
the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through
condition and power steering line leak.
5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area
are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured
with service tie straps (2).
6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the
wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 >
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9805
Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the
corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the
following precautions: -
Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material.
- Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife.
- Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or
rubber hoses.
- Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line.
- Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and
power steering line during the sleeve removal process.
Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden
stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line.
7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool
between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power
steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration.
8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the
plastic body trim tool (1).
Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose.
9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward
the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in
length.
10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat
sleeve and power steering line.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 >
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9806
Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber
hose or metal portion of the power steering lines.
11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife
(4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed
away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve
to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose.
12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 >
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9807
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324
Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09334A
Date: March 24, 2010
Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line
Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to
use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the
power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334,
issued December 2009.
This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the
dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty period.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on
certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return
hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to
the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped
around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve
and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the
GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for
service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the
VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS
(dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
No parts are required for this service update.
Claim Information
1. Submit a claim using the table above.
2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers
using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9813
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Service Procedure
1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if
there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the
frame on the front passenger side of
the vehicle.
- If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3.
- If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and
Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required.
3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal
and Installation in SI.
4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement
-Right Side in SI.
Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the
heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line
brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either
at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between
the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through
condition and power steering line leak.
5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area
are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured
with service tie straps (2).
6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the
wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9814
Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the
corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the
following precautions: -
Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material.
- Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife.
- Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or
rubber hoses.
- Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line.
- Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and
power steering line during the sleeve removal process.
Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden
stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line.
7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool
between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power
steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration.
8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the
plastic body trim tool (1).
Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose.
9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward
the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in
length.
10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat
sleeve and power steering line.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9815
Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber
hose or metal portion of the power steering lines.
11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife
(4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed
away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve
to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose.
12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9816
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement
Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Place drain pans under the vehicle. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake
Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
3. Remove as much power steering fluid from the upper power steering fluid reservoir as possible.
4. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See:
Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front
Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper
Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement).
5. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the power steering gear (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9819
6. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the lower power steering fluid reservoir
(2). 7. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) from the bracket (4). 8. Disconnect the
power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) from the bracket.
9. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe nut (2) and disconnect the bracket from the stud.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9820
10. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) from the front bumper impact bar. 11.
Disconnect the 3 power steering fluid cooling pipe clips (2). 12. Remove the power steering fluid
cooling pipe (3) from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the power steering fluid cooling pipe (3) in the vehicle. 2. Connect the 3 power steering
fluid cooling pipe clips (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) to the front bumper impact bar and tighten
to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9821
4. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe bracket to the stud. Install the power steering fluid
cooling pipe nut (2) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb
in).
5. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) to the bracket (4). 6. Install the power
steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) to the bracket and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 7. Connect the
power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the reservoir (2).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9822
8. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the power steering gear (2). Tighten the
fitting to 34 Nm (25 lb ft). 9. Fill and bleed the power steering system. Refer to Power Steering
System Bleeding (See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair).
10. Clean any excess power steering fluid from the vehicle. 11. Remove the drain pans. 12. Install
the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front
Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper
Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement).
13. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9823
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose
Replacement
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9824
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement
Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Motor: Service and Repair
Power Steering Assist Motor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9828
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Pump: Specifications
Power Steering Pump Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement
Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement > Page 9834
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Replacement
Power Steering Pump Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement > Page 9835
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF)
K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9839
K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9840
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9841
Steering Control Module: Service and Repair
Power Steering Control Module Calibration
Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning
Warning
An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power
steering (EPS) and result in personal injury.
Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after
certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows:
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Power steering assist motor replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement
* Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement
Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop
learning.
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program)
refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle
Sensor/Service and Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle
sensor (w/o electronic stability program) can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal
steering angle sensor is activated.
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan
tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering
procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center
position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the
steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed.
Software Endstop Learning
The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle
sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal.
1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset
procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the
Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the
on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF)
K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9846
K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9847
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9848
Steering Control Module: Service and Repair
Power Steering Control Module Calibration
Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning
Warning
An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power
steering (EPS) and result in personal injury.
Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after
certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows:
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Power steering assist motor replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement
* Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement
Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop
learning.
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program)
refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle
Sensor/Service and Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle
sensor (w/o electronic stability program) can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal
steering angle sensor is activated.
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan
tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering
procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center
position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the
steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed.
Software Endstop Learning
The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps:
Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle
sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal.
1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset
procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the
Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the
on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9853
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9856
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 9860
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9863
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
> System Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
> System Information > Diagrams > Page 9868
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or
Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming
> System Information > Diagrams > Page 9869
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical
Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and
ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Steering Gear Seal: Service and Repair
Steering Gear Pipe and Seal Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter >
Component Information > Locations
Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Wheel Components
1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9877
Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Diagrams
S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left
S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter >
Component Information > Locations > Page 9878
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Steering Shaft: Service and Repair
Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 9882
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Steering Wheel: Description and Operation
Steering Wheel and Column Description and Operation
The steering wheel and column has 4 primary functions:
* Vehicle steering
* Vehicle security
* Driver convenience
* Driver safety
Vehicle Steering
The steering wheel is the first link between the driver and the vehicle. The steering wheel is
fastened to a steering shaft within the column. At the lower end of the column, the intermediate
shaft connects the column to the steering gear.
Vehicle Security-Some Vehicle Models
Theft deterrent components are mounted and designed into the steering column. The following
components allow the column to be locked in order to minimize theft:
* The ignition switch
* The steering column lock
* The ignition cylinder
Driver Convenience
The steering wheel and column may also have driver controls attached for convenience and
comfort. The following controls may be mounted on or near the steering wheel or column.
* The turn signal switch
* The hazard switch
* The headlamp dimmer switch
* The wiper/washer switch
* The horn pad/cruise control switch
* The tilt or tilt/telescoping functions
Driver Safety
The energy-absorbing steering column compresses in the event of a front-end collision, which
reduces the chance of injury to the driver. The mounting capsules break away from the mounting
bracket in the event of an accident.
Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator
If the vehicle is equipped with a floor mounted console gear shifter, it has a ignition lock cylinder
control actuator system in the steering column. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator's purpose
is to prevent the ignition key from being turned to the OFF position when the transmission is in gear
and the vehicle may still be moving. The column ignition lock system consists of a ignition lock
cylinder control actuator , and a Park position switch that is located in the automatic transmission
(A/T) shift lock control switch. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator contains a pin that is spring
loaded out to mechanically prevent the ignition key cylinder from being turned to the Lock position
when vehicle transmission is not in the Park position. If vehicle power is lost, and/or the
transmission is not in the Park position the operator will not be able to turn the ignition key to the
Lock position and will not be able to remove the ignition key from the column.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 9886
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection
Tie Rod: Testing and Inspection Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection
Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection
Special Tools
J-8001 - Dial Indicator Set
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: This inspection procedure does not supersede local government required inspections that
have more stringent requirements.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position with the engine OFF. 2. With the aid of an assistant, turn
the steering wheel to the full stop position and hold the steering wheel in that position until the test
is complete.
The tie rod being tested should be inside the steering gear housing seated against the steering
stop.
3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 4. If there is not a good location for the J-8001 - Dial
Indicator pointer at the steering gear housing, install a large worm gear hose clamp to the
steering gear housing over the larger steering gear boot clamp and align the clamp so that the
screw can be a location for the J-8001 - Dial Indicator pointer.
5. Install the J-8001 - Dial Indicator between the inner tie rod (2) and the steering gear housing or
the worm gear clamp in such a way as to measure
the lash between the inner tie rod and the steering gear housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection > Page 9891
Note: Only move the tire enough to feel any lash between the inner tie rod and the inner tie rod
housing without moving the steering gear rack.
6. Grasping the tire at the 3 o'clock (2) and 9 o'clock (1) positions, gently push in on one side of the
tire in order to remove any lash. 7. Zero the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 8. On the same side of the tire
previously pushed in, gently pull out and measure the lash. 9. Record the measurement seen on
the J-8001 - Dial Indicator.
10. If the measured value exceeds 0.5 mm (0.02 in), replace the inner tie rod. Refer to Steering
Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement (See: Service
and Repair/Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement).
11. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection > Page 9892
Tie Rod: Testing and Inspection Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Inspection
Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Inspection
Special Tools
J-8001 - Dial Indicator Set
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment).
Note: This inspection procedure does not supersede local government required inspections that
have more stringent requirements.
1. Inspect the outer tie rod end seal. If the outer tie rod end seal is torn, replace the outer tie rod
end. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod
Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement).
2. Raise the side of the vehicle being inspected with a floor jack while maintaining contact between
the opposite wheel and the shop floor. Support
the lower control arm with a floor jack stand as far outboard as possible and remove the floor jack.
Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and
Repair).
3. Install the J-8001 - Dial Indicator between the outer tie rod end and the steering knuckle as
shown in the graphic. Note that the tire and wheel
assembly is shown removed only for clarification of the J-8001 - Dial Indicator position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection > Page 9893
4. Grasping the tire at the 3 o'clock (2) and 9 o'clock (1) positions, gently push in on one side of the
tire to remove any lash. 5. Zero the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 6. On the same side of the tire
previously pushed inwards, gently pull outwards and measure the lash. 7. Record the
measurement seen on the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 8. If the measured value exceeds 0.5 mm (0.02
in) then replace the outer tie rod. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement (See:
Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement).
9. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement
Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove 1 steering gear boot. Refer to Steering Gear Boot Replacement (See: Steering Gear).
2. Turn the steering wheel in order to position the steering gear rack so that only 2 rack teeth and
the flat surface of the rack are visible outside the
steering gear housing.
3. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, bend the tabs on the steering gear rack thrust
washer in order to release the steering linkage inner
tie rod.
4. Place a soft jaw pipe wrench or soft jaw pliers on the flat surface of the steering gear rack (3)
between the steering gear housing (4) and the inner
tie rod housing (2).
5. Place a crows foot wrench on the flats of the inner tie rod housing (2).
Caution: Do not change the steering gear preload adjustment before moving the inner tie rod from
the steering gear. Changing the steering gear preload adjustment before moving the inner tie rod
could result in damage to the pinion and the steering gear.
6. Rotate the steering linkage inner tie rod housing counterclockwise while holding the steering
gear rack stationary until the steering linkage inner tie
rod separates from the steering gear rack.
7. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, remove the steering gear rack thrust washer.
Discard the washer.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 9896
1. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, position the NEW steering gear rack thrust
washer (1). 2. Install the steering linkage inner tie rod (2) to the steering gear rack.
3. Place a soft jaw pipe wrench or soft jaw pliers on the flat surface of the steering gear rack (3)
between the steering gear housing (4) and the inner
tie rod housing (2).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Place a torque wrench with a crows foot wrench attachment on the flats of the inner tie rod
housing and tighten to 105 Nm (77 lb ft). 5. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, bend
the tabs over on the steering gear rack thrust washer in order to secure the inner tie rod. 6. Install
the steering gear boot. Refer to Steering Gear Boot Replacement (See: Steering Gear).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 9897
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement
Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 9898
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 9899
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Adjust Link Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information >
Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Ball Joint
Wear limit .............................................................................................................................................
....................................................... 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 9904
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection
Ball Joint Inspection
Special Tools
J 8001 Dial Indicator Set
Note: *
The vehicle must rest on a level surface.
* The vehicle must be stable. Do not rock the vehicle on the floor stands.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Clean and inspect the ball joint seal for cuts or tears. If
the ball joint seal is damaged, replace the ball joint. Refer to Lower Control Arm Ball Joint
Replacement (See: Service and Repair).
3. Support the lower control arm with a floor stand as far outboard as possible and raise the
suspension to just below ride height.
4. Install the J 8001 or suitable dial indicator in a way to measure vertical lash in the ball joint.
Caution: Do not pry in such a way that the ball joint seal is contacted. Damage to the seal may
result.
5. Gently lift or pry the suspension to induce ball joint movement. 6. If the dial indicator indicates a
reading greater than 0.5 mm (0.02 in), replace the ball joint. Refer to Lower Control Arm Ball Joint
Replacement (
See: Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 9905
Ball Joint: Service and Repair
Lower Control Arm Ball Joint Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control
Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 2. Place the control arm in a vise or suitable holding
device. 3. Remove the ball joint rivets using the following procedure.
1. Drill through the rivets using a 8 mm (5/16 in) drill bit. 2. Enlarge the hole using a 12 mm (31/64
in) drill bit. 3. Remove any remaining burs from the control arm.
4. Remove the ball joint from the control arm. Note the position of the ball joint for reassembly.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 9906
Note: The control arm must be clean and free of debris.
1. Install the ball joint to the control arm as previously noted.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: *
Only use hardware provided with the new ball joint.
* The bolts must be installed with the bolt head on top of the ball joint.
2. Install the ball joint to control arm bolts and tighten the bolts/nuts to 68 Nm (50 lb ft). 3. Install the
lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control Arm/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair
Front Lower Control Arm Bushing Replacement (Rear Bushing)
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove
the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Front
Suspension).
4. Remove the rear bushing nut. 5. Remove the rear bushing.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
1. Install the rear bushing to the lower control arm and tighten the nut to 150 Nm (110 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9911
2. Install the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Service and
Repair/Front Suspension). 3. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 4. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Knuckle Replacement
Special Tools
J 37043 Park Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
3. Disconnect the rear park brake cable from the park brake actuator. 4. Using the J 37043, remove
the park brake cable from the mounting bracket
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
5. Remove the brake caliper and bracket as an assembly and support it with heavy mechanics wire
or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket
Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement).
6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
(See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear
Suspension).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9916
7. Remove the upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut.
8. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle bolt and nut.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9917
9. Remove the toe link to knuckle bolt and nut.
10. Remove the 3 trailing arm to knuckle bolts. 11. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9918
1. Install the knuckle to the lower control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut.
2. Install the knuckle to the upper control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9919
3. Install the knuckle to the toe link. Loosely install the bolt and nut.
4. Install the 3 trailing arm to knuckle bolts. Loosely install the bolt and nut.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the bolts and nuts in the following sequence:
* Tighten the knuckle to lower control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft).
* Tighten the knuckle to upper control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft).
* Tighten the knuckle to toe link bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft).
* Tighten the 3 trailing arm to knuckle bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft).
6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
(See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear
Suspension).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9920
brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible
brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in
turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
7. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto
the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket
Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement).
8. Connect the rear park brake cable through the mounting bracket and onto the park brake
actuator. 9. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Perform a vehicle wheel alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment
Measurement (See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Wheel Alignment
Measurement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9921
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Steering Knuckle Replacement
Special Tools
J-42188-B Ball Joint Separator
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel
bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel
Bearing/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension).
Note: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut.
4. Remove the nut and separate the stabilizer link from the strut assembly. 5. Loosen the steering
knuckle to strut bolts and nuts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9922
6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint cotter pin. 7. Loosen the ball stud nut, until level with the
top of the ball stud. 8. Using the J-42188-B, separate the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle.
9. Remove the lower ball joint nut and separate from the knuckle.
Caution: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal
or bushing may result.
10. Remove the outer tie rod end from the knuckle. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod
Replacement (See: Steering/Tie Rod/Service and
Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9923
11. Remove the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. 12. Remove the steering knuckle from the
vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the steering knuckle to strut assembly.
2. Loosely install the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9924
3. Position the lower ball joint stud into the steering knuckle.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Install the ball stud nut and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Tighten the strut to steering knuckle
bolts and nuts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft).
Note: Do not loosen the castle nut for cotter pin installation.
6. Tighten the castle nut enough to allow for cotter pin installation.
Note: The cotter pin must not contact the wheel speed sensor or drive axle.
7. Install a new cotter pin. 8. Install the outer tie rod end to the knuckle. Refer to Steering Linkage
Outer Tie Rod Replacement (See: Steering/Tie Rod/Service and
Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 9925
Note: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut.
9. Position the stabilizer shaft link to the strut assembly and install the nut.
Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 lb ft).
10. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
(See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension).
11. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair). 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Perform a wheel alignment. Refer to Wheel
Alignment Measurement (See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Wheel Alignment Measurement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering
Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Steering Angle Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering
Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9930
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams
B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering
Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures
Steering Angle Sensor Centering
The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle
sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these
procedures are as follows:
* Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement
* Steering angle sensor replacement
* Steering gear replacement
* Steering column replacement
* Collision or other physical damage
The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the
following steps:
1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the
transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON,
engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn
procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset
Functions list.
10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may
be set.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering
Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9933
Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 9939
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 9944
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
3. Loosen the stabilizer shaft clamp bolts.
Note: Use a 90 degree bend TORX(R) bit to hold the ball stud when loosening or tightening the nut.
4. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 9945
Note: When disconnecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning.
5. Remove the stabilizer link to lower control arm nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the stabilizer link through the lower control arm.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
Note: When connecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning.
2. Install the stabilizer link to lower control arm nut and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 9946
Note: Use a 90 degree bend TORX(R) bit to hold the ball stud when tightening the nut.
3. Install the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft).
4. Tighten the loose stabilizer shaft clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 5. Install the rear tire and wheel
assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A >
Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A >
Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 9956
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: >
10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension or Front
Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: >
10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 9962
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page
9963
Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220
Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page
9964
9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220
Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower
> System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page
9965
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
Front Lower Control Arm Bracket Brace Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD)
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (AWD)
Rear Support Replacement (AWD)
Special Tools
J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement
().
5. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 6. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets 7. Position the rear park
brake cables aside. 8. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and routing
clips from the rear support and upper control arms.
Position the wiring harness aside.
9. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt.
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
10. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy
mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper
Bracket Replacement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9974
11. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms.
12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm
nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the
adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 15. Remove the rear wheel drive shafts.
Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 16. Remove the rear differential. Refer to
Differential Replacement (). 17. Position a transmission jack under the rear support and firmly
secure the support to the jack with straps.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9975
18. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 19. Remove the rear support assembly from the
vehicle. 20. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and
place it on the floor.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution ().
1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary.
* Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb
ft).
* Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb
ft).
* Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft).
Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft).
* Knuckles - Loosely install the upper and lower control arm to knuckle nuts/bolts. These fasteners
will be tightened later in this procedure after the wheel driveshafts are installed.
2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly
secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9976
4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the rear
differential. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 6. Install the rear wheel drive shafts. Refer to Rear
Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 7. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link
Replacement (). 8. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement ().
9. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to
15 Nm (11 lb ft).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
10. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto
the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket
Replacement ().
11. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 12. Position
the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and
upper control arms.
Connect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9977
13. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake
actuators.
14. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten the bolts to 12 Nm
(106 lb in). 15. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 16. Install the
tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 17. Check the rear
alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9978
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (FWD)
Rear Support Replacement (FWD)
Special Tools
J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement
().
5. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9979
6. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 7. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets. 8. Position the rear park
brake cables aside. 9. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and the
routing clips from the rear support and upper control arms.
Position the wiring harness aside.
10. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt.
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
11. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy
mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper
Bracket Replacement ().
12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm
nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the
adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9980
15. Remove the coil springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 16. Position a transmission jack
under the rear support and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps.
17. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 18. Remove the rear support assembly from the
vehicle. 19. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and
place it on the floor.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution ().
1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary.
* Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb
ft).
* Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb
ft).
* Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft).
Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft).
* Knuckles - The lower control arm to knuckle bolt/nut will be installed and tightened when the coil
spring is installed later in this procedure. Tighten upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut to 160
Nm (118 lb ft).
2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly
secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9981
4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the coil
springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 6. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link
Replacement (). 7. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement ().
8. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to
15 Nm (11 lb ft).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
9. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto
the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket
Replacement ().
10. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 11. Position
the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and
upper control arms. Connect the rear
wheel speed sensor electrical connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 9982
12. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake
actuators.
13. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb
in). 14. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 15. Install the tires and
wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 16. Check the rear alignment. Refer
to Wheel Alignment Measurement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun
> 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Customer Interest Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard
Acceleration
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B
Date: June 07, 2010
Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM
and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN
Breakpoint A6247602
Please Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction
section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions:
- Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and
usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate
the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing
(orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may
require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then
repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a
turn at lower speeds.
- Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph)
and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard
acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it).
- Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs
during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up
and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other
times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can
be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of
vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle).
Cause
This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too
high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary
based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints.
Correction
Important Do Not replace the front drive axles.
Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun
> 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 9991
Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the
bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the
condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and
replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts.
Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the
exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission
jack stand.
4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1).
5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain
access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7.
Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts.
Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft).
9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts.
Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft).
10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower
the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front
Springs.
Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only
1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM
P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun
> 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 9992
Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut
Component, and Spring Replacement in SI.
Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the
front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM
electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the
correct front wheel drive shaft.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): >
09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder
On Hard Acceleration
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B
Date: June 07, 2010
Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM
and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN
Breakpoint A6247602
Please Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction
section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions:
- Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and
usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate
the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing
(orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may
require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then
repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a
turn at lower speeds.
- Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph)
and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard
acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it).
- Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs
during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up
and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other
times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can
be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of
vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle).
Cause
This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too
high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary
based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints.
Correction
Important Do Not replace the front drive axles.
Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): >
09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 9998
Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the
bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the
condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and
replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts.
Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the
exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission
jack stand.
4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1).
5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain
access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7.
Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts.
Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft).
9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts.
Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft).
10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower
the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front
Springs.
Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only
1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM
P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): >
09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 9999
Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut
Component, and Spring Replacement in SI.
Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the
front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM
electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the
correct front wheel drive shaft.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension Coil Spring
Strut, Strut Component, or Spring Replacement
Special Tools
* J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket
* J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor
Removal Procedure
1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure.
1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper
legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure
hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut
assembly is parallel with the J 45400.
2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10002
Caution: Do not allow the absorber rod to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to
keep the absorber rod from rotating. If air tools are used, and the rod is allowed to rotate, damage
to the absorber may occur.
3. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut.
Note: Leave the spring in the spring compressor.
4. Lower the strut from the spring assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10003
Caution: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount
assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly.
Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing
components and cause the bearing to fall apart.
5. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as
necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as
necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and
deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10004
Note: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the coil
sits up against the tab on the spring seat.
3. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring.
Note: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the
knuckle bracket points.
4. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle
mounting bracket.
Caution: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount
assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly.
Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing
components and cause the bearing to fall apart.
Note: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the
anti-rotation tab on the spring seat.
5. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper
spring seat.
6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut.
Caution: Do not allow the absorber rod to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to
keep the absorber rod from rotating. If air
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10005
tools are used, and the rod is allowed to rotate, damage to the absorber may occur.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while
verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the
top mount. Tighten the strut shaft to 55 Nm (41 lb ft).
8. Release the tension on the J 45400. 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10006
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Suspension Coil Spring
Coil Spring Replacement
Coil Spring Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove
the stabilizer shaft link. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer
Link/Service and Repair/Rear
Suspension).
4. Position a jackstand underneath the lower control arm. 5. Raise the jackstand slightly to
compress the coil spring.
6. Remove the lower shock bolt and nut.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10007
7. Loosen the lower control arm to support frame nut and bolt.
8. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle nut and bolt. 9. Slowly lower the control arm in order to
unload the coil spring.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10008
10. Remove the coil spring and insulators.
Installation Procedure
1. Inspect the coil spring upper and lower insulators, if damage exists replace the insulators.
If no damage exists, transfer the existing components. Refer to Rear Spring Insulator Replacement
(See: Rear Spring Insulator Replacement).
2. Position the spring with the rubber insulators into the vehicle. 3. Raise the jackstand to compress
the spring.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10009
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Position the lower control arm to the knuckle and install the nut and bolt and tighten the bolt/nut
to 160 Nm (118 lb ft).
5. Tighten the lower control arm to support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10010
6. Install the shock to the lower control arm nut and bolt and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 7.
Remove the jackstand from under the vehicle. 8. Install the stabilizer shaft link. Refer to Stabilizer
Shaft Link Replacement (See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Rear
Suspension).
9. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
10. Lower the vehicle.
Rear Spring Insulator Replacement
Rear Spring Insulator Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the coil spring. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (See: Coil Spring Replacement).
2. Remove the upper and lower rubber insulators from the coil spring.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10011
Installation Procedure
Important: *
Spray silicon lubricant on the insulators to aid in installation.
* Make sure that part number identification tape located on the coil spring is oriented outboard of
the vehicle and at the top of the spring.
* Make sure to fully seat the top and bottom coil spring insulators to the spring.
1. Install the upper and lower rubber insulators to the coil spring. 2. Install the coil spring. Refer to
Coil Spring Replacement (See: Coil Spring Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard
Acceleration
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B
Date: June 07, 2010
Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM
and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN
Breakpoint A6247602
Please Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction
section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions:
- Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and
usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate
the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing
(orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may
require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then
repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a
turn at lower speeds.
- Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph)
and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard
acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it).
- Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs
during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up
and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other
times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can
be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of
vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle).
Cause
This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too
high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary
based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints.
Correction
Important Do Not replace the front drive axles.
Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10020
Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the
bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the
condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and
replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts.
Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the
exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission
jack stand.
4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1).
5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain
access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7.
Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts.
Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft).
9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts.
Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft).
10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower
the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front
Springs.
Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only
1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM
P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10021
Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut
Component, and Spring Replacement in SI.
Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the
front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM
electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the
correct front wheel drive shaft.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B
Date: June 07, 2010
Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM
and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN
Breakpoint A6247602
Please Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction
section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions:
- Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and
usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate
the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing
(orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may
require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then
repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a
turn at lower speeds.
- Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph)
and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard
acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it).
- Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs
during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up
and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other
times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can
be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of
vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle).
Cause
This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too
high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary
based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints.
Correction
Important Do Not replace the front drive axles.
Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10027
Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI.
Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the
bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the
condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and
replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts.
Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the
exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission
jack stand.
4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1).
5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain
access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7.
Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts.
Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft).
9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts.
Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft).
10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower
the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front
Springs.
Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only
1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM
P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10028
Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut
Component, and Spring Replacement in SI.
Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the
front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM
electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the
correct front wheel drive shaft.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock
Absorber/Strut Leakage Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C
Date: October 16, 2009
Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension).
This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage.
Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's
specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally
exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the
shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage.
Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a
defective component.
Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to
this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is
accumulated again.
Inspection Procedure
Note
The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform
the following inspection procedure.
Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component.
Shock Absorbers
Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage.
1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the
shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or
less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal.
Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks.
3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet
film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal.
Coil-over Shock Absorber
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 10033
Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage.
1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock
absorber components and not originating from the
shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube).
2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the
shaft seal.
Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks.
3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet
film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the
shaft seal.
Struts
Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage.
1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not
originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and
originating from the shaft seal.
Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks.
3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the
strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and
originating from the shaft seal.
Correction
Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair.
Use the applicable published labor operation.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock
Absorber/Strut Leakage Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C
Date: October 16, 2009
Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension).
This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage.
Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's
specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally
exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the
shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage.
Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a
defective component.
Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to
this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is
accumulated again.
Inspection Procedure
Note
The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform
the following inspection procedure.
Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component.
Shock Absorbers
Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage.
1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the
shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or
less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal.
Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks.
3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet
film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal.
Coil-over Shock Absorber
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: >
05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 10039
Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage.
1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock
absorber components and not originating from the
shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube).
2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the
shaft seal.
Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks.
3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet
film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the
shaft seal.
Struts
Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage.
1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not
originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and
originating from the shaft seal.
Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks.
3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the
strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and
originating from the shaft seal.
Correction
Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair.
Use the applicable published labor operation.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension
Strut and Shock Absorber Inspection (Strut)
Note: The strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following
inspection procedure.
Note: A light film of oil on the top portion of the strut is normal. DO NOT replace the strut for this
condition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10042
Condition 1
Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not
originating from the shaft seal, is not a strut related problem. DO NOT replace the strut, look for
other external leaks.
Condition 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10043
Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal, is
a NORMAL condition. DO NOT replace the strut.
Condition 3
Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal, is an ABNORMAL condition.
Replace the strut.
Condition 4
Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from
the shaft seal, is an ABNORMAL condition. Replace the strut.
Inspection
1. Verify the customer's concern is present. If the concern is present, continue to the next step. If
the concern is not present, then the vehicle is
operating normally.
Note: The strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following
inspection procedure.
2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Visually inspect each of the shock absorbers or struts
for external fluid leaks. Refer to the following conditions 1, 2 , 3 , and 4 for visual
inspection.
* If conditions 1 or 2 are found, continue to step 4.
* If conditions 3 or 4 are found, replace strut. Refer to Strut Replacement.
4. If equipped with electronic suspension control system, ensure that the system is working
properly. Refer to Diagnostic Starting Point-Electronic
Suspension Control.
5. Use your hands in order to lift up and push down on each corner of the vehicle 3 times. Remove
your hands from the vehicle. If the corner motion
exceeds 2 cycles, replace the strut. If the strut does not exceed 2 cycles, NO repair is necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10044
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection Strut and Shock Absorber Inspection
(Shock Absorber)
Strut and Shock Absorber Inspection (Shock Absorber)
Note: The shock absorber assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform
the following inspection procedure.
Note: A light film of oil on the top portion of the lower shock absorber tube is normal. DO NOT
replace the shock absorber for this condition.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10045
Condition 1
Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the
shaft seal, is not a shock absorber related problem. DO NOT replace the shock absorber, look for
other external leaks.
Condition 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10046
Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from
the shaft seal, is a NORMAL condition. DO NOT replace the shock absorber.
Condition 3
Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal, is an ABNORMAL
condition. Replace the shock absorber.
Condition 4
An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from
the shaft seal (B), is an ABNORMAL condition. Replace the shock absorber. Refer to Shock
Absorber Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Shock Absorber Replacement).
Inspection
1. Verify the customer's concern is present. If the concern is present, continue to the next step. If
the concern is not present, then the vehicle is
operating normally.
Note: The shock absorber assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform
the following inspection procedure.
2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Visually inspect each of the shock absorbers for
external fluid leaks. Refer to the following conditions 1, 2 , 3 , and 4 for visual inspection.
* If conditions 1 or 2 are found, continue to step 4.
* If conditions 3 or 4 are found, replace shock absorber. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement
(See: Service and Repair/Shock Absorber Replacement).
4. If equipped with electronic suspension control system, ensure that the system is working
properly. Refer to Diagnostic Starting Point - Electronic
Suspension Control.
5. Use your hands in order to lift up and push down on each corner of the vehicle 3 times. Remove
your hands from the vehicle. If the corner motion
exceeds 2 cycles, replace the shock absorber. If the shock absorber does not exceed 2 cycles, NO
repair is necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Suspension Strut
Suspension Strut Disposal
Suspension Strut Disposal
Warning
Use the proper eye protection when drilling to prevent metal chips from causing physical injury.
1. Clamp the strut in a vise horizontally with the rod (1) completely extended. 2. Drill a hole in the
strut at the center of the end cap (3) using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will
exhaust when the drill bit
penetrates the strut. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil.
3. Remove the strut from the vise. 4. Hold the strut over a drain pan vertically with the hole down.
5. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (2) to completely drain the oil from the strut.
Strut Assembly Replacement
Strut Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the air inlet screen. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement)Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10049
2. Remove the 3 upper strut mount bolts. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and
Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 4. Remove the
wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the brake hose bracket from the front strut. Refer to Front
Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement).
6. Remove the stabilizer link from the front strut. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See:
Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension).
7. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts. 8. Remove the strut assembly from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10050
1. Position the strut assembly to the vehicle.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the 3 upper strut mount bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
3. Install the lower strut bolts and nuts and tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb ft).
Note: Inspect the stabilizer link seals for damage prior to installation. Replace as required.
Note: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut.
4. Install the stabilizer link to the front strut. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See:
Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension).
5. Install the brake hose bracket to the front strut. Refer to Front Brake Hose Replacement (See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement).
6. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10051
7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the air inlet screen. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox)
(See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement)Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement)
9. Perform a wheel alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (See: Alignment/Service
and Repair/Wheel Alignment Measurement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10052
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Replacement
Shock Absorber Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to
Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Using the
proper jackstand, support the lower control arm or the knuckle.
4. Remove the lower shock bolt. 5. Remove the rear wheel house from the vehicle. Refer to Rear
Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair)Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and
Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10053
6. Remove the upper shock bolt. 7. Remove the shock from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the shock to the vehicle.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the upper shock bolt and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft).
3. Install the lower shock bolt and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 4. Remove the jack stand from the
lower control arm or the knuckle. 5. Install the rear wheel house in the vehicle. Refer to Rear
Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear
Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair)Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair).
6. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10054
7. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10055
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Disposal
Shock Absorber Disposal
Warning
Gas charged shock absorbers contain high pressure gas. Do not remove the snap ring from inside
the top of the tube. If the snap ring is removed, the contents of the shock absorber will come out
with extreme force which may result in personal injury.
Warning
To prevent personal injury, wear safety glasses when centerpunching and drilling the shock
absorber. Use care not to puncture the shock absorber tube with the centerpunch.
1. Make an indentation 10 mm (0.4 in) from the bottom (4) of the tube (3) using a centerpunch. 2.
Clamp the shock absorber in a vise horizontally with the shock absorber rod (1) completely
extended. 3. Drill a hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (4) using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill
bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit
penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil.
4. Make an indentation in the middle (2) of the tube (3) with a centerpunch. 5. Drill a second hole in
the shock absorber at the centerpunch (2) using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. Oil will exhaust when the
drill bit penetrates the
shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil.
6. Remove the shock absorber from the vise. Hold the shock absorber over a drain pan horizontally
with the holes down. Move the rod (1) in and out
of the tube (3) to completely drain the oil from the shock absorber.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10
> Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
Suspension Travel Bumper: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10
> Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 10064
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A
> Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
Suspension Travel Bumper: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension or
Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A
> Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 10070
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10071
Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair
Jounce Bumper Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire
and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the
lower control arm assembly. Refer to Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control
Arm/Service and Repair/Rear
Suspension/Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement).
4. Remove the rear suspension jounce bumper (1).
Installation Procedure
1. Install the rear suspension jounce bumper (1) and tighten until the jounce bumper just makes
contact with the mounting bracket.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10072
2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, create a reference mark (1) from the jounce bumper (3) to
the mounting bracket (2). 3. Tighten the jounce bumper (3) by rotating it 360° or one full turn.
4. Using the reference mark (1) as a starting point, rotate the jounce bumper (2) an additional 120°
or two points of the hex nut (3) on the jounce
bumper.
5. Install the lower control arm assembly. Refer to Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement
(See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear
Suspension/Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement).
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 7. Remove the support and lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement
Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Replacement
Trailing Arm Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the park brake
cable bolt from the trailing arm and from the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable
Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking
Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and
Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)).
4. Remove the trailing arm bracket to body bolts. Refer to Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement (See:
Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement).
5. Remove the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10077
6. Remove the trailing arm to knuckle bolts (1). 7. Remove the trailing arm.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the trailing arm to the vehicle.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the trailing arm to knuckle bolts (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 3. Position the trailing
arm bracket to the trailing arm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10078
4. Loosely install the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. 5. Install the trail arm bracket.
Refer to Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement (See: Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement). 6. Tighten
the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 7. Install the park brake cable
bolt to trailing arm and to the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) (See:
Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake
Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake
Rear Cable Replacement (Right)).
8. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair). 9. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10079
Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement
Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and
Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the park brake cable from the trailing arm and
from the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake
Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake
Rear Cable Replacement (Right)).
3. Remove the trailing arm bracket to body bolts (1).
4. Remove the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10080
5. Remove the trailing arm bracket.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the trailing arm bracket to the trailing arm.
2. Loosely install the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt.
3. Push upward on the trailing arm bracket and loosely install the front bolt (1).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. Use a drift to align the remaining trailing arm bracket bolts (1). Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb
ft). 5. Tighten the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 6. Install the
park brake cable on the trailing arm and on the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable
Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake
Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10081
Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)).
7. Remove the support and lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10087
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle
Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components
are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack
stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to
the hoist.
Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands
to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack.
Caution: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure:
* Remove or secure all of the vehicle contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that
may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure.
* The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of
the vehicle and any vehicle contents.
* The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting
equipment or jacking equipment manufacturer.
* Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface.
* Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the
lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components.
Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking
equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle contents.
Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift
Front Lift Pads
When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310
mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges.
Rear Lift Pads
When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard
from the rear pinchweld flanges.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 10096
Vehicle Jacking
Note:
* Only the left side or the right side of the rear of the vehicle can be lifted at a time when using
these jacking point.
* The floor jack pad must not contact the oil pan, splash shield or the steering linkage.
Under the Rear Suspension
Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad on either side of the suspension cradle,
inboard and forward of the rear suspension, as shown.
Under the Center of the Front Suspension Frame
Lift the front of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front suspension
frame, as shown.
Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands
Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires >
Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires
> Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires
> Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10107
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires
> Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10108
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires
> Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10109
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and
Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires
> Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10110
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire
Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 10116
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 10117
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 10118
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 10119
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 10120
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10129
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10130
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10131
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and
Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10132
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire
Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10137
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10138
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10139
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10140
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10141
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10142
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10143
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension).
GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires
General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect
the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to
continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with
compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical
benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the
realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be
minimal.
The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its
unique properties:
- A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time.
- A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water
vapor concentration.
- A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations.
Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is
used to inflate tires under controlled conditions.
The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use
Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the
molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration)
has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are
larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing.
The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the
materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated.
Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has
demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the
inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be
reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are
required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas
with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the
benefits of using nitrogen.
GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance
Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria)
specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance
under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original
equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to
both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The
inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns,
while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength.
This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity
throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions.
Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure
maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the
correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in
many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear,
and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation
pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without
excessive structural
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10144
degradation.
Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure
maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10145
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension).
This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in
the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and
whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair.
Caution
- Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools
and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their
customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall.
- Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while
repairing tires.
- NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads.
Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may
require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be
used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy.
- NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation.
Repairable area on a radial tire.
Important
- NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth).
- NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4").
- NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair.
- NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel).
- Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair.
- Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury.
- Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and
repair tools/repair material recommendations.
Three basic steps for tire puncture repair:
1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10146
2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent
air loss.
External Inspection
1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak
by using a water and soap solution. Mark the
injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core.
2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader.
Internal Inspection
1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs
of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4.
Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5.
Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should
not be repaired.
Cleaning
1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a
scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold
lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool.
2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow
guidelines for handling and disposal.
Clean the Injury Channel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10147
1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside
of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to
prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended
reaming tool(s).
Fill the Injury
1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent
moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this
step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug
per
repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just
above the inside tire surface.
3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection.
Repair Unit Selection
Important Do not install the repair unit in this step.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10148
1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so
that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap
previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit
selection.
Buffing
1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and
evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine
wire brush or gritted rasp.
2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the
inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult
your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool.
Cementing
Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures.
Repair Unit Application
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10149
1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads
excessively).
Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units
1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over
the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out.
3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread.
Combination Repair/Plug Units
1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2.
Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions.
2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool.
Safety Cage
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10150
Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may
require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be
used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy.
Final Inspection
1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water
and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be
demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle.
For additional tire puncture repair information, contact:
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10151
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B
Date: August 13, 2009
Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire
Wear Condition)
Models:
2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2,
H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension).
This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire
feathering and recommended practices.
If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the
tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to
13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or
recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation
for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes.
SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER
TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE
MAXIMIZED.
If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a
tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing
the vehicle on the alignment machine.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description
Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description
Tread Wear Indicators Description
The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the
tires.
The location of these indicators are at 60 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire.
The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 in) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm
(2/32 in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10154
Tires: Description and Operation Tire Inflation Description
Tire Inflation Description
When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and
tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures,
or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions:
* Vehicle handling concerns
* Poor fuel economy
* Shortened tire life
* Tire overloading
Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply:
* The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours.
* The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
* The tires are cool.
Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications
on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions
keep out dust and water.
The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both
kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa.
Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions:
* A hard ride
* Tire bruising
* Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire
Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions:
* A tire squeal on turns
* Hard steering
* Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread
* Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture
* Tire cord breakage
* High tire temperatures
* Reduced vehicle handling
* High fuel consumption
* Soft riding
Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions:
* Uneven braking
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10155
* Steering lead
* Reduced vehicle handling
Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10156
Tires: Description and Operation All Seasons Tires Description
All Seasons Tires Description
Most Saturn vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment.
These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the
non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling
resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both
tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side
wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification
number.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10157
Tires: Description and Operation P-Metric Sized Tires Description
P-Metric Sized Tires Description
Most P-metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. Replacement
tires should be of the same tire performance criteria TPC specification number including the same
size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle.
Consult a tire dealer if you must replace the P-metric tire with other sizes. Tire companies can best
recommend the closest match of alphanumeric to P-metric sizes within their own tire lines. The
above illustration may not correspond with your vehicle, but is meant as an example.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures
Tires: Procedures
Tire Repair
Tire Repair
Warning
* Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools
and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their
customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall.
* Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while
repairing tires.
* NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads.
* NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation.
Note: Repairable area on a radial tire.
* NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32 in) remaining depth.
* NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4 in).
* NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair.
* NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel).
* Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair.
* Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury.
* Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and
repair tools/repair material recommendations.
Three basic steps for tire puncture repair:
1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep
moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss.
External Inspection
1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak
by using a water and soap solution. Mark the
injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core.
2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader.
Internal Inspection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10160
1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs
of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4.
Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5.
Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4 in) should
not be repaired.
Cleaning
1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a
scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold
lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool.
2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow
guidelines for handling and disposal.
Clean the Injury Channel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10161
1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside
of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to
prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended
reaming tool(s).
Fill the Injury
1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent
moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. For combination repair/plug units skip this
step. Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per
repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just
above the inside tire surface.
3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection.
Repair Unit Selection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10162
Note: Do not install the repair unit in this step.
1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so
that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap
previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit
selection.
Buffing
1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and
evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine
wire brush or gritted rasp.
2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the
inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult
your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool.
Cementing
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10163
Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures.
Repair Unit Application
The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed. Do not spread the beads
excessively.
Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units
1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over
the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10164
3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread.
Combination Repair/Plug Units
1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2.
Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions.
Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool.
Safety Cage
Some run flat tires may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire
safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy.
Final Inspection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10165
1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water
and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be
demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle (See: Body and Frame/Testing and
Inspection/Vibration Diagnosis and Correction/Repair Instructions/Tire and Wheel Assembly
Balancing - Off Vehicle).
For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
1400 K Street, N.W., Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005-2403
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to Maintenance Schedule
(North American Emissions) (See: Maintenance). In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire
and wheel whenever uneven tire wear is noticed.
Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in
non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes
regular rotation especially necessary.
Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair).
Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set
the tire pressure.
After the tires have been rotated, the tire pressure sensors must be reset, if applicable. Refer to
Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10166
Tires: Removal and Replacement
Tire Dismounting and Mounting
Caution: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons
alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could
result.
Caution: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing
equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear
coating to peel from the wheel.
Caution: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of
improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air
to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire
changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage
may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking.
1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely.
Note: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended.
3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the
tire from the wheel.
4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and
270 degrees from the valve stem.
Caution: Failure to position valve stem in proper position while dismounting and mounting the tire
may result in the TPM sensor to become damaged.
5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. The
tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying
the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10167
6. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is again at the 7 o'clock position relative to the
head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when
prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head.
7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire
sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles
equipped with TPM, replace the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor
Replacement (See: Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires/Tire Pressure Sensor/Service and
Repair).
8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from
the wheel bead seats.
Caution: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or
corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound
can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration.
9. Apply mounting lubricant to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids,
Lubricants, and Sealers (See:
Suspension/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Tires and Wheels).
10. Position the rim so the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This
will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10168
11. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim. Ensure that the
valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position.
12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem (1) is
at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. This
will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 10169
13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel.
Warning
To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when
the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any
tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate
the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal
injury.
14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this
time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure.
17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire
bead is fully seated on the wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation
(RFV)
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009
and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on
Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Important
- Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven
a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires.
- Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel
assemblies for each vehicle.
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation
measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable
tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force
variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads.
Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out
of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three
conditions must be addressed.
Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle,
two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any
imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer,
and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly
balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration.
Before balancing, perform the following procedures.
Tire and Wheel Diagnosis
1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are
centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while
shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick.
3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and
correct as necessary:
- Missing balance weights
- Bent rim flange
- Irregular tire wear
- Incomplete bead seating
- Tire irregularities (including pressure settings)
- Mud/ice build-up in wheel
- Stones in the tire tread
- Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to
diagnosing a smooth road shake condition.
4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a
sufficient distance on a known, smooth road
surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes
are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section
of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration
as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order
(one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high
enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high
to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment.
If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a
throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation
(RFV) > Page 10178
of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel.
5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found
at the end of this bulletin. This should be done
after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to
eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency
is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the
various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required.
A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any
parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically
indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if
this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away
and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration
may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if
vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire
flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration.
6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle
being parked for long periods of time and that the
nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information
on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment
Tires.
7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel
assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic
balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are
absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and
always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is
not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim
flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see
the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the
wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First
order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or
hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough,
it can be seen.
If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and
force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700
can address both (it is also a wheel balancer).
Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will
produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels
because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not
under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel
assembly runout be within specification.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures
radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV
measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily
done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout
specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed.
After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then
calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that
can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in
tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it
should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel
assembly.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of
finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force
variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly
force variation.
The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation
numbers should be used as a guide:
When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps.
Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation
Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of
the repair order.
- Measure radial force variation and radial runout.
- If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the
front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap
the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem
still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those
tires onto the subject vehicle.
- If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040
in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive
customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to
have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the
EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the
back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do
not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation
(RFV) > Page 10179
onto the subject vehicle.
- After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced.
If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire
replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are
being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect
force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring.
Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to
measuring.
Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are
more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment
such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be
contacted for further instructions.
Important
- When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's
center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are
secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and
repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This
system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program.
- Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT
recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire
company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure.
Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet
When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the
appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation
(RFV) > Page 10180
Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the
vibration concern.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast
Aluminum Wheels
Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition.
Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel.
Cause
Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air
leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat).
Correction
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service
procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the
tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap
and water to locate the specific leak location.
Important
- If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim),
the wheel should be replaced.
- If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced.
3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location.
- If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks.
- If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step.
4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the
wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove
the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the
INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose
cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose
Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent.
8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use
88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry.
Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging
the repair area may result in an air leak.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast
Aluminum Wheels > Page 10185
10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire
Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on
the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and
inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the
tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire
and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty
one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
One leak repair per wheel.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON
Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated,
Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat)
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or
weeks.
Cause
Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat.
There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and
this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear
continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the
environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may
appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be
visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in
an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please
refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum
Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Correction
In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below.
Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to
repair the wheel with the procedure below.
Notice
The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to
be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine
the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat
Corrosion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10190
Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel
flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for
additional information on possible wheel porosity issues.
3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a
rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to
maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel
that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion
4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below.
- For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of
repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
- For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area
of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the
corrosion and any flaking paint. You should
remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to
the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges
that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired
surface.
Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be
visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not
visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend
to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced.
Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating
surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as
smooth and level as possible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10191
Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface
6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially
available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead
Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will
permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this
sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat
7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in SI.
Parts Information
Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at
www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes
Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10192
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome
Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F
Date: April 21, 2011
Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum
Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative
products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the
customer.
What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1
Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an
example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from
using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient
to clean wheels.
If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states
that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers
should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these
chemicals.)
- Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome)
- Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid
- Sulfamic Acid
- Phosphoric Acid
- Hydroxyacetic Acid
Notice
Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most
customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal.
Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the
paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car
warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the
calipers.
Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean,
clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts,
lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to
the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the
damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away.
Notice
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome
Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10198
Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome
wheels (or any wheels).
If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be
avoided.
For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels
Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome
wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were
returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be
charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2
A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium
chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to
Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be
uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels
should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently
possible.
Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can
also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on
the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward
direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such
conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed
as soon as conveniently possible.
Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time.
Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish
and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that
applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior
approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
"Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3
A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant
penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material
are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by
airflow. These
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome
Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10199
hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed
to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the
chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome.
Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and
Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up
or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars
Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be
waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax
#M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake
dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may
be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect
the finish.
Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be
replaced one time.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust
build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care
and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
Customer Assistance and Instructions
GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic
cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the
appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the
following:
Notice
THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN
EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE
APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL
REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED
INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER,
EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
EXACTLY.
1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce
wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water
to rinse.
2. Dry the wheels completely.
Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine
results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are
satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a
50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES,
only apply until the results are satisfactory.
3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the
polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the
towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If
continued applications fail to improve the appearance
further discontinue use.
This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications,
restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above
procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting.
In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of
cleaning will restore the finish.
†*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers
of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or
assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may
be available from other sources.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome
Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10200
*This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location
please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577.
**This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com.
^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Tri-Peek at
1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19
Inch Wheels Available through GM
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A
Date: March 21, 2011
Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension).
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle
from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories.
This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information.
Tires
GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be
used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or
exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines.
Important
- If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO
NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire.
- If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the
19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
Wheels
Wheel (Lug) Nuts
Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170
Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the
wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available.
Caution
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
Care / Cleaning
Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel
cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use
carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of
the wheel to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19
Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10205
remove road grime, brake dust and grease.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured
radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance.
The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide:
If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible
corrective actions.
Vehicle Modifications
Tire Label
After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle.
The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found
on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line
as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be
sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C
(65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to
occupant/cargo capacities.
Tire Type/Pressure Selection
To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to
update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The
factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be
changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic
System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure:
1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset
Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection".
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System
To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory
wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred
to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the
new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM).
TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure
Note
If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be
used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not
affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special
tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem
to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the
keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL
46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding
with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that
tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within
close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be
inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the
learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be
cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure
away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation
does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different
position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19
Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10206
1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound
together with activated turn signal lamps
indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079
Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall
close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for
a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in
the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3
seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the
learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method
1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until
the tire learn message appears on the driver
information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have
been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been
enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods:
- Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to
the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn
chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp
sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate.
- Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate,
repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the
following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for
3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded,
the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming
Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new
vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19"
wheels are installed.
When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy.
Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service
Programming System (SPS).
Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming
DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be
cleared.
Calibration Information Documentation
1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2.
Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the
customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form
in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder.
Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the
programming of the ECM to the original specifications.
Warranty Information
Wheels
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19
Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10207
All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery
will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are
replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of
the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only
effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI
(Accessory Distributor / Installer).
For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be
covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited
kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires,
but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines.
GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive
the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only).
Tires
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and
workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage.
Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a
prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire
manufacturer warranty.
USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more
information.
Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H.
ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19
Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10208
You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels
and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to
provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your
Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains
important information necessary to service your vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E
Date: March 17, 2011
Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not
endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic
refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed.
Evaluating Damage
In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion,
scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be
sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the
wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been
refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record
the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin.
Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations
- Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended.
- Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the
clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be
performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later
in this bulletin.
- Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat
procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original
coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum
Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel.
- Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them.
In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is
possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel
should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the
least amount of material to be removed.
Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the
dimensions and function of the wheel.
Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will
better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM
recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle
SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using
any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain
color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures
and product recommendations.
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company
Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels
will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that
re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used.
A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent.
Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is
allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to
assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the
wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed.
Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed.
Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel
mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel
and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the
new vehicle warranty, whichever is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 10213
longer.
Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact
surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut
torque.
When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to
reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A
Date: June 09, 2010
Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab
9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles
Attention:
Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and
reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel
installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking
instructions for safe wheel changing.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available
special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension).
Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven
Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures
had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation
intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as
winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more
than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the
technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself
aware of.
Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools
The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and
installation.
- J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
- J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
Corroded Surfaces
One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle.
Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened
wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed
away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and
an under-torqued condition.
Caution
Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or
brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting
surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is
moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury.
Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If
corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding
pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating
surface.
The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces:
- The hub mounting surface
- The brake rotor mounting surface
- The wheel mounting surface
Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub.
Lubricants, Grease and Fluids
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 10218
Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in
removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to
installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper
readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY.
Notice
Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or
drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to
clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light
coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel
pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub.
Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage
Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse.
You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not
retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any
component suspected of damage.
Tip
Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged
BEFORE tightening the nut.
Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side
of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation.
Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque
Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid
additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown
for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in
order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off
center resulting in vibration.
The Most Important Service You Provide
While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk
of becoming complacent on this very important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 10219
service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal
injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to
always side with caution when installing wheels.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire
Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F
Date: May 04, 2010
Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009
and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on
Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Important
- Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven
a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires.
- Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel
assemblies for each vehicle.
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation
measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable
tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force
variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads.
Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out
of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three
conditions must be addressed.
Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle,
two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any
imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer,
and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly
balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration.
Before balancing, perform the following procedures.
Tire and Wheel Diagnosis
1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are
centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while
shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick.
3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and
correct as necessary:
- Missing balance weights
- Bent rim flange
- Irregular tire wear
- Incomplete bead seating
- Tire irregularities (including pressure settings)
- Mud/ice build-up in wheel
- Stones in the tire tread
- Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to
diagnosing a smooth road shake condition.
4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a
sufficient distance on a known, smooth road
surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes
are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section
of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration
as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order
(one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high
enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high
to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment.
If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a
throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire
Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10224
of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel.
5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found
at the end of this bulletin. This should be done
after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to
eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency
is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the
various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required.
A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any
parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically
indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if
this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away
and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration
may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if
vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire
flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration.
6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle
being parked for long periods of time and that the
nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information
on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment
Tires.
7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel
assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic
balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are
absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and
always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is
not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim
flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see
the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the
wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First
order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or
hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough,
it can be seen.
If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and
force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700
can address both (it is also a wheel balancer).
Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will
produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels
because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not
under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel
assembly runout be within specification.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures
radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV
measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily
done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout
specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed.
After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then
calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that
can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in
tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it
should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel
assembly.
Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of
finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force
variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly
force variation.
The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation
numbers should be used as a guide:
When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps.
Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation
Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of
the repair order.
- Measure radial force variation and radial runout.
- If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the
front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap
the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem
still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those
tires onto the subject vehicle.
- If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the
worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040
in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive
customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to
have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the
EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the
back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do
not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire
Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10225
onto the subject vehicle.
- After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced.
If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire
replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are
being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect
force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring.
Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to
measuring.
Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are
more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment
such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be
contacted for further instructions.
Important
- When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's
center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are
secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and
repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This
system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program.
- Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT
recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire
company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure.
Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet
When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the
appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire
Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10226
Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the
vibration concern.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low
Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition.
Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel.
Cause
Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air
leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat).
Correction
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service
procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the
tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap
and water to locate the specific leak location.
Important
- If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim),
the wheel should be replaced.
- If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced.
3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location.
- If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks.
- If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step.
4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the
wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove
the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the
INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose
cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose
Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent.
8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use
88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry.
Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging
the repair area may result in an air leak.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low
Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 10231
10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire
Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on
the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and
inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the
tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire
and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty
one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair.
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
One leak repair per wheel.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire
Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated,
Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat)
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or
weeks.
Cause
Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat.
There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and
this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear
continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the
environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may
appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be
visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel.
Notice
This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in
an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please
refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum
Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant)
Correction
In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below.
Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to
repair the wheel with the procedure below.
Notice
The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and
Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to
be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine
the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat
Corrosion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire
Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10236
Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel
flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for
additional information on possible wheel porosity issues.
3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a
rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to
maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel
that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion
4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below.
- For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of
repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
- For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area
of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these
dimensions, the wheel should be replaced.
5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the
corrosion and any flaking paint. You should
remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to
the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges
that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired
surface.
Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be
visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not
visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend
to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced.
Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating
surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as
smooth and level as possible.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire
Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10237
Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface
6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially
available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead
Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will
permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this
sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat
7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in SI.
Parts Information
Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at
www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire
Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10238
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F
Date: April 21, 2011
Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum
Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative
products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the
customer.
What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1
Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an
example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from
using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient
to clean wheels.
If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states
that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers
should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these
chemicals.)
- Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome)
- Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome)
- Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid
- Sulfamic Acid
- Phosphoric Acid
- Hydroxyacetic Acid
Notice
Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most
customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal.
Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the
paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car
warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the
calipers.
Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean,
clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts,
lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to
the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the
damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away.
Notice
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10244
Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome
wheels (or any wheels).
If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be
avoided.
For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels
Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome
wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were
returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be
charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and
Instructions below.
Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2
A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium
chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to
Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be
uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels
should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently
possible.
Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can
also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on
the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward
direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such
conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed
as soon as conveniently possible.
Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time.
Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish
and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that
applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior
approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
"Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3
A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant
penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material
are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by
airflow. These
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10245
hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed
to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the
chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome.
Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and
Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up
or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars
Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be
waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax
#M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake
dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may
be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect
the finish.
Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels
Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be
replaced one time.
Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer
the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust
build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care
and Service Process (DM-CCSP).
Customer Assistance and Instructions
GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic
cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the
appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the
following:
Notice
THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN
EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE
APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL
REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED
INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER,
EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
EXACTLY.
1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce
wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water
to rinse.
2. Dry the wheels completely.
Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine
results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are
satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a
50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES,
only apply until the results are satisfactory.
3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the
polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the
towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If
continued applications fail to improve the appearance
further discontinue use.
This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications,
restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above
procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting.
In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of
cleaning will restore the finish.
†*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers
of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or
assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may
be available from other sources.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel
Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10246
*This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location
please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577.
**This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com.
^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local
retail location please call Tri-Peek at
1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch
Wheels Available through GM
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A
Date: March 21, 2011
Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension).
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle
from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories.
This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information.
Tires
GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be
used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or
exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines.
Important
- If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO
NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire.
- If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the
19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
Wheels
Wheel (Lug) Nuts
Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170
Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the
wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available.
Caution
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
Care / Cleaning
Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel
cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use
carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of
the wheel to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch
Wheels Available through GM > Page 10251
remove road grime, brake dust and grease.
Mounting and Balancing
Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods
for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires.
The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured
radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance.
The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide:
If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number
00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible
corrective actions.
Vehicle Modifications
Tire Label
After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle.
The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found
on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line
as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be
sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C
(65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to
occupant/cargo capacities.
Tire Type/Pressure Selection
To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to
update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The
factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be
changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic
System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure:
1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset
Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection".
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System
To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory
wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred
to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the
new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM).
TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure
Note
If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be
used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not
affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special
tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem
to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the
keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL
46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding
with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that
tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within
close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be
inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the
learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be
cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure
away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation
does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different
position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch
Wheels Available through GM > Page 10252
1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound
together with activated turn signal lamps
indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079
Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall
close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for
a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in
the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3
seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the
learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method
1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until
the tire learn message appears on the driver
information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have
been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been
enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods:
- Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to
the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn
chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp
sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will
illuminate.
- Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp
has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be
learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate,
repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the
following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for
3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded,
the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode.
5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures.
Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming
Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new
vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19"
wheels are installed.
When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy.
Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service
Programming System (SPS).
Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming
DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be
cleared.
Calibration Information Documentation
1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2.
Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the
customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form
in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder.
Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the
programming of the ECM to the original specifications.
Warranty Information
Wheels
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch
Wheels Available through GM > Page 10253
All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery
will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are
replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of
the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only
effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI
(Accessory Distributor / Installer).
For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be
covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited
kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires,
but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines.
GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive
the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only).
Tires
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and
workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage.
Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a
prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire
manufacturer warranty.
USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more
information.
Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H.
ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch
Wheels Available through GM > Page 10254
You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels
and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to
provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your
Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains
important information necessary to service your vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E
Date: March 17, 2011
Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not
endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic
refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed.
Evaluating Damage
In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion,
scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be
sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the
wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been
refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record
the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin.
Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations
- Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended.
- Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the
clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be
performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later
in this bulletin.
- Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat
procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original
coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum
Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel.
- Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them.
In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is
possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel
should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the
least amount of material to be removed.
Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the
dimensions and function of the wheel.
Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will
better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM
recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle
SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using
any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain
color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures
and product recommendations.
Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company
Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels
will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that
re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used.
A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent.
Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is
allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to
assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the
wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed.
Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed.
Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel
mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel
and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the
new vehicle warranty, whichever is
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 10259
longer.
Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact
surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut
torque.
When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to
reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A
Date: June 09, 2010
Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab
9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles
Attention:
Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and
reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel
installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking
instructions for safe wheel changing.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available
special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension).
Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven
Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures
had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation
intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as
winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more
than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the
technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself
aware of.
Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools
The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and
installation.
- J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
- J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent)
Corroded Surfaces
One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle.
Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened
wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed
away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and
an under-torqued condition.
Caution
Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or
brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting
surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is
moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury.
Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If
corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding
pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating
surface.
The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces:
- The hub mounting surface
- The brake rotor mounting surface
- The wheel mounting surface
Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub.
Lubricants, Grease and Fluids
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 10264
Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in
removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to
installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper
readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY.
Notice
Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or
drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to
clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light
coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel
pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub.
Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage
Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse.
You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not
retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any
component suspected of damage.
Tip
Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged
BEFORE tightening the nut.
Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side
of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation.
Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque
Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid
additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown
for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in
order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off
center resulting in vibration.
The Most Important Service You Provide
While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk
of becoming complacent on this very important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing
Procedures/Precautions > Page 10265
service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal
injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to
always side with caution when installing wheels.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description
Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description
Replacement Wheels Description
Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist:
* The wheel exhibits excessive runout.
* The wheel is bent.
* The wheel is cracked.
* The wheel is severely rusted.
* The wheel is severely corroded.
Note: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable.
* The wheel leaks air.
Warning
If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install
only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment
parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of
vehicle control resulting in personal injury.
Caution: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause:
* Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel
* Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components
* Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius
* Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance
* Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy
Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of
the following conditions exist:
* The wheel has elongated bolt holes.
* The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly.
Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem.
Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description > Page 10268
Wheels: Description and Operation Steel Wheel Repair Description
Steel Wheel Repair Description
Caution: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from
striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and
uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Caution: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed
ratings are greatly reduced.
If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearings Diagnosis
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10274
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component
Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information
> Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Fastener ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 190 Nm (140 ft lb)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 10282
Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation
Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description
Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way:
* The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face.
* The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt.
The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x
1.5.
* M = Metric
* 12 = Diameter in millimeters
* 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Stud Replacement
Tools Required
J 43631 Ball Joint Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly.
Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front
Suspension).
4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10285
Installation Procedure
1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange.
2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut
to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the
head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers.
6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing
and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service
and Repair/Front Suspension).
7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Service and Repair). 8. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10286
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Stud Replacement
Tools Required
J 43631 Ball Joint Remover
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle
Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub
replacement. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service
and Repair/Rear
Suspension).
4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10287
Installation Procedure
1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange.
2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut
to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the
head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers.
6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See:
Service and Repair). 7. Lower the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10293
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams
M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator
M37 Mode Door Actuator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10294
M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic
Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement
Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement
Mode Valve Actuator Replacement
Mode Valve Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10297
Mode Control Cam Replacement
Mode Control Cam Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10298
Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement
Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10299
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10300
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair HVAC - Manual
Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement
Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement
Mode Valve Actuator Replacement
Mode Valve Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10301
Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement
Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10302
Mode Control Cam Replacement
Mode Control Cam Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10303
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement
Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Inlet Housing Replacement
Air Inlet Housing Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10308
Air Duct: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10309
Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side
Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10310
Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side
Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10311
Air Duct: Service and Repair
Air Inlet Housing Replacement
Air Inlet Housing Replacement
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10312
Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side
Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10313
Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side
Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10314
Windshield Defroster Duct Replacement
Windshield Defroster Duct Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10315
Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Left Side
Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Left Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10316
Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Right Side
Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10317
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement
Air Register: Service and Repair Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement
Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10322
Air Register: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet Replacement
Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10323
Air Register: Service and Repair Floor Air Outlet Replacement - Center
Floor Air Outlet Replacement - Center
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and
Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement).
2. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear the rear floor air outlet duct, and
then up, and rearward to remove.
Installation Procedure
1. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear rear floor air duct, and then down,
and rearward to install. 2. Install the front floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement
(See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and
Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10324
Air Register: Service and Repair Rear Floor Air Outlet Replacement
Rear Floor Air Outlet Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front seats. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Driver or Passenger Seat
Replacement).
2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and
Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement).
3. Partially remove the floor carpet from the front footwells to the B-pillars. Refer to Front Floor
Panel Carpet Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Floor
Panel Carpet Replacement).
4. Remove the rear floor air outlet push pins from the floor pan. 5. Remove the rear floor air outlet
from the floor pan.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10325
1. Install the rear floor air outlet to the floor pan. 2. Install the rear floor air outlet push pins to the
floor pan. 3. Install the floor carpet to the B-pillars and the front footwells. Refer to Front Floor
Panel Carpet Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Floor Panel Carpet
Replacement)
4. Install the floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and
Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement).
5. Install the front seats. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Driver or Passenger Seat
Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10326
Air Register: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Specifications
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 10330
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of the Engine Compartment Components
1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling
Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 10331
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams
B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 10334
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic
Ambient Air Quality Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10340
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10341
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10342
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10343
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10344
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10345
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10346
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10347
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10348
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10349
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10350
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10351
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10352
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10353
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10354
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10355
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10356
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10357
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10358
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10359
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10360
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10361
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10362
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10363
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10364
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10365
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10366
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10367
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10368
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10369
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10370
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10371
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10372
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10373
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10374
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10375
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10376
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10377
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10378
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10379
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10380
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10381
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10382
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10383
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10384
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10385
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10386
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10387
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10388
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10389
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10390
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10391
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10392
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10393
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10394
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10395
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10396
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10397
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10398
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10399
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10400
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10401
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10402
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10403
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10404
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10405
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10406
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10407
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10408
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10409
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10410
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10411
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10412
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10413
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10414
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10415
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10416
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10417
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10418
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10419
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10420
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10421
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10422
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10423
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10424
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10425
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10426
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10427
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10428
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10429
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10430
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10431
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10432
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10433
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10434
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10435
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10436
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10437
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10438
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10439
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10440
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10441
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10442
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10443
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10444
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10445
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10446
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10447
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10448
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10449
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10450
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10451
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10452
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10453
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10454
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10455
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10456
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10457
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10458
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10459
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10460
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10461
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10462
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10463
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10464
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10465
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10466
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10467
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10468
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10469
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10470
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10471
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10472
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10473
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10474
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10475
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10476
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10477
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10478
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10479
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10480
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10481
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10482
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10483
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10484
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10485
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10486
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10487
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10488
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10489
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10490
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10491
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10492
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10493
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10494
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10495
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10496
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10497
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10498
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10499
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10500
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10501
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10502
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10503
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10504
Blower Motor: Connector Views
M8 Blower Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
10505
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair
Quarter Outer Panel Pressure Relief Valve Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Air gap .................................................................................................................................................
................................. 0.30-0.60 mm (0.011-0.023 in)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 10516
Compressor Clutch: Diagrams
Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 10517
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
Air Conditioning Clutch Drive Plate Adjustment
1. Install the clutch plate assembly.
Note: Ensure the drive plate does not drag against the pulley when the pulley is rotated.
2. Measure the air gap between the pulley and the drive plate. Adjust the shims to achieve a
0.30-0.60 mm (0.011-0.023 in) air gap.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the clutch plate retaining bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Hub > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Compressor Clutch Hub: Service and Repair
Compressor Clutch Plate and Hub Assembly Removal
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10524
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Condenser Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Locations
Control Assembly: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10531
Control Assembly: Diagrams
K33 HVAC Control Module X1 (C68)
K33 HVAC Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10532
K33 HVAC Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10533
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual
Control Assembly: Service and Repair HVAC - Manual
Heater and Air Conditioning Control Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual > Page 10536
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Defroster Valve Replacement
Defroster Valve Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual > Page 10537
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Vent Valve Replacement
Vent Valve Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual > Page 10538
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heater and Air Conditioning Control Replacement
Heater and Air Conditioning Control Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative > Page 10547
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative > Page 10548
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative > Page 10549
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative > Page 10550
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative > Page 10551
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger
Inoperative > Page 10552
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000:
Defroster Malfunction
Control Module HVAC: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10562
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10563
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10564
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10565
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10566
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10567
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 >
Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10572
Control Module HVAC: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10573
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10574
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10575
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement
A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement
Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the seal washer from the A/C refrigerant component. 2. Inspect the seal washer for any
signs of damage. 3. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair or replace
as necessary.
Note: DO NOT reuse sealing washer.
4. Discard the sealing washer.
Installation Procedure
Note: Flat washer type seals do not require lubrication.
1. Inspect the new seal washer for any signs of cracks, cuts, or damage.
Do not use a damaged seal washer.
2. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. 3.
Carefully install the new seal washer onto the A/C refrigerant component. 4. The washer must
completely bottom against the surface of the fitting.
Note: After tightening the A/C components, there should be a slight sealing washer gap of
approximately 1.2 mm (3/64 in) between the A/C line and the A/C component.
5. Assemble the remaining A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement > Page 10581
A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair Air Conditioning O-Ring Seal Replacement
Air Conditioning O-Ring Seal Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disassemble the A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure
* For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and loosen the fitting nut (1).
* For banjo style fittings remove the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting.
2. Remove the O-ring seal from the A/C refrigerant component. 3. Inspect the O-ring seal for signs
of damage to help determine the root cause of the failure. 4. Inspect the A/C refrigerant
components for damage or burrs. Repair if necessary.
Note: Cap or tape the open A/C refrigerant components immediately to prevent system
contamination.
5. Cap or tape the A/C refrigerant components. 6. Discard the O-ring seal.
Installation Procedure
1. Inspect the new O-ring seal for any sign or cracks, cuts, or damage. Replace if necessary. 2.
Remove the cap or tape from the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth,
carefully clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components.
Note: DO NOT allow any of the mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil on the new O-ring seal to
enter the refrigerant system.
4. Lightly coat the new O-ring seal with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil.
Note: DO NOT reuse O-ring seals.
5. Carefully slide the new O-ring seal onto the A/C refrigerant component.
6. The O-ring seal must be fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement > Page 10582
7. Assemble the A/C components.
Refer to the appropriate repair procedure.
* For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and tighten the fitting nut (1)
to specification.
* For banjo style fittings install the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting and tighten to specification.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10586
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68)
B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10587
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement - Upper
Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper > Page 10590
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement - Lower
Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Case Assembly Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the HVAC module. Refer to Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module
Replacement (See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair).
2. Remove the heater core cover screws from the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the
heater core cover from the evaporator case assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 10594
4. Remove the heater core from the HVAC module.
5. Remove the evaporator case assembly screws from the blower case assembly. 6. Remove the
evaporator case assembly from the blower case assembly.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 10595
1. Install evaporator case assembly to the blower case assembly.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install evaporator case assembly screws to the blower case assembly.
Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (13 lb in).
3. Install heater core to the HVAC module.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 10596
4. Install heater core cover. 5. Install heater core cover screws.
Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (13 lb in).
6. Install the HVAC module. Refer to Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module
Replacement (See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From
(HVAC) System
Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C
Date: June 12, 2009
Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating)
Models:
1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All
Equipped with Air Conditioning
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC).
Condition
Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions.
Cause
This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not
evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on
the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an
unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment.
There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water
leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow
the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection.
The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined
to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module.
Correction
Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module
software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the
evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to
confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded
afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and
specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in
areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration
installed prior to any customer comment.
Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may
be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876).
Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included
electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions
and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer
Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas.
To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to
eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the
following procedure:
Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation
1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and
running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for
an extended period of time.
Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full
adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces.
2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From
(HVAC) System > Page 10605
3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air
filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product
may clog the filter. If the
cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer.
5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE
COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE
BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE.
6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line
operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well.
Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube.
Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil
slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle.
8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating.
Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil
Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)).
Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening
- Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable
procedure in SI.
- Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core
surface.
- Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower
motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening.
- Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and
surrounding gasket surfaces.
- When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower
motor control module).
Application Through Blower Motor Opening
- Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI.
- Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core
surface.
- Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
- Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and
surrounding gasket surfaces.
- When the application is complete, install the blower motor.
Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module
- If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole
in the HVAC module.
- Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10
mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and
the blower motor fan.
- With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the
applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the
evaporator core.
- Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module.
9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately
10 minutes, with the compressor disabled,
HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and
one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the
evaporator core surface.
10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the
tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the
nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it
will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and
rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged ,
the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool.
11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system
operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from
underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From
(HVAC) System > Page 10606
Parts Information
Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under
warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core
microbial growth.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors
Emitted From (HVAC) System
Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C
Date: June 12, 2009
Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating)
Models:
1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All
Equipped with Air Conditioning
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC).
Condition
Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions.
Cause
This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not
evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on
the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an
unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment.
There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water
leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow
the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection.
The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined
to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module.
Correction
Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module
software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the
evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to
confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded
afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and
specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in
areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration
installed prior to any customer comment.
Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may
be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876).
Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included
electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions
and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer
Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas.
To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to
eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the
following procedure:
Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation
1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and
running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for
an extended period of time.
Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full
adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces.
2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors
Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 10612
3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air
filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product
may clog the filter. If the
cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer.
5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE
COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE
BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE.
6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line
operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well.
Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube.
Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil
slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle.
8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating.
Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil
Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)).
Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening
- Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable
procedure in SI.
- Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core
surface.
- Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower
motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening.
- Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and
surrounding gasket surfaces.
- When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower
motor control module).
Application Through Blower Motor Opening
- Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI.
- Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core
surface.
- Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
- Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and
surrounding gasket surfaces.
- When the application is complete, install the blower motor.
Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module
- If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole
in the HVAC module.
- Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10
mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and
the blower motor fan.
- With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the
applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the
evaporator core.
- Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module.
9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately
10 minutes, with the compressor disabled,
HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and
one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the
evaporator core surface.
10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the
tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the
nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it
will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and
rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged ,
the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool.
11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system
operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from
underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors
Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 10613
Parts Information
Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under
warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core
microbial growth.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 10614
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Evaporator Core Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 10618
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 10619
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Evaporator Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion
Valve Replacement
Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement > Page 10624
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion
Valve Hose Replacement
Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Hose Replacement
Special Tools
J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector
Removal Procedures
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
2. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose nut (1) from the air conditioning evaporator
thermal expansion valve tube hose. 3. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose from the air
conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. 4. Remove the compressor hose
retainer nut (2) from the battery box.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement > Page 10625
5. Remove the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose nut (1) from the
thermal expansion valve. 6. Remove the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube
hose (2) from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the air conditioning
evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air Conditioning
System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air
Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
Installation Procedure
1. Install new seal washers to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose.
Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement
(See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement).
2. Position the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose in the vehicle. 3.
Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose (2) to the thermal
expansion valve. 4. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose nut
(1) to the thermal expansion valve and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16
lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement > Page 10626
5. Install a new sealing washer to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube
hose at the compressor hose. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and
Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement)
6. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose (2) to the compressor
hose. 7. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose nut (1) to the
compressor hose and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 8. install the compressor hose retainer nut (2) to
the battery box and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 9. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant
Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
10. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement
Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement
Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 10634
Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement
Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator
Tube Replacement
Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement
Special Tools
J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector
Removal Procedure
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and
Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant
Reservoir/Service and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement).
4. Remove the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield
Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair).
5. Remove the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery
Replacement).
6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut
from the wheelhouse.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10639
8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent
hose retainers from the liquid line.
10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the thermal expansion
valve (TXV). 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10640
12. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 13. Remove the liquid line from the condenser.
14. Remove the bolt retaining the liquid line to the body.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10641
15. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 16. Route the liquid line
above the battery box and the ground lug. 17. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and
remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid
line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C
Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
19. Install protective caps to the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV to prevent
contamination and desiccant saturation.
Installation Procedure
1. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10642
3. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV. 4.
Install the new sealing washer to the liquid line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler
O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
5. Route the condenser end of the liquid line into position. 6. Install the liquid line to the condenser.
Note: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the
line.
7. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
8. Install the bolt to retain the liquid line to the body and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10643
9. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose.
10. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler
HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
11. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 12. Install the liquid line and
evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
13. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft).
14. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box and tighten to 10 Nm (86 lb in). 15.
Install the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery
Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10644
16. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 17. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower and tighten
to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 18. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 19. Install the
surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service
and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement).
20. Install the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield
Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement
(Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair).
21. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and
Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
22. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
23. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10645
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement
Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement (LF1)
Special Tools
J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector
Removal Procedures
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and
Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
3. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose nut (2) from the air conditioning evaporator
thermal expansion valve tube hose. 4. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose from the air
conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10646
5. Remove the compressor hose nut (2) from the condenser. 6. Remove the compressor hose (1)
from the condenser. 7. Unclip hose from fan shroud. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair).
9. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve.
10. Remove the compressor hose nut (1) at the compressor. 11. Remove the compressor hose (2)
from the compressor. 12. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 13. Remove and discard
the sealing washers from the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Coupler
HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10647
1. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler
O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement).
2. Install the compressor hose (2) to the compressor.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the compressor hose nut (1) to the compressor and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 4.
Connect the electrical connector to the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve.
5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. 7. Install a new sealing
washer to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal
Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System
Seal Replacement).
8. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose to the compressor
hose. 9. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion
valve tube hose and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10648
10. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. Refer to Air
Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler
HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement)
11. Install the compressor hose (1) to the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the
condenser and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 13. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp
Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair).
14. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
15. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
Receiver and Dehydrator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant charge ...............................................................................................................................
........................................................ 0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 10659
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant ...........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... R-134a
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 10660
Refrigerant: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging
Special Tools
J 34100 - Smart Cart
Warning
To prevent personal injury, avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Work in a
well ventilated area. To remove refrigerant from the A/C System, use service equipment designed
for recovery that is certified to meet the requirements of the appropriate SAE Standards. If an
accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional
health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant, refrigerant recovery, and
lubricant manufacturers.
Warning
For personal protection, goggles and lint-free gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped
around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant
system. If refrigerant comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury
can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical
help should be obtained.
Caution: You must replace the desiccant if the A/C refrigerant system has been open to
atmosphere for more than four hours, or if the A/C refrigerant oil has been contaminated. Failure to
replace the desiccant will result in damage to the A/C refrigerant system.
Caution: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other
refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure.
Caution: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C
system.
Caution: Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation
through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If
lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result.
The J 34100 - Smart Cart is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The Smart Cart
recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically.
The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead
the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is
recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically
replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg
(12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant.
The Smart Cart has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to
recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If
foreign gases are present, the Smart Cart will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system.
The Smart Cart also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain.
Refer to the J 34100 - Smart Cart Smart Cart manual for operation and setup instruction. Always
recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System
Specifications (See: Specifications) for the correct amount.
A/C Refrigerant System Oil Charge Replenishing
If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component
replacement, the oil must be replenished.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil
Abrupt Refrigerant Loss .......................................................................................................................
......................................................... 65 ml (2.20 oz) Compressor Replacement ................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 74 ml
(2.50 oz) The service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil.
Condenser Replacement with the Receiver Dehydrator
...................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2 oz)
Condenser Replacement without the Receiver Dehydrator
................................................................................................................................. 30 ml (1 oz)
Evaporator Replacement .....................................................................................................................
................................................................ 30 ml (1 oz) Receiver Dehydrator Replacement ................
..................................................................................................................................................... 30
ml (1 oz) Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement
........................................................................................................................................................ 20
ml (0.75 oz) Total System PAG Oil Capacity .......................................................................................
................................................................................ 120 ml (4 oz)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 10665
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
PAG Oil GM P/N 12378526 for United States
PAG Oil GM P/N 88900060 for Canada
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High
Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Valve Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10674
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10683
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10684
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10685
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10686
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10687
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10688
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09
> Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Control Module HVAC: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10698
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10699
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10700
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10701
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10702
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D
> Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10703
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: >
NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10708
Control Module HVAC: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10709
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1
K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10710
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10711
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature
Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature
Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10716
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of the Engine Compartment Components
1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling
Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature
Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10717
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams
B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature
Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature
Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement >
Page 10720
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic
Ambient Air Quality Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10724
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68)
B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10725
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement - Upper
Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper > Page 10728
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement - Lower
Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System
1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right
Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control
Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37
Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input
X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center
Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10732
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10733
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Evaporator Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Valve Replacement (LF1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Service Valve Core Replacement
Special Tools
* J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector
* J 46246 - Valve Core Removal Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and
Recharging).
2. Use J 46246 - Valve Core Removal Tool or equivalent to remove the valve core.
Installation Procedure
1. Use J 46246 - Valve Core Removal Tool or equivalent to install and tighten the valve core.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 10741
2. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See:
Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery
and Recharging).
Note: To prevent loss of refrigerant charge, tighten the cap. Replace the cap if the seal is missing
or damaged.
3. Test the affected A/C fittings for leaks using J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System
Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belts
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision
Warning
Restraint systems can be damaged in a collision. To help avoid injury and ensure that all parts in
need of replacement are replaced:
* Replace any seat belt system that was in use during the collision serious enough to deploy any
automatic restraint device such as air bags and seat belt pretensioners. This not only includes seat
belt systems in use by people of adult size, but seat belt systems used to secure child restraints,
infant carriers and booster seats, including LATCH system and top tether anchorages.
* Replace any seat belt system that has torn, worn, or damaged components. This not only
includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints and LATCH system components, if any.
* Replace any seat belt system if you observe the words "REPLACE" or "CAUTION", or if a yellow
tag is visible. Do not replace a seat belt if only the child seat caution label is visible.
* Replace any seat belt system if you are doubtful about its condition. This not only includes adult
seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints, LATCH system components, and any restraint
system used to secure infant carriers, child restraints, and booster seats. Do NOT replace single
seat belt system components in vehicles that have been in a collision as described above. Always
replace the entire seat belt system with the buckle, guide and retractor assembly, which includes
the latch and webbing material.
After a minor collision where no automatic restraint device was deployed, seat belt system
replacement may not be necessary, unless some of the parts are torn, worn, or damaged.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System
Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 10747
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Supplemental Inflatable
Restraints
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision
Accident With or Without Air Bag Deployment - Component Inspections
Warning
Proper operation of the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) sensing system requires that any
repairs to the vehicle structure return the vehicle structure to the original production configuration.
Not properly repairing the vehicle structure could cause non-deployment of the air bag(s) in a
frontal collision or deployment of the air bag(s) for conditions less severe than intended.
After any collision, inspect the following components as indicated. If you detect any damage,
replace the component. If you detect any damage to the mounting points or mounting hardware,
repair the component or replace the hardware as needed.
* The steering column-Inspect the steering column for bending, twisting, buckling or any type of
damage.
* The instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points-Inspect the knee bolsters for bending,
twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage.
* The instrument panel brackets, braces, etc.-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other
type of damage.
* The seat belts-Perform the seat belt operational and functional checks. Refer to Repairs and
Inspections Required After a Collision (See: Seat Belts).
* The instrument panel cross car beam-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of
damage.
* The instrument panel mounting points and brackets-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any
other type of damage.
* The seats and seat mounting points-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of
damage.
* The roof and headliner mounting points.
Accident With Frontal Air Bag Deployment - Component Replacement and Inspections
After a collision involving air bag deployment, replace the following components.
* Passenger instrument panel air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Front and/or side impact sensors
* Driver/Passenger seat side air bag, if deployed
* Seat back cover on if side seat air bag is deployed
* Driver/Passenger seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
Perform additional inspections on the following components.
* Steering wheel air bag coil and the coil wiring pigtail-Inspect for melting, scorching, or other
damage due to excessive heat.
* Mounting points or mounting hardware for the passenger instrument panel air bag, steering wheel
air bag, SDM, seat side air bag (if deployed) and seat belt anchor and/or retractor
pretensioners-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed.
Accident With Side Seat Air Bag Deployment - Component Replacement and Inspections
After a collision involving driver/passenger side seat air bag deployment, replace the following
components.
* Left/right side impact sensors on the side of the impact.
* Left/right roof rail air bag on the side of the impact.
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), if SDM has DTC B0052 56.
* Inflatable restraint seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioner.
* Driver or passenger seat back cushion cover replacement.
Warning
Do not repair or replace the seat stitching or seams in the seat back trim cover with an internal
mounted seat side airbag module. Replace the complete seat back trim cover from the OEM.
Non-OEM seat stitching may cause improper airbag deployment which could result in personal
injury.
Perform additional inspections on the following components.
* Mounting points or mounting hardware for the side impact sensors, and driver/passenger side
seat air bags on the side of impact-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component
as needed.
* Mounting points, mounting hardware, headliner and trim pieces for the left/right roof rail air bag on
the side of impact-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System
Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 10748
* Mounting points or mounting hardware for the SDM and seat belt anchor and/or retractor
pretensioners-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed.
* The seat cushion frame
* The seat recliner and cover, if equipped
* The seat adjuster
* The seat back frame
* Door trim assembly
* Impacted seat cushion side covers and switches
Impact Sensor Replacement Guidelines
The impact sensor replacement policy requires replacing sensors in the area of the accident
damage. The area of accident damage is defined as the portion of the vehicle which is crushed,
bent, or damaged due to a collision. An example of this would be a moderate collision where the
front of the vehicle impacts a object. If the vehicle has an impact sensor mounted forward of the
radiator, it must be replaced.
* Replace the impact sensor whether or not the air bags have deployed.
* Replace the impact sensor even if it appears to be undamaged.
Impact sensor damage which is not visible, such as slight bending of the mounting bracket or cuts
in the wire insulation, can cause improper operation of the SIR system. Do not try to determine
whether the impact sensor is undamaged, replace the impact sensor. Also, if you follow a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) procedure and a malfunctioning impact sensor is indicated, replace
the impact sensor.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Diagrams > Page 10753
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical Center
Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Diagrams > Page 10754
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical Center Identification
Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint
System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint
System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10764
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint
System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10765
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint
System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10766
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11
> Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11
> Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10772
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11
> Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10773
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11
> Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10774
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views
Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Identification Views
SIR Identification Views
The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components
available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling
for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair).
1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the
passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front
door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger
Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if
equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if
equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom
of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near
the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding
on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper
rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower
rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near
the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the
driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver
seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of
the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver
front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the
steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left
Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10779
Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components
1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10780
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10781
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10782
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10783
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X1
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10787
X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10788
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Procedures
Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil Centering
Caution: The new SIR coil assembly will be centered. Improper alignment of the SIR coil assembly
may damage the unit, causing an inflatable restraint malfunction.
1. Verify the following conditions before centering the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR)
steering wheel module coil:
* The wheels on the vehicle are straight ahead.
* The centering mark (1) of the steering shaft is in the 6 o'clock position.
2. Turn the lobe of the clock spring clockwise until the coil ribbon stops. Do not force. 3. Turn the
lobe of the clock spring counterclockwise approximately 3 turns to the Neutral position.
4. Properly align until the centering window turns yellow (1). This indicates the CENTER position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10791
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Removal and Replacement
Steering Wheel Inflatable Restraint Module Coil Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views
Impact Sensor: Locations SIR Identification Views
SIR Identification Views
The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components
available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling
for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair).
1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the
passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front
door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger
Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if
equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if
equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom
of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near
the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding
on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper
rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower
rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near
the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the
driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver
seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of
the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver
front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the
steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left
Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10796
Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10797
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Left Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10798
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10799
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10800
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left
B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10801
B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10802
B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10803
B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10804
B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10805
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor
Replacement
Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 10808
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front
Side Door
Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 10809
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear
Side Door
Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D
Date: January 28, 2011
Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat
Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic
Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010
Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints).
Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell
phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to
the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the
electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag
and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The
electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045,
B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic
device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM
and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the
DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition).
Note
Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the
passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the
SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the
electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat.
Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the
future.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference
Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical
Interference
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D
Date: January 28, 2011
Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat
Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic
Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010
Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints).
Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell
phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to
the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the
electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag
and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The
electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045,
B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic
device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM
and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the
DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition).
Note
Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the
passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the
SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the
electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat.
Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the
future.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 10818
Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With
Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing
System
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE
SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT
VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY
ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN
OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF
SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED.
The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that
will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an
infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the
right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly,
sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger
sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by
GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or
between the occupant and the seat fabric.
Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY
SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM
ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR
SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE
APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH
IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE
NECESSARY BY SUCH USE.
Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers.
Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat
heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other
materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing
System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to
the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and
either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the
passenger air bag.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10819
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Passenger Seat Components
1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C
Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85
Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
(KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10820
Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams
K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10821
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set
Side Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10830
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10831
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC
B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10832
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set
Side Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021
Set
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001
Date: March 10, 2011
Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM)
Models:
2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Condition
Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently.
When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02,
B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E.
This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on
the lower cushion on the affected side.
Cause
The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat
mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary,
but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as
intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The
source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body
harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat
cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger
seat cushion.
Correction
Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with
service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the
kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow
the steps below.
Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag
modules.
Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only
one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors.
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI.
Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with
bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002.
2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it
back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to
Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI.
3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10838
Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire
colors are matched when installing into the new connector.
4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to
the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize
wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape
on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals.
Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands.
5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install
the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the
white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in).
Align the seals with the wire insulation.
6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used
not to position the wire too far forward as it may
interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion
harness.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10839
7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp
tool, jaw 1 (1).
The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector
shown).
Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal.
Warning
DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering
irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or
damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled
soldering iron when working on SIR circuits.
8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp.
9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position
assurance (CPA) (1).
Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the
connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness.
10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue
terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto
the connector ends.
11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on
both sides of the connections.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR
Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10840
12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the
back of the connector.
Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent
Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness.
13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat.
Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure
on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn
the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has
been corrected. If the code is still current,
refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module Indicator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information
Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A
Date: March 24, 2011
Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom
Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE
HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS
RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED
DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE
OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS
INCURRED.
You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far
forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been
designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle
has its own specifically designed head restraint.
The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head
restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or
head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or
head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket
comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed.
Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this
may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper
positioning of the passenger within the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Knee Bolster Panel Replacement
Knee Diverter: Service and Repair Driver Knee Bolster Panel Replacement
Driver Knee Bolster Panel Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Knee Bolster Panel Replacement > Page 10852
Knee Diverter: Service and Repair Driver Knee Bolster Reinforcement Replacement
Driver Knee Bolster Reinforcement Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views
Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Identification Views
SIR Identification Views
The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components
available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling
for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair).
1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the
passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front
door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger
Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if
equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if
equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom
of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near
the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding
on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper
rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower
rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near
the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the
driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver
seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of
the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver
front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the
steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left
Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10858
Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components
1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10859
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10860
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10861
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10862
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant
Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory
Electrical Interference
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D
Date: January 28, 2011
Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat
Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic
Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010
Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints).
Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell
phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to
the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the
electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag
and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The
electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045,
B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic
device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM
and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the
DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition).
Note
Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the
passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the
SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the
electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat.
Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the
future.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Diagrams > Page 10871
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Air Bag Systems/Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Air
Bag Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or
Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Diagrams > Page 10872
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Air Bag Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical
Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and
ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions
Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E
Date: October 21, 2010
Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER
H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints).
The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are
several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts.
Overspool Lock
There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may
experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly
enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when
customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the
retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs
engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the
webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the
locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT
replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by
following the recommendation listed below.
Recommendation
Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of
webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when
released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now
function properly.
Vehicle Sensing
This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions:
- The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR
rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering).
- It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or
side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California.
- It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a
locked condition.
In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked.
When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt
should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks
intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly.
Web Sensing
This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at
an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To
observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as
"intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly.
Automatic Locking (ALR)
When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down
mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers
may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to
the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically
cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function).
Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only,
as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate
the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the
operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving
maneuvers.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 10877
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation
Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation > Page 10880
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Center Belt Replacement
Rear Seat Center Belt Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation > Page 10881
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Retractor Side Belt Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Retractor Side Belt Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation > Page 10882
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp
On/Buckling Issues
Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A
Date: February 02, 2011
Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints).
This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat
belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle
release button sticking.
Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages
being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers,
paper and coins can also contribute to this condition.
Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the
customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the
function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the
fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the
customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a
notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative
buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the
customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating
position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the
law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system.
Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do
not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a
spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle.
Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern.
1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any
debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to
vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If
the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly.
3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If
sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a
substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle
assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense.
4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement.
Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the
customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the
function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the
customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by
the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department
management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating
position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department
management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids
ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware
that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system.
5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional
Checks in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp
On/Buckling Issues > Page 10891
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints
- Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues
Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling
Issues
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A
Date: February 02, 2011
Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints).
This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat
belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle
release button sticking.
Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages
being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers,
paper and coins can also contribute to this condition.
Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the
customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the
function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the
fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the
customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a
notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative
buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the
customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating
position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the
law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system.
Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do
not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a
spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle.
Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern.
1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any
debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to
vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If
the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly.
3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If
sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a
substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle
assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense.
4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement.
Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the
customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the
function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the
customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by
the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department
management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating
position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department
management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids
ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware
that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system.
5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional
Checks in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints
- Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 10897
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability
Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button
Availability
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A
Date: June 04, 2009
Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service
Models:
2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to
update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002
(Section 09 - Restraints).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................
All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the
button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat
belt retractor assembly does not need replacement.
Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation
procedure.
Parts Information
For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or
Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the
appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability
Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button
Availability
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A
Date: June 04, 2009
Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service
Models:
2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to
update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002
(Section 09 - Restraints).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................
All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the
button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat
belt retractor assembly does not need replacement.
Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation
procedure.
Parts Information
For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or
Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the
appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement > Page 10909
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Seat Buckle Side Belt Replacement
Rear Seat Buckle Side Belt Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Passenger Seat Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 10913
1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C
Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85
Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
(KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 10914
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams
B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger
F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 10915
F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passsenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 10916
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt
Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F
Date: June 23, 2010
Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability
Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior
HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede:
This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty
Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints).
Important:
DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint.
The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient
belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt
extensions (extenders) should be minimal.
Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks
produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15
in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the
extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle
will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is
extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended.
Important:
Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when
you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender.
Parts Information
For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or
Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the
appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact
the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada.
Warranty Information
^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their
specific vehicles.
^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the
dealers.
^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Guide Track > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Seat Belt Guide Track: Service and Repair
Driver or Passenger Seat Shoulder Belt Guide Adjuster Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions
Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking
Conditions
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E
Date: October 21, 2010
Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic)
Models:
2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER
H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints).
The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are
several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts.
Overspool Lock
There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may
experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly
enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when
customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the
retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs
engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the
webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the
locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT
replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by
following the recommendation listed below.
Recommendation
Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of
webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when
released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now
function properly.
Vehicle Sensing
This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions:
- The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR
rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering).
- It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or
side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California.
- It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a
locked condition.
In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked.
When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt
should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks
intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly.
Web Sensing
This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at
an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To
observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as
"intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly.
Automatic Locking (ALR)
When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down
mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers
may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to
the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically
cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function).
Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only,
as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate
the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the
operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving
maneuvers.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 10928
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 10929
Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A
Date: June 04, 2009
Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service
Models:
2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to
update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002
(Section 09 - Restraints).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................
All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the
button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat
belt retractor assembly does not need replacement.
Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation
procedure.
Parts Information
For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or
Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the
appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10930
Seat Belt Retractor: Diagrams
F112D Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Driver
F112P Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10931
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10932
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair
Rear Seat Retractor Side Belt Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Seat Belt Tensioner: Procedures
Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping
Scrapping Procedure
During the course of a vehicles useful life, certain situations may arise which will necessitate the
disposal of a live (undeployed) pretensioner. The following information covers the proper
procedures for the disposing of a live (undeployed) pretensioner. Deploy the pretensioner before
disposal. Do not dispose of a live (undeployed) pretensioner through normal disposal channels until
the pretensioner has been deployed. The following information covers the proper procedures for
the disposing of a live (undeployed) pretensioner.
* After replacement of a pretensioner under warranty. The pretensioner may need to be returned
undeployed to the original manufacturer of pretensioner.
* If the vehicle is the subject of a Product Liability report related to the SIR system and is subject to
a Preliminary Investigation (GM-1241). Do not alter the SIR system in any manner.
* If the vehicle is involved in a campaign affecting the pretensioners. Follow the instructions in the
Campaign Service Bulletin for proper SIR handling procedures.
Deployment Procedures
The pretensioner can be deployed inside or outside of the vehicle. The method used depends upon
the final disposition of the vehicle. Review the following procedures in order to determine which will
work best in a given situation.
Deployment Inside the Vehicle
Refer to Inflatable Restraint Module Handling and Scrapping () for deploying the pretensioner
inside vehicle under Vehicle Scrapping Procedure.
Deployment Outside Vehicle for Seat Belt Pretensioners
Deploy the seat belt pretensioners outside of the vehicle when the vehicle will be returned to
service. Situations that require deployment outside of the vehicle include the following:
* Using the SIR diagnostics, you determine that the seat belt pretensioner is malfunctioning.
* The pretensioner pigtail (if equipped) is damaged.
* The pretensioner connector is damaged.
* The pretensioner connector terminal is damaged.
Deployment and disposal of a malfunctioning seat belt pretensioner is subject to any required
retention period.
Warning
In order to prevent accidental deployment of the pretensioner which could cause personal injury, do
not dispose of an undeployed pretensioner as normal shop waste. The undeployed pretensioner
contains substances that could cause severe illness or personal injury if the sealed container is
damaged during disposal. Use the following deployment procedures to safely dispose of an
undeployed pretensioner. Failure to dispose of a pretensioner as instructed may be a violation of
federal, state, or local laws.
Warning
When you are deploying a pretensioner for disposal, perform the deployment procedures in the
order listed. Failure to follow the procedures in the order listed may result in personal injury.
Special Tools
* J 39401-B SIR Deployment Fixture
* J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10937
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses.
4. Remove the seat belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 5. When carrying a pretensioner to the
deployment area keep the open end of pretensioner pointed away from the body.
6. Clear a space on the ground about 1.85 M (6 ft) in diameter for deployment of the pretensioner.
If possible, use a paved, outdoor location free of
activity. Otherwise, use a space free of activity on the shop floor. Make sure you have sufficient
ventilation.
7. Make sure no loose or flammable objects are in the area. 8. Place the J 39401-B SIR
Deployment Fixture in the center of the cleared area. 9. Fill the fixture plastic reservoir with water or
sand.
10. Mount the pretensioner (1) in the SIR deployment fixture (3) with the open end facing up using
the following mounting method.
1. Adjust and secure the J 39401-B arms (4) to the deployment fixture (3). 2. To mount, use the
proper size bolt (2) and nut (5) with washers in order to secure the pretensioner (1) to the
deployment fixture brackets (4). 3. Securely tighten all fasteners prior to deployment.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10938
11. Inspect the J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness and the appropriate pigtail adapter for damage.
Replace as needed. 12. Short the 2 SIR deployment harness (1) leads together using one banana
plug seated into the other. 13. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter (2) to the SIR deployment
harness (1).
14. Extend the SIR deployment harness and adapter to full length from the deployment fixture.
15. Connect the pretensioner (1) to the adapter (2) on the deployment harness (3).
Note: The rapid gas expansion involved with deploying a pretensioner is very loud. Notify all the
people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the seat belt pretensioner.
16. Clear the area of people.
Warning
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10939
When you are deploying a pretensioner for disposal, perform the deployment procedures in the
order listed. Failure to follow the procedures in the order listed may result in personal injury.
17. Separate the 2 banana plugs on the SIR deployment harness.
Note: When the seat belt pretensioner deploys, the deployment fixture may jump about 30 cm (1 ft)
vertically. This is a normal reaction of the seat belt pretensioner due to the force of the rapid
expansion of gas inside the pretensioner.
18. Place a 12 V minimum/2 A minimum power source (i.e., vehicle battery) near the shorted end
of the harness. 19. Connect the SIR deployment harness wires to the power source. Pretensioner
deployment will occur when contact is made. 20. Disconnect the SIR deployment harness from the
power source after the pretensioner deploys.
21. Seat one banana plug into the other in order to short the deployment harness leads. 22. If the
pretensioner did not deploy, disconnect the adapter and discontinue the procedure. Contact the
Technical Assistance Group. Otherwise,
proceed to the following steps.
23. Put on a pair of shop gloves. 24. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the pretensioner as soon
as possible. 25. Inspect the pigtail adapter and the SIR deployment harness. Replace as needed.
26. Dispose of the deployed pretensioner through normal refuse channels. 27. Wash hands with a
mild soap.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10940
Seat Belt Tensioner: Removal and Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10941
Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Cover Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10942
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views
Impact Sensor: Locations SIR Identification Views
SIR Identification Views
The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components
available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling
for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair).
1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the
passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front
door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger
Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if
equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if
equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom
of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near
the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding
on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper
rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower
rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near
the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the
driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver
seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of
the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver
front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the
steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left
Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10948
Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10949
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Left Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10950
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10951
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10952
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left
B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10953
B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10954
B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10955
B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10956
B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 10957
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor
Replacement
Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page
10960
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front
Side Door
Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page
10961
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear
Side Door
Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Passenger Seat Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 10965
1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C
Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85
Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
(KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 10966
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams
B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger
F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 10967
F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passsenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 10968
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference
Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical
Interference
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D
Date: January 28, 2011
Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat
Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic
Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010
Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints).
Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell
phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to
the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the
electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag
and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The
electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045,
B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic
device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM
and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the
DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition).
Note
Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the
passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the
SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the
electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat.
Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the
future.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 10973
Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With
Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing
System
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE
SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT
VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY
ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN
OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF
SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED.
The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that
will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an
infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the
right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly,
sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger
sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by
GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or
between the occupant and the seat fabric.
Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY
SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM
ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR
SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE
APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH
IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE
NECESSARY BY SUCH USE.
Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers.
Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat
heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other
materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing
System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to
the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and
either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the
passenger air bag.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10974
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Passenger Seat Components
1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C
Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85
Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
(KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10975
Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams
K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10976
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10981
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10982
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10983
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10984
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 10985
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Application and ID
Antenna Cable: Application and ID
Antenna Coaxial/Connector Cable Identification Table
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement
Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement > Page 10993
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Connector
Replacement
Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Connector Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement > Page 10994
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Radio Antenna Cable Extension Radio End Cable
Replacement
Radio Antenna Cable Extension Radio End Cable Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module,
(Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
Theft Deterrent Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch
(For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch
(For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11002
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch
(For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11003
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11008
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless
Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote
Start
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A
Date: October 26, 2009
Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information
Models:
2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT
2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse
2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent
2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY
Attention:
This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information).
This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM
Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems.
Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use
entire kit for warranty or repair work.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless
Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 11014
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless
Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 11015
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless
Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 11016
Parts Information
Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems
Transmitter Battery 12493150
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11021
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11022
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11023
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11024
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11025
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11026
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11027
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11028
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11029
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11030
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11031
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11032
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11033
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11034
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11035
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11036
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11037
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11038
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11039
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11040
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11041
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11042
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11043
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11044
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11045
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11046
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11047
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11048
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11049
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11050
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11051
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11052
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11053
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11054
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11055
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11056
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11057
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11058
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11059
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11060
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11061
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11062
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11063
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11064
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11065
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11066
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11067
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11068
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11069
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11070
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11071
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11072
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11073
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11074
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11075
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11076
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11077
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11078
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11079
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11080
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11081
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11082
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11083
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11084
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11085
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11086
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11087
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11088
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11089
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11090
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11091
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11092
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11093
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11094
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11095
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11096
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11097
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11098
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11099
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11100
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11101
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11102
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11103
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11104
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11105
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11106
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11107
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11108
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11109
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11110
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11111
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11112
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11113
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11114
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11115
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11116
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11117
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11118
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11119
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11120
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11121
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11122
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11123
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11124
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11125
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11126
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11127
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11128
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11129
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11130
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11131
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11132
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11133
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11134
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11135
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11136
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11137
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11138
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11139
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11140
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11141
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11142
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11143
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11144
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11145
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11146
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11147
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11148
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11149
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11150
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11151
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11152
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11153
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11154
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11155
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11156
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11157
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11158
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11159
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11160
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11161
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11162
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11163
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11164
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11165
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11166
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11167
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11168
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11169
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11170
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11171
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11172
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11173
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11174
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11175
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11176
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11177
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11178
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11179
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11180
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11181
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11182
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11183
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11184
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11185
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams
Remote Function Schematics
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry >
Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11186
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Tools and Equipment
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-08-44-003B
> Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R)
Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-003B
Date: October 13, 2010
Subject: Buzz Noise During Call When Using Bluetooth(R) (Replace Microphone and Bezel)
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2009-2011
Cadillac DTS, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX, STS (with RPO YQ1 or YQ2), XLR
2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt, Corvette, Equinox, HHR, Impala, Malibu, Silverado, Suburban,
Tahoe, TrailBlazer, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro 2009-2010 GMC Envoy 2009-2011
GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Torrent 2009-2010
HUMMER H2, H3 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY, VUE 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped
with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth (UPF)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to replace the microphone and bezel (if needed) and
update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-44-003A (Section 08 - Body
and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a buzz noise (from the land-line side only) during a call.
On any vehicle equipped with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth(R) (UPF), an electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) buzz can be heard from the land-line side only of the phone during a
Bluetooth(R) phone call made with an older model global system for mobile communications
(GSM) phone. The buzz is only heard with older model GSM phones and is dependent on the
distance of the phone from the microphone. The newer 3G GSM phones or other cellular phones
(CDMA, TDMA, etc.) have not shown this concern.
Correction
Equipped with Headliner Microphone (Cobalt, HHR (non-sunroof) H2, H3)
A new microphone and bezel has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing
microphone with GM P/N 20951265. Also replace the bezel. Refer to the parts information table
below for correct color/part number.
Equipped with Overhead Console Microphone
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-08-44-003B
> Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) > Page 11196
A new microphone has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing microphone
with GM P/N 20951265.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-08-44-003B > Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R)
Cellular Phone Microphone: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Buzz Noise When Using
Bluetooth(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-003B
Date: October 13, 2010
Subject: Buzz Noise During Call When Using Bluetooth(R) (Replace Microphone and Bezel)
Models:
2009-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2009-2011
Cadillac DTS, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX, STS (with RPO YQ1 or YQ2), XLR
2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt, Corvette, Equinox, HHR, Impala, Malibu, Silverado, Suburban,
Tahoe, TrailBlazer, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro 2009-2010 GMC Envoy 2009-2011
GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Torrent 2009-2010
HUMMER H2, H3 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY, VUE 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped
with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth (UPF)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to replace the microphone and bezel (if needed) and
update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-44-003A (Section 08 - Body
and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a buzz noise (from the land-line side only) during a call.
On any vehicle equipped with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth(R) (UPF), an electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) buzz can be heard from the land-line side only of the phone during a
Bluetooth(R) phone call made with an older model global system for mobile communications
(GSM) phone. The buzz is only heard with older model GSM phones and is dependent on the
distance of the phone from the microphone. The newer 3G GSM phones or other cellular phones
(CDMA, TDMA, etc.) have not shown this concern.
Correction
Equipped with Headliner Microphone (Cobalt, HHR (non-sunroof) H2, H3)
A new microphone and bezel has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing
microphone with GM P/N 20951265. Also replace the bezel. Refer to the parts information table
below for correct color/part number.
Equipped with Overhead Console Microphone
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-08-44-003B > Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) > Page 11202
A new microphone has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing microphone
with GM P/N 20951265.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11203
Cellular Phone Microphone: Diagrams
B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11204
Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair
Mobile Telephone Microphone Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired
Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing
Impaired
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B
Date: February 11, 2010
Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007
Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except
2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped
vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers.
Note
On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code
UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled.
OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY)
General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to
our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as
well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability
to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN
lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty.
TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access
to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency
button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages
back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free
Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate.
OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY.
The Reimbursement Program
This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R).
Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take
advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease
and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form
submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic
reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from
OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center.
How to Order
To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com.
The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness,
the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide.
Warranty Information
The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is
covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard
GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft
Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web.
Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through
normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11209
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11210
Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Radio Does Not Mute
Enough When Using OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-46-001
Date: January 27, 2010
Subject: Radio Does Not Mute Enough When OnStar(R) Turn-by Turn Navigation Directions Are
Announced (Increase Volume Setting or Request Soft Mute Feature Change Through OnStar(R)
Customer Service)
Models:
2009-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009
Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Condition
Some customers may comment that when the radio is on, it does not mute enough when the
OnStar(R) Turn-by-Turn Navigation directions are announced.
Cause
This condition may be caused by the customer improperly setting the radio volume high enough
when the Turn-by-Turn Navigation messages are played.
The 2009 and 2010 models with OnStar(R) initiates a "soft mute" feature when the radio is on
during Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. During the announcement, the radio can
still be heard at a very low volume. Previous model years initiated a "hard mute" during this
function which completely muted the radio audio.
Correction
Instruct the customer to increase the radio volume while getting the Turn-by-Turn Navigation
direction announcements. You can control the message volume using the radio volume control,
only when the Turn-by-Turn navigation messages are playing.
Some customers that were accustomed to previous model vehicles with the "hard mute" feature
may be dissatisfied with the function of the "soft mute" feature. For those customers, contact the
OnStar(R) Customer Service Center by pushing the Blue OnStar(R) Button to speak to a trained
Advisor and request a change be made to the vehicle from the "soft mute" setting to that of the
hard or complete muting of audio playback during Turn by Turn directions. OnStar(R) will then
create a case number. Advise the customer that the vehicle update should be completed Over the
Air within 5 business days, after which an OnStar(R) Customer Care advisor will follow-up with the
customer to verify the fix. If the customer does not hear back from OnStar(R) within a week, advise
them to press the Blue OnStar(R) Button and ask for Customer Care to check status.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11211
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11212
Communications Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11213
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11214
Communications Control Module: Diagrams
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1)
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11215
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11216
Communications Control Module: Service and Repair
Communication Interface Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11221
Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7)
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11222
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11223
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11227
17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11228
18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp
- Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11229
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams
B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11230
B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11231
B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11232
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement
Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement
1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
2. Disconnect the sensor harness. 3. Remove the sensor from the sensor housing.
The sensor housing must be painted if replaced. If reinstalled, painting will not be necessary.
Important: Do Not grind off alignment tabs.
4. Sand/grind sonic weld plastic residue from the fascia.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 11235
5. Apply structural adhesive epoxy, Lord Fusor(TM) 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating
surface.
6. Using the alignment tabs, install the sensor housing to the fascia. 7. Allow adhesive to cure
according to manufacturer's directions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 11236
8. Install the sensor to the sensor housing. 9. Connect the electrical harness.
10. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 11237
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Replacement
Rear Object Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
2. Disconnect electrical from the rear object sensor. 3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and
remove the rear object sensor.
Installation Procedure
Note: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will cause the sensor to be
inoperative.
1. Paint the rear object sensor. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Body and
Frame/Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and
ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems).
2. Ensure the paint does not exceed 6 mils. Use a paint thickness gauge suitable for non-ferrous
metals. Refer to Paint Gauges ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing
Replacement > Page 11238
3. Insert the sensor into the housing. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the rear object sensor.
5. Install the rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams
P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11242
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair
Information Center Telltale Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Rear Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams
Rear Vision Camera: Diagrams
B87 Rearview Camera (UVC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Rear Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11246
Rear Vision Camera: Service and Repair
Rearview Camera Image Display Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 11250
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams
P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ)
P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 11251
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 11252
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair
Driver Information Display Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10
> OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10
> OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11261
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C
> Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number
Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C
> Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11267
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output
Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia
Interface Information
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-013C
Date: October 05, 2010
Subject: Information on USB Command and Control Multimedia Player Interface/List of Supported
Devices
Models:
2010-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade
Models, SRX 2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2009-2011 Chevrolet HHR, Malibu 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Camaro, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, Traverse 2011 Chevrolet Cruze
2010-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Terrain, Yukon 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Solstice
Coupe 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, SKY 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK All Equipped with Convenience and
Connectivity Package - RPOs KTA, KTB, SRJ, U4H, UUI, UUJ, UUM, UUN, U2S, U2X, U2Y, UAV,
UYZ, UY5
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 09-08-44-013B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
USB Radio and MP3 Functionality
The USB (Universal Serial Bus) will be a USB 2.0 port on the radio faceplate, on the IP or in the
center console. This interface will give the customer the additional functionality of iPod/MP3
command and control. Customers now have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the
USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio.
The customer will also have playback capability with a USB memory stick (only MP3 and WMA
files).
Note
Not all memory sticks are supported.
Customers have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB
connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The iPod will be charging
while connected to the radio. Note
Video from the iPod is NOT capable of being transferred to a Navigation radio display.
For the Chevrolet Cobalt, HHR and Malibu; Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice; and Saturn AURA, SKY, the
USB port is on the faceplate of the radio. For all other models, it is located in the center console or
IP.
For the Cadillac CTS only, a special iPod cable (USB and AUX cable) is needed. This special cable
comes delivered with the vehicle. In all cases, the iPod will be charging while connected to the
radio through the USB port when the vehicle is running or the RPA is active.
Problems with iPod Not Connecting
If the infotainment system does not operate properly when using a device connected through the
USB port, this may be due to an incompatible media device.
Important DO NOT replace the radio or multimedia interface module due to a customer device
incompatibility issue.
Verify the customer's media device is validated for this system using the list below. If the
customer's device is a validated device for this system, follow the SI diagnostic procedure to isolate
the fault. If the customer's device is not on the validated device list, explain to the customer that
their particular unit is not compatible with the system.
Troubleshooting Tips for iPod Devices
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output
Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia
Interface Information > Page 11273
1. Check the version of the iPod/MP3 to confirm that it is supported. 2. Unplug and Re-insert the
iPod to verify the customer complaint. 3. Verify the battery charge of the iPod. A low battery
condition on the iPod may not allow it to connect to the radio. The iPod may need to be
charged before it can be controlled by the radio.
4. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio or is having general
iPod/MP3 connection issues (and they have a
supported device), they may need to reset their iPod. To reset the iPod:
- For the iPod Nanos and Classic , Toggle the Hold switch on and off. (Slide it to Hold, then turn it
off again. Press and hold the Menu and Center (Select) buttons simultaneously until the Apple logo
appears, about 6 to 8 seconds. You may need to repeat this step.
- For the iPod Touch and iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until
the red slider appears, then slide the slider.
5. Have the customer check their cable for quality.
- Aftermarket cables can wear from use. The customer may need to purchase a new USB cable.
- Verify that cable extensions are not present. The extra capacitance may cause too large a signal
drop for the iPod to communicate with the radio.
6. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio with an iPod
connected (and they have a supported device), the
customer may need to download the latest firmware from the Apple website (Please visit
www.apple.com for more information).
Validated Apple Device - Both Charge/Support Digital Audio (For All RPOs)
For further information on identifying iPod models, please visit http://support.apple.com/kb/ht1353
Other Validated Device- Both Charge/Support Digital Audio for Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Camaro,
Equinox Only (RPO KTA or KTB)
Important: Must be set to MTP (Mass Transfer Protocol) in the MP3 Player device setting.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output
Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia
Interface Information > Page 11274
Important These devices (and additional MP3 players) may be capable of connecting to the other
USB options by internally setting the MP3 device to MSC (Mass Storage Class) mode. In this
mode, the USB port will see the device as a flash drive. Please have the customer refer to their
MP3 device manual on how to set the device to MSC. If the device is not able to be set to MSC, the
customer must use the AUX jack.
Note
MTP mode must be used in order to transfer ANY Digital Rights Management (DRM) protected
content.
Non-Validated Apple Device
Important The devices above are NOT supported by USB interface. Apple does not support digital
media transfer from these devices through the USB port. The customer can still listen to their older
iPod on vehicle by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo
cable.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output
Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia
Interface Information > Page 11275
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output
Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11276
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams
X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG)
X83 Auxiliary Audio Input (without UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output
Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11277
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Television / Monitor: Diagrams
P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG)
P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11281
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11282
Television / Monitor: Service and Repair
Video Display Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component
Information > Service and Repair
DVD Player: Service and Repair
Audio/Video Disc Player Adapter Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System
Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Entertainment System Control Module: Diagrams
T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System
Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11289
Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair
Multimedia Player Interface Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number
Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Global Positioning System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number
Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11298
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C
> Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly
Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C
> Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11304
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B
> Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired
Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing
Impaired
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B
Date: February 11, 2010
Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007
Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except
2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped
vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers.
Note
On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code
UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled.
OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY)
General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to
our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as
well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability
to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN
lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty.
TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access
to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency
button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages
back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free
Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate.
OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY.
The Reimbursement Program
This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R).
Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take
advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease
and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form
submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic
reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from
OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center.
How to Order
To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com.
The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness,
the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide.
Warranty Information
The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is
covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard
GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft
Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web.
Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through
normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B
> Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11309
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B >
Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired
Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing
Impaired
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B
Date: February 11, 2010
Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007
Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except
2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped
vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers.
Note
On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code
UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled.
OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY)
General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to
our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as
well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability
to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN
lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty.
TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access
to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency
button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages
back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free
Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate.
OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY.
The Reimbursement Program
This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R).
Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take
advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease
and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form
submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic
reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from
OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center.
How to Order
To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com.
The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness,
the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide.
Warranty Information
The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is
covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard
GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft
Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web.
Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through
normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B >
Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11315
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory
Sys Operation
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B
Date: January 15, 2010
Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with
Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative
(Reprogram Memory Seat Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All
Built Prior to November 2, 2009
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns:
- The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will
not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may
also experience the inability to move the seat up or down.
- The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is
engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle
in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after
taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt
position and not returning to the memory position at all.
- The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory
Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent
operation.
- The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the
inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages
that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern.
Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration.
Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
> Page 11321
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11322
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11323
Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11324
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11325
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11326
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11327
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11331
Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11332
Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update
Navigation Module: Recalls Campaign - Navigation System Update
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09221C
Date: January 27, 2011
Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System
Update - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of
bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009.
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick
Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will
address multiple concerns with the navigation system.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate
Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS
Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles.
If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at
their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service
procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A
CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash
Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the
programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from
the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT
contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive.
For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0.
Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all
vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles
involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11342
from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events.
Service Procedure
Note
This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB
programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to
update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased
during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT
deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved
storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is
downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device.
1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will
udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the
Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS
procedures and Control Module References in SI.
Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of
12-15 volts.
2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool
EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the
ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and
Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software
- Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for
programming instructions, if required.
7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your
USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available
USB Drives box.
8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the
bottom of the SPS Special Function screen.
Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status
bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message:
"Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port."
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the
software download has been completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11343
11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen
to appear on the display.
Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the
viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the
"Ok" button in the following step.
12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title
"Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt
power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will
appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command
and begin programming.
13. A status bar indicates progress.
Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of
the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as
indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than
40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not
remove the USB flash drive.
14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen
will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the
entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will
appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will
automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming
will be complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11344
15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and
the version number U413.
Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow
viewing of the programming complete screen and version number.
16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST
now be calibrated.
Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not
operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed.
Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS
programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition.
Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the
vehicle being serviced.
19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool
and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select
the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or
the vehicle build
information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with.
22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon
completion of this step, the radio is updated.
Note
At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful
by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version
U413 displayed.
Note
The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade.
Warranty Transaction Information
Submit a claim using the table below.
* USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no
longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost
of a USB flash drive.
** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The
calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the
field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action,
remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB
programming events.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11345
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09221C
Date: January 27, 2011
Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System
Update - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of
bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009.
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick
Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will
address multiple concerns with the navigation system.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate
Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS
Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles.
If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at
their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service
procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A
CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash
Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the
programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from
the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT
contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive.
For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0.
Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all
vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles
involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11351
from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events.
Service Procedure
Note
This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB
programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to
update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased
during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT
deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved
storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is
downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device.
1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will
udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the
Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS
procedures and Control Module References in SI.
Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of
12-15 volts.
2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool
EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the
ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and
Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software
- Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for
programming instructions, if required.
7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your
USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available
USB Drives box.
8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the
bottom of the SPS Special Function screen.
Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status
bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message:
"Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port."
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the
software download has been completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11352
11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen
to appear on the display.
Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the
viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the
"Ok" button in the following step.
12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title
"Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt
power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will
appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command
and begin programming.
13. A status bar indicates progress.
Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of
the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as
indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than
40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not
remove the USB flash drive.
14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen
will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the
entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will
appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will
automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming
will be complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11353
15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and
the version number U413.
Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow
viewing of the programming complete screen and version number.
16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST
now be calibrated.
Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not
operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed.
Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS
programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition.
Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the
vehicle being serviced.
19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool
and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select
the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or
the vehicle build
information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with.
22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon
completion of this step, the radio is updated.
Note
At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful
by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version
U413 displayed.
Note
The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade.
Warranty Transaction Information
Submit a claim using the table below.
* USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no
longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost
of a USB flash drive.
** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The
calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the
field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action,
remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB
programming events.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C >
Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11354
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Calibration Criteria
Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail.
If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated.
Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or
body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal
position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver
applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data.
Calibration Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4.
Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM
menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position
Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 11360
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier,
Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams
Amplifier: Diagrams
T3 Audio Amplifier X1
T3 Audio Amplifier X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier,
Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11365
T3 Audio Amplifier X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier,
Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11366
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier,
Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11367
Amplifier: Service and Repair
Radio Speaker Amplifier Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Automatic
Volume Control > System Information > Diagrams
Automatic Volume Control: Diagrams
B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Automatic
Volume Control > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11371
Automatic Volume Control: Service and Repair
Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc
Player (CD) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Compact Disc Player (CD): Service and Repair
Audio Disc Player and USB Receptacle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio/Stereo
Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D
Date: July 29, 2009
Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise
Suppression Filter)
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the
OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or
decrease in engine speed.
Cause
This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication
Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio.
Correction
Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery
voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached
wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the
single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single
yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground.
Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most
effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical
noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting
the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing
the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding
the capacitor lead.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio/Stereo
Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 11384
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R)
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using
OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D
Date: July 29, 2009
Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise
Suppression Filter)
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the
OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or
decrease in engine speed.
Cause
This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication
Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio.
Correction
Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery
voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached
wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the
single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single
yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground.
Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most
effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical
noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting
the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing
the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding
the capacitor lead.
Parts Information
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 11390
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations
Signal Processing Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11394
Signal Processing Module: Diagrams
K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11395
Signal Processing Module: Description and Operation
Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation
The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine
the specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO
Code List (See: Application and ID/RPO Code List).
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) is a method used to cancel out undesirable sound generated by
the engine or an open window.
Active Noise Cancellation Control Circuit Operation
An Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system has four main components: the ANC module,
microphone(s), audio amplifier(s), and speaker(s). The microphone is connected to the audio
system and picks up the sound/noise in the vehicle cabin while the speakers produce the
cancellation vibrations. The ANC system is composed of two microphones. The microphones are
centrally located in the headliner to detect noise in the vehicle caused by the engine, or an open
window. The processor analyzes the noise signal and outputs a cancellation signal audio tone
based on positive coefficient and phase change to moderate the engine noise and make the
vehicle seem quieter and without vibration. The ANC system uses the engine revolutions per
minute (RPM) signal from the tachometer to determine the rotational speed in an engine. The ANC
system works within 1500-2500 engine RPM. The cancellation signal is then amplified and a signal
is sent to the speaker and subwoofer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal
Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11396
Signal Processing Module: Service and Repair
Active Noise Cancellation Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams
Speaker: Diagrams
P19AC Speaker - Subwoofer (UZ8)
P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11400
P19G Speaker - Left Front (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11401
P19G Speaker - Left Front (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11402
P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11403
P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11404
P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11405
P19U Speaker - Right Front (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11406
P19U Speaker - Right Front (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11407
P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11408
P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UW6)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11409
P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UZ8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11410
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11413
Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Front Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement
Radio Front Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11414
Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Rear Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement
Radio Rear Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11415
Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Replacement
Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11416
Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Windshield Side Garnish Molding Speaker Replacement
Radio Windshield Side Garnish Molding Speaker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11421
X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11422
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11423
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11424
Accessory Relay: Diagrams
X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1
X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2
X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11425
X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
Theft Deterrent Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired
Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing
Impaired
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B
Date: February 11, 2010
Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired
Models:
2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007
Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except
2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped
vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number
06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers.
Note
On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code
UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled.
OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY)
General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to
our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as
well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability
to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN
lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty.
TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access
to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency
button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages
back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free
Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate.
OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY.
The Reimbursement Program
This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R).
Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take
advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease
and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form
submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic
reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from
OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center.
How to Order
To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com.
The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness,
the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide.
Warranty Information
The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is
covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard
GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft
Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web.
Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through
normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11433
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11434
Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Radio Does Not Mute
Enough When Using OnStar(R)
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-46-001
Date: January 27, 2010
Subject: Radio Does Not Mute Enough When OnStar(R) Turn-by Turn Navigation Directions Are
Announced (Increase Volume Setting or Request Soft Mute Feature Change Through OnStar(R)
Customer Service)
Models:
2009-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009
Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Condition
Some customers may comment that when the radio is on, it does not mute enough when the
OnStar(R) Turn-by-Turn Navigation directions are announced.
Cause
This condition may be caused by the customer improperly setting the radio volume high enough
when the Turn-by-Turn Navigation messages are played.
The 2009 and 2010 models with OnStar(R) initiates a "soft mute" feature when the radio is on
during Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. During the announcement, the radio can
still be heard at a very low volume. Previous model years initiated a "hard mute" during this
function which completely muted the radio audio.
Correction
Instruct the customer to increase the radio volume while getting the Turn-by-Turn Navigation
direction announcements. You can control the message volume using the radio volume control,
only when the Turn-by-Turn navigation messages are playing.
Some customers that were accustomed to previous model vehicles with the "hard mute" feature
may be dissatisfied with the function of the "soft mute" feature. For those customers, contact the
OnStar(R) Customer Service Center by pushing the Blue OnStar(R) Button to speak to a trained
Advisor and request a change be made to the vehicle from the "soft mute" setting to that of the
hard or complete muting of audio playback during Turn by Turn directions. OnStar(R) will then
create a case number. Advise the customer that the vehicle update should be completed Over the
Air within 5 business days, after which an OnStar(R) Customer Care advisor will follow-up with the
customer to verify the fix. If the customer does not hear back from OnStar(R) within a week, advise
them to press the Blue OnStar(R) Button and ask for Customer Care to check status.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11435
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11436
Communications Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11437
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11438
Communications Control Module: Diagrams
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1)
K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11439
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11440
Communications Control Module: Service and Repair
Communication Interface Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page
11449
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number
Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C
Date: December 23, 2010
Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another
Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System
Models:
2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1)
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone
number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these
concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the
OnStar(R) phone number.
Service Procedure
1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech
2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section.
Then select the Special Functions menu.
For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular
Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module.
3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be
displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a
time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft
key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7.
Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been
programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the
blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call
center. If applicable, make sure the
Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call.
10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at
TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should
submit case closing information through the GM infoNET.
Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited
is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If
the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance.
This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically
be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned
> Page 11455
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Entertainment System Control Module: Diagrams
T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11459
Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair
Multimedia Player Interface Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11463
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update
Navigation Module: Recalls Campaign - Navigation System Update
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09221C
Date: January 27, 2011
Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System
Update - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of
bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009.
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick
Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will
address multiple concerns with the navigation system.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate
Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS
Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles.
If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at
their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service
procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A
CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash
Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the
programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from
the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT
contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive.
For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0.
Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all
vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles
involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11472
from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events.
Service Procedure
Note
This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB
programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to
update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased
during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT
deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved
storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is
downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device.
1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will
udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the
Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS
procedures and Control Module References in SI.
Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of
12-15 volts.
2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool
EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the
ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and
Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software
- Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for
programming instructions, if required.
7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your
USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available
USB Drives box.
8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the
bottom of the SPS Special Function screen.
Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status
bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message:
"Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port."
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the
software download has been completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11473
11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen
to appear on the display.
Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the
viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the
"Ok" button in the following step.
12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title
"Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt
power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will
appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command
and begin programming.
13. A status bar indicates progress.
Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of
the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as
indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than
40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not
remove the USB flash drive.
14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen
will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the
entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will
appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will
automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming
will be complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11474
15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and
the version number U413.
Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow
viewing of the programming complete screen and version number.
16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST
now be calibrated.
Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not
operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed.
Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS
programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition.
Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the
vehicle being serviced.
19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool
and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select
the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or
the vehicle build
information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with.
22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon
completion of this step, the radio is updated.
Note
At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful
by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version
U413 displayed.
Note
The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade.
Warranty Transaction Information
Submit a claim using the table below.
* USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no
longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost
of a USB flash drive.
** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The
calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the
field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action,
remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB
programming events.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11475
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update
SERVICE UPDATE
Bulletin No.: 09221C
Date: January 27, 2011
Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System
Update - Expires with Base Warranty
Models:
2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of
bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009.
THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER
VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE
END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD.
Purpose
This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick
Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will
address multiple concerns with the navigation system.
This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in
dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period.
Vehicles Involved
A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin
Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer
Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service,
for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN
breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system
listed below.
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate
Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all
vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved.
Parts Information
For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS
Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles.
If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at
their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service
procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A
CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash
Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the
programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from
the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT
contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive.
For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0.
Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all
vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles
involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11481
from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events.
Service Procedure
Note
This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB
programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive
capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to
update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased
during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT
deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved
storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is
downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device.
1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will
udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the
Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS
procedures and Control Module References in SI.
Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of
12-15 volts.
2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool
EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the
ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and
Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software
- Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for
programming instructions, if required.
7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your
USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available
USB Drives box.
8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the
bottom of the SPS Special Function screen.
Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status
bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message:
"Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port."
10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the
software download has been completed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11482
11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen
to appear on the display.
Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the
viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the
"Ok" button in the following step.
12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title
"Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt
power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will
appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command
and begin programming.
13. A status bar indicates progress.
Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of
the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as
indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than
40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not
remove the USB flash drive.
14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen
will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the
entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will
appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will
automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming
will be complete.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11483
15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and
the version number U413.
Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow
viewing of the programming complete screen and version number.
16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST
now be calibrated.
Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not
operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed.
Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS
programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition.
Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the
vehicle being serviced.
19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool
and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select
the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or
the vehicle build
information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with.
22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon
completion of this step, the radio is updated.
Note
At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful
by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version
U413 displayed.
Note
The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade.
Warranty Transaction Information
Submit a claim using the table below.
* USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no
longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost
of a USB flash drive.
** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The
calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the
field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action,
remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB
programming events.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11484
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11488
Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7)
K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11489
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11490
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11499
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11500
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: >
09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11501
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11507
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11508
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11509
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations
Signal Processing Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11513
Signal Processing Module: Diagrams
K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11514
Signal Processing Module: Description and Operation
Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation
The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine
the specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO
Code List (See: Application and ID/RPO Code List).
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) is a method used to cancel out undesirable sound generated by
the engine or an open window.
Active Noise Cancellation Control Circuit Operation
An Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system has four main components: the ANC module,
microphone(s), audio amplifier(s), and speaker(s). The microphone is connected to the audio
system and picks up the sound/noise in the vehicle cabin while the speakers produce the
cancellation vibrations. The ANC system is composed of two microphones. The microphones are
centrally located in the headliner to detect noise in the vehicle caused by the engine, or an open
window. The processor analyzes the noise signal and outputs a cancellation signal audio tone
based on positive coefficient and phase change to moderate the engine noise and make the
vehicle seem quieter and without vibration. The ANC system uses the engine revolutions per
minute (RPM) signal from the tachometer to determine the rotational speed in an engine. The ANC
system works within 1500-2500 engine RPM. The cancellation signal is then amplified and a signal
is sent to the speaker and subwoofer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11515
Signal Processing Module: Service and Repair
Active Noise Cancellation Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules
Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11524
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11525
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's
Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11526
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules
Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control
Modules
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D
Date: December 08, 2010
Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle
Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion
(Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks
Attention:
This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body
electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the
point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal
surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011
model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System).
Condition
Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions:
- An intermittent no crank/no start
- Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination
- Intermittent service lamp illumination
- Intermittent service message(s) being displayed
The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as
fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector.
This may be caused by any of the following conditions:
- Vibration
- Thermal cycling
- Poor connection/terminal retention
- Micro motion
- A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement
On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent
connections.
On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and
may cause a device to become inoperative.
Representative List of Control Modules and Components
The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected
by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or
component for every vehicle.
- Blower Control Module
- Body Control Module (BCM)
- Communication Interface Module (CIM)
- Cooling Fan Control Module
- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
- Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
- Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11532
- HVAC Actuator
- Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
- Any AIR BAG module
- Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner
- Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner
- An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set:
B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions:
- The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated.
- The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can
no longer be duplicated.
Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above.
1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any
existing history or current DTCs from all of the
control modules (refer to SI).
‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the
connector(s) of the control module/component
which may be causing the condition (refer to SI).
‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control
module/component which may be causing the
condition (refer to SI).
2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component
Connector End Views and Component Locator
documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the
condition.
Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the
actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or
identified without the use of a magnifying glass.
Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown,
as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush
that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin.
3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side
and the harness side of the affected connector(s).
4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present.
5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information:
- DTC Diagnostic Procedure
- Circuit/System Description
- Conditions for Running the DTC
- Conditions for Setting the DTC
- Diagnostic Aids
- Circuit/System Verification
‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated,
then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI).
Repair Order Documentation
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11533
Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so
may result in a chargeback.
- Customer vehicle condition.
- Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or
Service Message.
- Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set.
- After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated?
‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector
name and number on the repair order.
- If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and
additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID
Number MUST be written on the repair order.
Parts Information
Alternate Distributor For All of North America
Note
NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada),
specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to:
Warranty Information (Saab Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11534
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon
the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table
above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11539
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11540
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11544
17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11545
18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp
- Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11546
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams
B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11547
B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11548
B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11549
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor
Housing Replacement
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement
Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement
1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
2. Disconnect the sensor harness. 3. Remove the sensor from the sensor housing.
The sensor housing must be painted if replaced. If reinstalled, painting will not be necessary.
Important: Do Not grind off alignment tabs.
4. Sand/grind sonic weld plastic residue from the fascia.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor
Housing Replacement > Page 11552
5. Apply structural adhesive epoxy, Lord Fusor(TM) 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating
surface.
6. Using the alignment tabs, install the sensor housing to the fascia. 7. Allow adhesive to cure
according to manufacturer's directions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor
Housing Replacement > Page 11553
8. Install the sensor to the sensor housing. 9. Connect the electrical harness.
10. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor
Housing Replacement > Page 11554
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Replacement
Rear Object Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
2. Disconnect electrical from the rear object sensor. 3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and
remove the rear object sensor.
Installation Procedure
Note: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will cause the sensor to be
inoperative.
1. Paint the rear object sensor. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Body and
Frame/Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and
ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems).
2. Ensure the paint does not exceed 6 mils. Use a paint thickness gauge suitable for non-ferrous
metals. Refer to Paint Gauges ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor
Housing Replacement > Page 11555
3. Insert the sensor into the housing. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the rear object sensor.
5. Install the rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Calibration
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Calibration Criteria
Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail.
If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated.
Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or
body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal
position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver
applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data.
Calibration Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4.
Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM
menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position
Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Calibration > Page 11560
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter >
Component Information > Locations
Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Wheel Components
1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11564
Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Diagrams
S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left
S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11565
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Locations
Trailer Connector: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11570
17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11571
18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp
- Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11572
Trailer Connector: Diagrams
X88 Trailer Connector (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair
Trailer Hitch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information >
Locations
Trailer Connector: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information >
Locations > Page 11579
17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information >
Locations > Page 11580
18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp
- Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information >
Locations > Page 11581
Trailer Connector: Diagrams
X88 Trailer Connector (V92)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body
Control Module
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A
Date: June 14, 2010
Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not
Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions
Models:
2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV,
Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro
2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet
Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL
2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming
event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS).
The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this
incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event.
This condition may be caused by the following:
- A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle
and the TIS2WEB terminal.
- The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event.
Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition.
SPS Programming Process Selection
Perform this procedure first.
1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS
application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When
selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new
BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS)
with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 11588
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
BCM Still Fails to Reprogram
If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following
modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes:
- BCM
- EBCM
- ECM
- IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox)
- TCM
3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to
turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace
and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using
the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to
the SPS procedures
in SI.
When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11589
Body Control Module: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11590
Body Control Module: Diagrams
K9 Body Control Module X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11591
K9 Body Control Module X2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11592
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11593
K9 Body Control Module X3
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11594
K9 Body Control Module X4
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11595
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11596
K9 Body Control Module X5
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11597
K9 Body Control Module X6
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11598
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11599
K9 Body Control Module X7
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11600
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11601
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Body Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11608
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11609
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer
Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11610
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement
Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11611
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11612
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
Front Bumper Fascia Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11613
Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11614
Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement
Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11615
Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11616
Front Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11617
Front Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement
Front Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11618
Front Bumper Fascia Opening Cover Replacement
Front Bumper Fascia Opening Cover Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11619
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
Front Bumper Impact Bar Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Shock Absorber > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair
Front Bumper Energy Absorber Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09
> Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Customer Interest Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With
Quarter Panel
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003
Date: September 16, 2009
Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener)
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009
Condition
Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter
panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The
condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions.
The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of
support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions.
Correction
The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia.
Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support.
1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI.
3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09
> Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11635
4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard
(sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface.
5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia
and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration.
6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539.
Tighten
Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in).
7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp
fasteners.
8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown.
Tighten
Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover.
10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09
> Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11636
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003
> Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush
With Quarter Panel
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003
Date: September 16, 2009
Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener)
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009
Condition
Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter
panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The
condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions.
The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of
support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions.
Correction
The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia.
Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support.
1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI.
3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003
> Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11642
4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard
(sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface.
5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia
and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration.
6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539.
Tighten
Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in).
7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp
fasteners.
8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown.
Tighten
Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover.
10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003
> Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11643
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11644
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-62-003 Date: 090916
Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003
Date: September 16, 2009
Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener)
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009
Condition
Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter
panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The
condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions.
The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of
support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions.
Correction
The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia.
Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support.
1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11645
3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown.
4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard
(sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface.
5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia
and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration.
6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539.
Tighten
Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in).
7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp
fasteners.
8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown.
Tighten
Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover.
10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11646
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-62-003 Date: 090916
Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003
Date: September 16, 2009
Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener)
Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009
Condition
Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter
panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The
condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions.
The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of
support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions.
Correction
The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia.
Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11647
1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI.
3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown.
4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard
(sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface.
5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia
and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration.
6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539.
Tighten
Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in).
7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11648
Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp fasteners.
8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown.
Tighten
Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover.
10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side
Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11651
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11652
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11653
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11654
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement
Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11655
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side
Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side (Equinox)
Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11656
Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11657
Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement
Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement
Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11658
Rear Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement
Rear Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11659
Rear Bumper Fascia Bumper Guard Pad Replacement
Rear Bumper Fascia Bumper Guard Pad Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11660
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Impact Bar Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Shock Absorber > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Energy Absorber Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair
Quarter Outer Panel Pressure Relief Valve Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Screen Replacement
Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement > Page 11675
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement
Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle >
Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Adjustments
Front Door Exterior Handle: Adjustments
Front Side Door Outside Handle Rod Adjustment
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front side door trim panel. Refer to Front Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See:
Front Door Panel/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the front side door water deflector. 3. Use a
flat-head tool to open the clip from the threaded rod connecting the lock to the outside handle.
Note: The rear window channel blocks access to the rod clip. Removing the two bolts from the rear
run channel enough to undo clip.
4. Adjust the travel of the handle by removing the threaded rod from the clip.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle >
Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Adjustments > Page 11683
1. Position the outside door handle rod in the clip in order to eliminate any free play in the outside
door handle. 2. Install the clip cover closed over the threaded outside door handle rod. 3. Inspect
the door lock system for proper operation. 4. Install the front side door water deflector. 5. Install the
front side door trim panel. Refer to Front Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See: Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle >
Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement
Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle >
Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement > Page 11686
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle >
Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement > Page 11687
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement
Front Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle >
Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge >
System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Upper Hinge and Lower Hinge Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch >
System Information > Diagrams
Front Door Latch: Diagrams
A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch >
System Information > Diagrams > Page 11697
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch >
System Information > Diagrams > Page 11698
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Latch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Limiter >
System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Limiter: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Check Link Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel >
System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel >
System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11706
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement
Front Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel >
System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11707
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Side Door Trim Panel
Front Side Door Trim Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker >
System Information > Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
Front Side Door Lock Striker Adjustment
To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows:
Warning
In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not
strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition
and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS.
1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker
adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the
door to move upward or downward upon contact with the
striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch.
3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the
striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper
door position within the door opening. Start with the
up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the
in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are
correct.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker >
System Information > Adjustments > Page 11711
Front Door Striker: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Lock Striker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip
Replacement
Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11716
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11717
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11718
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations
Front Door Window Motor: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11726
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11727
Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams
M74D Window Motor - Driver
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11728
M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11729
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11730
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11731
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle >
Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle >
Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement > Page 11741
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle >
Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement > Page 11742
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Adjustment
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Adjustment
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rear side door trim panel. Refer to Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See:
Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Side
Door Trim Panel Replacement).
2. Remove the rear side door water deflector. 3. Use a flat-head tool to open the clip from the
threaded rod connecting the lock to the outside handle. 4. Adjust the travel of the handle by
removing the threaded rod from the clip.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle >
Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement > Page 11743
1. Position the outside door handle rod (2) in the clip (1) in order to eliminate any free play in the
outside door handle. 2. Install the clip cover closed over the threaded outside door handle rod. 3.
Inspect the door lock system for proper operation. 4. Install the rear side door water deflector. 5.
Install the rear side door trim panel. Refer to Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See: Rear
Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Side Door
Trim Panel Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle >
Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing
Replacement > Page 11744
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle >
Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge >
System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Upper Hinge and Lower Hinge Replacement
Removal Procedure
Warning
In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not
strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition
and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS.
1. Mark around the hinge location with a soft marker for installation alignment purposes. 2. Support
the door. 3. With the door fully latched on the striker, remove the hinge to door bolts. 4. Remove
the hinge to body bolts and remove the hinges one at a time.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 11751
1. Position the hinge to the vehicle with the marks made prior to removal.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
2. Install the hinge to door bolts.
Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
3. Install the hinge to body bolts.
Tighten the bolts to 36 Nm (27 lb ft).
4. Inspect the door for proper alignment. Refer to Rear Side Door Adjustment (See: Adjustments).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch >
System Information > Diagrams
Rear Door Latch: Diagrams
A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch >
System Information > Diagrams > Page 11755
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch >
System Information > Diagrams > Page 11756
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Latch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter >
System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Limiter: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Check Link Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel >
System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel >
System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11764
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement
Rear Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel >
System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11765
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement
Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker >
System Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Striker: Adjustments
Rear Side Door Lock Striker Adjustment
To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows:
Warning
In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not
strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition
and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS.
1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker
adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the
door to move upward or downward upon contact with the
striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch.
3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the
striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper
door position within the door opening. Start with the
up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the
in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are
correct.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the striker screws. Tighten the door striker screws to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker >
System Information > Adjustments > Page 11769
Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Lock Striker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11774
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11775
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip
Replacement
Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11776
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip
Replacement
Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11777
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11778
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations
Rear Door Window Motor: Locations
Door Component Views
Left Rear Door Components
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11786
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11787
Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams
M74D Window Motor - Driver
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11788
M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11789
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11790
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11791
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Fuel Door: Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Filler Door Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Hood Hinge: Service and Repair
Hood Hinge Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair
Hood Insulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
Hood Primary and Secondary Latch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement
Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement
Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement > Page 11812
Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Handle
Replacement
Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair
Hood Strut Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11820
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11821
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement
Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Front Seal Replacement
Hood Front Seal Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement > Page 11826
Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement
Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Replacement
Special Tools
* J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover
* J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
* Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Cracked Window Warning (See: Windows and Glass/Service
Precautions/Cracked Window Warning).
Note: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the
perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim
Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel
Replacement ().
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. 4. Remove the
rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and
Washer Systems/Wiper
Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear
Window Wiper Arm Replacement).
5. Remove the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Spoilers,
Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair)
Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and
Repair). Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information).
6. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass:
* Upper dash pad
* Defroster outlets and A/C outlets
* Seats and carpeting
Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning).
7. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to
access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped.
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11831
8. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive.
* Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange.
* The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
* Use J 24402-A, J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window.
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle.
9. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window
from the urethane adhesive.
10. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows
(See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Service and
Repair/Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows).
2. Install the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Spoilers,
Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair)
Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and
Repair).
3. Install the rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox)
(See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear
Window Wiper Arm Replacement).
4. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 5. Install the liftgate
lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate
Lower Trim Finish Panel
Replacement ().
6. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the
interior trim. 7. Close the liftgate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from
Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 11840
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk /
Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate
Inoperative from Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk /
Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 11846
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11847
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11848
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams
K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5)
K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11849
K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11850
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11854
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams
B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5)
B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11855
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair
Liftgate Hinge Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
Liftgate Outside Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Control Unit: Service and Repair
Liftgate Hydraulic Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling
Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning).
Warning: Refer to Battery Disconnect Warning (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Precautions).
Note:
* The actuator/hose assemblies are shipped full with fluid. In this case the pump fluid reservoir
should only be filled to the normal + sign. Do not overfill to compensate for an empty actuator/hose
assembly.
* Symptom of a low fluid condition will be a jerking liftgate and with an abnormal hydraulic pump
noise as the liftgate is being open. The liftgate will not open to the full open position. The liftgate will
reverse before reaching the full open position if not operating properly.
* Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate hydraulic
actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench horizontally to
the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must
rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level
must be above the + mark.
* The liftgate hydraulic system components must be tested for proper operation before reinstalling
the trim panels that cover the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump and actuator/hose assemblies so the
fluid level can be recheck after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level.
Rechecking the fluid level will require removal of the liftgate hydraulic pump.
1. Remove the liftgate hydraulic pump. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Trunk
/ Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and
Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement).
2. Position the pump with the fluid reservoir in a vertical position with the filler screw (1) in the up
and/or on top position. 3. Wipe the surface around the filler screw clean. 4. Remove the filler screw
(1) and place on a clean, lint and dust free surface.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 11869
5. Add hydraulic fluid from a clean container (1). Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and
Sealers (See: Locks/Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications) for the recommended fluid.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
6. Install the filler screw and tighten to 1.3 Nm (12 lb in).
7. Position the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump (1) on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the +
sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as
needed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 11870
8. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the
hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level
must be above the + mark.
9. Install the pump without the trim and inspect for proper operation and fluid level. The fluid level
can be checked after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times
to ensure proper fluid level. If the fluid is still low repeat the procedure.
10. Install the liftgate hydraulic pump after inspection. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump
Replacement (See: Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 11871
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding
Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning).
Note: Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate
hydraulic actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench
horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic
actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is
inspected. The level must be above the + mark after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times.
1. Cycle the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. 2. Inspect the fluid level. Refer to Liftgate
Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate
Hydraulic Pump Replacement).
3. If adding fluid is required, refer to Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling (See: Liftgate Hydraulic
System Refilling).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
Liftgate Hydraulic Actuator Hose Disconnection and Connection
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement
Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement > Page 11879
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Insulator
Replacement
Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Insulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic
Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement > Page 11880
Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Cover Replacement
Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Cover Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Diagrams
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB4)
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11884
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11885
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair
Liftgate Latch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components
1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7)
3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11889
Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Diagrams
M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Position
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Liftgate Side Upper Sensor Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11896
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock /
Support > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair
Liftgate Strut Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker >
Component Information > Adjustments
Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Adjustments
Liftgate Lock Striker Adjustment
Note: Make certain the liftgate is properly aligned within the liftgate opening before proceeding with
the striker adjustment.
1. Close the liftgate onto the striker and note if liftgate drags on striker causing the liftgate to move
side to side upon contact with the striker. Also
note closing efforts to fully engage latch.
2. Mark around the striker with a grease pencil for reference of original position. 3. Loosen striker
bolts. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on striker and liftgate latch and to achieve proper liftgate
position within the liftgate opening. 5. Align the left/right liftgate position, then position the striker to
achieve proper alignment to liftgate opening. 6. Align the in/out adjustment for proper liftgate seal
engagement making sure the liftgate closing efforts are correct.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
7. Verify correct alignment of striker and tighten striker bolts.
Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker >
Component Information > Adjustments > Page 11903
Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair
Liftgate Lock Striker Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11907
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11908
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11909
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams
B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11910
S46 Liftgate Handle Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 11911
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 11914
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement
Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 11915
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Replacement
Liftgate Release Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement
Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11920
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement
Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11921
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement
Liftgate Wedge Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11922
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side
Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Screen Replacement
Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement > Page 11928
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement
Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information >
Service and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information >
Service and Repair
Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair
Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair
Firewall: Service and Repair
Plenum Upper Panel Replacement
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning).
1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling
(See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair).
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damage as possible to
factory specifications. Refer to Dimensions - Body (). 5. Note the location and remove the sealers
and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment
and
Repair ().
Note: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcements.
6. Locate and drill out all factory welds. Note the number and location of the welds for installation of
the plenum top panel. 7. Remove the damaged plenum top panel.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11941
Note: If the location of the original plug weld holes can not be determined, space the plug weld
holes every 40 mm (1 1/2 in) apart.
Some panels may have structural weld-thru adhesive. It is necessary to replace the weld-thru
adhesive with an additional spot weld between each factory spot weld.
1. Drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in the service part as necessary in the locations noted from
the original panel. 2. Prepare all mating surfaces as necessary. 3. Apply GM-approved Weld-Thru
Coating or equivalent to all mating surfaces. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 4.
Position the plenum top panel to the vehicle using 3-dimensional measuring equipment. Clamp the
plenum top panel into place. 5. Plug weld accordingly. 6. Clean and prepare all welded surfaces. 7.
Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to
Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 8. Paint the repair area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint
Systems (See: Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat
Paint Systems).
9. Install all related panels and components.
10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
11. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
Front Lower Control Arm Bracket Brace Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD)
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (AWD)
Rear Support Replacement (AWD)
Special Tools
J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement
().
5. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 6. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets 7. Position the rear park
brake cables aside. 8. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and routing
clips from the rear support and upper control arms.
Position the wiring harness aside.
9. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt.
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
10. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy
mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper
Bracket Replacement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11951
11. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms.
12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm
nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the
adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 15. Remove the rear wheel drive shafts.
Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 16. Remove the rear differential. Refer to
Differential Replacement (). 17. Position a transmission jack under the rear support and firmly
secure the support to the jack with straps.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11952
18. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 19. Remove the rear support assembly from the
vehicle. 20. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and
place it on the floor.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution ().
1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary.
* Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb
ft).
* Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb
ft).
* Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft).
Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft).
* Knuckles - Loosely install the upper and lower control arm to knuckle nuts/bolts. These fasteners
will be tightened later in this procedure after the wheel driveshafts are installed.
2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly
secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11953
4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the rear
differential. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 6. Install the rear wheel drive shafts. Refer to Rear
Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 7. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link
Replacement (). 8. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement ().
9. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to
15 Nm (11 lb ft).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
10. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto
the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket
Replacement ().
11. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 12. Position
the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and
upper control arms.
Connect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11954
13. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake
actuators.
14. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten the bolts to 12 Nm
(106 lb in). 15. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 16. Install the
tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 17. Check the rear
alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11955
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (FWD)
Rear Support Replacement (FWD)
Special Tools
J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool
Removal Procedure
1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to
Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel
Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement
().
5. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11956
6. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 7. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets. 8. Position the rear park
brake cables aside. 9. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and the
routing clips from the rear support and upper control arms.
Position the wiring harness aside.
10. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt.
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
11. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy
mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper
Bracket Replacement ().
12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm
nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the
adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11957
15. Remove the coil springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 16. Position a transmission jack
under the rear support and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps.
17. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 18. Remove the rear support assembly from the
vehicle. 19. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and
place it on the floor.
Installation Procedure
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution ().
1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary.
* Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb
ft).
* Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb
ft).
* Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft).
Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft).
* Knuckles - The lower control arm to knuckle bolt/nut will be installed and tightened when the coil
spring is installed later in this procedure. Tighten upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut to 160
Nm (118 lb ft).
2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly
secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11958
4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the coil
springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 6. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link
Replacement (). 7. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement ().
8. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to
15 Nm (11 lb ft).
Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is
separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support
the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which
may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak.
9. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto
the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket
Replacement ().
10. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 11. Position
the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and
upper control arms. Connect the rear
wheel speed sensor electrical connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service
and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 11959
12. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake
actuators.
13. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb
in). 14. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 15. Install the tires and
wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 16. Check the rear alignment. Refer
to Wheel Alignment Measurement ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair
Trailer Hitch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Lower
Grille Replacement
Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Lower Grille Replacement
Radiator Lower Grille Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Lower
Grille Replacement > Page 11967
Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Lower Outer Grille Replacement
Radiator Lower Outer Grille Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Lower
Grille Replacement > Page 11968
Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Grille Replacement
Radiator Upper Grille Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle
Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather,
Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum
and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009
Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information).
To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the
upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which
can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care
should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and
fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to
the point that nothing can remove it.
Important
Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.
- Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This
can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces.
- Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of
the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are
in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are
water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals.
Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film.
When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components.
The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing
adhesive residue without causing damage to the component.
Important
- If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the
residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the
pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue.
- On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be
treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this
bulletin for more information.
Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces:
1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the
towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work
cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the
surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the
towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's
original luster.
Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is
important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's
integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 11974
Effective cleaning steps for fabric:
1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate
stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle
brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to
reduce or eliminate future staining.
Upholstery and Carpet Stains
When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you
determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the
common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after
the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils.
A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain
or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material.
Leather Conditioner/Restorer
A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a
water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds
luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 11975
Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede
comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will
appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely
affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with
the restorer.
Extractor Machine and Concentrate
For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when
using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N
627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released
a concentrate for use with the extractor machine.
Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby
Extractor:
Ruby Extractor Specifications:
- Pump PSI: 55
- Water Lift: 85"
- Hose Length: 10 ft
Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty.
Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in
the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The
water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry
time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better
contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine.
Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help
remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions
listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain
is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to
remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions.
Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the
extraction process.
Parts Information
Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles.
Available Equipment
Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 11976
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 11977
Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001
Date: March 30, 2010
Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM
vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly
may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety
guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer.
Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal
and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or
increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not
interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal.
- Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean)
- Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel)
- Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber
mats over carpeted floor mats)
- Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle
- When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal before driving the vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is
installed correctly and according to the instructions.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 11978
After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator
or brake pedals.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures
Carpet: Procedures
Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles
Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles
GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator, GM P/N 88861431 (Canadian P/N 88861436), may control or
eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. This non-toxic,
biodegradable, odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove the following types
of odor:
* Objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks
* Customer created odors, such as smoke
You may safely use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet, and sound
deadening materials. You may also induce this product into HVAC modules and instrument panel
ducts for the control of non-bacterial related odors.
Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be used as an air freshener.
This product may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to
customers whose allergies make them sensitive to perfumes. This product may effectively remove
odors when directly contacting the odor source. In cases such as water leaks, use this product with
diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the primary cause of the odor. Then use further applications
on the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition.
How to Use this Product
* Spray GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator directly or as an additive with carpet shampoo in steam
cleaners.
* Do not use on any interior surface that plain water would deteriorate, because this product will
have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic
substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator.
* Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor
Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by
step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact your dealership.
* Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you
encounter a persistent or recurring odor, you may call to obtain additional information and usage
suggestions.
Drying Floor Carpet
Floor Carpet Drying
If the carpet or the pad or insulator is wet, use the following criteria for drying or for replacing the
components:
* For a 1-piece carpet assembly bonded to a cotton or a fiber padding, replace the entire assembly.
* For a 2-piece carpet assembly with a cotton or a fiber padding, replace the padding only. While
the carpet is out of the vehicle, dry the carpet using the method described below.
* For a 1-piece carpet assembly bonded to a foam padding or attached to a synthetic padding, dry
the carpet using the method described below.
* For a 2-piece carpet assembly with a synthetic padding, dry the assembly using the method
described below.
* For a 1-piece carpet assembly with a separate cotton or a fiber padding, replace the cotton or
fiber padding. While the carpet is out of the vehicle, dry the carpet using the method described
below.
Drying Method
1. If you observe puddles of liquid on the carpet face, use a wet vacuum to remove the excess
moisture. 2. Blot the face of the carpet with a towel in order to absorb as much moisture as
possible. 3. Point a fan at the affected area and air dry the carpet.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 11981
Carpet: Removal and Replacement
Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement
Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement
Rear Side Door Opening Floor Carpet Retainer Replacement
Rear Side Door Opening Floor Carpet Retainer Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 11982
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component
Information > Diagrams
Console Lamp: Diagrams
E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement
Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement
Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement > Page 11989
Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement
Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11994
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or
Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11995
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical
Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and
ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement
Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12000
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Compartment Bracket
Replacement
Instrument Panel Center Compartment Bracket Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12001
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Compartment Door Latch Replacement
Instrument Panel Compartment Door Latch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12002
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Compartment Door Replacement
Instrument Panel Compartment Door Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12003
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Compartment Door Dampener
Replacement
Instrument Panel Compartment Door Dampener Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel
Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close
Headliner: Customer Interest Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-08-67-016F
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Roof Panel Flutters or Rattle Noise from Roof or Headliner when Closing Doors (Apply
Foam)
Models:
2007-2009 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2009 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Silverado (Crew Cab Models Only), Suburban, Tahoe 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2009
GMC Sierra (Crew Cab Models Only), Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL
2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year to Equinox/Terrain models.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-67-016E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the roof panel flutters and/or there is a rattle noise from the
roof or headliner when closing one of the side doors or the liftgate.
Cause
This may be caused by the excessive motion of the roof panel. On initial inspection, you may notice
that the roof panel expansion adhesive material has separated between the roof and the roof bow.
The concern is seen mostly on the first cross bow.
Correction
Lower the headliner assembly (it is not usually necessary to remove the headliner from the vehicle)
to gain access to the roof bows. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI.
Remove any loose foam from the roof bow or bows. Apply Fusor super flexible anti-flutter foam-fast
set, Fusor P/N 121/124, or equivalent, in a continuous bead the entire length between the roof bow
reinforcement and the roof outer panel.
Reinstall the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI.
Parts Information
Contact Lord Fusor at 1-877-275-5673 or on the Web at www.lord.com.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel
Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close > Page 12012
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel
Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors
Close
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 08-08-67-016F
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Roof Panel Flutters or Rattle Noise from Roof or Headliner when Closing Doors (Apply
Foam)
Models:
2007-2009 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2009 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Silverado (Crew Cab Models Only), Suburban, Tahoe 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2009
GMC Sierra (Crew Cab Models Only), Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL
2010-2011 GMC Terrain
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year to Equinox/Terrain models.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-67-016E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the roof panel flutters and/or there is a rattle noise from the
roof or headliner when closing one of the side doors or the liftgate.
Cause
This may be caused by the excessive motion of the roof panel. On initial inspection, you may notice
that the roof panel expansion adhesive material has separated between the roof and the roof bow.
The concern is seen mostly on the first cross bow.
Correction
Lower the headliner assembly (it is not usually necessary to remove the headliner from the vehicle)
to gain access to the roof bows. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI.
Remove any loose foam from the roof bow or bows. Apply Fusor super flexible anti-flutter foam-fast
set, Fusor P/N 121/124, or equivalent, in a continuous bead the entire length between the roof bow
reinforcement and the roof outer panel.
Reinstall the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI.
Parts Information
Contact Lord Fusor at 1-877-275-5673 or on the Web at www.lord.com.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel
Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close > Page 12018
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12019
Headliner: Service and Repair
Headlining Trim Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12020
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement
Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement
Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement > Page 12025
Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair Roof Rail Rear Assist Handle Replacement
Roof Rail Rear Assist Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement
Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement
Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement > Page 12030
Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement
Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Sunshade
Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sunshade
Sunshade Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Sunshade > Page 12035
Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sunshade Support Replacement
Sunshade Support Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement
Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12040
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12041
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side
Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12042
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side
Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12043
Trim Panel: Service and Repair
Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement
Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement
Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12044
Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side
Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12045
Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side
Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12046
Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement
Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12047
Center Pillar Upper Trim Panel Replacement
Center Pillar Upper Trim Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12048
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12049
Liftgate Upper Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Liftgate Upper Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Rear End Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Rear End Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12050
Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement
Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12051
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement
Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement > Page 12058
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod Replacement
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement > Page 12059
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Replacement
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement > Page 12060
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover
Replacement
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Door Lock Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12064
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure
Key: Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-029F
Date: January 05, 2011
Subject: Key Cutting Procedure for Obtaining Replacement Key
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2011
Chevrolet Cruze, Volt 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac G8
Attention:
This bulletin applies to the United States and Canada only. Export dealers are to contact their local
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for further information.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the Chevrolet Volt. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 09-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information).
Due to the uniqueness of the ignition/door lock key, special equipment is required to cut a key. If
you do not have the required equipment, you may order a cut/coded key through GM CC&A.;
To obtain a replacement key, the following procedure is suggested:
1. Obtain the vehicle key code.
U.S. Dealers: Access the "Key Code Look Up" application through GM GlobalConnect under the
Parts Workbench. Canadian Dealers: Access the "KeyCode Look-Up" feature within the
OEConnection D2DLink application.
2. Submit a part order through the GM CC&A; Parts System for a key blank. Be sure to include the
key code in the "note" field of the order. 3. DO NOT ORDER AN UNCODED KEY AS YOU WILL
RECEIVE A BLANK KEY THAT WILL REQUIRE CODING ON THE
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT LISTED BELOW.
Note
The key code is five digits. Some vehicle records do not have the first digit displayed (i.e., vehicle
records show the key code as "1234"). When ordering a cut/coded key, refer to the key code table.
Important The order will be shipped the same day if received by 12:00 p.m. (noon) EST, or within
24 hours, Monday through Friday via FedEx (Canadian dealers should place their orders for these
parts using a CSO order type only. Do not order using the CSO3 order type).
Important The remote control transmitter and the key shank are not serviced separately.
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12069
If a key is received with an incorrect cut contact the SPAC department for assistance.
Tip The new key and transmitter will need to be programmed to the vehicle. Refer to Key and
Transmitter Programming in SI for details.
Parts Information
For part numbers and usage, refer to Key in Group 02.187 of the appropriate parts catalog.
Important As an alternate to Step 2, the following equipment can be purchased through
1-800-GM-TOOLS or by visiting www.GMDEsolutions.com (U.S.) or www.des-canada.ca
(Canada).
General Motors highly recommends the use of the following key machines. General Motors has
identified superior equipment through testing and evaluation. General Motors believes these
sources and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such
equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the equipment from these firms or for any such items which may be available for
other sources.
Equipment Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12070
Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010
Date: May 27, 2010
Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada
Only)
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior
Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu
Attention:
This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode
security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer
operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin
should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference.
Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009.
Where Are Key Codes Located?
General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to
a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a
small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it.
Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed
on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code
Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers.
The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the
OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model
years from the current model year.
When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original
vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have
access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been
completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors.
Tip
Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not.
GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers
All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and
Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates &
keys").
Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this
application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently
goes back 17 years from current model year.
Important notes about security:
- Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously.
- Users may only request one KeyCode at a time.
- KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes.
- Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password.
- Never share your password with others.
- User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts.
- User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days.
- Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews.
- The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee
termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off
immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership.
- If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at
1-800-265-0573.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12071
Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is
used.
Key Code User Agreement
- Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle
owner.
- Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to
criminal and civil penalties.
- This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone
unless authorized.
I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information:
1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership.
Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and
possibly the
receipt for payment recorded as well.
Important
- GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving
out key codes.
- When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the
information.
Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never
be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the
expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this
bulletin or other materials.
- Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet.
- Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions.
Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following:
- Government issued picture ID (Drivers License)
- Registration or other proof of ownership.
- Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key
to the customer.
- Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up
to either GM or law enforcement officials.
- Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions.
- Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers
How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered?
Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the
ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien
holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is
the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short
description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on
file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field.
How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed?
The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered
repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of
the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for
documentation.
What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle?
Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will
have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's
ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and
or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be
involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the
owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information.
Can I get a print out of the information on the screen?
It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or
proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results
must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper
or illegal use.
Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application?
Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is
authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership
parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up
application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system
includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12072
What if I input the VIN incorrectly?
If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN
or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message.
If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home?
Yes.
What if I suspect key code misuse?
Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any
suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems
Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892.
Whose key codes can I access through the system?
At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet,
Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu
(up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years.
What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information?
Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This
may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information
may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN,
you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892.
How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down?
If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling
dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at
1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have
the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911.
What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle?
On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In
cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting
equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to
verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the
KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at
1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock
cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding
a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary.
How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records?
Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years.
Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system?
Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed.
Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892.
What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or
KeyCode information?
The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and
registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the
dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough
information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided.
How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key?
The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed
copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name,
address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included
in your dealer KeyCode file.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12073
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Diagrams
Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 12078
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote
Start
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A
Date: October 26, 2009
Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information
Models:
2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT
2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche,
Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse
2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent
2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY
Attention:
This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information).
This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM
Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems.
Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use
entire kit for warranty or repair work.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start >
Page 12084
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start >
Page 12085
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start
Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start >
Page 12086
Parts Information
Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems
Transmitter Battery 12493150
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12091
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12092
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12093
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12094
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12095
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12096
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12097
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12098
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12099
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12100
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12101
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12102
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12103
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12104
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12105
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12106
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12107
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12108
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12109
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12110
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12111
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12112
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12113
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12114
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12115
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12116
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12117
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12118
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12119
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12120
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12121
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12122
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12123
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12124
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12125
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12126
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12127
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12128
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12129
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12130
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12131
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12132
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12133
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12134
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12135
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12136
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12137
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12138
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12139
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12140
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12141
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12142
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12143
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12144
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12145
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12146
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12147
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12148
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12149
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12150
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12151
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12152
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12153
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12154
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12155
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12156
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12157
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12158
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12159
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12160
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12161
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12162
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12163
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12164
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12165
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12166
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12167
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12168
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12169
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12170
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12171
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12172
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12173
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12174
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12175
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12176
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12177
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12178
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12179
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12180
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12181
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12182
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12183
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12184
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12185
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12186
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12187
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12188
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12189
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12190
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12191
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12192
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12193
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12194
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12195
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12196
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12197
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12198
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12199
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12200
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12201
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12202
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12203
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12204
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12205
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12206
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12207
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12208
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12209
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12210
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12211
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12212
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12213
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12214
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12215
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12216
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12217
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12218
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12219
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12220
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12221
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12222
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12223
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12224
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12225
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12226
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12227
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12228
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12229
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12230
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12231
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12232
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12233
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12234
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12235
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12236
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12237
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12238
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12239
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12240
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12241
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12242
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12243
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12244
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12245
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12246
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12247
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12248
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12249
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12250
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12251
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12252
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12253
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12254
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12255
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams
Remote Function Schematics
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 12256
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Tools and Equipment
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > System Information > Description and Operation
Power Locks: Description and Operation
Power Door Locks Description and Operation
Door Lock System Components
The power door lock system consists of the following components:
* Central door lock switch
* Child door lockout switch
* Door lock actuators in each of the doors
* Body control module (BCM)
* Underhood fuse block
Door Lock System Controls
The power door lock system can be controlled by any of the following:
* A door lock switch LOCK or UNLOCK activation
* A mechanical key cylinder lock/unlock
* A keyless entry transmitter activation
* An automatic door lock activation
* An automatic door unlock activation
Door Lock Operation
When the central door lock switch is activated in the lock or unlock position the BCM will receive a
ground signal on either the door lock switch lock or unlock signal circuits.
The BCM, upon receipt of a lock switch lock or unlock signal, will supply voltage to the door lock
actuator lock or unlock control circuits. Since the opposite side of the lock actuator is connected to
ground through the other lock actuator control circuit, the doors will then lock or unlock as
commanded.
The following three circuits are used to operate the lock:
* Driver door unlock
* Passenger door unlock
* All door lock
Child Door Lockout Operation
The operator has the option to disable the interior rear door handles to prevent the unauthorized
opening of the rear door doors while still retaining normal driver and passenger door handle
functions. The rear door latches contain switches that are open when the rear doors are unlocked
and closed when the rear doors are locked. The operator will first lock all the doors by pressing the
central door lock switch. When the child door lockout switch is pressed, the BCM will confirm that
the rear doors have been locked, if the rear doors are locked the BCM will then command the child
lockout latches and will command the child lockout indicator to illuminate. The driver and
passenger doors will still function normally by pressing the central door lock switch which will
unlock the doors but the child lockout latches will continue to disable the interior rear door handles.
Pressing the child lockout switch again will signal a command to the BCM to unlatch the rear doors,
restore normal interior rear door handle functions and the turn off the child lockout indicator.
If the child lockout indicator flashes while trying to lockout the rear door handles means one or both
rear door latches are not locked and the child lockout system will not function.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time
Heated Element: Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 08-08-64-011A
Date: February 25, 2010
Subject: Information on Heated Electrochromatic Outside Rearview Mirror Performance
Models:
2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 08-08-64-011 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Defrosting Time/Performance Concern
The electrochromatic (auto-dimming) outside rearview mirror used on the driver's side of many GM
vehicles is slower to defrost than the passenger side outside rearview mirror.
This is a normal condition. The glass on the driver's side electrochromatic mirror is twice as thick as
the traditional glass on the passenger side mirror. The heating elements for the mirrors on both
sides draw the same wattage, therefore the driver's side mirror will take approximately twice as
long to defrost as the passenger mirror (approximately four minutes versus two minutes). Should a
customer indicate that the driver's side heated mirror is not functioning correctly, verify it's function
based upon this information prior to replacing the mirror.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory
Sys Operation
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B
Date: January 15, 2010
Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with
Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative
(Reprogram Memory Seat Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All
Built Prior to November 2, 2009
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns:
- The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will
not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may
also experience the inability to move the seat up or down.
- The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is
engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle
in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after
taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt
position and not returning to the memory position at all.
- The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory
Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent
operation.
- The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the
inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages
that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern.
Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration.
Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page
12270
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12271
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12272
Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12273
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12274
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12275
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12276
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12280
Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12281
Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Power Mirror Control Module: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12285
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagrams
K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12286
Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12290
Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams
S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12291
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Outside Remote Control Rearview Mirror Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint
Paint: Customer Interest Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust)
Models:
1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust.
Cause
Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the
tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the
vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material
can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface.
Correction
Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the
success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick
up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials
recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust:
1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID:
- Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel
consistency.
2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED:
- Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available.
Caution
Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down
the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary
safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions
closely because it may require special handling and disposal.
If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes
can be repeated.
After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most
cases, with a finesse/polish operation.
Procedure
1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during
the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE
REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY
PANELS.
2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a
wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical
manufacturer's directions.
Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process.
Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers
Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page
12301
Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from:
Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or
(214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com
[email protected]
E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from:
Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll
Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com
[email protected] *We
believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from
other sources.
If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a
distributor near your location.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information
regarding warranty coverage for this condition.
Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time
exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours"
field.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint
Codes
Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-51-001
Date: January 05, 2010
Subject: Exterior Paint Codes
Models:
2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint
Codes > Page 12307
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint
Codes > Page 12308
The primary exterior body paint codes on the SPID label may be missing on some 2010 vehicles.
Above is a chart with the primary exterior body colors for your reference.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored
Spots in Paint
Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust)
Models:
1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust.
Cause
Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the
tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the
vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material
can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface.
Correction
Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the
success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick
up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials
recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust:
1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID:
- Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel
consistency.
2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED:
- Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available.
Caution
Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down
the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary
safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions
closely because it may require special handling and disposal.
If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes
can be repeated.
After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most
cases, with a finesse/polish operation.
Procedure
1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during
the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE
REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY
PANELS.
2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a
wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical
manufacturer's directions.
Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process.
Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers
Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored
Spots in Paint > Page 12313
Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from:
Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or
(214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com
[email protected]
E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from:
Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll
Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com
[email protected] *We
believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from
other sources.
If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a
distributor near your location.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information
regarding warranty coverage for this condition.
Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time
exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours"
field.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint
Codes
Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-51-001
Date: January 05, 2010
Subject: Exterior Paint Codes
Models:
2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint
Codes > Page 12319
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint
Codes > Page 12320
The primary exterior body paint codes on the SPID label may be missing on some 2010 vehicles.
Above is a chart with the primary exterior body colors for your reference.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12321
Paint: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622
Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust)
Models:
1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust.
Cause
Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the
tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the
vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material
can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface.
Correction
Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the
success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick
up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials
recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust:
1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID:
- Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel
consistency.
2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED:
- Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available.
Caution
Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down
the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary
safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions
closely because it may require special handling and disposal.
If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes
can be repeated.
After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most
cases, with a finesse/polish operation.
Procedure
1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during
the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE
REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY
PANELS.
2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a
wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical
manufacturer's directions.
Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process.
Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12322
Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent:
Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from:
Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or
(214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com
[email protected]
E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from:
Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll
Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com
[email protected] *We
believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from
other sources.
If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a
distributor near your location.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information
regarding warranty coverage for this condition.
Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time
exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours"
field.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622
Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12323
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C
Date: June 22, 2009
Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust)
Models:
1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2
2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust.
Cause
Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the
tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the
vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material
can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface.
Correction
Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the
success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick
up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials
recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust:
1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID:
- Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel
consistency.
2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED:
- Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available.
Caution
Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down
the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary
safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions
closely because it may require special handling and disposal.
If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes
can be repeated.
After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most
cases, with a finesse/polish operation.
Procedure
1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during
the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE
REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY
PANELS.
2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a
wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical
manufacturer's directions.
Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process.
Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers
Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent:
Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from:
Auto Wax Company, Inc.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12324
1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax
(214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com
[email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E
Liquid Fallout Remover II available from:
Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll
Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com
[email protected] *We
believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from
other sources.
If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a
distributor near your location.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information
regarding warranty coverage for this condition.
Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time
exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours"
field.
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Paint: Technician Safety Information
Handling of Refrigerant Lines and Fittings
Caution: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C
system.
* Keep all metal tubing lines free of dents or kinks. Any line restrictions will cause the loss of
system capacity.
* Never bend a flexible hose line to a radius of less than four times the diameter of the hose.
* Never allow a flexible hose line to come within 65 mm (2-1/2 in) of the exhaust manifold.
* Inspect flexible hose lines regularly for leaks or brittleness.
* Replace flexible hose lines with new lines if you find signs of deterioration or leaking.
* Discharge the refrigeration system of all refrigerant before disconnecting any fitting in the
refrigeration system.
* Proceed very cautiously regardless of the gauge readings.
Warning
For personal protection, goggles and lint-free gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped
around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant
system. If refrigerant comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury
can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical
help should be obtained.
* Open the fittings very slowly.
* If you notice pressure when you loosen a fitting, allow the pressure to bleed off as described
Discharging, Adding Oil, Evacuating, and Charging Procedures for A/C System.
* Cap or tape any refrigerant line immediately after it is opened. This will prevent the entrance of
moisture and dirt, which can cause internal compressor wear or plugged lines in the condenser, the
evaporator core, the expansion valve, or the compressor inlet screens.
* Keep the sealing surfaces in perfect condition. A burr or a piece of dirt may cause a refrigerant
leak.
* When seal washers are used, always install the seal washer without lubrication.
* When O-rings are used, always lightly coat the new O-ring seal with mineral base 525 viscosity
refrigerant oil prior to installation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 12327
Paint: Vehicle Damage Warnings
Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution
Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution
Caution: Avoid spilling brake fluid onto painted surfaces, electrical connections, wiring, or cables.
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces and cause corrosion to electrical components. If any
brake fluid comes in contact with painted surfaces, immediately flush the area with water. If any
brake fluid comes in contact with electrical connections, wiring, or cables, use a clean shop cloth to
wipe away the fluid.
Clearcoat/Ultraviolet Screeners Caution
Clearcoat/Ultraviolet Screeners Caution
Caution: Removing more than 0.5 mils of the clearcoat can result in early paint failure. The
clearcoat contains ultraviolet screeners. Do not finesse sand more than what is required to remove
the defect.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application
and ID > Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems
Paint: Application and ID Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems
Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems
Warning
Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe
breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting
materials, equipment, and protective gear.
All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. Refer to the latest
revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book to identify the paint systems you may use that
have been engineered to meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book supplies
all approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations
recommended by the individual manufacturer, and detailed procedures for materials used in their
paint system.
The latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book is located on the Goodwrench
website.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application
and ID > Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems > Page 12330
Paint: Application and ID Paint Identification
Paint Identification
Warning
Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe
breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting
materials, equipment, and protective gear.
Note: Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials booklet. This information identifies the
paint systems you may use.
The latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book is located on the Goodwrench
website.
Use the service parts identification label to identify the type of paint technology, paint codes, trim
level, and any special order paint colors on the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard,
Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard,
Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair
Radiator Support: Service and Repair
Front End Upper Tie Bar Replacement
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning (See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning).
Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning).
Note: Before beginning the repair, refer to Metal Panel Bonding () for proper adhesive applicator
preparations and general information.
1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling
(See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair).
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damage as possible to
factory specifications. Refer to Dimensions - Body (). 5. Note the location and remove the sealers
and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment
and
Repair ().
Note: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcements. Record the number and location of the
original welds for installation of the service part.
6. Locate and drill out all factory welds (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 12334
7. Remove the damaged tie bar assembly (1).
Installation Procedure
Note: If the location of the original plug welds cannot be determined or structural weld- thru
adhesive was present, space plug weld holes every 40 mm (1 1/2 in) apart.
1. Drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in the service part as necessary in the locations noted from
the original panel (1). 2. Prepare all mating surfaces as necessary. 3. Apply GM-approved
Weld-Thru Coating or equivalent to all mating surfaces. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair ().
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 12335
4. Position the tie bar assembly to the vehicle using 3-dimensional measuring equipment (1).
Clamp the tie bar assembly into place.
5. Plug weld accordingly (1). 6. Clean and prepare all welded surfaces. 7. Apply the sealers and
anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and
Repair (). 8. Paint the repair area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Paint, Striping
and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat
Paint Systems).
9. Install all related panels and components.
10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and
Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery
Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection).
11. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Door Lock Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12340
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Diagrams
Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12344
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory
Sys Operation
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B
Date: January 15, 2010
Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with
Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative
(Reprogram Memory Seat Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All
Built Prior to November 2, 2009
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns:
- The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will
not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may
also experience the inability to move the seat up or down.
- The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is
engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle
in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after
taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt
position and not returning to the memory position at all.
- The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory
Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent
operation.
- The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the
inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages
that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern.
Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration.
Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page
12349
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12350
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12351
Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12352
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12353
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12354
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12355
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Control Module: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12359
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagrams
K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12360
Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair
Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12364
Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12365
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12366
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12367
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12368
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12369
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from
Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 12378
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate
Inoperative from Key FOB
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B
Date: March 25, 2010
Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate
Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to
the Following VIN Breakpoints:
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
- Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the
interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted
touch pad.
- 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate
does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power
liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus.
Correction
Note
If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait
a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module
(disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module,
and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then
update the software in the power liftgate module.
- A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition.
Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest
calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI.
- When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with
the latest software version.
- When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software
version.
- During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16
volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 12384
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12385
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12386
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams
K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5)
K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12387
K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12388
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Heater Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12392
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12393
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12394
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12395
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12396
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12397
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12398
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12399
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12403
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component
Information > Specifications
Luggage Rack: Specifications
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 12408
Luggage Rack: Service and Repair
Luggage Carrier Side Rail Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade >
Component Information > Diagrams
Sun Shade: Diagrams
Component Connector End Views
A3L Sunshade - Left Front
A3R Sunshade - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12413
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12414
Sun Shade: Service and Repair
Sunroof Sunshade Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Panel/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the screws from the sunroof drain channel.
3. Remove the sunroof drain channel.
Slide the sunshade (2) forward to the closed position.
4. Apply slight upward pressure to the rear of the sunshade flange close to either left or right of the
guide track to disengage the tab. 5. Rotate the rear of the sunshade toward the guide tab was
disengaged until all tabs release. 6. Remove the sunshade (2) from the sunroof frame (1).
Installation Procedure
1. Engage one front tab of the sunshade by positioning it into the lower guide track.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12415
2. Rotate the sunshade (1) toward opposite guide to engage other front tab while ensuring rear tab
of first side engaged. 3. Gently apply upward pressure to the rear sunshade flange to engage last
tab. 4. Slide the sunshade back and forth to ensure proper operation. 5. Slide the sunshade to the
half closed position.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
6. Install the rear drain channel, large flange to rear. Tighten the bolts to 2 Nm (18 lb in). 7. Install
the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Panel/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12419
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12420
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams
M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12421
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection
Sunroof Motor/Actuator Initialization/Teach Process
Note: If the sunroof motor is new, cycle the sunroof seven (7) times to teach the motor/actuator
initialization process.
1. Perform the initialization/teach process on a new or reinstalled motor as follows:
1. Ensure that the headliner electrical harness is connected to the sunroof motor. 2. Put the vehicle
Park Brake On. 3. Ensure that the vehicle is in Park. 4. Engine running.
Note: If the sunroof window doesn't go to the vent open position first time, release the switch and
press the switch again.
2. Press and hold the sunroof switch to the vent open position until the sunroof window stops in the
vent open position. 3. Again press and hold the sunroof switch to the vent open position for at least
10 seconds, then the window should move slightly. 4. Verify the sunroof operation.
If the initialization/teach procedure is not carried out completely, it has to be started again.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12422
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12426
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12427
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams
S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5)
S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12428
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement > Page 12431
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch
Sunroof Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair
Sunroof Track Timing/Synchronization
1. It is only necessary to lower the headliner. Only do those steps in the headliner replacement
procedure that will lower the headliner enough to gain
access to the part. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair).
2. Place the sunroof window in the vent/open position. 3. Remove the screws from the
motor/actuator. 4. Disengage the motor/actuator from the drive cables and module.
Note: After the motor/actuator has been remove it will be necessary to align the module tracks.
5. Remove the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Panel/Service and Repair).
6. Sliding the drive cable plates (1) on the left and right forward until the first stop is made (2), this
will lock the sliding bracket and release drive
cable plate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12435
7. Manually adjust the drive cable plates (1) on the left and right sides, by sliding them forward until
contact is made to the guide crimp (timing hard
stop).
8. Install the sunroof motor/actuator. Refer to Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement (See: Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor/Service and Repair). 9. Install the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window
Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair).
10. Ensure the motor/actuator initialization/teach process has been done. Refer to Sunroof
Motor/Actuator Initialization/Teach Process (See: Sunroof
/ Moonroof Motor/Testing and Inspection).
11. Verify the sunroof for proper operation. 12. Install the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel
Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
Sunroof Air Deflector Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Procedures
Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning
Drain Hose Routing
Note: If the headliner is wet DO NOT remove any interior trim. Do the Plugged Drain Hose test first.
A drain trough encircles the sunroof window panel and water is drained off by the drain hoses
located at each corner of the housing. A drain channel spans across the sunroof module at the rear
of the window panel and directs water into the trough.
1. The front drain hoses are routed down the windshield pillars and out the plenum upper panel
(wiper pocket). The front hoses are installed in a
rubber grommet and retained by clips.
2. The rear drain hoses are routed through the rear pillars and out of the rocker panel. In some
vehicle the drain hoses are routed out through the
metal roof slots and routed to the lower wheelhouse to drain out of the vehicle. The rear hoses are
installed in a rubber grommet and retained by clips.
Plugged Drain Hose
If a waterleak has occurred check for a plugged drain hose at each corner of drainage system.
1. Open the sunroof window. 2. To test for blockage, pour a small container of water into the
module housing drain trough. Check each corner to confirm the drain hose is draining
water.
Warning
Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage.
3. Use compressed air, 241 kPa (35 psi) or less to blow out any drain hose that is plugged. 4. Test
the system again. 5. If the hose remains plugged, check to see it is properly routed and does not
have a kink. Refer to Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement
(See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement) or Sunroof
Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Rear
Drain Hose Replacement).
6. Remove the blockage using the following steps.
1. Push mechanics wire through the hose to remove the obstruction. 2. Use compressed air in
order to blow out any remaining material.
Disconnected Drain Hose
Inspect the drainage system for disconnected drain hoses. Complete the following steps in order to
obtain partial access to drain hoses and check for a disconnected hose.
1. Open the sunroof window panel. 2. Lower the headliner as needed. Refer to Headlining Trim
Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair). 3. Connect any
disconnected hoses. 4. Ensure that the rear drain hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot
and taped in place.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12443
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Removal and Replacement
Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement
Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12444
Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement
Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12445
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair
Sunroof Frame Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. It is only necessary to lower the headliner. Only do those step in headliner replacement that will
lower the headliner enough to gain access to the
part. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service
and Repair).
2. Remove the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Panel/Service and Repair). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the sunroof frame. 4.
Disconnect the front and rear sunroof drain hoses. Refer to Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose
Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose
Replacement) and Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose
Replacement).
5. With the aid of an assistant, remove the bolts (1) that secure the sunroof frame (2).
Installation Procedure
1. Before transferring any parts perform the timing/synchronization of the sunroof frame. Refer to
Sunroof Track Timing/Synchronization (See:
Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and Repair).
2. Transfer all necessary parts to the new frame.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12449
3. With the aid of an assistant, position the new sunroof frame (2) into the roof opening.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
4. With the aid of an assistant, install the bolts (1) that secure the sunroof frame (2) to the roof.
Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (70 lb in).
5. Connect the front and rear sunroof drain hoses. Refer to Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose
Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose
Replacement) and Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof
Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose
Replacement).
6. Connect the electrical connectors to the sunroof frame. 7. Install and adjust the sunroof window.
Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). 8.
Ensure the motor/actuator initialization/teach process has been done. Refer to Sunroof
Motor/Actuator Initialization/Teach Process (See: Sunroof
/ Moonroof Motor/Testing and Inspection).
9. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before installing the headliner.
10. Install the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Adjustments
Sunroof Window Height and Opening Fit Adjustment
1. Remove the sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening
Closeout Cover Replacement (See: Service and
Repair/Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement).
Note: Correct adjustment cannot be achieved if the sunroof window is closed from vent position.
2. Cycle the sunroof window from full open to closed position.
Note: Do Not remove or lower headliner to access sunroof window screws.
3. Loosen the adjusting screws on the window. 4. Adjust the corners of the front window panel
using the following guidelines:
* Adjust the front of the sunroof window to 0.0 mm-1.0 mm (0.0 in-0.04 in ) below the top surface of
the roof panel.
* Adjust the rear center line of the sunroof window to 2 mm-3 mm (0.08 in-0.12 in) below the top
surface of the roof panel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the sunroof window adjustment screws to 5 Nm (44 lb in). 6. Cycle sunroof window
through all positions. 7. Inspect the sunroof window adjustment. Adjust if necessary. 8. Install the
sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover
Replacement (See: Service and
Repair/Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover
Replacement
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover
Replacement
Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Open the sunshade to the full rearward position. 2. Open the sunroof window (1) to the vent
position. 3. Detach both sides of the sunroof side opening closeout panel covers (6) from the
sunroof window clips (2). 4. Open the sunroof to the full open position. 5. Using a flat-bladed tool,
press the locking tab (4) outward, from inside the roof opening, in order to detach the side opening
closeout panel cover
from the sunroof track channel (3).
6. With the lock tab (4) depressed, lift the front edge of the side opening closeout panel cover from
the track, working towards the rear of the sunroof
opening.
7. Repeat the steps for the entire length of the side opening closeout panel cover (6). 8. Remove
the sunroof side opening closeout panel cover from the sunroof module track assembly.
Installation Procedure
1. Place in position, the new sunroof side opening closeout panel cover (6) to the sunroof module
track assembly (3). 2. Hold the lower part (5) of the side opening closeout panel cover firmly and
press the locking tab (4) into the track assembly. 3. Ensure the entire length of the side opening
closeout panel cover (6) is secure to the sunroof assembly track. 4. Close the sunroof window (1).
5. Open the sunroof window to the vent position. 6. Secure the sunroof side opening closeout panel
cover (6) to the 3 clips (2) located on the inside edge of the sunroof window. 7. Close the sunroof
window. 8. Cycle the sunroof window to the vent position and full open positions in order to ensure
the sunroof side opening closeout panel covers are secure
to the attachment clips.
9. Close the sunroof window.
10. Close the sunshade.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover
Replacement > Page 12455
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Sunroof Window
Sunroof Window Replacement
Removal Procedure
Caution: In order to prevent damage to the paint, mask the roof panel in front of the sunroof
opening using masking tape and paper.
1. Cycle the sunroof window to the vent position. 2. Slide the sunshade rearward. 3. Remove the
sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover
Replacement (See: Sunroof Panel
Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement).
4. Remove the sunroof window screws (1) on both sides.
Note: If operating the sunroof without the window, refer to Sunroof Air Deflector Replacement (See:
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard/Service and Repair).
5. Lift the sunroof window from the sunroof opening.
Installation Procedure
1. Position the sunroof window into the opening. 2. Install the sunroof window screws (1). Do not
tighten the screws. 3. Carefully close the sunroof window from the vent position to the full closed
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover
Replacement > Page 12456
4. Adjust the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Height and Opening Fit Adjustment (See:
Adjustments).
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
5. Tighten the sunroof window screws to 5 Nm (44 lb in). 6. Install the sunroof panel side opening
closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement (See: Sunroof
Panel
Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement).
7. Operate the window to ensure that the window seal properly to the frame.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement
Head Rest: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement > Page 12462
Head Rest: Service and Repair Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement > Page 12463
Head Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement
Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement > Page 12464
Head Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information
Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A
Date: March 24, 2011
Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom
Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE
HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS
RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED
DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE
OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS
INCURRED.
You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far
forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been
designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle
has its own specifically designed head restraint.
The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head
restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or
head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or
head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket
comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed.
Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this
may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper
positioning of the passenger within the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation
Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory
Sys Operation
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B
Date: January 15, 2010
Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with
Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative
(Reprogram Memory Seat Module)
Models:
2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All
Built Prior to November 2, 2009
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns:
- The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will
not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may
also experience the inability to move the seat up or down.
- The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is
engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle
in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after
taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt
position and not returning to the memory position at all.
- The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory
Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent
operation.
- The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the
inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages
that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern.
Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration.
Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page
12474
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12475
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12476
Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12477
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12478
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12479
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12480
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12484
Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12485
Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Power Seat Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12489
Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT)
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12490
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12491
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12492
K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12493
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12494
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Motor: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12498
Power Seat Motor: Diagrams
M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (AE8)
M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12499
M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12500
M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12501
M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement
Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement
Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement > Page 12504
Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Front Seat Adjuster Actuator Replacement
Front Seat Adjuster Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12508
Power Seat Switch: Diagrams
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12509
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 12510
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement > Page 12513
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement
Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad
Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12518
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12519
Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12520
Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12521
Seat Back: Service and Repair Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rear seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat
Replacement). 2. Remove the fastener from the rear seat back latch and pull the latch out from the
seat back assembly.
3. Detach the latch cable from the latch.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12522
4. If you are going to replace the cable, disconnect the latch cable at the seat recliner mechanism.
5. Open the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12523
6. Attach a mechanics wire to the cable to guide it through the seat back. 7. Pull the cable out from
the seat back assembly.
Installation Procedure
1. Attach a mechanics wire to the new cable to guide it through the seat back. 2. If you are
replacing the cable, route the cable through the rear seat back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12524
3. Connect the latch cable to the recliner mechanism.
4. Connect the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover. 5. Connect the latch cable to the latch
assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12525
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
6. Install the latch to the seat back with a fastener and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Install the rear
seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat Replacement).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12526
Seat Back: Service and Repair
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12527
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12528
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12529
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the rear seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat
Replacement). 2. Remove the fastener from the rear seat back latch and pull the latch out from the
seat back assembly.
3. Detach the latch cable from the latch.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12530
4. If you are going to replace the cable, disconnect the latch cable at the seat recliner mechanism.
5. Open the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12531
6. Attach a mechanics wire to the cable to guide it through the seat back. 7. Pull the cable out from
the seat back assembly.
Installation Procedure
1. Attach a mechanics wire to the new cable to guide it through the seat back. 2. If you are
replacing the cable, route the cable through the rear seat back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12532
3. Connect the latch cable to the recliner mechanism.
4. Connect the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover. 5. Connect the latch cable to the latch
assembly.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12533
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
6. Install the latch to the seat back with a fastener and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Install the rear
seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat Replacement).
Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 60 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 60 percent seat)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12534
Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 40 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 40 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 60 percent seat)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12535
Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 60 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 40 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 40 percent seat)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12536
Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 60 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 60 percent seat)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12537
Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 40 percent seat)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 40 percent seat)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12538
Rear Seat Recliner Inner Finish Cover Replacement
Rear Seat Recliner Inner Finish Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12539
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Release Handle Replacement
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Release Handle Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12540
Rear Seat Recliner Outer Finish Cover Replacement
Rear Seat Recliner Outer Finish Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12541
Rear Seat Outer Recliner Rear Finish Cover Replacement
Rear Seat Outer Recliner Rear Finish Cover Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12542
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info
Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D
Date: September 09, 2010
Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and
Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits,
wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of
the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the
Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or
No Trouble Found (NTF).
The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions:
- Cigarette burns
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12547
- Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.)
- Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet)
- Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's
Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later.
- Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual
- Other chemical spills
- Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use
- Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI).
Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and
cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the
customer's expense.
The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty:
- Split seams
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12548
- Wear/cracking/peeling
- Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed
after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409),
replace the covers.)
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12549
Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F
Date: April 27, 2010
Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather,
Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability
Models:
2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum
and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009
Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information).
To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the
upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which
can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care
should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and
fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to
the point that nothing can remove it.
Important
Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.
- Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This
can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces.
- Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of
the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are
in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are
water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals.
Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film.
When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components.
The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing
adhesive residue without causing damage to the component.
Important
- If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the
residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the
pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue.
- On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be
treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this
bulletin for more information.
Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces:
1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the
towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work
cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the
surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the
towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's
original luster.
Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is
important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's
integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12550
Effective cleaning steps for fabric:
1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate
stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle
brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to
reduce or eliminate future staining.
Upholstery and Carpet Stains
When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you
determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the
common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after
the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils.
A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain
or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material.
Leather Conditioner/Restorer
A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a
water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds
luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12551
Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede
comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will
appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely
affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with
the restorer.
Extractor Machine and Concentrate
For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when
using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N
627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released
a concentrate for use with the extractor machine.
Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby
Extractor:
Ruby Extractor Specifications:
- Pump PSI: 55
- Water Lift: 85"
- Hose Length: 10 ft
Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty.
Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in
the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The
water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry
time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better
contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine.
Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help
remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions
listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain
is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to
remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions.
Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the
extraction process.
Parts Information
Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles.
Available Equipment
Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12552
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12557
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12558
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion Frame Replacement
Rear Seat Cushion Frame Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12563
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12564
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12565
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12566
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12567
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12568
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12569
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12570
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12571
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12572
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12573
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12574
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12575
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12576
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12577
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12578
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12579
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12580
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12581
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12582
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12583
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12584
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12585
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12586
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12587
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12588
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12589
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12590
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12591
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12592
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12593
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12594
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12595
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12596
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12597
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12598
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12599
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12600
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12601
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12602
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12603
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12604
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12605
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12606
Seat Fan: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12607
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12608
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12609
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12610
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12611
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12612
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12613
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12614
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12615
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12616
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12617
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12618
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12619
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12620
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12621
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12622
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12623
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12624
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12625
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12626
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12627
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12628
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12629
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12630
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12631
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12632
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12633
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12634
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12635
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12636
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12637
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12638
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12639
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12640
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12641
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12642
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12643
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12644
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12645
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12646
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12647
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12648
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12649
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12650
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12651
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12652
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12653
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12654
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12655
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12656
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12657
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12658
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12659
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12660
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12661
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12662
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12663
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12664
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12665
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12666
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12667
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12668
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12669
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12670
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12671
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12672
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12673
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12674
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12675
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12676
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12677
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12678
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12679
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12680
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12681
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12682
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12683
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12684
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12685
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12686
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12687
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12688
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12689
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12690
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12691
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12692
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12693
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12694
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12695
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12696
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12697
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12698
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12699
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12700
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12701
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12702
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12703
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12704
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12705
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12706
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12707
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12708
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12709
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12710
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12711
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12712
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12713
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12714
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12715
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12716
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12717
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12718
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12719
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12720
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12721
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12722
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12723
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12724
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12725
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12726
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12727
Seat Fan: Electrical Diagrams
Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics
Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Controls (KA1)
Heating Elements (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12728
Heating Elements (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12729
SPO Heated Seats
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12730
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Specifications
Seat Heater: Specifications
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12736
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12737
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12738
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12739
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12740
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12741
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12742
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12743
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12744
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12745
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12746
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12747
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12748
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12749
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12750
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12751
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12752
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12753
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12754
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12755
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12756
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12757
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12758
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12759
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12760
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12761
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12762
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12763
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12764
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12765
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12766
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12767
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12768
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12769
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12770
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12771
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12772
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12773
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12774
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12775
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12776
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12777
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12778
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12779
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12780
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12781
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12782
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12783
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12784
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12785
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12786
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12787
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12788
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12789
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12790
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12791
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12792
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12793
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12794
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12795
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12796
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12797
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12798
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12799
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12800
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12801
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12802
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12803
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12804
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12805
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12806
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12807
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12808
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12809
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12810
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12811
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12812
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12813
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12814
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12815
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12816
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12817
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12818
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12819
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12820
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12821
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12822
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12823
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12824
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12825
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12826
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12827
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12828
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12829
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12830
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12831
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12832
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12833
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12834
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12835
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12836
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12837
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12838
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12839
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12840
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12841
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12842
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12843
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12844
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12845
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12846
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12847
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12848
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12849
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12850
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12851
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12852
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12853
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12854
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12855
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12856
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12857
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12858
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12859
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12860
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12861
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12862
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12863
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12864
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12865
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12866
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12867
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12868
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12869
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12870
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12871
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12872
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12873
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12874
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12875
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12876
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12877
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12878
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12879
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12880
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12881
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12882
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12883
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12884
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12885
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12886
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12887
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12888
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12889
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12890
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12891
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12892
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12893
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12894
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12895
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12896
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12897
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12898
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12899
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12900
Seat Heater: Connector Views
E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12901
E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12902
E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12903
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12904
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics
Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Controls (KA1)
Heating Elements (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12905
Heating Elements (KA1 with LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12906
SPO Heated Seats
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 12907
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed)
Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory
Installed)
Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed)
Heated Seat Components
The heated seat system consists of the following components:
* Heated seat switch
* HVAC control
* Seat memory control module or seat heating control module
* Seat cushion heating element
* Seat back heating element
* Seat cushion temperature sensor
* 10 A fuse
* 25 A fuse
Heated Seat Operation
The driver and passenger heated seats are controlled by separate heated seat switches. Both
switches are located in the HVAC controls. When a heated seat switch is pressed, a LIN-Bus
message is sent from the HVAC control to the HVAC control module. The HVAC control module
then serves as a gateway to transmit the message to the seat memory control module/seat heating
control module via serial data line indicating the heated seat command. In response to this
message, the seat memory control module/seat heating control module applies or removes battery
voltage through the element supply voltage circuit of the seat heating elements. The seat memory
control module/seat heating control module sends a serial data message back to the HVAC control
module to gateway the information to the HVAC control to either illuminate or turn off the
appropriate temperature indicator.
Temperature Regulation
The seat memory control module/seat heating control module monitors the seat temperature
through the temperature sensor signal circuit and the temperature sensor (thermistor) located in
the seat cushion with the heater element. The temperature sensor is a variable resistor, it's
resistance varies as the temperature of the seat changes. When the temperature sensor resistance
indicates to the seat module that the seat has reached the desired temperature, the module opens
the ground path of the seat heating elements through the heated seat element control circuit. The
module will then cycle the element control circuit open and closed in order to maintain the desired
temperature.
Remote Start Seat Heating and Ventilation
Some vehicles allow the customer to configure their heated and/or ventilated seats to come on
after a remote start is commanded. The heated seats will only come on if the outside air
temperature is below 50°F as measured by the outside air temperature sensor. When seat heating
is commanded, the heating level will be on the "High" setting. On some vehicles, the LED display
for the temperature level may not illuminate during remote start operation. When the vehicle
operator inserts the key in the ignition and turns it to the "On" position, the heated seats will
automatically turn off. Be aware that during remote start heated seat operation, since there is no
occupant in the seat, the customer may comment that they feel little or no difference in the
temperature of the seat. This is due to little heat transfer to the seat cover occurring since there is
no weigh on the cushion. Once the seat is occupied and the seat cover is pressed against the
heater element, heat will begin to transfer more rapidly to the seat cover.
Load Management
The electrical power management function is designed to monitor the vehicle electrical load and
determine when the battery is potentially in a high discharge condition. The heated seat system is
one of the vehicle loads that is subject to reduction during a battery discharge condition. For more
information on load management refer to Electrical Power Management Description and Operation
(See: Starting and Charging/Description and Operation/Electrical Power Management Description
and Operation).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) > Page 12910
Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed)
Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed)
Heated Seat Components
The heated seat system consists of the following components:
* Heated seat switch
* Seat heating control module
* Driver seat cushion heating element
* Driver seat back heating element
* Driver seat cushion temperature sensor
* Passenger seat cushion heating element
* Passenger seat back heating element
* Passenger seat cushion temperature sensor
Heated Seat Operation
Battery positive voltage and ground is supplied to the seat heating control module from the auxiliary
power outlet harness connector located under the CD player. This voltage is used to power up the
heated seat module and to supply power to the seat heater elements. Battery voltage is supplied to
the heated seat switch from the seat heating control module. When a heated seat switch is
pressed, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts and the heated seat switch signal
circuit to the seat heating control module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this
signal, the seat heating control module applies battery voltage through the control circuit to the seat
heater elements.
Temperature Regulation
The seat memory control module/seat heating control module monitors the seat temperature
through the temperature sensor signal circuit and the temperature sensor (thermistor) located in
the seat cushion with the heater element. The temperature sensor is a variable resistor, it's
resistance varies as the temperature of the seat changes. When the temperature sensor resistance
indicates to the seat module that the seat has reached the desired temperature, the module opens
the ground path of the seat heating elements through the heated seat element control circuit. The
module will then cycle the element control circuit open and closed in order to maintain the desired
temperature.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling
Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling
Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling
Note: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. When diagnosing a heated seat system condition perform the Diagnostic System Check Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) , before using the symptom tables in
order to verify that all of the following are true:
* There are no DTCs set.
* The control module(s) can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory
Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory
Installed))Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and
Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed)).
Visual/Physical Inspection
* Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the power seats. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories).
* Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions
which could cause the symptom.
* Inspect the seat adjuster track for conditions which may cause binding or objects within the seat
adjustment range which obstruct movement or interfere with wiring.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing
for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections ( See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections).
Symptom List
Refer to the Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory) (See: Front Heated Seat Malfunction
(Without Memory))Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory) (See: Front Heated Seat
Malfunction (With Memory))Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed) (See: Front Heated
Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed)) diagnostic procedure in order to diagnose the symptom.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12913
Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory)
Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory)
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The driver and front passenger heated seats are controlled by separate heated seat switches that
are located in the radio/HVAC controls. When a heated seat switch is pressed, a serial message is
sent from the radio/HVAC controls to the HVAC control module indicating the heated seat
command. The HVAC control module serves as a gateway to transmit the message to the seat
heating control module via the serial data line. In response to this message, the seat heating
control module applies battery voltage through the element supply voltage circuit to the appropriate
seat heating elements. The seat heating control module then sends a serial data message back to
the HVAC control module to gateway the information to the radio/HVAC controls to either illuminate
or turn off the appropriate temperature indicator.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and
Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description
and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and
Operation (Dealer Installed)) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12914
Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Engine ON, observe the scan tool Driver Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while
pressing the driver HEATED seat switch. The
reading should change between Off and Back & Cushion.
‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls.
2. Observe the scan tool Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while pressing
the passenger HEATED seat switch. The reading
should change between Off and Back & Cushion.
‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls.
3. If all scan tool parameter readings test normal, there are no DTCs set, and the driver and/or
passenger heated seat is inoperative, replace the K29
seat heating control module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Radio Control Assembly Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo,
and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Radio Control Assembly Replacement)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for seat
memory control module replacement, setup, and programming
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12915
Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory)
Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory)
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
The driver and front passenger heated seats are controlled by separate heated seat switches that
are located in the radio/HVAC controls. When a heated seat switch is pressed, a serial data
message is sent from the radio/HVAC controls to the HVAC control module indicating the heated
seat command. The HVAC control module serves as a gateway to transmit the message to the
seat memory control module via the serial data line. In response to this message, the seat memory
control module applies battery voltage through the element supply voltage circuit to the appropriate
seat heating elements. The seat memory control module then sends a serial data message back to
the HVAC control module to gateway the information to the radio/HVAC controls to either illuminate
or turn off the appropriate temperature indicator.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and
Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description
and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and
Operation (Dealer Installed)) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12916
Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K40 seat memory control module. 2.
Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high
resistance.
3. Ignition OFF, connect the X4 harness connector at the K40 seat memory control module. 4.
Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Driver Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while
pressing the driver HEATED seat switch. The
reading should change between Off and Back & Cushion.
‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls.
5. Observe the scan tool Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while pressing
the passenger HEATED seat switch. The reading
should change between Off and Back & Cushion.
‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls.
6. If all scan tool parameter readings test normal, there are no DTCs set, and the driver and/or
passenger heated seat is inoperative, replace the K40
seat memory control module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Radio Control Assembly Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo,
and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Radio Control Assembly Replacement)
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for seat
memory control module replacement, setup, and programming
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12917
Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed)
Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed)
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit/System Description
Battery positive voltage and ground is supplied to the seat heating control module from the auxiliary
power outlet harness connector located under the CD player. This voltage is used to power up the
heated seat module and to supply power to the seat heater elements. Battery voltage is supplied to
the heated seat switch from the seat heating control module. When a heated seat switch is
pressed, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts and the heated seat switch signal
circuit to the seat heating control module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this
signal, the seat heating control module applies battery voltage through the control circuit to the seat
heater elements.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View
Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation
Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and
Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description
and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and
Operation (Dealer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12918
Installed)) Electrical Information Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan
tool information
Circuit System Verification
Note: For a valid test of the heated seat operation, you must sit in the seat for at least a 5 minute
period for which the heat has time to reach the seat surface.
1. Ignition ON, operate both heated seats. The seat cushion and seat back should get warm for
both seats.
‹› If both the driver and front passenger heated seats are inoperative, refer to Driver and Passenger
Heated Seats Inoperative. ‹› If just one of the heated seats is inoperative or always ON, refer to
Heated Seat Malfunction.
2. Observe the heated seat switch temperature indicators while pressing the appropriate heated
seat switch through the high, medium, and low
positions. The appropriate indicators should illuminate as the switch is activated.
‹› If the heated seat operates normal, but one or all of the switch temperature indicators are
inoperative or always ON, refer to Heated Seat
Switch Indicator Malfunction.
‹› If three temperature indicators are flashing, there is a problem with the heating element circuit.
Refer to Heated Seat Malfunction. ‹› If one temperature indicator is flashing, there is a problem with
the temperature sensor circuit. Refer to Heated Seat Malfunction.
Circuit/System Testing
Driver and Passenger Heated Seats Inoperative
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the seat heating control module. 2. Test
for less than 5 Ohms between the ground circuit terminals listed below and ground:
* Terminal 2
* Terminal 5
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance.
3. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminals listed below and
ground:
* Terminal 3
* Terminal 6
‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high
resistance.
4. Ignition OFF, connect the X2 harness connector at seat heating control module and disconnect
the harness connector at the heated seat switch. 5. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates
between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high
resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the
seat heating control module.
6. If all circuits test normal, replace the seat heating control module.
Heated Seat Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the seat heating control module. 2. Install
a 3 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and B+. 3. Connect a test lamp between
the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.
* Driver heated seat switch terminal 2
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12919
* Passenger heated seat switch terminal 7
4. Ignition ON, press and release the appropriate heated seat switch. The test lamp should turn ON
and OFF as the switch is pressed and released.
‹› If the test lamp is always ON, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests
normal, test or replace the heated seat switch. ‹› If the test lamp is always OFF, test the signal
circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace
the heated seat switch.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the X5 harness connector at the seat heating control module and
disconnect the appropriate X1 or X3 harness connector at
the seat heating control module.
6. Test for 800 - 300 kOhms between the signal circuit terminal 3 and low reference circuit terminal
4.
‹› If less than the specified range, test for a short between the signal and low reference circuits. If
the circuits test normal, test or replace the seat
cushion heater element.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the signal and low reference circuits for a short to voltage
or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test
normal, test or replace the seat cushion heater element.
7. Disconnect the harness connector at the seat back heating element.
Note: Element resistance must be measured twice to ensure that all failure conditions are
simulated. First with the seat unoccupied, then with the seat occupied.
8. Test for 1 - 5 Ohms between control the circuit terminal A and the low reference circuit terminal
B.
‹› If not within the specified range, test or replace the seat back heating element.
9. Connect the harness connector at the seat back heating element.
Note: Element resistance must be measured twice to ensure that all failure conditions are
simulated. First with the seat unoccupied, then with the seat occupied.
10. At the seat heating control module harness connector, test for 1 - 7 Ohms between the control
circuit terminal 1 and the low reference circuit
terminal 2.
‹› If less than the specified range, test for a short between the control and low reference circuits. If
the circuits test normal, test or replace the seat
cushion heater element.
‹› If greater than the specified range, test the control and low reference circuits for an open/high
resistance. If the circuits test normal, test or
replace the seat cushion heater element.
11. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to ground.
12. Ignition ON, test for less than 0.1 V between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground.
‹› If greater than the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage.
13. If all circuits test normal, replace the seat heating control module.
Heated Seat Switch Indicator Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the heated seat switch. 2. Ignition ON, verify
that a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit terminals listed below and B+.
* Left seat high temperature indicator terminal 2
* Left seat medium temperature indicator terminal 3
* Left seat low temperature indicator terminal
* Right seat high temperature indicator terminal 6
* Right seat medium temperature indicator terminal 7
* Right seat low temperature indicator terminal
‹› If the test illuminates, test the appropriate control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests
normal, replace the seat heating control
module.
3. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the heated seat switch and disconnect the X5
harness connector at the seat heating control module. 4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between
the B+ circuit terminal 1 and B+. 5. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the control circuit
terminals listed below and ground. The appropriate temperature indicator should
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 12920
illuminate.
* Left seat high temperature indicator terminal 2
* Left seat medium temperature indicator terminal 3
* Left seat low temperature indicator terminal
* Right seat high temperature indicator terminal 7
* Right seat medium temperature indicator terminal 8
* Right seat low temperature indicator terminal
‹› If the indicator does not illuminate, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high
resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or
replace the heated seat switch.
6. If all circuits test normal, replace the seat heating control module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement
Seat Heater: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement > Page 12923
Seat Heater: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Seat Heater Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12927
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12928
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12929
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12930
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12931
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12932
K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12933
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 12934
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams
S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Vacuum/Pressure Pump, Seats > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Vacuum/Pressure Pump: Service and Repair
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Vertical Actuator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 12946
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 12947
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams
B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration
Calibration Criteria
Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure.
Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail.
If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated.
Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or
body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal
position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver
applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data.
Calibration Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4.
Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM
menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position
Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 12952
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12956
Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams
S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12957
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Outside Remote Control Rearview Mirror Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12961
Power Seat Switch: Diagrams
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12962
S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT)
S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12963
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement > Page 12966
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement
Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12970
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams
B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5)
B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12971
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams
S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Driver Seat Components
1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar
Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat
Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or
SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or
M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D
Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15
- E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12978
Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams
S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12979
Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12983
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12984
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams
S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5)
S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12985
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement > Page 12988
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch
Sunroof Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12992
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12993
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12994
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams
B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12995
S46 Liftgate Handle Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 12996
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Liftgate Close Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 12999
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement
Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 13000
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Replacement
Liftgate Release Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Position
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Liftgate Side Upper Sensor Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine
Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side
Splash Guard: Service and Repair Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side
Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine
Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side > Page 13008
Splash Guard: Service and Repair Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Right Side
Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Right Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Spoiler: Service and Repair
Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 13022
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 >
Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension or Front
Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 >
Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 13028
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 13029
Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220
Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 13030
9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220
Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A
Date: December 20, 2010
Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft)
Models:
2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain
2008-2010 Saturn VUE
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please
discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension).
Condition
Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise
coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium
suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns.
Cause
The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper
rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition.
Correction
Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc)
without first performing this bulletin.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 13031
1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of
the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce
bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly
down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft.
5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut
shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft.
8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust
shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut.
10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as
possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the
vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service
and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Screen Replacement
Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service
and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement > Page 13038
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement
Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip
Replacement
Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13044
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13045
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13046
Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement
Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Front Seal Replacement
Hood Front Seal Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement > Page 13054
Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement
Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13059
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13060
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip
Replacement
Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13061
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip
Replacement
Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13062
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13063
Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement
Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13071
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement
Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13072
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement
Liftgate Wedge Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13073
Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side
Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) > Page 13079
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5)
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) > Page 13085
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5)
Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan > 11 >
Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing
Battery Lamp/Indicator: Customer Interest Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-08-49-001
Date: January 31, 2011
Subject: Transport Mode On Message Displayed in Driver Information Center (DIC) and Battery
Light is Flashing (Follow Procedure as Outlined Below)
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2011 Chevrolet Volt
Condition
Some customers may comment that the red battery light is flashing and there is a "Transport Mode
On" message displayed in the DIC. The transport mode is intended for use on vehicles being
shipped outside of the United States and Canada.
Correction
2011 Vehicle Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard flashers, press the
brake pedal, then press and hold the Start/Stop button or turn the ignition key to the crank position
for 15 seconds.
2010 Chevrolet Camaro Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard lamps, turn the
ignition key to the crank position, and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. The
Transport Mode Off message will be displayed and the Battery light will turn off.
2010 Buick LaCrosse Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button or
turn the ignition key to the crank position, while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the
Transport Mode Off message is displayed.
2010 Cadillac SRX Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button
while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the Transport Mode Off message is displayed. For
SRX, if Transport Mode is active, this causes the RKE system to only work when the ignition is On
or the BCM is awake (approximately 20 minutes after ignition off).
2010 Chevrolet Equinox Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to turn the ignition key to the crank position,
and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. After turning the Transport Mode Off, make
sure the ignition lock cylinder is not binding on the bezel around it, and causing the key to stick in
the crank position.
Note
If this is a repeat concern, this feature can be completely turned off by reprogramming the BCM.
This calibration will be titled "Update calibrations to improve Customer Satisfaction."
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan > 11 >
Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing > Page 13095
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan
> 11 > Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing
Battery Lamp/Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light
Flashing
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 11-08-49-001
Date: January 31, 2011
Subject: Transport Mode On Message Displayed in Driver Information Center (DIC) and Battery
Light is Flashing (Follow Procedure as Outlined Below)
Models:
2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet
Camaro, Equinox 2011 Chevrolet Volt
Condition
Some customers may comment that the red battery light is flashing and there is a "Transport Mode
On" message displayed in the DIC. The transport mode is intended for use on vehicles being
shipped outside of the United States and Canada.
Correction
2011 Vehicle Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard flashers, press the
brake pedal, then press and hold the Start/Stop button or turn the ignition key to the crank position
for 15 seconds.
2010 Chevrolet Camaro Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard lamps, turn the
ignition key to the crank position, and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. The
Transport Mode Off message will be displayed and the Battery light will turn off.
2010 Buick LaCrosse Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button or
turn the ignition key to the crank position, while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the
Transport Mode Off message is displayed.
2010 Cadillac SRX Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button
while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the Transport Mode Off message is displayed. For
SRX, if Transport Mode is active, this causes the RKE system to only work when the ignition is On
or the BCM is awake (approximately 20 minutes after ignition off).
2010 Chevrolet Equinox Procedure
To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to turn the ignition key to the crank position,
and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. After turning the Transport Mode Off, make
sure the ignition lock cylinder is not binding on the bezel around it, and causing the key to stick in
the crank position.
Note
If this is a repeat concern, this feature can be completely turned off by reprogramming the BCM.
This calibration will be titled "Update calibrations to improve Customer Satisfaction."
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan
> 11 > Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing > Page 13101
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Electrical Schematic Symbols
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13106
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13107
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13108
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13109
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13110
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13111
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13112
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13113
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13114
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13115
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13116
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13117
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13118
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13119
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13120
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13121
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13122
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13123
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13124
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13125
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13126
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13127
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13128
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13129
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13130
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13131
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13132
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13133
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13134
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13135
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13136
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13137
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13138
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13139
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13140
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13141
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13142
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13143
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13144
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13145
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13146
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13147
General Electrical Diagnosis
General Electrical Diagnosis
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures
contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know
the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read
and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or
a shorted wire.
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
Vehicle Zoning Strategy
All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they
are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13148
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13149
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Arrows and Symbols
Arrows and Symbols
This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations.
1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or
Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or
Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Decimal and Metric Equivalents
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13150
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13151
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint
Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning).
Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the
circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and
causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component
damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit.
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits:
* SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
* OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical
problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on
accessories are not the cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
* Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
* Antenna location
* Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
* Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
* Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Circuit Testing
Circuit Testing
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this
information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
* Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test
Adapters)
* Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical
Connectors)
* Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13152
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter)
* Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test
Lamp)
* Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires)
* Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage)
* Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop)
* Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency)
* Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions)
* Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents)
* Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure)
* Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses)
* Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit
Breakers)
* Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible
Links)
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Special Tools
EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter
(DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an
attached pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where
voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point
being tested.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13153
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the
positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the
DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage
measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Special Tools
J-25070 - Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is
caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the
customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction
appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions,
including:
* Wiggling the harness
* Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
* Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
* Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
* Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool
connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot
option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component
commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the
component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while
monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed,
component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as
necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of
weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to
duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding
harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A
DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield
desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents).
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide
good results as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the
fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other
conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions,
along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the
circuit to these kinds of conditions.
Salt Water Spray
Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as
ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13154
quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be
sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture.
Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5
percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's
own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is
completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan
tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat
gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses
under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault
condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal
operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis.
This option does not allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle
is in the shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that
provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to
-18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized
cooling needs.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or
components in an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
* If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure
conditions.
* Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present
when the DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that
were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must
also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the
DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough
for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
* An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An
abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
Measuring Frequency
Measuring Frequency
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will
allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect
the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13155
5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable
the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
* Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
* Turn ON the engine.
* Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
* Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive
lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to
a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Voltage Drop
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13156
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the
negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM
displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
Probing Electrical Connectors
Probing Electrical Connectors
Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position
assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have
been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is
the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to
use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical
center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested.
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing
connectors:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13157
Backprobe
Note:
* Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
* Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector.
* Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large
of a test probe.
* After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
Overview
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13158
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information
while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a
vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather
than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select,
Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow
snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished
recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay.
Snapshot Replay
The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions.
The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning
properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods:
* Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection.
* Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page.
* Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open
the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load
Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file.
Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot
Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window.
Snapshot Play Functions
There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots
* The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will
move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they
are active.
* The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a
second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off.
* The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the
beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function.
Time Control
Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time
frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be
selected directly under Time Control.
* The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to
this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a
bookmark name and select OK.
* The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of
time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the
snapshot file and select OK.
* The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis.
This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager.
* The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be
selected by clicking on the item you want.
* The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X,
1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of
2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection.
View Selections
Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following
functions can be selected under Available Views:
Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation
is available for the name.
* Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of
the parameters is displayed on the screen.
* Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in
the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by
clicking on the appropriate item.
* State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be
used for comparison with the trigger view.
* Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when
there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met
a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen.
Triggers:
* Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions.
* Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive.
* Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present.
* Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters
contained within a trigger.
* Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger.
* DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the
list of recorded DTCs.
* Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view,
specific parameters can be selected for graphing by
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13159
checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In
(increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these
functions can be accessed by clicking on them.
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Continuity
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse,
control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on
the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the
other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance,
the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the
other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to
ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at
convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
* Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground)
* Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity)
* Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to
Voltage)
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the
EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected.
Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200
can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum
(MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end
of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13160
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with
a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of
the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the
EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep).
Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling
the connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions).
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has
been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the
value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9.
Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
* If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an
intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist.
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be
intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the
symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of
causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the
following items:
* Wiring broken inside the insulation
* Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
* Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor
crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
* Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The
conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff
sections of wire in the suspect circuits.
* Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent
open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
* Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
* Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the
customer concern.
* Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical
Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and
short to voltage conditions.
* Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot
Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is
a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between
electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that
the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting
surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of
paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal
expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and
can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper,
nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult
to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G
(dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13161
terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the
additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing
a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of
contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody
connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper
adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation
are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector
halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact
causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses
and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact.
Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination.
Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or
between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An
underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its
entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly
different between a known good terminal and the
suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of
contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a
source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the
circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
* Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying
voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply
circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors,
fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component.
A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the
component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power
Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and
Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics).
* Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple
ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need
to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can
carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System
Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics).
Temperature Sensitivity
* An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when
the component/connection is hot.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13162
* Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type
of intermittent condition, where applicable.
* If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
- High ambient temperatures
- Underhood/engine generated heat
- Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
- Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
* If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
- Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
- The condition only occurs on a cold start.
- The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
* Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is
temperature related.
* If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the
condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing
Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
* A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary
ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a
circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation.
* Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven
solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will
occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
* Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way
radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These
accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in
use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket
Accessories).
* Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays
may contain a clamping diode.
* The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
* There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
- A new service control module is installed.
- A control module from another vehicle is installed.
- Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are
already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
* Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming
is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement,
setup, and programming.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Short to Ground
Special Tools
* EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
* EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13163
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to
one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the
DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the
load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of
the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or
switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure
that the fuse is powered).
* When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
* If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test
Probe Caution).
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13164
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module
(ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the
EL-39200.
The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly
upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits.
While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM
indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp
will not illuminate even though voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a
circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM.
This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the
presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find
out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and
take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the
measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
* Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors).
* Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a
component or to other harnesses.
* If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in
order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Using Connector Test Adapters
Special Tools
EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal.
The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor
connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved
Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other
substitutes to probe terminals.
When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test
adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal
test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal
in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the
EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580
GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view
for terminal size.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Special Tools
J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13165
Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without
damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some
circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
AFL/EPC Connectors
AFL/EPC Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the
connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13166
2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13167
View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab.
View of connector in released position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the
corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the
dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13168
6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover.
7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the
nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body.
Gently pry the nose piece out of the
connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13169
9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the
inside of the connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Bosch Connectors (BSK)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13170
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage
the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Bosch Connectors (ECM)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13171
1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13172
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool
to release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13173
5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector.
6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into
the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13174
Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before
reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component.
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Bosch Connectors (0.64)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector
dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13175
5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small
flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector
body and pry up.
6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a
small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the
connector end and pry up.
7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13176
9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small
slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the
TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector,
gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector.
10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of
the connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling
a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13177
1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding
grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the
retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and
seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4.
Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet.
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4.
Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in
position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13178
5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the
connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the
terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is
difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Connector Position Assurance Locks
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in
all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate
apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating
terminals, of the connector.
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the
connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the
manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector
manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list:
* Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector
Position Assurance Locks)
* Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position
Assurance Locks)
* AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors)
* Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8
JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors
(ECM))
* Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13179
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR))
* FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear))
* JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors)
* Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal
Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission))
* Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors)
* Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors)
* Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors
(CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector
Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door
Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module))
* Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors
(16-Way))
* Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector
Terminals)
Connector Anatomy
1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13180
5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal
Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector
Identifying Connectors
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair
procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes
difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with
the identification of connector manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
* AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
* Bosch
* Delphi
* FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
* JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
* JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
* Kostel
* Molex
* Sumitomo
* Tyco/AMP
* Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the
manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector
supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and
refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings.
* Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will
not have any markings on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13181
* In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the
connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo
can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
* In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the
connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they
can appear anywhere on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13182
* FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A"
above it.
* JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13183
* JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location
of the logo will vary with the connector size and style.
* Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13184
* Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some
cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the
connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is
similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere
but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing.
* Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have
identifiable marks on them.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13185
* Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors.
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves (1).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13186
3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector.
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal,
refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3.
Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a
new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward
the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the
passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the
back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Terminated Lead Repair
1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice
sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat)
Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat)
Special Tools
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13187
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal
If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should
be replaced.
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors:
1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3.
Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into
the front of the connector body.
Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to
remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough
service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal.
5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the
connector body.
Terminal Repair
1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the
same size wire through the back of the connector
cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not
cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the
crimp with rosin core solder.
Terminal Installation
1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal.
2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing
Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the
connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks.
Delphi Connectors (Micro .64)
Delphi Connectors (Micro.64)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13188
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and
past the lock. The lever lock may be located on
the top or sides of the wire dress cover.
View of a typical Micro 64 connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13189
Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock.
View of the connector when released from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13190
View of another type of Micro 64 connector.
Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and
past the locks.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13191
View of the connector when released from the component.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool
push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the
cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab.
4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward.
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing
down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA
out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13192
Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the
tool may break.
6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the
connector. See the release tool cross reference in
the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals.
The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping.
In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed.
The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool
has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped.
The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same
time.
After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair
Micro 64 terminals.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation
from the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13193
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely
visible.
4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct
terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also
ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator.
5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the
terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7.
Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector.
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13194
Terminal Removal Procedure
There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use
different terminals and have some minor physical differences also.
The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds
the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the
terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and
offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals
cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to
identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities.
Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you
have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector
uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second
design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area.
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some
Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13195
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece.
The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive
assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same
side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose
piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover
removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover
removal procedures may vary.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13196
6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover.
7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13197
8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat
procedure for the other side of the dress cover and
remove the cover.
9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never
use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the
wire out of the front of the connector instead of
pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal
is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire
through the connector.
Terminal Repair Procedure
The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when
crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was
developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W
terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the
terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the
connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13198
1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long
enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough,
splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on
the added wire.
2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal
holder is completely visible.
4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp
tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the
crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect
the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than
the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly.
5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the
emergency release to open applicator.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13199
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace
Micro-Pack 100 terminals.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure.
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors.
1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in
terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the
terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position.
4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the
connector cavity until it rests on the cavity
shoulder (1).
5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2).
Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector.
6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals).
7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join
connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily.
10. Perform system check.
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13200
Delphi Connectors (12-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA)
and slide the lever lock away from the connector
body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade
tool release all of the locking tabs.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13201
4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab.
5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress
cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13202
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the
TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector.
8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of
the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of
the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13203
9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release
cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13204
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13205
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab
is located on the top of the wiredress cover.
3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5.
Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs and remove the dress
cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13206
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both
ends of the connector. The TPA is located
underneath the wire dress cover.
For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the
terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference
in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13207
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
FCI (SIR)
FCI Connectors (SIR)
Removal Procedure
Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13208
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to
release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any
tools.
2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector.
Installation Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13209
1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small
flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA.
The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools.
2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and
push the connector down into the initiator
connector sub assembly until fully seated.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13210
3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until
the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on
the connector.
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
Removal Procedure
1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13211
2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be
pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the
locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector.
JST Connectors
JST Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13212
2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the
connector body.
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13213
4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body.
5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the
terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use
the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is
used.
6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13214
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
View of typical connector.
View of connector in released position.
1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2.
Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13215
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover.
4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13216
5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector.
Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position.
6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately
0.125 in. (3 mm).
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13217
8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the
terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13218
1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component.
2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13219
Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the
connector body.
3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as
shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13220
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA).
4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13221
5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body
when viewed.
Molex Connectors
Molex Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA
forward.
2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13222
3. The lever should be in the full forward position.
4. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13223
5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and
lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body.
7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When
the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose
piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13224
8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose
piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece,
gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you
should feel the nose piece click into position.
9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on
the back of the wire.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13225
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out.
The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
component.
3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover
opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13226
5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose
piece forward with your thumb. This will release
the terminal position assurance (TPA).
6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are
the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the
connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13227
7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull
the wire out of the back of the connector. Always
remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross
reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector.
1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the
dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once
the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13228
Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid
damaging it.
5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the
connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the
released position on both ends.
6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool
into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller
terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal
release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13229
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13230
View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13231
Side view of connector.
View of top of connector.
1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13232
2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock.
3. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13233
4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to
release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for
the other locking tab.
5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector
housing.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13234
6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool
cross reference in the Reference Guide of the
J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Repairing Connector Terminals
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following:
* Push to Seat terminals
* Pull to Seat terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your
terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For cable seal terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used.
Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal.
3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable
insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack
100 World terminals may damage the terminal.
Sumitomo Connectors
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13235
Sumitomo Connectors
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab.
2. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13236
3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and
pulling off the dress cover.
4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer
slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying
out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side
of the nose piece.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13237
5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up.
The nose piece should raise slightly.
6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by
hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The
nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure
on the opposite side.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13238
7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted,
and the terminal cavity.
* Terminal (1)
* Entry Canal (2)
8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal
retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the
terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13239
9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the
terminal retainer.
10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair
Kit.
Terminal Replacement Procedure
After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the
terminal.
1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal
into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other
terminals. Ensure that the terminal is
locked in place by gently pulling on the wire.
3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure.
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13240
2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the
terminal release tang access panel slides over.
3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the
terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and
hold it in position.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13241
5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access
panel of the connector and press down on the terminal
while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire
procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position
assurance (CPA).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13242
2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool
in the small recess on the side of the connector
and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly.
Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the
terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When
the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA
with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector.
3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector.
4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13243
5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the
terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the
back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a
connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure
that the correct release tool is used.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the
terminal.
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Terminal Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector from the component.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13244
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA)
and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the
terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position.
5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be
removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is
facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic
terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to
ensure that the correct release tool is used.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13245
6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector.
Always remember never use force when pulling a
terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure.
Terminal Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Special Tools
J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit
Removal Procedure
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13246
1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart.
Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully.
2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards
the face of the connector on both sides of the
connector.
3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13247
4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to
release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool
cross reference in the
Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used.
6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13248
7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in
place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when
pulling a
terminal out of a connector.
Repair Procedure
Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.
Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate
connector end view.
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in
excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the
circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types
of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker
- This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again
after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The
circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker
- This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually
the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the
PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once
the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13249
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is
an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an
open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time
the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if
the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital
Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace
the fuse with one of equal current rating.
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
Special Tools
EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is
often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or
a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine
if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
Repairing a Fusible Link
Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload
protection.
Flat Wire Repairs
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13250
Flat Wire Repairs
The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the
flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced.
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
GMLAN Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool
* DuraSeal splice sleeves
* A wire stripping tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low
energy circuits.
The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the
sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on
GMLAN connectors and terminals.
GMLAN Repairs
Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must
be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be
maintained after the repair is completed.
GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire
and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher
speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and
Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation).
GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair
Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed
and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high
speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the
repair.
If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector
repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure.
GMLAN Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13251
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13252
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference
being obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen
sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In
order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference
is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires,
connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen
sensor performance.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13253
The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
* Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors.
These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems.
* Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire.
* Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize
the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal
of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance.
* To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical
wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
* Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any
damaged wire.
* Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
* Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing.
* After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat
source.
Identifying High Temperature Wiring
Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time
need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher
temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas.
These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing.
Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are
used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician
to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas
of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and
exhaust pipes.
Items Required
* DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections
* High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves
* Terminated leads or pigtails
* The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or
larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape
that you remove during the repair.
High Temperature Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated
at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm
etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice
sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures
in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13254
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced.
Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with
the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13255
7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and
gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13256
12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the
heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from
the center to the open end of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair.
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the
wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If
the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the
appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires
together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced
together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire.
If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the
damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13257
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for
these sensitive, low energy circuits.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the
specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components,
such as connectors and terminals.
SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin)
Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals.
Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray.
The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits.
Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the
connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be
used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body.
SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair
Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail
is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering
wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR/SRS Wire Repair
Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to
determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in
order to ensure circuit integrity.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13258
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and
EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13259
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of
a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other
systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA
in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not
remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13260
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
* J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from
moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture
sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any
wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
* Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness
in order to avoid wire insulation damage.
* Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
* Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
* When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
* Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work
down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
* Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
* Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
* If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at
the beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13261
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13262
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from
voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure.
1. Open the harness.
* If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
* To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply
stores) in order to cut open the harness.
* If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow
direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable
soldering tool.
Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual wiring
schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some
heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the
diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for
the soldering equipment.
8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed.
Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable
of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and
other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below
in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable.
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap
the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the
splice is made.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire
Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by
65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13263
Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact
with the drain wire.
4. Re-assemble the cable.
* Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product
AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape.
* Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1).
* Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire.
* Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer
insulation.
5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape.
Wiring Repairs
Wiring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs)
* GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs)
* High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs)
* Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen
Sensor Wiring Repairs)
* Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves)
* Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded
Cable)
* Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness
Diodes)
* SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs)
US English/Metric Conversion
US English/Metric Conversion
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13264
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13265
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following
requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate
readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis.
Display and Settings
1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and
min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values
Voltage
1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an
AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V.
Amperage
1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A.
Resistance
Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40
Mohm (O.L. (Over-load))
Frequency
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ
Diode Test
1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop
(0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse
biased
Min-Max Readings
1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not
recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the
circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can
light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used
when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low
reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test
can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component
replacement.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13266
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM
continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a
ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal,
will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground
reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control
modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal
frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is
attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with
the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below
10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely
goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground
or low reference circuit:
* Ignition OFF
* Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start)
* Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF)
* Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
* Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
* All entry doors closed
* Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled)
* Any delay lighting OFF
* HVAC after blow OFF
* Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF
* Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met)
Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid
ground or low reference continuity test result.
Terminal Wiring Repair
Terminal Wiring Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures.
1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector
end view has the following information:
* Diagnostic probe tool
* Terminal release tool
* Terminal/terminated lead part numbers
2. Determine if a terminal is damaged.
Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed.
* Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes
the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool.
* Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter.
* Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a
Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital
Multimeter).
3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair.
Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs).
Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals:
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13267
Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To
Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical
Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors
(Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi
Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors
(Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi
Connectors (Steering Gear))
* The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body.
* Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper
terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit.
Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body.
* Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity.
Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released.
Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector.
Terminated Lead Repair
Terminated Lead Repair
Special Tools
* EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool
* EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit
* J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch
* EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and
Equipment).
Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the
High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring
Repairs) procedures.
Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used
throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is
450 mm.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13268
The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features:
* A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a
sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing.
* A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive
low energy circuits.
1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead
package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3.
Open the harness by removing any tape:
Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation
damage.
4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm.
Try to keep the harness wire length the same.
If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the
bundle size of the wire harness.
5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color
nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool
has four nests, one for each color.
6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the
end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop
(3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand
crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13269
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the
handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal
splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice.
9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
* The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
* A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13270
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13275
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or
Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13276
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical
Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and
ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 13280
Dimmer Switch: Diagrams
S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 13281
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation
Door Ajar Indicator Description and Operation
Door Ajar Indicator System Components
The door ajar indicator system consists of the following components:
* Body control module (BCM)
* Instrument cluster
* Driver information center
* Driver door latch
* Passenger door latch
* Left rear door latch
* Right rear door latch
* Liftgate door latch
* Driver window switch
* Passenger window switch
* Left rear window switch
* Right rear window switch
Driver Door Ajar
The driver window switch receives a discrete input from the driver door ajar switch within the driver
door latch to indicate the status of the door. The window switch then communicates this status to
the instrument cluster via GMLAN message. The instrument panel cluster, upon receipt of this
GMLAN message, will illuminate the appropriate door ajar message in the driver information center
and also send a GMLAN message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the
vehicle speed is greater then 8 km/h (5 MPH).
Passenger Door Ajar
The passenger window switch receives a discrete input from the passenger door ajar switch within
the passenger door latch to indicate the status of the door. The window switch then communicates
this status to the instrument cluster via GMLAN message. The instrument panel cluster, upon
receipt of this GMLAN message, will illuminate the appropriate door ajar message in the driver
information center and also send a GMLAN message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible
warning when the vehicle speed is greater then 8 km/h (5 MPH).
Left Rear Door Ajar And Right Rear Door Ajar
The body control module (BCM) (without power rear windows) or the left and right rear window
switches (with power rear windows AED) receive discrete inputs from both the rear door latches
and the rear compartment lid latch to indicate the status of the doors and rear compartment lid. The
BCM or window switches then communicate this status to the instrument cluster via GMLAN
message. The instrument panel cluster, upon receipt of this GMLAN message, will illuminate the
appropriate door ajar message in the driver information center and also send a GMLAN message
to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the vehicle speed is greater then 8 km/h
(5 MPH)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13285
Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Warning Lamp Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13289
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams
P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ)
P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13290
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13291
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair
Driver Information Display Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams
P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13296
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
SIR Disabling and Enabling
SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR
system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components
refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations).
There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or
servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable
the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information
covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system.
SIR Service Precautions
Warning
When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must
be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR
components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in
unnecessary SIR system repairs.
The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply.
The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery
power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after
disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the
SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply.
General Service Instructions
The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the
vehicle and return it to its original integrity:
* Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F).
* Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different
vehicle.
* Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use
salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system.
Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or
greater:
* Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
* Any air bag
* Driver steering wheel air bag coil
* Any impact sensor
* Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners
* Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor
Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position.
Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR
deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power
to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG
warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system
malfunction.
3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or
Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13297
Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to
SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical
Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and
ID).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the
ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to
Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
4. Wait 1 minute before working on system.
Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer
to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable
Disconnection and Connection).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4.
Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate
as described. Refer to Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic
System Check - Vehicle).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13306
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13307
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13308
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13309
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13310
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 >
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13311
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA09V489000 >
Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13321
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13327
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13328
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13329
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13330
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13331
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13332
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel
Blanks Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative >
Page 13337
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster
Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel
Blanks Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page
13347
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13353
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13354
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13355
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13356
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13357
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13358
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster
Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
13367
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
13368
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
13369
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
13370
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page
13371
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR
If your vehicle is equipped with a "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON"
indicator. This indicator is not a maintenance indicator and does not mean a maintenance service
is required.
For additional "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator information
refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
For Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator, refer to Oil Change Reminder Lamp.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis
Diagnostic Instructions
* Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic
procedure.
* Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
* Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module
(ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit.
Diagnostic Aids
If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors with the engine
operating. Monitor the scan tool Circuit Test Status parameters for the component. The Circuit Test
Status parameter will change from OK or Not run to Fault if there is a condition with the circuit or a
connection.
Reference Information Schematic Reference
* Instrument Cluster Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Instrument Cluster
Schematics)
* Engine Controls Schematics (See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams)
Connector End View Reference
Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Electrical Information
Reference
* Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing)
* Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs)
* Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic
Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections)
* Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General
Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs)
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan
tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool MIL Circuit Test Status parameters. Each of the MIL circuit
test status parameters should display OK or Not
Run.
2. Ignition ON, command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The MIL should turn ON and OFF
as commanded. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC
does not reset. You may also operate the vehicle within the
conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
Circuit/System Testing
1. If any other IPC indicators or gauges are inoperative, refer to Instrument Cluster Gauges
Inoperative (See: Testing and Inspection/Instrument
Cluster Gauges Inoperative).
2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM harness connectors. Ignition ON, the MIL should not
illuminate.
‹› If the MIL is illuminated, test the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 for a short to ground. If the
circuit tests normal, replace the IPC.
3. Ignition ON, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 and
ground. The MIL should illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 13378
‹› If the MIL does not illuminate, test the MIL control circuit for a short to voltage, or an open/high
resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace
the IPC/bulb.
4. If all circuits/connections test normal, replace the ECM.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure.
* Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)
* Instrument Cluster Replacement (Equinox) (See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and
Repair)Instrument Cluster Replacement (Terrain) ( See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and
Repair)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide
Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D
Date: December 06, 2010
Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide
Models:
2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Attention:
This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new
2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer
programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season
odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists
the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be
stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM),
also commonly called a body control module (BCM).
Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today
1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup
at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2
is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed
and stored in the IPC. A
replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the
BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as
part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 13383
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 13384
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 13385
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
GM Oil Life System Resetting
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A "Change Engine Oil Soon" message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
If the vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 2. Press the DIC menu button until "Remaining
Oil Life" displays. 3. Press and hold the set/clear button until "100%" is displayed. 4. Turn the key
to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the "Change Engine Oil Soon" message goes off.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams
P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13392
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair
Information Center Telltale Assembly Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13396
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
B80 Park Brake Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13397
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13407
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13408
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13409
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13410
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13411
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D >
Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13412
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13422
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13428
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13429
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13430
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13431
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13432
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13433
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel
Blanks Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative > Page 13438
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster
Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel
Blanks Out/Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003
Date: May 17, 2010
Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC)
Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC)
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009
Condition
In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights
do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may also come on.
Cause
This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more
of the above conditions.
Correction
Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the
ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and
re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC
that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this
concern.
Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration.
Note
A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to
reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please
contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY
experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575.
Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style)
and RPO codes.
A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram
the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on
TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI.
When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it
is updated with the latest software version.
During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15
Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming
Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks
Out/Inoperative > Page 13448
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122
Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative
FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE
Bulletin No.: 09298D
Date: November 22, 2010
Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module
Models:
2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain
Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers.
Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to
begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued
March 2010.
Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service
appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the
Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will
be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled
service appointment date.
Condition
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these
vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost,
and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a
functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and
could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's
attention while looking for a control.
Correction
Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved
Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within
these VIN breakpoints:
Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required
Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints
may be involved.
For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle
identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be
provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent
directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles
currently assigned.
The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration
Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up
necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries.
Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this
recall.
Parts Information
For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of
vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts
information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo
(U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada).
For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required.
Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13454
Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers.
Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A
prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core
securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important
that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping.
Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order
parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment.
U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument
panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does
have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an
exchange ICS.
Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to
arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do
not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website.
Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to
arrange for an exchange.
- Bulletin number 09298
- VIN
Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile
upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an
appointment.
All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel
(radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675.
Service Procedure
Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming
tool)
Note
Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS),
reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If
the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior
to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels).
(1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly
1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies
are NOT programmable and must go through the
radio control assembly exchange process.
- First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly.
- Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the
backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly,
proceed to Step 2.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13455
Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top
portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade
screwdriver to remove the radio assembly.
2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool
as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool.
5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been
completed. The programming tool will read
"Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds
to complete.
6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13456
7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control
module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control
Assembly Replacement in SI.
Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process
Caution
Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of
the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to
remove the radio control assembly.
Note
If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed
to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13457
Note
For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the
radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly.
1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2.
Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid
Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed
with the exchange unit within 24 hours.
Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control
assembly.
3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI.
Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada
The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer
inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the
warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining
customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service
or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge.
Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy
Transportation guidelines.
Warranty Transaction Information
1. Submit a transaction using the table below.
* Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using
GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time.
** Administrative allowance for unit exchange.
*** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly
is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours
administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative
allowance under Administrative Time.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13458
Customer Notification - For US and Canada
General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter
included with this bulletin).
Customer Notification - For Export
Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify
customers using the attached sample letter.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions)
The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a
recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has
tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie
evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired
within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent
vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for
depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made
to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as
possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time.
This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with
the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal
for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles
without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for
each such sale.
Dealer Recall Responsibility - All
All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and
inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take
possession of these vehicles.
Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of
mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward.
Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which
there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer.
Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions
contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in
contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the
customer may not as yet have received the notification letter.
In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your
dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall
correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Disclaimer
Owner Letter
Owner Letter
Dear General Motors Customer:
This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act.
General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain
vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is
conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your
safety and continued satisfaction with our products.
Important
- Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298.
- Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page
13459
- This service will be performed for you at no charge.
Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the
heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become
inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain
driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can
divert your attention while looking for a control.
What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel.
This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it
is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of
approximately 20 minutes.
If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle
service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this
repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation.
What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as
soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your
vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name
and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your
VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service
appointment.
Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve,
please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More
information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com.
If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we
have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may
wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236
(TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy
of this notice to the lessee within ten days.
Scott Lawson
Director,
Customer and Relationship Services
09298
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument
Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster
Malfunction
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010
MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031
SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC
Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can
cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to
become inoperative.
CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under
certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge.
The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at
1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com.
NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument
Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument
Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13468
Dimmer Switch: Diagrams
S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument
Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13469
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument
Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position
Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument
Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13473
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
B80 Park Brake Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument
Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13474
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips
# 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive
for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010)
Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information
Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab)
2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3
ATTENTION
The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures
for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a
check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message.
Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under
warranty.
This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference
information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension).
Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes
into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire
pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should
perform the following steps:
Procedure
Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine.
^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add
air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC),
advise the customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn
the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service
tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped
with DIC):
- A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your
service department for further DTC diagnosis and service.
- If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a
previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another
vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this
bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)).
- If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem.
Follow the appropriate SI service procedures.
^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started,
then goes off after driving a while, advise the
customer:
- The system is working properly.
- Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires
are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 13480
up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly
adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information Label on the driver side door).
- More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual.
- Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner.
- Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information".
For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS
Training Course 13044.12T2.
Tire Pressure Light
At key on, without starting the vehicle:
Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning
properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition.
Blinking TPM Indicator
If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid,
diagnostic service is needed.
The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures
Important:
As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in
temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer.
Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a
solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is
working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the
Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air
pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire
pressure light on:
^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge.
^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or
ambient temperature.
^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature
the vehicle will encounter during operation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 13481
^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air
temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures.
^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has
updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same
readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary).
^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the
Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to
avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns.
Important:
Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire
pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has
been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to
compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the
placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the
tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range.
Important:
Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer
through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile
racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to
outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For
additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C.
Important:
All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already
been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low
tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that
light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a
short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update
and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive.
Important:
All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle
corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor
or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated
relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals
initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will
prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a
flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to
and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns.
Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not
perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during
pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been
adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079
tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech
2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech
2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information.
Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation
Important:
The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue.
That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on
vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will
have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty
System documentation are required:
^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order.
^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order.
^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim
submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual,
Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G).
If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim
may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order
documentation must be sent back.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 13482
Customer TPMS Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 13483
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire
Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System
Message/Service Tips > Page 13484
Frequently Asked Questions
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire
Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning
Sensor IDs
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001
Date: July 19, 2010
Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and
Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted
Tire Pressure Sensors
In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25
mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON,
indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set.
The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type
message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator
icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared.
To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to
clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn
procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results.
It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a
stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been
replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13493
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
Special Tools
J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool
Relearn Mode Description
The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control
module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to
perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after
every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been
enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory.
When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a
horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it.
The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location.
The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right
rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location
is to be learned in the proper sequence.
Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079
Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it
produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low
frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode
transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle
relative to the order in which it was learned.
Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method
Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary
mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last
pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in
pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When
the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's
ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
Relearn Mode Cancellation
The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed
for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is
learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first
sensor is learned, the following will occur:
* All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory.
* If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures.
* DTC C0775 will be set.
These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function
properly.
TPM Relearn Procedure
Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the
sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn
procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon
activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a
different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease
Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is
being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM
equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just
driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while
performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will
need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn
Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular
sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve
stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component.
Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire
Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has
been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed
upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel
rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp.
Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next
location to be learned will illuminate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13494
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method
1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the
driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the
Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated.
3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following
methods:
* Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at
the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the
horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to
be learned will illuminate.
Warning
Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing
tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall.
* Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp
may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time
period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and
the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for
the remaining 3 sensors in the following order:
1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear
5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn
process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn
mode.
6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire
Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (
See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13495
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See:
Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the
vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair).
Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure
sensor damage upon tire dismounting.
* Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and
the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve
made of any other material.
* When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from
the valve stem.
* Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly
clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting
head.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the out side of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for inner bead.
3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement).
Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the
inside of the tire and wheel surfaces.
4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor.
Installation Procedure
1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area.
2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel.
Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener
Caution).
3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while
torquing.
Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13496
Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor
damage upon tire mounting:
* Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem.
* Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem.
* Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead
to the inside of the wheel rim.
* Repeat items for outer bead.
4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels
and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement).
Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the
sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The
sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20
mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds.
5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
(See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair).
6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor
Learn (See: Testing and Inspection).
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
13501
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams
B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67)
B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
13502
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Backup Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Stop and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagrams
E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 13514
Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair
High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information >
Diagrams
Console Lamp: Diagrams
E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement
Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement
Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement > Page 13521
Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement
Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13525
Dimmer Switch: Diagrams
S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13526
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13534
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13535
Dome Lamp Switch: Diagrams
S12 Dome Lamp Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Front Fog Lamp Bulb Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 13543
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headlamp Bulb: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s)
Inoperative
Headlamp Bulb: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headlamp Bulb: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s)
Inoperative > Page 13553
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative
Headlamp Bulb: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B
Date: January 24, 2011
Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector)
Models:
2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011
Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet
Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet
Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon
Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA,
OUTLOOK
Attention:
This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps.
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice
sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and
Accessories).
Condition
Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative.
Correction
DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition.
Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below.
1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect
the connector.
- If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see
Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog.
- If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed
below) and bulb.
Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not
protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper
Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures.
1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in
the service pigtail connector. Ensure that
the splices are not above the connector when re-installing.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional.
Parts Information
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam
Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 13559
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam)
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam)
Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam) > Page 13562
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb Replacement (Low Beam)
Headlamp Bulb Replacement (Low Beam Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13566
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Headlamp Dimmer Sensor: Service and Repair
Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention
Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage
Prevention
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D
Date: June 21, 2010
Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior
Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements.
Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may
be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types
of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance.
A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are
very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when
treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal.
Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash
soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need
to replace the entire headlamp housing.
Warning
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and
lenses.
Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over
the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are
on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps.
Warning
Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is
being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause
excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens
can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it
could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are
often tinted in color.
Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins.
This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks.
In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp.
Notice
Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are
not covered under the new vehicle warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page
13581
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations
Horn Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Wheel Components
1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
13585
Horn Switch: Diagrams
S33 Horn Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
13586
Horn Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Horn Contact Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
License Plate Lamp: Diagrams
E7L License Plate Lamp - Left
E7R License Plate Lamp - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
13590
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
13591
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
Rear License Plate Lamp Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair
Map Light: Service and Repair
Reading Lamp Switch Pushbutton Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Parking Lamp Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13603
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13611
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13615
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 13619
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Lamp Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13623
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13627
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13632
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams
B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67)
B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13633
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations
Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views
Headliner Components
2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise
Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6
- E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24
Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front
Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left
14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 -
A3R Sunshade - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13637
18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display
(UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13638
Dome Lamp Switch: Diagrams
S12 Dome Lamp Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Headlamp Dimmer Sensor: Service and Repair
Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components
1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light
Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3
Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia
Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J
Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Horn Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Wheel Components
1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Right
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13648
Horn Switch: Diagrams
S33 Horn Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13649
Horn Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Horn Contact Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13653
Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams
S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement > Page 13656
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement
Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Tail Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement
Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement > Page 13667
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Stop and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement
Stop and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Turn Signal Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13671
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13675
Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams
S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement > Page 13678
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement
Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 13684
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13689
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Power Window Switch: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13694
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Left Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13695
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13696
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13697
Power Window Switch: Diagrams
S79D Window Switch - Driver
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13698
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13699
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13700
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 13701
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13704
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch
Replacement
Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13705
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations
Front Door Window Motor: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13711
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13712
Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams
M74D Window Motor - Driver
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13713
M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13714
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13715
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13716
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations
Rear Door Window Motor: Locations
Door Component Views
Left Rear Door Components
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13720
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13721
Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams
M74D Window Motor - Driver
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13722
M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13723
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13724
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 13725
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Power Window Switch: Locations
Door Component Views
Driver Door Components
1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent
Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent
Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT)
Passenger Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13729
1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ
or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P
Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front
Left Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13730
1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR
Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear
Right Rear Door Components
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13731
1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR
Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right
Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13732
Power Window Switch: Diagrams
S79D Window Switch - Driver
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13733
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13734
S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13735
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13736
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13739
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch
Replacement
Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13740
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster
Contact/Tab Repair Information
Back Window Glass: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H
Date: April 11, 2011
Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab
Models:
2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3
2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear
Window Defroster - RPO C49
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Repair Suggestions
Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs
In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For
Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass),
always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector
(P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab.
In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear
defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is
equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but
does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of
the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the
following before attempting the repair:
- Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the
re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and
have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the
solder.
- If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back
window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering
creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass.
Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass
breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair!
- You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with
conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar,
making a strong and lasting repair.
- Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this
repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection.
Soldering Procedure
1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a
new connector to the feed wire. The proper
connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5.
- Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal.
- Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab.
Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with
moveable glass.
2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly
seated connector may cause excessive resistance
and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical
connector tab to the defroster tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster
Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13750
3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size
utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine
grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder,
but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close
up of a properly prepared surface.
Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will
allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black
painted shading.
Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When
cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading
or the surface of the glass.
4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to
remove any residual oil or dirt.
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster
Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13751
You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with
conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is
available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for
this repair.
5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on
the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered.
Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep
the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been
reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the
solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached,
a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact.
Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the
original contact.
6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the
performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely
that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a
positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor
cosmetic application.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada,
1-800-563-1717).
Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at
1-800-843-7422.
All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster
Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13752
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr >
11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information
Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H
Date: April 11, 2011
Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab
Models:
2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3
2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear
Window Defroster - RPO C49
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate
Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Repair Suggestions
Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs
In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For
Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass),
always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector
(P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab.
In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear
defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is
equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but
does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of
the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the
following before attempting the repair:
- Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the
re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and
have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the
solder.
- If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back
window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering
creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass.
Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass
breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair!
- You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with
conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar,
making a strong and lasting repair.
- Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this
repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection.
Soldering Procedure
1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a
new connector to the feed wire. The proper
connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5.
- Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal.
- Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab.
Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with
moveable glass.
2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly
seated connector may cause excessive resistance
and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical
connector tab to the defroster tab.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr >
11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13758
3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size
utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine
grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder,
but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close
up of a properly prepared surface.
Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will
allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black
painted shading.
Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When
cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading
or the surface of the glass.
4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to
remove any residual oil or dirt.
Important
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr >
11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13759
You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with
conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is
available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for
this repair.
5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on
the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered.
Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep
the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been
reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the
solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached,
a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact.
Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the
original contact.
6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the
performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely
that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a
positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor
cosmetic application.
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume
any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be
available from other sources.
Parts Information
Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada,
1-800-563-1717).
Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at
1-800-843-7422.
All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr >
11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13760
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep
> 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D
Date: September 10, 2010
Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after
the vehicle has:
- Accumulated some mileage.
- Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes.
This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into
the surface of the glass.
Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the
glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used
correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the
outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing.
If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt
seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and
what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also
see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass.
Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in
material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10
> Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D
Date: September 10, 2010
Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after
the vehicle has:
- Accumulated some mileage.
- Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes.
This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into
the surface of the glass.
Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the
glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used
correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the
outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing.
If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt
seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and
what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also
see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass.
Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in
material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
Front Corner Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion
Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D
Date: September 10, 2010
Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after
the vehicle has:
- Accumulated some mileage.
- Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes.
This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into
the surface of the glass.
Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the
glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used
correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the
outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing.
If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt
seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and
what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also
see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass.
Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in
material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Replacement
Special Tools
* J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover
* J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
* Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Cracked Window Warning (See: Service Precautions/Cracked Window
Warning).
Note: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the
perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim
Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel
Replacement ().
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. 4. Remove the
rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and
Washer Systems/Wiper
Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear
Window Wiper Arm Replacement).
5. Remove the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air
Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair) Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and
Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair). Warning: Refer to Defroster
Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information).
6. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass:
* Upper dash pad
* Defroster outlets and A/C outlets
* Seats and carpeting
Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning).
7. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to
access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 13781
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window.
8. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive.
* Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange.
* The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
* Use J 24402-A, J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window.
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle.
9. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window
from the urethane adhesive.
10. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows
(See: Service and Repair/Adhesive Installation of
Liftgate Windows).
2. Install the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air
Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair) Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and
Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair).
3. Install the rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox)
(See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm
Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear
Window Wiper Arm Replacement).
4. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 5. Install the liftgate
lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate
Lower Trim Finish Panel
Replacement ().
6. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the
interior trim. 7. Close the liftgate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
Quarter Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D
Date: September 10, 2010
Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after
the vehicle has:
- Accumulated some mileage.
- Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes.
This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into
the surface of the glass.
Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the
glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used
correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the
outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing.
If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt
seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and
what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also
see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass.
Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in
material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13786
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
Quarter Window Replacement
Special Tools
* J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover
* J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
* Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G
Removal Procedure
Warning: Refer to Cracked Window Warning (See: Service Precautions/Cracked Window
Warning).
Note: Before cutting out a quarter window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the
perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the quarter window trim finish panel. Refer to Quarter Window Trim
Finish Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement).
Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information).
3. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass:
* Upper dash pad
* Defroster outlets and A/C outlets
* Seats and carpeting
Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning).
4. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to
access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped.
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window.
5. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive.
* Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange.
* The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
* Use J 24402-A, J 39032, or equivalent to remove the window.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13787
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle.
6. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window
from the urethane adhesive.
7. Remove the window (1) from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the quarter window into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Quarter Windows
(See: Service and Repair/Adhesive Installation of
Quarter Windows).
2. Install the quarter window trim finish panel. Refer to Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel
Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement).
3. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the
interior trim. 4. Close the liftgate.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator >
System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator >
System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter
Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-006
Date: September 18, 2009
Subject: Clear Stain or Film on Inside Perimeter of Windshield Glass (Clean/Polish Glass)
Models:
2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER
H2, H3
Condition
Some customers may comment on a clear stain or film on the inside of the windshield glass. This
condition appears along the outer edges of the glass along the top, bottom or A-pillar areas.
Normal glass cleaning procedures will not remove the stain.
Cause
The assembly plant uses a clear sealer/primer on the outer edge of the windshield glass to improve
adhesion to the urethane adhesive that bonds the windshield glass to the vehicle body. Excess
sealer/primer may drip or flow onto the windshield and cause a stain. Once the sealer/primer dries,
it may appear to have etched the glass.
Correction
Note
A "white" type of toothpaste is recommended for this repair. Gel-type toothpaste may provide less
satisfactory results.
Use a small amount of toothpaste on a soft, cotton cloth to polish the stained area. It may be
necessary to wrap the cloth around a paint stir stick or a similar tool to reach the lower corners of
the windshield glass.
After polishing the glass, clean the inside of the windshield glass with a clean, damp, cotton cloth
and verify all of the stain is removed. Do not use any cleaners or solvents - use only clean warm
water.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter > Page 13807
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-002A > Mar > 09 > Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet
Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-002A
Date: March 19, 2009
Subject: Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet (Clean Windshield)
Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-48-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some owners may comment that marks/stains appear on the windshield when the windshield is
wet.
Cause
This condition may be caused by contact between the windshield and the vacuum hoses or other
tools used in the assembly process. This contact may leave a residue that creates a water repellent
surface on the glass which, in wet conditions, appear as marks/stains on the surface.
Correction
Important
DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD FOR THIS CONDITION.
To clean the windshield, use Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound*. Follow the manufacturer's
directions for product use. Use only hand tools. DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS.
Parts Information
Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound
1-800-343-9353 (for overseas inquiries: +1-610-705-2200)
http://www.eastwoodco.com/
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from
other sources.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C
Date: February 21, 2011
Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Wiper Concerns
Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged
wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending
on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are
some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to
avoid unnecessary replacements.
Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong
with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review
the information in their Owner Manual.
Inspection and Cleaning
Scheduled Maintenance
- Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or
contamination.
- Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are
not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber
elements.
Cleaning Procedure
Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct
contact with washer fluid.
Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades.
- Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid
or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth.
- Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and
a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking.
Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami*
(www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid
scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely.
Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest
Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use
foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces.
Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the
window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also
recommends using plain water to clean interior glass.
*"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material.
General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the
products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other
sources.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
> Page 13817
Avoiding Wiper Damage
The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others
are environmental concerns.
- Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear
quickly and unevenly.
- Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper
blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements.
- Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not
flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas.
- Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a
frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow.
- Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the
ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades.
- Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the
rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield.
- Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To
remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the
frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition.
Note
GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid
additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes
wipers to chatter and have premature wear.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D
Date: September 10, 2010
Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after
the vehicle has:
- Accumulated some mileage.
- Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes.
This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into
the surface of the glass.
Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the
glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used
correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the
outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing.
If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt
seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and
what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also
see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass.
Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in
material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass
Perimeter
Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-006
Date: September 18, 2009
Subject: Clear Stain or Film on Inside Perimeter of Windshield Glass (Clean/Polish Glass)
Models:
2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER
H2, H3
Condition
Some customers may comment on a clear stain or film on the inside of the windshield glass. This
condition appears along the outer edges of the glass along the top, bottom or A-pillar areas.
Normal glass cleaning procedures will not remove the stain.
Cause
The assembly plant uses a clear sealer/primer on the outer edge of the windshield glass to improve
adhesion to the urethane adhesive that bonds the windshield glass to the vehicle body. Excess
sealer/primer may drip or flow onto the windshield and cause a stain. Once the sealer/primer dries,
it may appear to have etched the glass.
Correction
Note
A "white" type of toothpaste is recommended for this repair. Gel-type toothpaste may provide less
satisfactory results.
Use a small amount of toothpaste on a soft, cotton cloth to polish the stained area. It may be
necessary to wrap the cloth around a paint stir stick or a similar tool to reach the lower corners of
the windshield glass.
After polishing the glass, clean the inside of the windshield glass with a clean, damp, cotton cloth
and verify all of the stain is removed. Do not use any cleaners or solvents - use only clean warm
water.
Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use:
Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models)
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass
Perimeter > Page 13826
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-002A > Mar > 09 > Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet
Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet
TECHNICAL
Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-002A
Date: March 19, 2009
Subject: Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet (Clean Windshield)
Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H2, H3
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-48-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Condition
Some owners may comment that marks/stains appear on the windshield when the windshield is
wet.
Cause
This condition may be caused by contact between the windshield and the vacuum hoses or other
tools used in the assembly process. This contact may leave a residue that creates a water repellent
surface on the glass which, in wet conditions, appear as marks/stains on the surface.
Correction
Important
DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD FOR THIS CONDITION.
To clean the windshield, use Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound*. Follow the manufacturer's
directions for product use. Use only hand tools. DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS.
Parts Information
Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound
1-800-343-9353 (for overseas inquiries: +1-610-705-2200)
http://www.eastwoodco.com/
*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of
such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any
responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from
other sources.
Warranty Information
For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C
Date: February 21, 2011
Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Wiper Concerns
Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged
wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending
on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are
some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to
avoid unnecessary replacements.
Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong
with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review
the information in their Owner Manual.
Inspection and Cleaning
Scheduled Maintenance
- Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or
contamination.
- Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are
not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber
elements.
Cleaning Procedure
Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct
contact with washer fluid.
Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades.
- Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid
or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth.
- Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and
a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking.
Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami*
(www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid
scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely.
Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest
Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use
foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces.
Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the
window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also
recommends using plain water to clean interior glass.
*"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material.
General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the
products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other
sources.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance >
Page 13836
Avoiding Wiper Damage
The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others
are environmental concerns.
- Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear
quickly and unevenly.
- Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper
blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements.
- Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not
flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas.
- Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a
frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow.
- Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the
ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades.
- Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the
rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield.
- Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To
remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the
frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition.
Note
GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid
additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes
wipers to chatter and have premature wear.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D
Date: September 10, 2010
Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass
Models:
2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior
HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin
Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after
the vehicle has:
- Accumulated some mileage.
- Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes.
This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into
the surface of the glass.
Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the
glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used
correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the
outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing.
If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt
seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and
what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also
see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass.
Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in
material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement
Windshield: Service and Repair Windshield Replacement
Windshield Replacement
Special Tools
* J 24402-A Glass Sealant Cold Knife Remover
* J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
* Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G
Removal Procedure
Note: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the
perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arms and blades. Refer to Windshield Wiper
Arm Replacement (Equinox Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side))
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side))
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm
Replacement (Terrain Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and
Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)).
3. Remove the air inlet grille. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement) Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement).
4. Remove the interior windshield pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Windshield Side Garnish
Molding Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement).
5. Remove the rearview mirror. Refer to Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Inside Rearview
Mirror Replacement).
6. Remove the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Module/Service and Repair).
Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information).
7. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass:
* Upper dash pad
* Defroster outlets and A/C outlets
* Seats and carpeting
Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning).
8. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to
access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13843
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window.
9. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive.
* Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange.
* The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
* Use J 24402-A, J 39032, or equivalent to remove the window.
Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle.
10. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the
windshield from the urethane adhesive.
Note: If the retainers are cut off when removing the window it will be necessary to tape the it in
place.
11. With the aid of an assistant (2), remove the windshield (1) from the vehicle.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the windshield into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Windshields (See:
Adhesive Installation of Windshields). 2. Install the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Module/Service and Repair).
3. Install the rearview mirror. Refer to Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement (See: Body and
Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Inside Rearview
Mirror Replacement).
4. Install the interior windshield pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Windshield Side Garnish Molding
Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement).
5. Install the air inlet grille. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement) Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13844
Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement).
6. Install the windshield wipers arms and blades. Refer to Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement
(Equinox Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side))
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side))
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm
Replacement (Terrain Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and
Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)).
7. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the
interior trim. 8. Close the hood.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13845
Windshield: Service and Repair Adhesive Installation of Windshields
Adhesive Installation of Windshields
Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning).
1. Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G 2. Remove all
mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive from the pinchweld area. 3. If the original window is
being reused, remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the existing bead of urethane
adhesive from the pinchweld
flange by using a clean utility knife or razor blade scraper.
4. Inspect for any of the following problems in order to help prevent future breakage of the window:
* The flange of the window opening
* High weld
* Solder spots
* Hardened sealer
* Any other obstruction or irregularity in the pinchweld flange
Note: If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present or if sheet metal repairs or replacements are
required, the pinch-weld flange must be refinished in order to restore the bonding area strength. If
paint repairs are required, mask the flange bonding area prior to applying the color coat in order to
provide a clean primer only surface. Materials such as BASF DE15(R), DuPont 2610(R),
Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70(R) and Martin-Semour 5120 and 5130(R) PPG DP90LF
SPIES/ HECKER 3688/8590 - 3688/5150 - 4070/5090 STANDOX 11158/13320 - 14653/14980
products are approved for this application.
5. After repairing the opening as indicated, perform the following steps:
1. Remove all traces of broken glass from the outer cowl panel, seats, floor and defroster ducts. 2.
Clean around the edge of the inside surface of the window with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol
and water by volume on a dampened lint
free cloth.
Warning
When replacing stationary windows, use Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 (Canadian P/N
10952983), or a urethane adhesive system meeting GM Specification GM3651G, to maintain
original installation integrity. Failure to use the urethane adhesive kit will result in poor retention of
the window which may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle resulting in
personal injury.
6. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13846
Warning
Failure to prep the area prior to the application of primer may cause insufficient bonding of
urethane adhesive. Insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to
be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury.
Note: Do not apply the black #3 primer to the existing bead (1) of the urethane adhesive on the
pinch-weld flange. Apply the primer only to nicks, scratches or the primed surfaces.
7. Shake the pinch-weld primer black #3 for at least 1 minute. 8. Use a new dauber in order to
apply the primer to the surface of the pinch-weld flange (1). 9. Allow the pinch-weld primer to dry
for approximately 10 minutes.
10. With the aid of an assistant, dry fit the window (1) to the opening in order to determine the
correct position.
11. Use masking tape in order to mark the locations (1) of the window (2) in the opening. 12. Cut
the masking tape in the center and remove the window from the opening.
Note: Use care when applying glass prep clear #1 on the window. This primer dries almost
instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied evenly.
13. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep clear #1 to the area approximately 10-16 mm
(3/8-5/8 in) around the entire perimeter of the window
inner surface. Immediately wipe the glass primed area using a clean, lint-free cloth.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13847
14. Apply a second coat of the glass prep clear #1 to the same area of the glass.
Note: The glass primer black #2 is effective up to 8 hours after applying it to the glass. The primed
surface of the glass must be kept clean.
15. Shake the glass primer black #2 for at least 1 minute. 16. Use a new dauber in order to apply
the glass primer black #2 to the same areas (2) that glass prep clear #1 was applied. 17. Allow the
glass primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
18. Cut the applicator nozzle in order to provide a bead of 12.7 mm (1/2 in) wide and 12.7 mm (1/2
in) high.
19. Use a cartridge-type caulking gun in order to apply a smooth, continuous bead of urethane
adhesive.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13848
20. Use the edge of the window as a guide for the nozzle in order to apply the urethane adhesive
(1) to the inner surface of the window (3).
21. With the aid of an assistant, place the window in the opening. If installing a windshield, place
the windshield on the lower supports (2), if
equipped.
22. Align the masking tape (1) lines on the window (2) and the body.
23. Press the window firmly into place. 24. Tape the window to the body in order to minimize
movement until the urethane adhesive cures.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Replacement > Page 13849
25. Clean any excess urethane adhesive from the body.
Note: Do not direct a hard stream of high pressure water to the freshly applied urethane adhesive.
26. Use a soft spray of warm water in order to immediately water test the window. 27. Inspect the
window for leaks. 28. If any leaks are found, use a plastic paddle in order to apply extra urethane
adhesive at the leak point. 29. Retest the window for leaks.
Warning
Insufficient curing of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the
vehicle resulting in personal injury.
* For the moisture-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 6 hours at 21°C (70°F) or
greater and with at least 30 percent relative humidity. Allow at least 24 hours for the complete
curing of the urethane adhesive.
* For the chemical-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 1 hour.
Do NOT physically disturb the repair area until after these minimum times have elapsed.
30. Maintain the following conditions in order to properly cure the urethane adhesive:
* Partially lower a door window in order to prevent pressure buildups when closing doors before the
urethane adhesive cures.
* Do not drive the vehicle until the urethane adhesive is cured. Refer to the above curing times.
* Do not use compressed air in order to dry the urethane adhesive.
31. Complete the window installation.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems >
Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems >
Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13855
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13859
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems >
Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems >
Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13864
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams
S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems >
Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13865
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Washer Hose Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Hose Repair
Washer Hose Repair
Washer Hose Repair and Routing
The washer hose can be a component within the main body wire harness conduit. The washer
hose is a hard plastic convoluted tube that could be wrapped with electrical tape along the main
body electrical wiring harness. It starts underhood where it connects from the rear window washer
pump hose to the rear window washer nozzle extension hose. The washer hose usually routes into
the main body wire harness underhood and passes through the front of the dash panel grommet.
The washer hose is routed either inside the vehicle interior behind the left front side window
garnish molding, along the headliner area and continues to the rear of the vehicle, as equipped.
The washer hose could be routed back to the center of the vehicle where it could possibly connect
to the high mounted stop lamp or the rear window washer pump where it connects by rubber
flexible tubing, at the lift gate opening, if equipped.
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the damaged section of the washer hose, this will be hard plastic convoluted tubing. 2. If
the leak is located inside the main body wire harness, carefully cut the electrical tape, securing the
harness within the electrical conduit to expose
the damaged section of washer hose.
3. Cut and remove the damaged section of the washer hose.
Installation Procedure
1. In order to repair the damaged section of washer hose, use the following steps:
* Use a 9.5 mm (3/8 in) vacuum hose to replace damaged section.
* Overlap the washer hose onto the plastic tubing by, 12.5 mm (0.50 in) on each end.
* Secure each end of the vacuum hose with a 100 mm (4 in) cable tie.
2. Verify the repair by activating the front and rear (if equipped) washer system and check the
system for leaks. 3. If the leak was located inside the main body wire harness or conduit, use
electrical tape to retain the repaired section to the exterior of the electrical
wire harness conduit.
4. If the leak was located external from the conduit, secure the hose with cable ties to prevent
unnecessary movement and unwanted noise.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Washer Hose Repair > Page 13873
5. If the leak requires the washer hose to be removed in the front of dash panel grommet complete
the following:
* Carefully slit the grommet next to the original washer hose.
* Pass the new section of the washer hose through, next to the existing grommet tubing.
* Repair the hose on either side of the grommet.
* Use small tie straps to secure the hose onto the washer tubing.
* Verify the repair by operating the washer system.
* Seal any openings in the grommet, larger than the hose that was passed through.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Washer Hose Repair > Page 13874
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump Hose Replacement Washer Pump to Headliner Hose
Rear Window Washer Pump Hose Replacement - Washer Pump to Headliner Hose (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information >
Diagrams
Windshield Washer Pump: Diagrams
G24 Windshield Washer Pump
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement
Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement > Page 13880
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump Replacement
Windshield Washer Pump Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Windshield Washer Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13884
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 13888
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose
Replacement
Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement > Page 13893
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Nozzle Replacement
Windshield Washer Nozzle Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement > Page 13894
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Nozzle Replacement
Rear Window Washer Nozzle Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views
Steering Column Components
1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid
Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13898
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams
S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 13899
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Driver Side)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side) > Page 13904
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side) > Page 13905
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement
Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance
INFORMATION
Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C
Date: February 21, 2011
Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance
Models:
2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2,
H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X
Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard
Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories).
Wiper Concerns
Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged
wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending
on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are
some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to
avoid unnecessary replacements.
Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong
with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review
the information in their Owner Manual.
Inspection and Cleaning
Scheduled Maintenance
- Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or
contamination.
- Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are
not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber
elements.
Cleaning Procedure
Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct
contact with washer fluid.
Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades.
- Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid
or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth.
- Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and
a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking.
Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami*
(www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid
scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely.
Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest
Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use
foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces.
Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the
window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin
Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also
recommends using plain water to clean interior glass.
*"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material.
General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the
products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other
sources.
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 13910
Avoiding Wiper Damage
The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others
are environmental concerns.
- Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear
quickly and unevenly.
- Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper
blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements.
- Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not
flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas.
- Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a
frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow.
- Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the
ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades.
- Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the
rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield.
- Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To
remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the
frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition.
Note
GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid
additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes
wipers to chatter and have premature wear.
Disclaimer
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side)
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side)
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Equinox Driver Side)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side) > Page 13913
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Passenger Side)
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side) > Page 13914
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement
Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Gear Box > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Wiper Gear Box: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper Transmission Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Wiper Motor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views
Liftgate Components
1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C
Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5)
Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 13922
1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper
Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake
and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle
Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object
Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left
Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 13923
1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone,
Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper
6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K
Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer
(UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview
Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle
(UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 13924
Wiper Motor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views
Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet)
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17
Electronic Brake Control Module
Engine Compartment Components (GMC)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 13925
1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7
- P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
10 - P12A Horn - High Note
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
13926
Wiper Motor: Diagrams
M45 Rear Wiper Motor
M75 Windshield Wiper Motor
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
13927
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement
Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement (Equinox)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 13930
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement
Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement (Equinox Terrain)
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Relay: Locations
Electrical Center Identification Views
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page
13934
Chevrolet Equinox Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010))
Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement